WARNING! BID PACKAGES MUST BE RETURNED IN ITS ENTIRETY
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Procurement Services Center – Contract Administration 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660 (562) 654-9007
INVITATION FOR BID (IFB)
IFB FOR IT EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SERVICES
IFB NO. 2000002197
DATE ISSUED: August 18, 2021
DATE ADVERTISED: August 18, 2021 and August 25, 2021
LAST DAY FOR QUESTIONS: August 30, 2021
SUBMITTAL DATE: September 10, 2021
ANTICIPATED CONTRACT START DATE: NOVEMBER 15, 2021
BIDDER’S (FIRM) NAME: ______
Note: All bidders are required to submit a printed bid in its entirety and one copy of the entire bid on a CD or Flash Drive. IFB 2000002197 TABLE OF CONTENTS
IFB PAGE SECTION DESCRIPTION NO.
Section I Letter to Prospective Bidders and “No Bid” Form 2
Section II A. Bid Form and Rate Schedule Instructions 5
B. Specific Bid Conditions/Certifications 16
C. General Specifications 27
D. Technical Specifications 35
E. Bidder Questionnaire 321
Section III Rate Schedule 324
Section IV General Bid & Contract Conditions
A. General Bid Conditions 444
B. General Contract Conditions 449
Section V Small Business and Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise 469
Appendix A District Map 475
Appendix B OIG Fraud Notice 476
Section I. IFB Letter 1 LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Procurement Services Center – Contract Administration 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660 (562) 654-9007
DATE: August 18, 2021
ATTENTION: Prospective Bidder
SUBJECT: INVITATION FOR BID (IFB) FOR: IT EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SERVICES
The Los Angeles Unified School District, Contract Administration Branch, is seeking bids for IT EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SERVICES as outlined in the attached. The resultant unit cost requirements contract, if awarded, will be for a 36-month period, with the options to renew for two (2) additional twelve (12) months. The contract will be State and/or locally funded, and is subject to fiscal year funding. District contract awards are made in accordance with authority granted to the Los Angeles Board of Education under California Law (e.g. the Public Contract Code, Education Code and Government Code).
You are hereby invited to submit to the District a bid to furnish all the labor, materials, and any other related items required for performance under the subject IFB. An original and two (2) electronic versions of the entire bid on a flash drive, (plus an additional hard copy of the entire original bid), must be submitted in a sealed envelope, and delivered by hand or mail to the address below no later than 11:00 a.m. local time on September 10, 2021 Bids received after that time will not be considered. In order to accommodate bidders during the COVID-19 protocols, we have stationed a bid drop box outside the main lobby of the Procurement Services Center. The IFB designation number 2000002197 must be inscribed upon the face of the submission package.
Los Angeles Unified School District Procurement Services Center Main Lobby/Reception Desk 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660
Please read all sections of this IFB carefully to assure that your response to this IFB contains all bidding information required to be considered responsive and responsible.
All communications in connection with this IFB shall be provided in writing and submitted online only, on or before the last day for questions, August 25, 2021 through the Vendor Registration Website: http://achieve.lausd.net/Page/3904.
Prospective bidders must not contact any District representative or personnel working on behalf of the District (except those designated herein) prior to publication of the District’s notice of contract award covering this requirement. Inappropriate contacts by a prospective bidder may subject the bidder to disqualification from the contract award process.
Section I. IFB Letter 2 The bid package must be submitted in its entirety, including this letter (Section I) and the following:
II. IFB form and rate schedule, instructions, volume rebate program, specific bid conditions, technical and product specifications, and Bidder Questionnaire. III. Rate Schedule IV. General Bid and Contract Conditions V. Small Business and Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise (SBVE) Utilization Program VI. Appendix A District Map VII. Appendix B OIG Notice
Failure to submit the bid package in its entirety may cause a bid to be ruled “non-responsive.”
The District reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive informalities or irregularities to the extent permitted by law in any bid received, and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received. The award, if made, will be to the lowest priced responsive and responsible bidder.
The contract(s) that may be awarded hereunder is/are not exclusive. The District expressly reserves the right to contract for goods and services such as those referenced herein, through other contractors.
Should you decide not to compete for a contract award under this IFB, please complete the attached “No Bid Response” form, (attachment 1) and send it to the undersigned. Failure to provide a response to this solicitation may result in removal of your firm’s name from our vendor list for future IFB opportunities.
Sincerely,
Leonardo de Leon Buyer ATTACHMENT: IFB PACKAGE
Section I. IFB Letter 3 LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Procurement Services Center – Contract Administration 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660 (562) 654-9007
Bid No.: 2000002197 Date of Bid Opening: September 10, 2021
“NO-BID” RESPONSE FORM
IT IS NOT NECESSARY FOR THE BIDDER WHO IS SUBMITTING A BID FOR THE PRODUCTS AND/OR SERVICES SPECIFIED HEREIN, TO RETURN THIS FORM.
The LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT is committed to programs and policies that will result in the procurement of supplies, equipment, and services that meet the quality standards required by our schools and support facilities at the lowest possible prices.
An important aspect of achieving this goal is to promote competitive bidding among the largest number of qualified bidders as possible. In instances where the bidder fails to respond, feedback from the bidder is encouraged. Reasons for not bidding are evaluated with the intention of improving future solicitations for this commodity or service, thereby encouraging and expanding the field of competition.
All bidders who respond with a “No Bid” response are requested to provide the information cited below and return this form, in time for the bid opening. FAILURE OF NON-BIDDERS TO RETURN THIS COMPLETED FORM MAY RESULT IN BEING DROPPED FROM OUR BIDDER’S LIST FOR THE PRODUCT(S) AND/OR SERVICES SPECIFIED BELOW.
REASONS FOR NOT BIDDING AT THIS TIME: (Attach additional page if necessary)
DO YOU WISH TO RECEIVE BID REQUESTS FOR THIS PARTICULAR PRODUCT OR SERVICE IN THE FUTURE? □YES □NO*
*If this option is selected, the bidder must forward a written request to Contract Administration for reinstatement.
BIDDER’S (FIRM) INFORMATION:
FIRM NAME:
ADDRESS:
SIGNATURE: NAME & TITLE:
DATE: PHONE: FAX:
BID TITLE: IT EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SERVICES
Section I. IFB Letter 4 LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT Procurement Services Center – Contract Administration 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660 (562) 654-9007
IFB AND CONTRACT FOR: IT EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SERVICES
IFB No.: 2000002197 SUBMISSION DATE: September 10, 2021 FOR: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION
SECTION II.
A. BID FORM AND RATE SCHEDULE INSTRUCTIONS The undersigned has complied with instructions in the IFB, has approved the contract form and agrees to enter into a Contract for furnishing to the Los Angeles Unified School District, Los Angeles County, hereinafter called the District, the required supplies, equipment and/or services at the stated rates; subject to all of the Terms and Conditions of the Invitation for Bids, Bid and Contract Conditions, Specifications, instructions set forth and all amendments or addenda thereto.
1. SCOPE OF CONTRACT The scope of the contract is to provide IT EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SERVICES (no refurbished, reconditioned, opened boxes, or gray market systems for the purchase and lease of equipment) in accordance with all the terms, conditions and specifications specified herein.
2. TERM OF UNIT RATE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT The term of the Contract will be thirty-six (36) months (the “Initial term”). The Contract is subject to two (2) additional twelve (12) month option renewals, for a maximum of five (5) years total (“Contract Term”). Any request for extension must be requested by the Contractor in writing no later than ninety (90) days prior to the expiration date of the existing agreement. Extended contract period(s) granted by the District would be subject to the same terms and/or conditions. Provisions for rate adjustments would be subject to the “Adjustment to the Rate Schedule” provision. The anticipated start date for work hereunder will be on or about November 15, 2021. Funding is contingent on fiscal year availability.
3. OPTIONS Provided that this Agreement has not expired or otherwise been terminated, LAUSD shall have the option to renew this Agreement for up to two (2) additional twelve (12) month periods (as specified by LAUSD in any renewal notice delivered hereunder) by delivering written notice of such renewal to contractor at least thirty (30) calendar days before expiration of the then-current term. All of the terms of this Agreement shall continue to apply without change during any renewal period. Provisions for price adjustments would be subject to the “Adjustment to the Rate Schedule” provision.
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 5 IFB No. 2000002197 4. AWARD OF CONTRACT It is the intent of the District to award a contract(s) for each item in the Rate Schedule Section either “individually”, “by manufacturer”, “as a whole”, or in any combination, to any of the three lowest, responsive and responsible bidder(s), pursuant to the authority granted under California Public Contract Code Sections 20111 and 20118.1, to a single or to multiple vendors, whichever is in the best interest of the District. Award is contingent upon timely compliance with all bid conditions and specifications which must be satisfied prior to award of contract.
5. BASIS OF AWARD The award of contract shall be to any of the responsive and responsible bidder(s) who submits the highest “combined total weighted average” percentage either “individually”, “per manufacturer”, “as a whole”, or in any combination, whichever would be in the best interest of the District. The “combined total weighted average” will be determined from the “percentage rate of discount” and the weightings per category per manufacturer “summary rate schedule.
The cash/trade discount shall be included in the determination of low bid. A cash discount for a time period of less than 30 days may be considered. The cash discount offered in excess of 10% will be considered a “trade discount”. A trade discount offered will be deducted from the unit price(s) bid, thus establishing the items normal/actual contract cost with zero percent cash discount for early payment.
A Cash Discount of ______% 45 Days is being offered.
Payment is contingent upon acceptance of the work and approval of invoice(s) by the District Authorized Representative or designee.
The District, in an effort to become the Public agency of choice, has expanded upon its ongoing Small Business Enterprise (SBE) program to further encourage and promote SBE participation in District business opportunities.
In furtherance of the SBE community and program, efforts resulting in contract award(s) stemming from this solicitation, any contract awardee(s) from this solicitation who are certified Small Business Enterprises, will be entitled to a faster payment process. Contract awardee(s) who have been certified by agencies such as the State of California’s Department of General Services, the City of Los Angeles, Metropolitan Water District, or by the Los Angeles Unified School District (must attach proof of certification at the time of bid submission by the certifying agency) will be entitled to receive payments upon provisioning of acceptable and verifiable receipt of goods/general services by the District.
Although a Payment Term of Net 45-days is applicable for this solicitation, the “now due and payable” term extended to those vendors who have received award(s) on the basis of being the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, and who are certified as an SBE(s) is one such effort the District is implementing to become the public agency of choice.
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 6 IFB No. 2000002197 5. BASIS OF AWARD-continued
Los Angeles Unified School District “VOLUME REBATE PROGRAM” The Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) has established a Volume Rebate Program. The Rebate Program was established because the District purchases large volumes of supplies, equipment, furniture or services which are delivered/provided to various locations throughout the District.
As part of the Rebate Program, the Contractor shall pay the LAUSD a one percent (1%) volume rebate on the total sales price of all purchases invoiced and paid pursuant to the Master Agreement, excluding taxes. Total sales shall include LAUSD and other participating agencies utilizing this contract such as but not limited to school districts, cities, counties, and state agencies.
This volume rebate shall be due and payable to LAUSD within thirty (30) days of the end of each calendar quarter for purchases invoiced and paid during such calendar quarter. All rebate checks should reference the contract number and be sent to:
Los Angeles Unified School District Attn: Director of Contract Administration - Ref: Contract #XXXXXXX 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660
Contractor’s Failure to Pay Volume Rebate: Failure of Contractor to pay the volume rebate within the time and in the manner specified herein shall be regarded as a material breach under this Agreement. All rebate dollar amounts not paid within thirty (30) days of the end of the previous calendar quarter shall bear interest at the rate of one and one-half percent (1.5%) per month until paid in full. In addition, in the event the Contractor does not pay the required fee LAUSD reserves the right to apply (at any time past the required rebate payment due date) the volume rebate amount towards any unpaid invoices in the form of a credit.
*Note: Contractor solely shall bear the cost of paying the volume rebate. Contractor shall neither increase its prices to cover the volume rebate nor pass through the volume rebate charge to the District.
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 7 IFB No. 2000002197 5. ADJUSTMENT TO THE RATE SCHEDULE The Rate Schedule is firm for the entire contract period including the renewal periods. The “Percentage Rate of Discount” as originally bid shall not change during the contract period. The District shall pay using the manufacturer’s published price list, less the “Percentage Rate of Discount” off the column offered by the Contractor. In the event that price lists are revised, the District is to be notified immediately. (See Section II.C, Technical specification, item #19, “Manufacturer’s Catalog/Price Listing”). The price may be modified only once during each annual contract period.
The “Percentage Rate of Discount” may be “subject to adjustment” at the beginning of each annual contract period. It is expressly understood that contract rate increases are not automatic or guaranteed. Contractor’s request to increase the current rate schedule will be evaluated and considered when such adjustments are requested. The District reserves the right to reject any such request and re- bid and/or terminate said contract within the provisions of the existing agreement. The District may offer a lower, higher or no increase in percentage. All increases are subject to negotiation between the Contractor and the District.
The adjustment to the contract’s unit price Schedule, if granted by the District, shall be effective July 1st or on the first day of the month following final District approval, whichever is applicable and continue through the remaining contract period. Further explanation or clarification or provisions pertaining to “Adjustment to the Rate Schedule” may be obtained by contacting the Authorized District Representative listed in this bid.
NOTE: All requests for rate adjustments must be received by the District, in writing, no later than ninety (90) days prior to the end of each annual contract period at the District’s Procurement Services Center – 8525 Rex Road, Pico Rivera, CA 90660. An explanation citing the rationale for price increase should be included in such correspondence.
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 8 IFB No. 2000002197 7. INVOICES AND PAYMENTS All invoices must be sent to the following address below: ORIGINAL INVOICES TO: LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT ACCOUNTS PAYABLE BRANCH P.O. BOX 54306 LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90054 (213) 241-4800
All vendors shall accept orders placed by both District approved purchase orders and P- Cards*. All coinciding invoices submitted for payment must include the District Contract Number and related Purchase Order (P.O.) Numbers, and be under the same firm name as shown on the Purchase Order (P.O.)/Contract.
Only orders that have been completely delivered and accepted shall be invoiced. Partial billing of orders shall not be allowed.
Prior to the start of the Contract, the Contractor may contact the District’s Accounts Payable Branch regarding the invoice format that may be required to facilitate timely payment. A sample of invoicing format may be required by the Accounts Payable Section prior to the start of service.
Late payment by the District shall not constitute a material breach of any Contract awarded hereunder.
In any contract or purchase order awarded, the District will reserve the right to withhold payment as a “set off” against amounts due, or to become due, resulting from any other contracts or purchase orders awarded to the same contractor.
All invoices applicable to this contract must be submitted by the Contractor within 60 days after the end of this contract. Late invoice submittals may result in non-payment.
For payment information call: (213) 241-4800
*PROCUREMENT CARD PURCHASES (P-CARD) The P-Card is a District issued MasterCard from Citibank. It is issued to authorized cardholders to simplify purchases and the payment and tracking of those purchases.
The P-Card works like any personal credit card, which is billed monthly to the District. However, the advantage of the P-Card is that vendors are paid directly by Citibank within a few days, while the District pays the bank with a single monthly payment.
Contractors accepting P-Card purchase transactions shall provide a detailed invoice/billing statement to each requesting office/school site ONLY, unless otherwise requested by an authorized District representative. Contractor shall specify in detail the quantities ordered/delivered, shipped, and unit costs per item on the invoice/billing statement.
Invoices and billing statements with insufficient information may delay the processing of payment and is not the responsibility of the District.
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 9 IFB No. 2000002197 8. TAXES The “Unit Price” in the Rate Schedule Section shall exclude all applicable taxes. The District shall pay only the California Sales and Use Tax, and/or the Los Angeles County Uniform Local Sales and Use Tax on the rates (unit cost), when applicable and listed separately on the invoice.
The Federal Excise Tax is not applicable. The District, upon request, shall furnish the Contractor a federal exemption number.
Any new or additional tax not in effect at the time of the bid that becomes effective during the contract period shall be paid by the District, providing that the items/services being provided under this contract are subject to such tax. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the District of any applicable changes in taxation categories or rates.
9. AUTHORIZED DISTRICT REPRESENTATIVE The contract shall be under the direction and subject to the approval of the Chief Procurement Officer, or designated representative.
The authorized District representative for this Contract will be:
For Contractual Matters: For ITD Administrative Matters: Leonardo de Leon Augustus Tiongco Procurement and Contract Administration Branch Information Technology Division TEL: (562) 654-9380 TEL: (213) 241-1309 Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected]
10. RATE SCHEDULE The “Rate Schedule” (Section III) shall be firm during the contract period.
a. The “Percentage Discount Off”/“Unit Cost” as bid should include all costs for all items listed in the Specifications Section, all costs for any insurance, delivery, and/or any performance guarantee as required.
b. The “Percentage Discount Off”/“Unit Cost” as bid shall exclude any applicable taxes. Exclude all applicable taxes for the purposes of evaluation.
c. The “Percentage Discount Off”/“Unit Cost” as bid shall be firm for each line item, regardless of the quantities/dollar amount ordered at any one time. Percentages bid (net cost) shall include freight/delivery on an F.O.B. destination basis.
d. MANUFACTURER’S PUBLISHED PRICE LIST(S) i. Bidders must submit a current copy of the manufacturer’s published education price list(s) as part of their offer. Bids not including a price list(s) may be considered “non- responsive”.
ii. The price list(s) must be the most currently published, with a date within 180 days from the closing date, or later. All future price list(s) and Web site updates must be updated after the contract date or they will not be accepted. The price list(s) must cover all models of computer systems, accessories, software, service and integration options within the categories provided by the bidder/manufacturer as indicated in this agreement. Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 10 IFB No. 2000002197 10. RATE SCHEDULE - continued
1. Any remarks, additions, amendments, or exceptions attached (by the bidder) to the bid, which conflict with terms and conditions herein, may cause it to be deemed “non- responsive.”
2. Bidder shall indicate whether or not it can provide the District with the ability to purchase personal computer systems.
3. Bid on each item/section separately for accounting purposes. Section(s) may be awarded either “per category,” “individually,” “as a whole,” or “in any combination.”
4. When filling in the Rate Schedule (Section III) information/unit costs on the hard copy, the Bidder should either type or print legibly. If the pricing information/unit price is illegible, that item may not be considered for an award. Additionally, the electronic copy of the Rate Schedule should be submitted in an MS Excel format and saved in compact disk or a flash drive. If a discrepancy exists between the hard copy and the electronic copy, the hard copy will prevail.
NOTE: No additional charges will be authorized or paid during the subsequent contract agreement period unless originally specified in the bid.
11. ESTIMATED DISTRICT REQUIREMENTS The District’s actual requirements may vary up to a maximum of 10% of the annual contract value.
The items listed on the Contract and required during the Contract period shall be ordered, for the most part, from the Contractor during such period.
The District reserves the right to purchase from other than the Contractor such items not on hand or readily available to the Contractor, which are urgently needed by the District.
12. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE – SEALED BIDDING Any inconsistency in this solicitation or contract shall be resolved by giving precedence in the following order: (a) the Rate Schedule (excluding the specifications); (b) representations and other instructions; (c) contract clauses; (d) other documents, exhibits, and attachments; and (e) the specifications.
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 11 IFB No. 2000002197 13. NOTICES, DEMANDS, AND COMMUNICATIONS Formal notices, demands, and communication to be given hereunder by either party shall be in writing and delivered in person, by U.S. mail, or electronically, and shall be deemed received as of the date of verifiable delivery. “Verifiable delivery” of electronic transmissions shall mean email Delivery Status Notifications and fax Transmit Confirmation Reports or their equivalents.
Such notices, demands, or communication directed to the District shall be addressed as indicated below.
Los Angeles Unified School District Procurement Services Center – Leonardo de Leon 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660
14. INDEPENDENCE OF BID Unless Bidder is furnishing a joint bid, by submitting this Bid, Bidder swears under penalty of perjury that it did not conspire with any other supplier to set prices in violation of anti- trust laws.
15. CONTRACT PIGGYBACK PROVISION For the term of the Contract, and any mutually agreed extension(s) pursuant to this request for bid and subsequent contract, other school districts, community college districts, public corporations or agencies, including any county, city, town or public corporation or agency within the State of California, may purchase item(s) at the same price and upon the same terms and conditions pursuant to Section 20652 and/or 20118 of the Public Contract Code. The District waives it right to require other districts and agencies to draw their warrants in the favor of the District, as provided in said code sections.
Acceptance or rejection of this provision will not affect contract awards in this bid.
INDICATE SELECTION: Piggyback Provision is granted: * Piggyback Provision is not granted:
*Please note any comments/restrictions related to this agreed upon selection below or attach a separate comment sheet to the bid package.
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 12 IFB No. 2000002197 16. NAME AND NATURE OF BIDDER’S LEGAL ENTITY The Bidder shall state the name and nature of its legal entity. The Bid shall be signed under the correct firm name by an officer/employee authorized to obligate the Bidder/Contractor.
The Bidder understands and agrees by signing this document that all provisions of this IFB/contract must be complied with, and the District may accept any or all of the Bidder’s offer as submitted (unless otherwise stipulated by the Bidder). Execution hereof will constitute a legal and binding Contract upon approval of this offer by the District’s Board of Education.
The representative of the Bidder/Contractor who is authorized to contractually obligate and administer this Contract/Agreement and to whom formal notices, demands, and communications shall be given is as follows:
Legal Name of Bidders Firm:
Name of CEO/President:
Name of Bidder’s Parent Company (if applicable):
Name of CEO/President:
CHECK ONE Bidder’s Signature: Sole Ownership: Bid not acceptable unless signed by an authorized signor. Partnership: Original signature only! Rubber stamp or typed Corporation: signature not acceptable. Other: By: (Print Name of Authorized Signor) Title: (Print Title) Address:
City, State & Zip Code:
Telephone:
Fax number:
E-Mail Address:
Dated this Day of , 20
FOR DISTRICT USE ONLY Approval of Contract Award
By: Contract No.:
Title: Effective Date:
NOTE: THIS AGREEMENT, OR ANY OF ITS RIGHTS, OBLIGATIONS, TERMS OR CONDITIONS, MAY NOT BE ASSIGNED OR TRANSFERRED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE DISTRICT. Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 13 IFB No. 2000002197 17. CONTRACT AWARD NOTIFICATION The Bidder must retain a completed copy of their Bid Document in its entirety, as submitted to the District. In the event of an award, the Bid and all Bid Documents shall become the Contract Agreement. The only other document provided to the successful bidder (awardee/contractor) will be the “Notice of Acceptance of Bid and Award of Contract” letter that will be sent electronically. Contractors also desiring a hard copy (sent by regular U.S. mail) must advise the buyer, in writing, of their request.
All Bidders must provide the following required information: name, address, telephone number, fax number, and business email address of the person designated to receive such notice on behalf of the Bidder (if different from Page 13).
Name of Firm:
Name of Contact: (Please Print)
Address:
City State Zip Code
Email Address: (Required)
Telephone:
Fax number:
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 14 IFB No. 2000002197 18. FILING OF PROTESTS All District procurements shall be conducted in a manner which assures that all prospective contractors are afforded fair and equal consideration in the selection of the successful contractor and award of District contracts in order to preserve and protect the integrity of the procurement process. To that end, any interested party shall have the right to have its complaint considered and resolved administratively by the District in an economical and expeditious manner. “Interested party”, as used herein, means an actual or prospective offeror whose direct economic interest would be affected by the award of a contract or by the failure to award a contract.
All protests shall be filed, handled and resolved in a manner consistent with the District’s Protest Procedures. The District will respond to each substantive issue raised in the protest. Protests relating to the content of this Invitation for Bid (IFB)/Request for Proposal (RFP) document must be filed within ten (10) business days after the date the IFB/RFP is first advertised. Protests relating to a recommendation for award solicited by this IFB/RFP must be filed by an “interested party” within five (5) business days after the staff’s written recommendation and Notice of Intent to Award is issued to the proposing firms. The date of filing shall be the date of receipt of protests by the District.
All protests shall be filed in writing with the Chief Procurement Officer, Los Angeles Unified School District, 333 South Beaudry Ave 28th Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90017. No other location shall be acceptable. The protest shall, at a minimum, contain the following:
• The name and address of the interested party and its relationship to the procurement; • Identification of the proposed procurement or contract; • Substantive description of the nature of the protest; • Identification of the provision(s) of the solicitation, regulations, or laws upon which the protest is based; and • All documentation supporting the allegations of the protest; • Signature of an authorized executive with the authority to bind the company; • Statement of the specific relief requested.
The Chief Procurement Officer, or designee, shall make a determination on the protest, normally within ten (10) business days from receipt of the protest. The Chief Procurement Officer, or designee, has the authority to make a final determination and the decision shall constitute the District’s final administrative remedy.
Section II.A - Bid Form & Rate Schedule Instructions 15 IFB No. 2000002197 SECTION II
B. SPECIFIC BID CONDITIONS / CERTIFICATIONS Compliance with LAUSD Ethics and Integrity Standards
Every Contractor and its Representatives must abide by LAUSD’s Contractor Code of Conduct. A “Contractor” is any individual, organization, corporation, sole proprietorship, partnership, non-profit, joint venture, association, or any combination thereof that is pursuing or conducting business with and/or on behalf of LAUSD, including, without limitation, consultants, suppliers, manufacturers, and any other vendors, bidders or proposers. A Contractor’s “Representative” is broadly defined to include any subcontractor, employee, agent, or any other entity acting on a Contractor’s behalf.
If a Contractor or its Representative is not knowledgeable about the necessary ethical requirements for establishing a business relationship with LAUSD, he or she shall visit the LAUSD Ethics Office website at: https://achieve.lausd.net/ethics, or refer any questions to the designated contracting official. Failure to meet LAUSD’s ethics standards and requirements could result in sanctions including, but not limited to, voidance of any current or future contracts. LAUSD reserves the right to disqualify any bid or proposal as non-responsive if this certification is not submitted in whole by the deadline required.
1. ETHICS AGREEMENT I, THE UNDERSIGNED AFFIRM, UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, THAT I AM AUTHORIZED, AS THE SENIOR EXECUTIVE RESPONSIBLE FOR MY ORGANIZATION’S ETHICAL CONDUCT, TO EXECUTE THIS CERTIFICATION ON BEHALF OF MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES* AND TO ENSURE THAT EACH AND EVERY REPRESENTATIVE ABIDES BY LAUSD’S ETHICS AND INTEGRITY STANDARDS IN ACCORDANCE WITH LAUSD’S CONTRACTOR CODE OF CONDUCT WHICH I HAVE REVIEWED IN FULL. I DECLARE THAT ALL REPRESENTATIONS MADE IN THIS CERTIFICATION ARE TRUE, CORRECT AND IN GOOD FAITH, AND I COMMIT TO PROVIDING AN UPDATED FORM WITHIN 10 BUSINESS DAYS WHENEVER THERE IS A MATERIAL CHANGE TO THE INFORMATION I HAVE PROVIDED DURING THE TERM OF OUR CONTRACT WITH LAUSD.
* You will need to attach a list of all known representatives who will conduct LAUSD work on your behalf (see Section 7).
SENIOR EXECUTIVE RESPONSIBLE FOR YOUR ORGANIZATION’S ETHICS AND INTEGRITY:
NAME OF RESPONSIBLE SENIOR OFFICER POSITION TITLE PHONE NUMBER
SIGNATURE OF RESPONSIBLE SENIOR OFFICER DATE E-MAIL ADDRESS
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 16 IFB No. 2000002197 2. ETHICAL MANAGEMENT (PLEASE COMPLETE EACH LINE BELOW): A. MY ORGANIZATION TAKES RESPONSIBILITY FOR ENSURING THAT EACH OF OUR REPRESENTATIVES, REGARDLESS OF POSITION, r r UNDERSTANDS AND COMPLIES WITH THE DUTIES AND REQUIREMENTS OUTLINED IN LAUSD’S CONTRACTOR CODE OF CONDUCT Yes No AND FOR ENSURING THAT WE ADHERE TO THE HIGHEST STANDARDS OF HONESTY AND INTEGRITY IN ALL OUR DEALINGS WITH AND/OR ON BEHALF OF LAUSD. B. MY ORGANIZATION HAS AN EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT PROCESS IN PLACE TO ENSURE THAT THE BEHAVIOR, DECISIONS, AND r r ACTIONS OF OUR REPRESENTATIVES DEMONSTRATE THE LETTER AND SPIRIT OF LAUSD’S ETHICS AND INTEGRITY STANDARDS IN Yes No ALL PHASES OF ANY RELATIONSHIP WITH LAUSD. C. DESCRIBE BRIEFLY THE SCOPE OF YOUR ORGANIZATION’S EFFORTS TO MANAGE FOR AND ASSURE ETHICAL CONDUCT, ATTACH AN ADDITIONAL SHEET OF PAPER IF NECESSARY:
D. BY INITIALING HERE, I CERTIFY THAT MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL EXERCISE CAUTION AT ALL TIMES TO ENSURE THAT OUR CONDUCT AVOIDS EVEN THE APPEARANCE OF IMPROPRIETY OR MISREPRESENTATION. WE WILL BE PROACTIVE IN ASKING QUESTIONS AND SEEK FORMAL GUIDANCE FROM LAUSD WHENEVER THERE IS A DOUBT ABOUT HOW TO PROCEED IN AN ETHICAL MANNER.
3. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY (PLEASE COMPLETE EACH LINE BELOW):
For each “No” answer below, attach an additional sheet of paper with the heading “Contractor Responsibility” and provide an explanation that is brief, concise, and to the point which gives: 1) a detailed description of the issue and its cause, 2) the actions taken or being implemented to ensure that the issue will not occur again, 3) the name, position, and contact info for the individual in your organization charged with ensuring the issue will not be repeated, and 4) the impact, if any, the issue will have on the products or services you have proposed to LAUSD for this contract. A. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES DEMONSTRATE A RECORD OF INTEGRITY AND BUSINESS ETHICS IN ACCORDANCE r r WITH ALL LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL LAWS, ORDINANCES, DIRECTIVES AND REGULATIONS AS WELL AS THE POLICIES AND Yes No REQUIREMENTS ESTABLISHED BY LAUSD. B. MY ORGANIZATION, INCLUDING ANY PRINCIPAL, OWNER, OFFICER, PARTNER, MAJOR STOCKHOLDER, SUBSIDIARY, AND ALL r r OTHER REPRESENTATIVES ACTING ON OUR BEHALF, HAS NOT BEEN THE SUBJECT OF A CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION, INDICTMENT, Yes No CONVICTION, JUDGMENT, INJUNCTION, OR A GRANT OF IMMUNITY, INCLUDING PENDING ACTIONS, FOR BRIBERY, EMBEZZLEMENT, EXTORTION, FALSIFICATION, FORGERY, MAKING FALSE STATEMENTS OR, ANY OTHER BUSINESS OR ETHICS RELATED CONDUCT CONSTITUTING A CRIMINAL OFFENSE UNDER FEDERAL, STATE OR LOCAL LAW WITHIN THE LAST SEVEN (7) YEARS. C. MY ORGANIZATION, INCLUDING ANY PRINCIPAL, OWNER, OFFICER, PARTNER, MAJOR STOCKHOLDER, SUBSIDIARY, AND ALL r r OTHER REPRESENTATIVES ACTING ON OUR BEHALF, HAS NOT BEEN THE SUBJECT OF A FEDERAL, STATE, LOCAL GOVERNMENT, OR Yes No LAUSD SUSPENSION, DEBARMENT, ADMINISTRATIVE AGREEMENT, DENIAL OF CONTRACT AWARD, DECLARATION OF INELIGIBILITY, OR BID REJECTION, INCLUDING PENDING ACTIONS, FOR NON-RESPONSIBILITY WITHIN THE LAST SEVEN (7) YEARS. D. MY ORGANIZATION, INCLUDING ANY PRINCIPAL, OWNER, OFFICER, PARTNER, MAJOR STOCKHOLDER, SUBSIDIARY, AND ALL r r OTHER REPRESENTATIVES ACTING ON OUR BEHALF, HAS NOT BEEN THE SUBJECT OF A FEDERAL, STATE, LOCAL GOVERNMENT, OR Yes No LAUSD ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEEDING OR CIVIL ACTION SEEKING SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE, RESTITUTION, CONTRACT SUSPENSION, OR TERMINATION FOR CAUSE, INCLUDING PENDING ACTIONS WITHIN THE LAST SEVEN (7) YEARS. E. MY ORGANIZATION, INCLUDING ANY SUBSIDIARY OR PREDECESSOR COMPANY OR ENTITY UNDER A DIFFERENT BUSINESS NAME, r r HAS NOT BEEN THE SUBJECT OF A BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDING, INCLUDING ANY PENDING BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS WITHIN THE Yes No PAST SEVEN (7) YEARS. F. MY ORGANIZATION HAS THE FINANCIAL RESOURCES AND MANAGEMENT CAPACITY NECESSARY TO FULFILL THE REQUIREMENTS r r OF OUR PROPOSED CONTRACT WITH LAUSD. Yes No G. MY ORGANIZATION, INCLUDING ANY PRINCIPAL, OWNER, OFFICER, PARTNER, MAJOR STOCKHOLDER, SUBSIDIARY, AND ALL r r OTHER REPRESENTATIVES ACTING ON OUR BEHALF, HAS NOT, TO OUR KNOWLEDGE, BEEN THE SUBJECT OF A POOR PERFORMANCE Yes No COMPLAINT, CONFLICT OF INTEREST CONCERN, OR OTHER ETHICS INQUIRY AT LAUSD. H. BY INITIALING HERE, I CERTIFY THAT MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL BE PROACTIVE IN DISCLOSING TO LAUSD ANY ISSUES CONCERNING OUR RESPONSIBILITY, SO THAT THE APPROPRIATE ACTIONS CAN BE TAKEN TO AVOID IMPACT TO THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES WE WILL DELIVER TO LAUSD.
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 17 IFB No. 2000002197 4. CONTRACTING EXCELLENCE (PLEASE COMPLETE EACH LINE BELOW): A. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL MAINTAIN A CONE OF SILENCE AND AVOID ALL PROHIBITED r r COMMUNICATIONS WITH LAUSD OFFICIALS DURING THE REQUIRED TIMES OF LAUSD’S CONTRACTING PROCESS. WE WILL NOT Yes No REQUEST OR ACCEPT – EITHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY – ANY PROTECTED INFORMATION REGARDING PRESENT OR FUTURE CONTRACTS BEFORE THE INFORMATION IS MADE PUBLICLY AVAILABLE AT THE SAME TIME AND IN THE SAME FORM TO ALL OTHER POTENTIAL BIDDERS. B. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL PROTECT THE CONFIDENTIALITY OF ALL INFORMATION GARNERED r r THROUGH THE CONTRACTING PROCESS AND OUR WORK WITH LAUSD. WE UNDERSTAND THAT USING SUCH INFORMATION, Yes No DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR PERSONAL, FINANCIAL OR OTHER PRIVATE INTERESTS IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. C. MY ORGANIZATION, INCLUDING ANY PRINCIPAL, OWNER, OFFICER, PARTNER, MAJOR STOCKHOLDER, SUBSIDIARY, AND ALL r r OTHER REPRESENTATIVES ACTING ON OUR BEHALF, HAS NOT PARTICIPATED IN ANY ASPECT OF DEVELOPING THE SCOPE OF WORK, Yes No SOLICITATION DOCUMENTS, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, EVALUATION CRITERIA, PROCUREMENT CONSIDERATIONS, OR OTHER CONTRACTUAL INSTRUMENTS FOR THIS CONTRACT. D. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES KNOW OF NO LAUSD OFFICIAL WITH AN ECONOMIC INTEREST IN OUR r r ORGANIZATION OR OUR REPRESENTATIVES WHO HAS PARTICIPATED IN ANY ASPECT OF THIS CONTRACT. WE KNOW THAT AN Yes No ECONOMIC INTEREST EXISTS WHENEVER AN OFFICIAL, HIS OR HER SPOUSE, AND ANY DEPENDENT CHILDREN HAS A DIRECT OR INDIRECT FINANCIAL INTEREST OR LIABILITY IN EXCESS OF $1000 IN AN ENTITY; HAS RECEIVED INCOME WITHIN THE PAST 12 MONTHS FROM THE ENTITY; HAS SERVED AS AN OFFICER, DIRECTOR, COMMITTEE MEMBER OR AN EMPLOYEE OF THE ENTITY (EVEN IN AN UNPAID CAPACITY); OR HAS RECEIVED A GIFT FROM AN ENTITY OVER LAUSD’S GIFT LIMIT. E. BY INITIALING HERE, I CERTIFY THAT MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL ABIDE BY ALL THE INTEGRITY REQUIREMENTS OF LAUSD’S CONTRACTING PROCESS. WE WILL BE CAUTIOUS TO AVOID ANY ACTIONS THAT COULD BE SAID TO INTERFERE WITH AN OPEN AND UNIFORM CONTRACTING PROCESS.
5. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST (PLEASE COMPLETE EACH LINE BELOW): A. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT CONDUCT BUSINESS WITH OR ON BEHALF OF LAUSD IN A MANNER r r THAT WOULD BE REASONABLY KNOWN TO CREATE OR LEAD TO A PERCEPTION OF SELF-DEALING. Yes No B. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT CONDUCT BUSINESS WITH ANY LAUSD OFFICIAL* WHO HAS AN r r ECONOMIC INTEREST IN OUR ORGANIZATION OR OUR REPRESENTATIVES. WE UNDERSTAND THAT DOING SO COULD VIOLATE Yes No GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 1090 AND RESULT IN A VOID CONTRACT IN WHICH WE MAY OWE RESTITUTION TO LAUSD. C. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT MAKE OR PARTICIPATE IN THE MAKING OF LAUSD DECISIONS WHEN r r OUR PERSONAL FINANCIAL INTERESTS CAN BE AFFECTED. Yes No D. MY ORGANIZATION WILL NOT ALLOW ANY OF OUR REPRESENTATIVES TO CONDUCT BUSINESS DIRECTLY WITH ANY LAUSD r r OFFICIAL WHO IS A CLOSE RELATIVE OR COHABITANT, OR WITH WHOM THERE IS A CLOSE ECONOMIC ASSOCIATION. WE Yes No UNDERSTAND THAT ANY TIME THERE IS A CLOSE FAMILY OR PERSONAL RELATIONSHIP INVOLVED BETWEEN OUR REPRESENTATIVES AND AN LAUSD OFFICIAL WHO IS INVOLVED IN THIS WORK OR WHO HAS OVERSIGHT, WE MUST WORK WITH LAUSD TO IMPLEMENT THE NECESSARY SAFEGUARDS. E. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT CONDUCT WORK ON BEHALF OF ANOTHER CLIENT ON A MATTER THAT r r WOULD BE REASONABLY SEEN AS IN CONFLICT WITH WORK PERFORMED FOR LAUSD. Yes No F. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT BEGIN ANY PROSPECTIVE EMPLOYMENT OR CONSULTING DISCUSSIONS r r WITH ANY CURRENT LAUSD OFFICIAL WITHOUT IMPLEMENTING THE NECESSARY SAFEGUARDS ESTABLISHED BY STATE LAW Yes No AND LAUSD SINCE AN OFFER OF COMPENSATION CAN CREATE A CONFLICT. G. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT GIVE ANY GIFTS OR PERSONAL BENEFITS A) TO ANY LAUSD r r PROCUREMENT OFFICIAL, B) TO ANY LAUSD OFFICIAL IN EXCESS OF LAUSD’S ESTABLISHED GIFT LIMIT, OR C) TO ANY LAUSD Yes No OFFICIAL WITHOUT THE REQUIRED DISCLOSURE, IF DISCLOSURE IS REQUIRED. H. BY INITIALING HERE, I CERTIFY THAT MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL BE PROACTIVE IN DISCLOSING IN WRITING ALL POTENTIAL OR ACTUAL CONFLICTS, ON AN ONGOING BASIS, TO THE LAUSD OFFICIALS DESIGNATED IN THE CODE, SO THAT ANY CONFLICTS CAN BE APPROPRIATELY REMEDIED. * Note that an LAUSD official is broadly defined to include “any board member, employee, consultant or advisory member of LAUSD” who is involved in making recommendations or decisions for LAUSD.
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 18 IFB No. 2000002197 6. REVOLVING DOOR RESTRICTIONS (PLEASE COMPLETE EACH LINE BELOW):
For each “No” answer below, attach an additional sheet of paper with the heading “Revolving Door Restrictions” and provide an explanation that is brief, concise, and to the point which gives: 1) a description of the situation and the full name of the current or former LAUSD official(s) involved, 2) employment dates with LAUSD, 3) LAUSD position title(s) held with department(s) worked, 4) position title(s) held for your organization, 5) a detailed scope of responsibilities and services being performed for your organization, and 6) time period(s) your organization or representatives has compensated the official. A. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT COMPENSATE ANY CURRENT LAUSD OFFICIAL TO LOBBY LAUSD, r r NOR WILL WE COMPENSATE ANY FORMER LAUSD OFFICIAL TO LOBBY LAUSD BEFORE A ONE (1) YEAR PERIOD HAS ELAPSED Yes No FROM THAT OFFICIAL’S LAST DATE OF EMPLOYMENT WITH LAUSD. WE UNDERSTAND THAT LOBBYING INCLUDES ANY ACTION TAKEN WITH THE PRINCIPAL PURPOSE OF INFLUENCING A POLICY, PROGRAM, CONTRACT, AWARD OR OTHER LAUSD DECISION- MAKING, INCLUDING MARKETING EFFORTS. B. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT COMPENSATE ANY CURRENT OR FORMER LAUSD OFFICIAL TO WORK r r ON A MATTER THAT THE OFFICIAL HAS BEEN PERSONALLY AND SUBSTANTIALLY INVOLVED WITH IN THE PRECEDING 12 MONTHS. Yes No C. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT COMPENSATE ANY CURRENT OR FORMER LAUSD OFFICIAL TO r r PERFORM ANY SERVICES ON A CONTRACT THAT THE OFFICIAL HAS SUBSTANTIALLY PARTICIPATED IN WITHIN THE PRECEDING Yes No TWO (2) YEARS. D. MY ORGANIZATION WILL ENSURE THAT ANY REPRESENTATIVE WHO IS CONTRACTED TO ACT IN THE CAPACITY OF AN LAUSD r r OFFICIAL WILL DISQUALIFY HIMSELF OR HERSELF FROM MAKING ANY GOVERNMENTAL DECISIONS FOR LAUSD RELATING TO A Yes No PRIVATE SECTOR INTEREST, INCLUDING MATTERS INVOLVING OUR ORGANIZATION, UNTIL A ONE (1) YEAR PERIOD HAS ELAPSED FROM THE TIME THE INTEREST HAS BEEN DISPOSED OR SEVERED. E. DESCRIBE BRIEFLY THE INTERNAL SAFEGUARDS YOUR ORGANIZATION HAS PUT IN PLACE TO PRESERVE LAUSD’S COOLING PERIOD RESTRICTIONS:
F. BY INITIALING HERE, I CERTIFY THAT MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL UPHOLD ALL THE PROVISIONS OF LAUSD’S REVOLVING DOOR COOLING PERIOD RESTRICTIONS. WE RESPECT THE NEED FOR PUBLIC AGENCIES TO ENSURE THAT NO UNFAIR COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE IS EXTENDED DUE TO THE HIRING OF CURRENT OR FORMER PUBLIC OFFICIALS.
7. DISCLOSURE OBLIGATIONS (PLEASE COMPLETE EACH LINE BELOW): Disclosure of Your Representatives Please attach an additional sheet of paper with the heading “Our Representatives” and provide the following: 1) the full name of all subcontractors, employees, agents and anyone else who will act on your organization’s behalf for this LAUSD contract, 2) each individual’s position title, and 3) each individual’s organizational affiliation. Disclosure Relating to Current & Former LAUSD Officials For each “No” answer below, attach an additional sheet of paper with the heading “Disclosure Obligations – Current & Former LAUSD Officials” and provide the following: 1) the full name of the current or former LAUSD official(s) involved, 2) the official’s employment dates with LAUSD, 3) the official’s final three-year history of LAUSD position title(s) held with department(s) worked, 4) position title(s) held for your organization, 5) a detailed scope of the responsibilities and services being performed for your organization, and 6) the time period(s) for which your organization or representative has compensated the official. Note: Public agencies are exempt from this requirement and may indicate so on their attachment. A. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES ARE NOT COMPENSATING ANY CURRENT LAUSD OFFICIALS. WE KNOW THAT r r AN LAUSD OFFICIAL IS BROADLY DEFINED TO INCLUDE “ANY BOARD MEMBER, EMPLOYEE, CONSULTANT OR ADVISORY MEMBER Yes No OF LAUSD” WHO IS INVOLVED IN MAKING RECOMMENDATIONS OR DECISIONS FOR LAUSD. B. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES ARE NOT COMPENSATING ANY INDIVIDUALS WHO HAVE BEEN FORMER LAUSD r r OFFICIALS WITHIN THE LAST THREE (3) YEARS. Yes No For each “No” answer below, attach an additional sheet of paper with the heading “Disclosure Obligations – Other Affiliations” and provide the following: 1) the full name of the LAUSD official(s) involved, 2) the official’s current LAUSD position title held and department worked, and 3) the details of the official’s relationship or affiliation with your organization or representatives. C. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES ARE NOT COMPENSATING THE FAMILY MEMBERS OF ANY LAUSD OFFICIALS r r WHO ARE INVOLVED WITH THIS CONTRACT OR OUR WORK FOR LAUSD. Yes No D. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES HAVE NO KNOWLEDGE OF ANY FORMER EMPLOYEES OF OURS WHO ARE r r PRESENTLY EMPLOYED BY LAUSD. Yes No
Lobbying Disclosure E. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT ENGAGE IN ANY LAUSD LOBBYING ACTIVITIES WITHOUT THE r r APPROPRIATE REGISTRATION AND DISCLOSURE THROUGH LAUSD’S ETHICS OFFICE WEBSITE https://achieve.lausd.net/ethics). Yes No WE UNDERSTAND THAT UNDER LAUSD’S LOBBYING DISCLOSURE CODE, REGISTRATION IS REQUIRED IF WE ARE PAID BY A CLIENT TO LOBBY LAUSD, OR IF WE WILL SPEND MORE THAN $10,000 THIS YEAR TO LOBBY LAUSD ON OUR OWN BEHALF. WE KNOW THAT LOBBYING INCLUDES ANY ACTION TAKEN WITH THE PRINCIPAL PURPOSE OF INFLUENCING A POLICY, PROGRAM, CONTRACT, AWARD OR OTHER LAUSD DECISION, INCLUDING MARKETING AND PROMOTIONAL EFFORTS.
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 19 IFB No. 2000002197
State-Mandated Statement of Economic Interests (for professional services contracts only)
F MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL ABIDE BY THE FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS OF CALIFORNIA’S POLITICAL r r REFORM ACT WHICH REQUIRES INDIVIDUAL CONTRACTORS AND THEIR REPRESENTATIVES TO DISCLOSE ECONOMIC INTERESTS THAT Yes No COULD BE FORESEEABLY AFFECTED BY THEIR EXERCISE OF CONTRACTUAL DUTIES. If the answer is “No” below, attach an additional sheet of paper with the heading “State-Mandated Statement of Economic Interests” and provide the following: 1) the full name of each of your representatives who will make governmental decisions or participate in the making of governmental decisions for LAUSD in this contract, 2) a detailed scope of the responsibilities and services each individual will provide to LAUSD, and 3) a valid e-mail address for each representative. Before a contract is executed, these individuals will have to complete a Statement of Economic Interests which can be downloaded from: https://achieve.lausd.net/ethics . G. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT BE INVOLVED IN PERFORMING ANY ACTIVITIES OR DECISION-MAKING FOR r r LAUSD IN THIS CONTRACT SUCH AS: OBLIGATING LAUSD TO A COURSE OF ACTION; APPROVING PLANS, DESIGNS, REPORTS OR STUDIES Yes No FOR LAUSD; ADOPTING POLICIES, STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES FOR ANY SUBDIVISION OF LAUSD; AUTHORIZING LAUSD TO ENTER INTO, MODIFY, OR RENEW A CONTRACT; NEGOTIATING ON BEHALF OF LAUSD; ADVISING OR MAKING RECOMMENDATIONS TO LAUSD DECISION- MAKERS; CONDUCTING RESEARCH OF INVESTIGATIONS FOR LAUSD; PREPARING A REPORT OR ANALYSIS THAT REQUIRES AN EXERCISE IN JUDGMENT OR PERFORMING DUTIES SIMILAR TO AN LAUSD STAFF POSITION WHICH IS ALREADY DESIGNATED AS A FILER POSITION IN LAUSD’S CONFLICT OF INTEREST CODE. H. BY INITIALING HERE, I CERTIFY THAT MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL UPHOLD ALL OUR PUBLIC DISCLOSURE OBLIGATIONS WITH LAUSD. WE UNDERSTAND THAT PROVIDING TRANSPARENCY HELPS TO ENSURE GREATER ACCOUNTABILITY AND PUBLIC TRUST.
8. TRUST-BUILDING PRACTICES (PLEASE COMPLETE EACH LINE BELOW): A. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL ADVISE LAUSD OF ANY CHANGE IN THE OWNERSHIP OR OPERATIONAL AND MANAGERIAL CONTROL OF OUR ORGANIZATION WITHIN 10 BUSINESS DAYS OF SUCH CHANGE. r r Yes No B. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT ENGAGE IN POLITICAL SUPPORT AND ACTIVITIES ON LAUSD TIME OR WITH LAUSD RESOURCES UNLESS WE HAVE BEEN RETAINED BY LAUSD TO SPECIFICALLY ENGAGE IN THOSE ACTIVITIES. WE UNDERSTAND r r THAT LAUSD RESOURCES INCLUDE: TIME, PROPERTY, SUPPLIES, SERVICES, CONSUMABLES, EQUIPMENT, TECHNOLOGY, INTELLECTUAL Yes No PROPERTY, AND INFORMATION C. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT SUBMIT ANY FALSE CLAIMS FOR PAYMENT TO LAUSD, AND WE WILL NOT MAKE ANY SUBSTITUTION FOR GOODS, SERVICES OR TALENT THAT DO NOT MEET CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL r r BY LAUSD. Yes No D. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT USE LAUSD ASSETS AND RESOURCES FOR PURPOSES WHICH DO NOT SUPPORT LAUSD’S WORK. WE UNDERSTAND THAT LAUSD ASSETS INCLUDE: TIME, PROPERTY, SUPPLIES, SERVICES, CONSUMABLES, EQUIPMENT, r r TECHNOLOGY, INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, AND INFORMATION. Yes No E. MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT USE LAUSD NAMES AND MARKS, OR SUGGEST ANY LAUSD ENDORSEMENT IN ANY WAY, WITHOUT THE APPROPRIATE WRITTEN LAUSD APPROVAL. r r Yes No F MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL NOT LET ANY SUSPECTED VIOLATIONS OF LAUSD’S CONTRACTOR CODE OF CONDUCT GO UNADDRESSED. WE UNDERSTAND THAT GOOD FAITH REPORTING OF SUSPECTED VIOLATIONS TO LAUSD’S OFFICE OF THE r r INSPECTOR GENERAL IS ENCOURAGED. Yes No G. BY INITIALING HERE, I CERTIFY THAT MY ORGANIZATION AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES WILL ENSURE ETHICAL AND RESPONSIBLE USE OF PUBLIC TAX DOLLARS FOR MAXIMUM STUDENT BENEFIT BY COMMITTING TO TRUST-BUILDING PRACTICES AND BY PROVIDING EXCELLENCE, HIGH QUALITY, INNOVATION AND COST EFFECTIVENESS IN THE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES WE WILL DELIVER TO LAUSD.
To ensure your compliance with LAUSD’s disclosure obligations, please verify that all necessary attachments are included. Thank you for your commitment to helping LAUSD ensure ethical conduct, public integrity and responsible use of scarce tax dollars.
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 20 IFB No. 2000002197 9. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE DISTRICT’S SWEAT-FREE PROCUREMENT POLICY a. DISTRICT POLICY
It is the policy of the Los Angeles Unified School District (LAUSD) that all products and/or services purchased by the District be manufactured and supplied in compliance with applicable labor and wage laws governing the countries of its origin. For the purposes of establishing a non-poverty wage, the LAUSD uses the definition of non-poverty wages as formulated by the Union of Needletrades, Industrial and Textile Employees (UNITE), utilizing the Department of Health and Human Services’ guidelines to determine non- poverty wages domestically. Internationally, the LAUSD recognizes the World Bank’s Gross National Income Per Capita Purchasing Power Parity figures to determine comparable wages in other countries. Purchases by the LAUSD will be restricted to only those products and/or services that have been manufactured without the illegal use of “sweatshop” (including exploitive “child,” “forced,” “convict,” and “indentured”) labor.
Prior to any award, the LAUSD will require its bidders/contractors to certify adherence to the provisions of the District’s Sweat-Free Procurement Policy. This Sweat-Free Procurement Policy includes the following principles/requirements:
§ Safe and healthy working conditions § Prohibition of child labor § Disclosure of manufacturing plant locations § Verification and enforcement mechanisms § Compliance with applicable codes § Penalties for violations § Responsible bidder forms § Non-poverty wage standard (domestic and international)
Contractors will denote compliance to these provisions by signing a Sweat-Free Procurement Policy certification, which will extend to their subcontractors.
The consequence of any violation by the contractor to the aforementioned laws and provisions may result in action being taken by the District against the contractor. Through Memorandums of Understanding (MOU), information will be exchanged with various government-based investigative agencies. The District will adopt the investigative agency’s findings to take appropriate actions against the contractor. The action may include, but is not limited to, agreed upon liquidated damages, contract cancellation, vendor default, and/or vendor debarment.
The LAUSD will continuously educate the vendors to raise their level of awareness about the “sweat-free” procurement policy.
b. COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION
(While all Bidders/Contractors, and their subcontractors, are required to comply with all the provisions of this Policy, only the Bidder/Contractor is required to sign this certification statement.)
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 21 IFB No. 2000002197 9. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH THE DISTRICT’S SWEAT-FREE PROCUREMENT POLICY-continued
For any award made under this bid:
1. The Bidder/Contractor and its subcontractors certify that all goods and/or services will be manufactured, supplied, and/or provided in compliance with the applicable labor laws and non-poverty wage standards of the country or countries of origin, and,
2. The Bidder/Contractor and its subcontractors will abide by all other provisions of the District’s Sweat-Free Procurement Policy, as outlined on the previous page (Section II.B, Item #9 a), and,
3. Should the District find that the Bidder/Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, is in violation of the aforementioned laws/provisions, the Contractor shall be subjected to the consequences for violation, which may include, but not be limited to, agreed upon liquidated damages, contract termination, vendor default, and/or debarment action being taken, and,
4. If the Bidder/Contractor is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, the Bidder agrees to attach an explanation to its bid.
I hereby certify, under the penalty of perjury, that the above information is true and correct, and:
1. That I have read and understand the District’s Sweat Free Procurement Policy (Item #9 a) which is incorporated and made part of this certification, and,
2. That should an award be made, all goods and/or services provided by the Contractor and its subcontractors will be in compliance with the District’s Sweat Free Procurement Policy.
Name of Firm:
Signature Printed name
Dated this: Day of , 20 Title
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 22 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder (firm’s) Name: Subcontractor/Supplier:
10. POSSIBLE CONFLICT OF INTEREST DISCLOSURE FORM Bidder must provide the following information for itself and any subcontractor(s) to the bid. This information is required to avoid any conflict of interest regarding the Board of Education Members’ ability to take any action regarding approval of any contract awards. Please disclose all information and use additional sheets if necessary.
1. Name of Bidder (Contractor) (Prime)
Principal/Contractor Contact Name and Telephone No.
Partners/Officers/Stockholders
Partners/Officers/Stockholders
Parent Company (if any)
Partners/Officers/Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries (if any)
Partners/Officers Stockholders
2. NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR NO.1
Principal/Contractor Contact Name and Telephone No.
Partners/Officers/Stockholders
NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR NO.2
Principal/Contractor Contact Name and Telephone No.
Partners/Officers/Stockholders
NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR NO. 3
Principal/Contractor Contact Name and Telephone No.
Partners/Officers/Stockholders
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 23 IFB No. 2000002197 10. POSSIBLE CONFLICT OF INTEREST DISCLOSURE FORM- continued A. CONFLICT OF INTEREST
1. Contractor warrants that it has not employed or retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for Contractor, to solicit or secure the Contract and that it has not paid or agreed to pay any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for Contractor, any fee, commission, percentage, brokerage fee, gifts or any other consideration, contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of the Contract. For breach of this warranty, or violation of any other prohibition in this Article, the District shall have the right to terminate the Contract for failure of Contractor to fulfill its Contract obligations.
2. Contractor agrees that, for the term of the Contract, no member, officer, or employee of the District, or of a local public body during their employment and for one (1) year thereafter, shall have any interest, direct or indirect, in the Contract, or to any benefit arising thereof as prohibited by Government Code § 1090 and 87100.
3. The employment by Contractor of personnel on the payroll of the District for the performance of Work under the Contract will not be permitted, even though such employment may be outside of the employee’s regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, or vacation time. The employment by the Contractor of personnel who have been on the District payroll within one (1) year prior to the date of Contract award, where such employment is caused by and/or dependent upon Contractor securing the Contract or a related Contract with the District, is also prohibited.
4. Neither the Contractor nor its employees nor its Subcontractors or their employees shall give or offer to give any campaign contribution to any member of the District in violation of Government Code Section 84308.
5. The Contractor shall not be permitted to participate in any capacity in Contracts, Subcontracts or proposals (solicited or unsolicited) which may arise from its performance under the Contract and from any solicitations relating to the Project.
B. COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES
1. The Contractor warrants that no person or Authorized Representative has been specifically employed or retained to solicit or obtain the Contract in exchange for a contingent fee, except a bona fide employee or Agent. A breach or violation of this warranty shall be considered a breach of Contract pursuant to the Article entitled TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT herein. In addition to any rights and remedies otherwise provided for in the contract, by law, the District may deduct from the Total Contract Price or considerations, or otherwise recover, the full amount of the contingent fee.
2. "Bona fide Agent", as used in this Article, means an established commercial or selling entity that is maintained by the Contractor for the sole purpose of securing business and that neither exerts nor proposes to exert improper influence to solicit or obtain District Contract(s) nor holds itself out as being able to obtain any District Contract(s) through improper influence.
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 24 IFB No. 2000002197 10. POSSIBLE CONFLICT OF INTEREST DISCLOSURE FORM- continued B. COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES-continued
3. "Bona fide employee", as used in this Article, means a person who is employed by the Contractor and subject to the Contractor's supervision and control as to time, place, and manner of performance and who neither exerts nor proposes to exert improper influence to solicit or obtain District Contract(s) nor holds itself out as being able to obtain any District Contract(s) through improper influence.
4. "Contingent fee", as used in this Article, means any commission, percentage, or other sum that is payable only upon success in securing a District Contract.
5. "Improper influence”, as used in this Article, means any influence that induces or tends to induce a District employee, officer, Contractor, Subcontractor, Authorized Representative, or Consultant to give consideration or to act regarding a District Contract on any basis other than the merits of the matter.
I have read and agree to the above Conflict of Interest and Covenant Against Contingent Fees Policies.
Bidder (Company) Name:
Print Name: Title:
Signature Date
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 25 IFB No. 2000002197 11. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT SUSPENSION OR INELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD (34 CFR 85) The following certification is applicable only to contracts for $25,000 or more that are funded in whole or in part with Federal funds.
By signing this document, the Bidder certifies that it and its principals:
a. Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, or declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded by any Federal department or agency;
b. Have not, within a three-year period preceding this bid, been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property;
c. Are not presently indicted for, or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State or local) with the commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph b. (above) of this certification; and
d. Have not within a three-year period preceding this bid had one or more public transactions (Federal, State, or local) terminated for cause or default.
If the Bidder is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, the Bidder shall attach an explanation to the Bid.
Name of Firm:
By: (Signature)
By: (Print Name)
Title:
Dated this Day of , 20
Section II.B – Specific Bid Conditions / Certifications 26 IFB No. 2000002197 SECTION II
C. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
SCOPE OF CONTRACT
a. The intent of this Invitation for Bid (IFB) is to provide solutions for the current installed base equipment;
1. Local Area Network (LAN), Wireless LAN, Telecommunication (VoIP), Information Security, IT Management, Datacenter, other equipment and related services including but not limited to electronics, associated modules, software, applicable license, cables/wiring components and related technical services to expand and replace the existing installed systems at schools and offices throughout the Los Angeles Unified School District.
2. Public Announcement (PA) equipment, and related services including but not limited to electronics, associated modules, software, applicable license, and related technical services to expand and replace the obsolete PA system currently installed at schools and offices throughout the Los Angeles Unified School District.
3. Integrated Electronic Security Systems (IESS) including Access Control, Intrusion Detection, Video/Audio Surveillance (also known as Closed-Circuit Television or CCTV) equipment, and related services including but not limited to electronics, associated modules, software, applicable license, and related technical services to expand and replace the obsolete IESS systems installed at schools and offices throughout the Los Angeles Unified School District.
b. The purpose of this IFB is to establish a reliable and economical source of complete IT equipment, parts for replacement, upgrades, adds, moves, and changes to existing IT systems.
c. Procurements under this contract do not include, nor are they intended for the acquisition of services associated with public works e.g. trenching, pathways such as conduit/raceway, cabinet installations etc.
d. Bidder may respond to one (1) or more manufacturers’ products per the Rate Schedules.
Contracted items shall be in accordance with all the Terms and Conditions set forth herein; including adherence to the Specifications listed below. The “Percentage Discount,” and “Unit Cost” bid in the “Rate Schedule Section, Section III must include the following requirements:
Section II.C – General Specifications 27 IFB No. 2000002197 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. DELIVERY REQIREMENTS AND LOCATIONS a. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivery (F.O.B. Destination) and shall pay all costs, including drayage, freight, pallets, and packaging, which shall be included in the item’s percentage rate of discount. No separate charges for proceeding will be allowed nor paid by the District. All deliveries shall be set-on the Districts’ dock and/or pallet(s) as required by the District and must include a detailed delivery/packing slip.
b. Purchase orders will be issued and e-mailed to the Contractor by the individual locations. All equipment/parts shall be delivered to the requesting location within thirty (30) calendar days. Contractor shall notify requesting location upon receipt of order for items that are not deliverable within this time period. At that time, the ordering location will determine if item(s) are to be back ordered, or other sources are to be used to acquire the item(s). No back orders are allowed without District approval.
c. Contractor must coordinate with the receiving location for an acceptable delivery time between the hours of 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Delivery slips showing purchase order number must be furnished by the Contractor and accompany each shipment.
2. AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS The District may purchase, from any source, essential material to support the operational activities for the Information Technology Division, when the Contractor does not have the necessary material immediately available or as deemed necessary by the District.
3. PREFERENTIAL PRICING The District shall be given the benefit of any lower prices which may, for comparable quantity and delivery, be given by the Contractor to any other school district, state, county, municipal or local government agency for the products listed herein.
4. PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION a. Packaging: Items shall be packaged sufficiently to protect them from damage during transit. Items which are repacked and delivered in a quantity less than a full case shall be clearly marked as such and if being delivered on a pallet shall be stacked at the top of the delivery.
b. Packing Slip: Shall clearly show the District Purchase order number, District SKU number, quantity delivered, and description.
c. If Not Properly Packaged: deliveries may be rejected, and all costs (return and re- delivery) shall be at the Contractor’s expense
Section II.C – General Specifications 28 IFB No. 2000002197 5. PRODUCT SUBSTITUION/MANUFACTURER’S BRAND CHANGE This contract does NOT allow for product substitutions without written authorization by an Authorized District Representative.
Only the manufacturer’s brand listed in the Rate Schedule Section will be accepted during the contract period, under this contract agreement. If, during the course of the Contract, there is a manufacturer’s brand change, the Contractor/Manufacturer representative shall not automatically substitute product. The Contractor shall notify the District if the listed brand can no longer be provided. The Contractor shall not substitute any product without prior written authorization from the District’s authorized representative
Contractor shall submit specifications, brochures and/or a sample (upon request) for approval prior to any future shipment.
If the new brand is accepted, all other terms, conditions and prices shall remain in effect. No substitutions shall be made without prior written permission by the District.
6. FAILURE OF CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THE SERVICE/PRODUCTS AS AGREED If, in the opinion of the District, the Contractor, at any time during the period of the Contract, fails to properly and satisfactorily perform the service/provide the product(s) called for in the Contract, or otherwise fails or neglects to comply with the terms of the Contract, the District may make arrangements elsewhere for the material/service, or any part thereof, and hold the Contractor responsible for re-procurement costs incurred by the District.
It is specifically provided and agreed that time shall be of the essence with regard to the Contract performance requirement. Unacceptable performance may include but not be limited to: late/non deliveries, partial deliveries, delivery of wrong material or products not meeting specification, giving wrong prices, invoicing problems, consistent negative feedback on survey responses, etc.
7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES – N/A The liquidated damages clause is not applicable to this IFB.
8. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Contractor shall, at his, her, or its sole cost and expense, maintain in full force and effect, during the term of this Agreement, the following insurance coverage from a California licensed and/or admitted insurer with an A minus (A-), VII, or better rating from A.M. Best, to cover any claims, damages, liabilities, costs and expenses (including legal counsel fees) arising out of or in connection with Contractor's fulfillment of any of its obligations under this Agreement or either party's use of the Work or any component or part thereof:
Section II.C – General Specifications 29 IFB No. 2000002197 8. INSRUANCE REQUIREMENTS – continued a. Commercial General Liability (CGL)
Includes both bodily injury and property damage. $1,000,000 per occurrence $ 100,000 fire damage $ 5,000 medical expenses $1,000,000 personal and advertisement injury $3,000,000 general aggregate $3,000,000 products/completed operation aggregate
b. Commercial (Business) Automobile Liability (CA or BA)
Business Auto Liability Insurance for owned, scheduled, non-owned or hired automobiles with a combined single limit of no less than $1,000,000 per occurrence. Workers’ Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance in a form and amount covering Contractor’s full liability under the California Workers’ Compensation Insurance and Safety Act and in accordance with applicable state and federal laws
c. Technology errors and omissions $1,000,000 occurrence/aggregate.
d. Workers’ Compensation (WC)
Part A – Statutory limits Part B Employers Liability -- $1,000,000/$1,000,000/$1,000,000
Exemption: Sole proprietors with no employees are exempt from providing WC Coverage. Contractors meeting this exemption requirement must sign a District Workers’ Compensation Waiver Statement.
e. Any deductibles or Self-Insured Retentions (SIR) shall be declared in writing, and all deductibles and retentions above $100,000 require District approval.
f. Contractor, upon execution of this contract and periodically thereafter upon request, shall furnish the District with certificates of insurance evidencing such coverage. The certificate of insurance shall include a ten (10) day non-renewal/cancellation notice provision. The Commercial General and Automobile Liability policies referred to in clauses A and B above shall name the District and the Board of Education as additional insured. Premiums on all insurance policies shall be paid by Contractor and shall be deemed included in Contractor’s obligations under this contract at no additional charge.
9. SAFETY Contractor’s representatives operating vehicles on District property shall use extreme caution at all times - maximum speed is 5 M.P.H.
Section II.C – General Specifications 30 IFB No. 2000002197 10. ASSIGNMENT/FINANCING The Contractor shall not assign or transfer by operation of law or otherwise any or all of its rights, including the right to receive payment, burdens, duties, or obligations without the prior written consent of the District and the surety on the Contract bonds (if applicable). The District’s standard assignment form shall be used for any assignment requested by the Contractor and granted by the District.
The District will not sign any documents in connection with assignments or financing other than the District’s standard form for “Assignment of Contract Money” or “Assignment of Rights and Delegation of Duties on Contract” which is available from the District’s Procurement Services Center office located at: 8525 Rex Road, Pico Rivera, CA 90660.
11. MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY Contractor warrants that goods and services furnished hereunder will conform to the requirements of this contract (including all descriptions, specifications, and drawings made a part hereof), and such goods will be merchantable, fit for their intended purposes, free from all defects in materials and workmanship and, to the extent not manufactured pursuant to detailed designs furnished by the District, free from defects in design. The District’s approval of designs or specifications furnished by Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations under this warranty.
All warranties, including special warranties specified elsewhere herein, shall insure to the District, its successors, assigns, customer agencies, and users of the goods or services.
12. AUTHORIZED DEALER The contractor if other than the manufacturer, shall be an authorized dealer and must provide written authorization/verification with the bid.
13. PRICING a. The District shall, for purposes of issuing purchase orders, apply the “Percentage Rate of Discount Off” (indicated in the Rate Schedule Section), the manufacturer’s latest “Price List”. (See below: Manufacturer’s Price Listing)
b. The District shall issue purchase orders based upon current pricing. Should the cost of the items ordered be reduced between the time of purchase order issuance and the Contractor’s ordering, the District shall be entitled to the lower cost.
g. Any price reductions, special offerings, sales or promotions occurring during the term of the contract, shall be passed on to the District as soon as they are announced by the Manufacturer and/or Contractor and shall be considered part of the contract. During the term of the contract, any reduction in cost of items to the District shall be automatically reflected in the next electronic date file update following the price reduction. The District reserves the right to audit as necessary to ensure that any and all reductions in item costs to the District are reflected in the pricing set for the District.
h. The District shall request the Contractor to provide/confirm product availability and the Districts’ net cost through a system of individualized quotations. Either the Contract Administration Branch staff or the end user shall forward requests to the Contractor for verification of product and pricing. All quotations returned must identify the products/services to be provided by the manufacturer’s product number. Products
Section II.C – General Specifications 31 IFB No. 2000002197 identified solely by the Contractor’s internal numbering system will not be accepted. Note: requests for quotation shall not be construed as an “order” from the District. Only upon receipt of the District’s official purchase order shall any product/service be provided. Any shipment without such authorization/purchase order shall be made at the sole risk of the Contractor.
NOTE: The District maintains numerous contracts. It is very difficult to identify bid/contracts to which a specific catalog/price lists applies to if it is not identified when submitted.
14. MANUFACTURER’S PRICE LISTING a. HARD AND/OR ELECTRONIC COPY Contractor shall provide (at no charge to the District) two (2) copies (printed and/or electronic version) of the manufacturer’s current published price list(s) indicating available product and price listing upon award of contract and with any subsequent price list change (monthly at minimum). The Contractor is responsible for contacting the manufacturer to assure availability of price list(s). Items to be invoiced are to be based on listed prices effective on ordering (purchase order) date. Any change in prices and/or price list(s) shall not be effective until revised price list(s) are received by Procurement. Revised price listing and/or manufacturer’s catalogs should include:
COVER LETTER: To indicate Contractor’s name, contact person, phone number, number of copies, and Bid and Contract number.
EACH PRICE LIST: Label or stamp Contractor’s name, address and phone number. Write on cover in bold figures, “Contract Percentages Off Discount”.
Send two (2) copies to: Los Angeles Unified School District Contract Administration Branch 8525 Rex Road Pico Rivera, CA 90660 Attn: Leonardo de Leon
b. WEBSITE PRICE LISTING The Contractor shall also maintain the current pricing on a Web site for access by District personnel. The price listing should include at the minimum, both the “Original Manufacturer’s Pricing” and the “District’s Actual Net Discounted Cost”. The manufacturer’s price list, as well the District’s net discounted cost, shall be updated immediately upon any change made by the manufacturer.
It is specifically understood that the District’s General Terms and Conditions shall supersede any general terms and/or conditions which may be contained in the manufacturer’s price list submitted as a part of this contract by the Contractor.
15. PERMITS AND LICENSES All work shall comply with the needs of the District. The Contractor and all of their operators shall secure and maintain in force such licenses as are required by city, county and state laws, ordinances, and regulations for this type of work. All operations and materials shall be in accordance with the laws prescribed for this purpose.
Section II.C – General Specifications 32 IFB No. 2000002197 16. REJECTION OF MERCHANDISE All products or services purchased under the contract are subject to approval by the District. Any product rejected because of nonconformity to the terms and specifications of this contract/individual purchase order will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall assume all shipping costs for returned merchandise and/or reshipped merchandise when provided.
17. NEW PRODCUT/PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Product purchased under the terms of this contract shall be manufactured, packaged, and warranted by the indicated manufacturer. This contract shall cover the complete line of all indicated Manufacturer’s products. All items delivered/sold to the District shall be new product and/or must be current production models. No pioneering or discontinued models shall be supplied unless otherwise approved by the District.
The Contractor shall guarantee that all products provided to the District are new, are the latest and most improved model of current production and are of first quality as to workmanship and materials used in said products. All modifications shall be made at the factory. A new product is defined as a product that is made up of unused and genuine original parts. The District recognizes that some manufacturers’ use a combination of new and reconditioned parts which have exactly the same guarantee of “new” parts.
18. TECHNOLOGY CLAUSE New technology that meets the specifications as set forth but not available at the time of award or is so new as to provide the District a benefit to including a new category of this type of equipment under this contract may be added with the following stipulations:
As new models are introduced in the product line, it is understood that the improved or enhanced products may supersede the existing product in both price and performance and yet be essentially similar. This solicitation seeks to address the rapid advances in technology by allowing functionally similar or identical model that may be introduced in the future, during the term of the contract, to be included in the general umbrella of compatible products and are thus specifically included in this solicitation and shall be discounted at the current contract rates set forth.
19. PERFORMANCE REVIEW A performance review will be conducted by the District to ensure services are performed satisfactorily by the Contractor. Contractor will be notified by the District of their performance. If the review is unsatisfactory, the Contractor will be required to submit a corrective action plan to address the deficiencies. If the performance is not improved, the contract will not be renewed and the option years will not be exercised.
20. NON-SPECIFICALLY PRICED ITEMS (NSP) The District reserves the right to purchase from the Contractor items/products not listed specifically in this bid but listed in the submitted Manufacturer’s Price Book. Such items shall be made available and given discounts. Pricing shall be provided on an “individualized quotation basis” per project and shall not exceed the prevailing State competitive bid limit at the time of issuance of purchase order. The offered discount shall not affect the basis of award. State the percentage discount for NSP items on the Rate Schedule.
Section II.C – General Specifications 33 IFB No. 2000002197 21. FINGERPRINTING Contractor shall comply and shall require its subcontractors (if any) to comply with the requirements of California Education Code Sections 45125.1 and 45125.2, at no additional cost to District. These requirements include, but are not limited to the following:
A. Any employee or agent of Contractor, and any employee or agent of Contractor’s subcontractors, who may have any contact with pupils must submit his or her fingerprints to the California Department of Justice (“DOJ”) in a manner authorized by the DOJ to determine whether the employee or agent has been arrested or convicted of any crime. Contractor will be responsible for any expenses arising from its compliance with this Section, including, but not limited to, the payment of any fee required for fingerprinting or the processing thereof.
B. Contractor shall not permit an employee or other person requiring fingerprinting to come in contact with pupils until the DOJ has ascertained that the person has not been convicted of a felony as defined in Education Code Section 45122.1. Upon Contractor’s receipt of such clearance from DOJ, Contractor shall certify in writing to District that none of Contractor, its subcontractors and any of their employees or agents who are required by District to submit their fingerprints to the DOJ and who may come in contact with pupils have not been convicted of a felony as defined in Section 45122.1.
C. Alternatively, District may require Contractor to provide continual supervision and monitoring of all employees and agents of Contractor and Contractor’s subcontractors by an employee of Contractor whom the DOJ has ascertained has not been convicted of a violent or serious felony, as defined by California Penal Code Sections 667.5 and 1192.7. If District elects to require this supervision, Contractor shall supply the supervision at no additional cost to District.
D. Contractor shall remove immediately from District property any employee or agent (including employees or agents of its subcontractors) who has been arrested or convicted of any serious or violent felony, as defined by California Penal Code Sections 667.5 and 1192.7.
NOTE: Compliance to this requirement is only necessary if the Contractor and/or their subcontractors will be required to perform any type of services on District school property.
22. AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) Contractor warrants that it complies with California and federal disabilities laws and regulations. (Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990,42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq). Contractor hereby warrants the products or services it will provide under this Contract comply with the accessibility requirements of Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 U.S.C. 794d), and its implementing regulations set forth at Title 36, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1194. Contractor agrees to promptly respond to and resolve any complaint regarding accessibility of its products or services. Contractor further agrees to indemnify and hold harmless District from any claims arising out of Contractor’s failure to comply with the aforesaid requirements. Failure to comply with these requirements shall constitute a material breach of this Contract.
Section II.C – General Specifications 34 IFB No. 2000002197 D. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ATTACHMENT A: SCOPE OF CONTRACT OVERVIEW
a. Any requested installation, configuration or provisioning of equipment shall be compliant with the requirements as detailed in the following attachments (NOTE: Attachment A “Scope of Contract Overview” will take precedence over Attachments B & C.):
1. Attachment A—Scope of Contract Overview (this section)
2. Attachment B—27 1017 Wireless Local Area Network (LAN)
3. Attachment C – 27 1018 Local Area Network (LAN) Systems
4. Attachment D – 27 3100 Converged IP Telecommunications Systems
5. Attachment E – 27 5117 Converged IP Public Address and Intercommunication
6. Attachment F – 27 1015 Premises Wiring New Installation
7. Attachment G – 28 1000 Access Control System (ACS)
8. Attachment H – 28 1600 Intrusion Detection Systems (IDS)
9. Attachment I – 28 2300 Video Surveillance Systems (VSS)
10. Attachment J – 28 4100 Integrated Security Management System (ISMS)
11. Attachment K – Data Center Hardware and Software
12. Rate Schedules for (Network and Datacenter Equipment Manufacturers and Manufacturer-Partner Products such as, APC, Tripp Lite, NVT Phybridge, Informacast)
a) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (Actifio/Google)
b) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (Dell EMC)
c) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (HPE)
d) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (Infinidat)
e) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (Qnap)
f) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (Varonis)
g) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (VMWare)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 35 IFB No. 2000002197 h) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (Alcatel-Lucent)
i) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (Aruba – HP)
j) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (Cisco)
k) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (CradlePoint)
l) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (InfoBlox)
m) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (Infosim)
n) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (Netscout-Fluke)
o) Section III – Rate Schedule Network (Palo Alto)
p) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (Red Hat)
q) Section III – Rate Schedule Data Center (F5)
13. Rate Schedules for (Public Address Equipment Manufacturers and Partner Products)
a. Section III – Rate Schedule PA-IC Systems (AtlasED)
b. Section III – Rate Schedule PA-IC Systems (Bogen)
c. Section III – Rate Schedule PA-IC Systems (Rauland)
d. Section III – Rate Schedule PA-IC Systems (Valcom)
e. Section III – Rate Schedule PA-IC Systems (Zenitel)
14. Rate Schedules for (Integrated Electronic Security Systems and Partner Products)
a. Section III – Rate Schedule ACS (AiPhone)
b. Section III – Rate Schedule ACS (2N)
c. Section III – Rate Schedule ACS (AMAG)
d. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Axis)
e. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Bolide)
f. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Hikvision – New Equipment)
g. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Hikvision – Refurbished Equipment)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 36 IFB No. 2000002197 h. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Louroe – New Equipment)
i. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Louroe – Refurbished Equipment)
j. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Panasonic New Equipent)
k. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Panasonic Refurbished Equipment)
l. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Pelco – New Equipment)
m. Section III – Rate Schedule CCTV (Pelco – Refurbished Equipment)
n. Section III – Rate Schedule IDS (DMP)
o. Section III – Rate Schedule IDS (DSC – New Equipment)
p. Section III – Rate Schedule IDS (DSC – Refurbished Equipment)
q. Section III – Rate Schedule IDS (NAPCO New Equipment)
r. Section III – Rate Schedule IDS (NAPCO Refurbished Equipment)
s. Section III – Rate Schedule IDS (Takex – New Equipment)
t. Section III – Rate Schedule IDS (TaKex – Refurbished Equipment)
u. Section III – Rate Schedule IESS (Bosch)
v. Section III – Rate Schedule IESS (Genetec)
w. Section III – Rate Schedule IESS (General Equipment)
15. Rate Schedules (Telecommunication Equipment Manufacturers and Partner Products)
a. Section III – Rate Schedule Telecom (Avaya – New Equipment)
b. Section III – Rate Schedule Telecom (Avaya – Refurbished Equipment)
b. Optional Services (as needed/as requested):
1. Equipment preparation, integration, testing and certification. a. At the vendor’s facilities, all equipment provided shall be assembled, tested and certified as fully operational prior to delivery and/or installation.
b. All chassis and modules shall be fully assembled and ready to install in the District facilities.
2. Labor Rate for Network and Data Center also include:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 37 IFB No. 2000002197
a. Configuration and/or performance tuning
b. Equipment replacement, integration, testing and certification
c. Engineering Services including but not limited to site survey and solution engineering
d. On-site equipment replacement (excluding public works and related construction)
e. Documentation as described in this Statement of Work and its Attachments
f. Other related general/professional services as mutually agreed upon
3. Labor Rate for PA-IC Systems
a. Configuration and/or performance tuning
b. Equipment replacement, integration, testing, and certification
c. On-site equipment replacement (excluding public works and related construction)
d. Documentation as described in this Statement of Work and its Attachments)
e. Engineering Services may include but not limited to solution engineering
f. Other related general/professional services as mutually agreed upon.
4. Labor Rate for Integrated Electronic Security Systems (IESS) equipment)
a. Access Control System
b. Intrusion Alarm System
c. Video Surveillance Systems (also known as CCTV)
d. Services for IESS may include but are not limited to:
1. Configuration and/or performance tuning
2. Equipment replacement, integration, testing and certification
3. On-site equipment replacement (excluding public works and related construction)
4. Documentation as described in this Statement of Work and its Attachments
5. Engineering Services may include but are not limited to solution engineering
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 38 IFB No. 2000002197
e. Other related general/professional services as mutually agreed upon
5. Labor Rate for Telecommunication equipment
a. Configuration and/or performance tuning
b. Equipment replacement, integration, testing and certification
c. On-site equipment replacement (excluding public works and related construction)
d. Documentation as described in this Statement of Work and its Attachments.
e. Engineering Services may include but are not limited to solution engineering
f. Advanced/Professional Services
g. Other related general/professional services as mutually agreed upon
c. District Asset Management Process
1. Serial Numbers; Asset Tags and Registers
a. Upon delivery of any serialized Equipment, Contractor shall provide a complete asset register of serialized Equipment in accordance with District provided format and instructions.
b. The Contractor will tag each active hardware component using District provided asset tags and include the asset tag numbers using the required asset register format. Upon completion of the contract, all unused asset tags are to be returned to the District.
c. The Contractor will validate the accuracy of the asset register at the time of delivery.
d. The Contractor shall also provide updated serial numbers and asset tag numbers resulting from warranty repairs following the process and format provided by the District.
REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES
a. Compliance: The District shall determine equipment technical specification compliance at time of purchase.
b. Warranty: Warranties shall be as described in the Specifications.
c. Services required:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 39 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Delivery: All Equipment and Materials purchased by the District shall be inventoried, assembled, tested and certified as complete and in full compliance with all District requirements by the Contractor on their premises prior to Delivery, or Job Start. Unless otherwise notified by the District, no Delivery or Job Start shall proceed until all items ordered are in place at the Contractors’ facilities. At no time shall the job site (School or Office) be contacted or visited without the express permission of the District, or other designated ITD Branch offices.
a) Purchase of Equipment and/or Materials with or without “Optional” Services:
(1) Purchase of equipment and/or materials shall proceed as follow:
(a) Quote shall be provided within two (2) working days
(b) Goods shall be delivered within (5) working days of receipt of equipment from manufacturers unless otherwise instructed by the District in writing
(c) Maximum of five (5) additional working days shall be allowed if configuration services are required
(d) Contractor shall notify the District two (2) business days before order is delivered
(e) Contractor shall provide weekly status reports in Microsoft Excel format that tracks the progress of the orders with the following information:
(i) Site Name
(ii) LAUSD P.O.
(iii) Total P.O. amount
(iv) Date P.O. received
(v) Anticipated delivery date
(vi) Actual delivery date
(2) Partial or incomplete deliveries of Equipment, Materials or services are not permitted unless authorized in writing by the District.
(3) Drop shipments will not be accepted unless previously authorized by the District.
(a) All Deliveries must be checked in by the District. Provide written inventories at time of Delivery. This requirement applies to all modules and subassemblies where applicable. Deliveries at new school sites may require the wearing of a hard hat, safety vest, and safety shoes.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 40 IFB No. 2000002197
(4) The District reserves the right to exercise any options allowed within the Contract if Delivery conditions are not met.
2. Configuration Management: When required, the Vendor shall configure all provided equipment and document those configurations following LAUSD’s required format, which will be provided to the winning bidder(s). Configuration services will be provided as specified by the District. If the District elects not to include installation as a part of the services to be provided, configuration services shall commence at a time determined by the District, which will issue a formal written Notice to Proceed for these services.
a. Configuration services may include:
1. Delivery and inventory of new network equipment using District format as shown below:
School Page 1 of X Date of Delivery: Name
Item Serial Description Manufacturer. QTY Model Number Missing OK
a. Inventories shall be logically organized by major component, including all modules associated with that component listed after.
b. All chassis, modules software, firmware, and other items shall be itemized on a line by line basis.
c. All deliveries shall be accompanied by a signature sheet which includes the following information:
(i) Vendor Name and Address
(ii) School Name and Address
(iii) District Purchase Order Number
(iv) Contract Number
(v) Name, signature and date lines for the following personnel:
• Company Representative
• ITD Representative
• District Owner Authorized Representative (OAR)
• General Contractor Section II.D –Technical Specifications 41 IFB No. 2000002197
2. Upgrade all new Network Equipment to meet LAUSD’s current and standardized, licensed firmware revision.
3. Implementation of District provided Internet Protocol (IP) address network assignments.
4. Creation of trunking services between all existing equipment and newly installed equipment.
5. Example of configuration requirements may include but are not limited to:
a) Assign IP address to each device e.g., router, switch, wireless controller; District to provide IP addressing space for each site
b) Routing
c) Multiple VLANs on all network equipment using District provided information
d) Gateway
e) SNMP read only and read/write community strings
(1) Query restrictions (2) Trap recipient
f) Passwords
g) Proper assignment of switch ports to the correct VLANs
h) Test DHCP from all applicable VLANs
i) Host name on all networking equipment
j) Configure existing equipment and newly installed equipment to current District standards.
d. Engineering and Configuration services specific to Optional “as needed/as requested” Services for Network Equipment may include, but are not limited to:
1. LAN services may include:
a. Repair/replace failure LAN equipment (e.g., BBS, ISM, ESM, CESM, and related cabling components) b. Configuration of:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 42 IFB No. 2000002197 i. IP address, VLAN, SNMP, and other configuration parameters District will provide required information at the time of project execution.
ii. Authentication protocol as instructed by the District.
c. LAN Site Survey, Design and As-Built procedures and documentation
i. Submittals of two (2) electronic copies of proposed installation and As-Built drawings shall be provided in Adobe (.pdf) and/or AutoCAD (.dwf) formats in accordance with Specification, or as directed by the District.
2. WLAN services may include:
a. Repair/replace failure equipment (e.g., controllers and AP)
b. Configuration of controller and/or AP
c. WLAN Site Survey, Design and As-Built procedures and documentation
i. Submittals of two (2) electronic copies of proposed installation and As-Built drawing shall be provided in Adobe (.pdf) and/or AutoCAD (.dwf) formats in accordance with Specification, or as directed by the District.
3. IP Convergence services may include:
a. Repair/replace failure equipment (e.g., phones, gateways, central VoIP processing, voicemail
b. Configuration of converged telecommunications and PA systems
c. Site Survey, Design and As-Built procedure and documentation.
i. Submittals of two (2) electronic copies of proposed installation and As-Built drawings shall be provided in Adobe (.pdf) and/or AutoCAD (.dwf) formats in accordance with Specification, or as directed by the District.
4. Specialized equipment services may include:
a. Advanced services (e.g., design of complex datacenter systems)
b. Configuration of datacenter equipment (e.g., advanced IP networking, fiber channel)
c. Design and As-Built procedures and documentation
i. Submittals of two (2) electronic copies of proposed installation and As-Built drawings shall be provided in Adobe (.pdf) and/or AutoCad (.dwf) formats in accordance with Specification, or as directed by the District.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 43 IFB No. 2000002197
5. IESS services may include:
a. Repair/replace failure equipment (e.g., ACS, IDS, CCTV)
b. Configuration of IESS equipment:
c. IESS Site Survey for deployment, Design and As-Built procedures and documentation
i. Submittals of two (2) electronic copies of proposed installation and As-Built drawings shall be provided in Adobe (.pdf) and/or AutoCad (.dwf) formats in accordance with Specification, or as directed by the District
6. Telecommunication services may include:
a. Repair/replace failure equipment (e.g., PBX and sub-components)
b. Configuration of Telecommunication equipment:
c. Telecommunication Site Survey for deployment, Design and As-Built procedures and documentation
i. Submittals of two (2) electronic copies of proposed installation and As-Built drawings shall be provided in Adobe (.pdf) and/or AutoCad (.dwf) formats in accordance with Specification, or as directed by the District
SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT (SLA)
SLA is applicable for the following categories: ACS IESS a. The work hours at all sites will be Monday through Friday, 6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Contractor may be required to work on weekends and/or holidays to mitigate safety hazards, and to accommodate school schedules. Work schedule shall be coordinated with the Task order Initiator. b. Response Time for Service: During Regular Hours, here identified as 6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., the Contractor shall arrive at the property within one (1) business day for regular service calls. In case of emergency, Contractor agrees to arrive within 4 business hours.
SUBMITTALS a. Pricing 1. For all associated components, the Bidder shall, in addition to the percentage discount required in the Rate Schedule, submit a current Manufacturers Product Catalog and Price list under separate cover as part of the Bid response.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 44 IFB No. 2000002197 a) This price list shall include all equipment, software, firmware and components currently available from that Manufacturer. Bids not including the price book may be deemed “non-responsive.”
b) Future price books must be dated after bid opening date. Manufacturer may submit Catalog and Price list collectively, however, they must clearly identify each Bidder represented.
c) Provide prices for non-manufacturer specific products related to LAN/WLAN systems (e.g. cabling related components such as patch cables, connectors, patch panels, etc.) as identified in the Rate Schedules. Prices in the Rate Schedules are sample. District may request equivalent components that are not listed on the Rate Schedules (e.g, various lengths and types of patch cables). These types of requests will be covered as “Non-specifically Priced (NSP) items.
2. Bidder shall use the “Section III – Rate Schedule” to complete the discount percentages indicated for each line item
3. Percentage discount shall apply to each line item in the Rate Schedule.
4. Rate Schedule shall be submitted as Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format. Bidder shall provide percentage discounts off of the Manufacturers’ Suggested Retail Pricing (MSRP).
5. Calculations in the Rate Schedules are examples. It is Bidder(s)’ responsibility to ensure all entries and calculations are accurate. b. Qualification of Contractor and Personnel
1. Submit a list of at least three former clients, including Client business contact names and telephone numbers that the vendor has provided materials and services valued at one million dollars or more within the past three years. Submit the information as indicated in the Bidder’s Questionnaire
2. Submit resumes and certifications of stall qualified to perform the Optional services as listed in this attachment.
3. Submit a copy of a letter from the manufacturer of submitted equipment certifying that the Vendor is an authorized distributor and maintenance provider of the submitted manufacturer’s equipment.
4. Vendor shall have a service organization capable of responding to warranty service requests within 24 hours of receipt of written notification and resolution within 1 day for MDF equipment and 3 days for equipment located either in the classroom, IDF or LDF
a) Vendor shall include a letter signed by a corporate officer, partner, or owner of the contracting company describing the service capability of the company and stating the company’s commitment to maintain that service capability through the warranty period.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 45 IFB No. 2000002197
b) Vendor shall have a service organization, with certified stall, that is qualified to install, configure, and service products that are typically purchased by educational entities on the most current manufacturer’s product catalog
5. Submit copies of certifications for all Optional installation and configuration proposed to perform the Work under this agreement. Certifications and background shall include, at a minimum:
a) Manufacturer professional training level certification or equivalent for the proposed staff, e.g., Cisco CCNP, Aruba ACSP, Rauland and Valcom certified VARs and installers.
b) The Contractor shall maintain valid certifications for the duration of the contract and any renewals thereof if such renewals are exercised as an option by the Los Angeles Unified School District. These certifications shall be presented at the District’s request during the duration of the contract.
NOTE: PREVAILING WAGE MAY APPLY, PELASE REFER TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 46 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT B—27 1017 WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
SECTION 27 1017
WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLAN) OWNER’S INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD) IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION TO THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM ITD.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This specification describes the equipment, installation, integration, configuration, testing, training, documentation, standards, and acceptance criteria, necessary for acquiring and implementing IEEE controller-based 802.11n/ac Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) systems at the Los Angeles Unified School OWNER (LAUSD). B. The WLAN system and associated components shall consist of Wi-Fi Alliance compliant IEEE 802.11n/ac and Wi-Fi Alliance compliant wireless Access Points, Bridges, Controllers, and client adapters. The controller and access point combination shall be Wi-Fi Alliance certified under the category of “Enterprise Access Point, Switch/Controller or Router” and possess the associated Interoperability Certificate and Certification ID.” Certification for operation using the 400 ns short guard interval is not required. The WLAN system shall also include associated radios, antennas, cables, enclosures, administration software, and related materials.
1.02 REFERENCES A. Complete installation shall meet or exceed the latest edition of following standards: 1. EIA/TIA-568C: Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard and all current addenda 2. EIA/TIA-569A: Commercial building standard for telecommunications pathways and spaces 3. EIA/TIA-606A: Administration standard for telecommunications infrastructure of commercial buildings 4. EIA/TIA-607: Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications 5. California Building Code (CBC) 6. California Electrical Code (CEC) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA-70
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 47 IFB No. 2000002197 8. National and State Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements. 9. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 (Ethernet), 802.3u (100Base-TX/FX), 802.3z (Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber), 802.3ab (Gigabit Ethernet over 4 pair category 5 or higher), 802.3ae (10GbE), 802.3be (40 and 100GbE) 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol, 802.11 (Wireless LAN) including 802.11n-2009 (part 11 amendment 5), 802.11ac, 802.11af (PoE), 802.11at (PoE+). 802.1d (spanning tree protocol), 802.1p (QOS), 802.1q (VLAN tagging), 802.1x (Port Based Network Access Control), RFC 2236/5186 (IGMP v2/v3), RFC 3973/4602 (PIM-DM/SM), RFC 2365 (Administratively Scoped IP Multicast) 10. ANSI, ASTM, UL, NEMA, IEEE and FCC standards as applicable 11. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act 12. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition 13. BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual, current edition
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. following submittals in accordance with Division 01: 1. Materials list: Submit a complete material list for the materials and products of this section. 2. Product Data: Include Product Data sheets and/or catalog cut sheets for all items to be installed. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data. Items shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is indicated, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. Product Data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the ARCHITECT to review the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination. 3. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Product Data list submission, copies of manufacturer certificates that the CONTRACTOR is an authorized distributor of the submitted manufacturer’s products; and each member of the installation crew has been trained and certified in the installation of those products. CONTRACTOR shall submit proof that his/her company has a service organization capable of responding within 24 hours of receipt of written notification and resolution within 1 day. B. Sample Materials: CONTRACTOR shall provide samples of material and equipment as required by the ARCHITECT. If samples are requested, they shall be submitted within 10 days from the date of request. C. Site Survey Report: Prior to the WLAN installation, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a WLAN Site Survey Report to the OWNER ITD PMO for review and acceptance. At a minimum, the report shall include the following information: 1. WLAN system architecture and design
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 48 IFB No. 2000002197 2. RF and interference areas for the WLAN system including signal strengths, antenna types and locations for survey, AP and Bridge model used for survey, types and strength of interference identified. 3. Configuration settings for Access Points and Controllers 4. Name and location of Access Points, Bridges, and Controllers 5. Access Point infrastructure models (i.e., Autonomous AP, Controller-based AP) 6. Antenna types to be used per Access Point 7. Mounting instructions for Access Points, Bridges and antennas 8. Access Point, Bridge, and wireless client channel selections 9. Power provisioning requirements for the Access Points and Bridges 10. Power output settings per Access Point 11. Connectors and cables to be used 12. Digital pictures of locations for all Access Points, Bridges, Controllers and antennas 13. Submit mapping of signal strength levels in all areas of interest on site. D. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings, providing a complete set of detailed and scaled indication of Access Points, Bridges and antennas with dimensions, WLAN topology maps, location designations, and instrument wiring diagrams. Indicate required interfaces with equipment provided in other sections. At the minimum, Shop Drawings shall be provide engineering documentation including: 1. Summary and diagrams of logical and physical wireless design, including: a) A comprehensive description of the logical and physical wireless design and derivation of the design. b) Detailed process used to perform the actual site survey for both indoor and outdoor applications. This process shall include all survey tools, methodologies utilized, and the assumptions made to accommodate the design requirements. c) Access Point, Bridge and antenna mounting equipment and diagrams. d) Any additional diagrams and information on logical and physical wireless design that the CONTRACTOR feels is necessary to provide a complete solution. e) A set of as-built documents showing the completed installation with all of the requirements as detailed in the WLAN site survey. f) WLAN Site Survey: when Notice to Proceed has been given, CONTRACTOR shall submit a site survey (SS) plan and subsequent design for the deployment of WLAN technology for each site. Site Survey and design drawings shall, at a minimum, identify and include the following: Section II.D –Technical Specifications 49 IFB No. 2000002197 (1) Cell Planning (2) Cell search threshold (3) Sources of RF interference, if any are present. g) All Access Points and Bridges currently in operation, both on-site and other, such as neighboring residences, channel selection and device locations using a strategy to minimize interference with neighboring devices. Locate and identify all WLAN devices currently in operation on the designated site. (1) AP density (2) AP, Bridge, and Controller placement (3) Antenna selection, locations and mounting methodology (4) AP, Bridge, and Controller locations and mounting methodology h) Paper copies shall show site building backgrounds, device locations, pathways, wired LAN connection points and WLAN site coverage. i) CONTRACTOR shall provide two-dimensional drawings indicating the location of all Access Points, Bridges, and Controllers. Drawings shall be prepared in latest version of AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio with 3 electronic copies submitted along with full sized Drawings. j) Riser diagram indicating all connections in a manner following the floor plan layout. k) Cabling diagram indicating the CONTRACTOR’s designed routing and number of cables in specific raceways or conduits, from the main data sources connecting to other sub-panels, modules, or devices. E. Preliminary Plans: Submit documentation including a preliminary installation schedule, architecture and design plan, and call flow patterns to OWNER for review prior to the start of work. Installation Work shall not commence before installation CONTRACTOR receives OWNER approval of design and architecture. F. CONTRACTOR shall provide a migration and integration plan that details the CONTRACTOR’s implementation strategy to complete the WLAN system. This plan shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER. G. Inventory of installed systems shall be documented in the OWNER provided Asset Management Excel Workbook as required by Contract Documents. H. Certified Statements: CONTRACTOR shall provide the following certification statements: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide shop drawings, in the same size as the Record Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be prepared in latest version of AutoCAD format with 3 electronic copies submitted along with full sized Shop Drawings.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 50 IFB No. 2000002197 2. CONTRACTOR shall provide a letter from the Manufacturer assuring the availability of spare parts common to proposed system for a period no less than 5 years on all components. 3. Certification of compliance that California Health and Safety Code requirements for products containing substances identified in the California Lighting Efficiency and Toxics Reduction Act shall not exceed the following allowed content in parts per million (ppm): a. Lead content > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. b. Mercury Content > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. c. Cadmium Content > 0.01% or 100 ppm. d. Hexavalent Chromium > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. e. Polybrominated Biphenyls > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. f. Polybrominated Biphenyls Ether > 0.1% or 1000 ppm.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Equipment substitutions must be pre-approved by OWNER prior to bid date. CONTRACTOR must demonstrate operation of equipment and compliance with functions and features specified herein. Additionally, CONTRACTOR must demonstrate interoperability of design and systems with existing systems. Equipment substitutions that were not pre-approved prior to bid date shall be rejected. B. When deviating or substituting equipment, the following information shall be submitted: 1. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER. 2. OWNER’S approval shall be obtained for any equipment or materials substitutions. Proposed substitutions requests shall provide proof of compliance with OWNER’S criteria described in this specifications. 3. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall conform to CCR, Title 24 Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulation and National Electrical Code, latest edition. B. Only a qualified CONTRACTOR holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work, shall do the work. C. The CONTRACTOR shall use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are manufacturer certified, thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary crafts, and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work. D. Work shall be performed by CONTRACTOR that has completed at least 5 school systems of equal scope to system described herein and shall have been engaged in business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least 5 years.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 51 IFB No. 2000002197 CONTRACTOR shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to equipment. E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide technicians and tools required to participate in OWNER’s Quality Assurance Testing as detailed in Attachment “A” of this specification. 1. Items on check list of Attachment “A” shall be examined as a minimum at the Public Address Head End, terminal cabinets, ground vaults and classrooms. Should the examination show deficiencies related to items in the checklist, OWNER’s acceptance testing shall be discontinued until corrections have been made. When the CONTRACTOR has completed the corrections, a subsequent Quality Assurance test shall be initiated. This procedure is in addition to the system functionality testing required in section 3.03 below. F. Provide equipment mounting structural engineering details in compliance with the California Code of Regulations seismic requirements.
1.06 WARRANTY A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of or failure to examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. B. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. C. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than five (5) years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. D. CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with all manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to the OWNER ITD Project Management Office. E. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that a wireless LAN system, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate, or repeated failure rate, the
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 52 IFB No. 2000002197 CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems (of the same model) purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a Project Manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be less than or equal to 10% in any 12-month period during the original warranty term. 2. If at any time, during the life of the products , the failure rate of the wireless LAN systems or components exceeds 15%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3. CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition. 4. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days of written notification from the OWNER. 5. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service. F. The warranty shall cover the complete wireless LAN system including all associated components, software, fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. G. The warranty shall include coverage 8 hours per day, 5 days per week with next business day parts for all other covered components and chassis. H. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). I. All equipment shall have the option for OWNER to extend the warranty beyond the initial coverage period. J. In the event any supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing, and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. K. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 53 IFB No. 2000002197 1.07 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. The access points shall support both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz radios. The 2.4 GHz radio shall be set to support legacy “802.11g” and “802.11n/ac” clients while the 5 GHz radio is set to support “802.11n/ac” clients only. B. Installation shall include all power cords, cable patches at wireless equipment, as well as cable patches to the OWNER LANs. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate patch cable runs, equipment locations, and electrical power requirements with the OWNER’s ITD Project Management Office prior to installation. CONTRACTOR and the ITD Project Management Office must agree as to the final location and placement of all devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
A. Prior to installation CONTRACTOR shall provide the following: 1. Max (Wi-Fi) power (in dBm) for each and every WLAN Bridge model, Bridge Antenna model, AP model, and AP antenna model. 2. Transmit power (in dBm) per port per WLAN Bridge model and AP model. 3. Number of antennas per WLAN Bridge model and AP model. 4. Antenna gain (in dBi) per Bridge Antenna model and AP model.
B. Provide Aps mounting details in compliance with manufacturer’s specifications.
C. Provide a padlock to secure each indoor AP to its mounting bracket, using the provided security hasp.
D. All major WLAN equipment (Access Points, Bridges, Controllers) installed at a standalone or campus site shall be from a single manufacturer except otherwise approved by the OWNER.
E. Equipment Requirements 1. CONTRACTO shall provide manufacturer’s equipment specification sheets. 2. Use only OWNER approved products. 3. Equipment support of Centralized Management a. The OWNER requires that all networking components deployed on its wide Network shall be capable of supporting local or remote management anywhere within the OWNERs Enterprise network. For the purposes of this document, a network component is defined as any component or device that provides connectivity to the OWNER-wide Network. Examples include: Wireless Access Points, Bridges, Controllers, Connecting switches, routers, gateways, Uninterruptible Power Supplies, etc. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 54 IFB No. 2000002197 b. CONTRACTOR provided devices shall meet the following requirements: (1) Each component shall support remote management in compliance with the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) standards with community string authentication. (2) Device operational status, name, descriptive information, and Operating System (OS) and/or firmware versions (e.g., MIB-II System tree). (3) Interface operational status and traffic/error statistics for all interfaces in use (e.g., MIB-II Interfaces tree). c. The CONTRACTOR shall include and enable for use all manufacturer developed SNMP agents and agent features available for the provided equipment. d. For devices with agents supporting private enterprise MIB extensions (ASN.1 Object Identifier .1.3.6.1.4.x) all extensions must be included and enabled for use: in addition, the CONTRACTOR shall provide: (1) Electronic documentation for all private enterprise MIB extensions supported by the device in Abstract Syntax Notation number One (ASN.1)/Structure of Management Information (SMI) MIB format. (2) Electronic versions of SNMP manageable equipment shall include accessible Internet links (e.g., URL) to all manufacturer developed documentation regarding the features, use, and/or configuration of the device agent(s). e. If procedures for remote management, configuration, or software/firmware upgrades of the equipment require the use of proprietary or otherwise manufacturer-specific software, the CONTRACTOR shall include in submittal the specification (i.e. name, version, part number) and price for this software sufficient to perform remote management functions. F. Non-Proprietary Implementation: Manufacturers’ proprietary protocols or capabilities required to either deliver an operational overall system, or preclude future implementations that rely on prevailing industry standards shall not be acceptable.
2.02 Wireless LAN EQUIPMENT 1. All wireless LAN systems and ancillary components shall meet the following requirements: A. Wireless LAN System: All Access Points shall have the capability to operate both independently and simultaneously in IEEE 802.11n/ac and IEEE 802.11g wireless modes without causing abnormal degradation in client-to-access point performance.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 55 IFB No. 2000002197 1. WLAN system as a complete operational unit shall be a “Controller-based” system. 2. The general requirements for 802.11n/ac Access Points are as follows: a. Adhere to the IEEE 802.11n/ac (1) At the minimum, the Access Point shall support 3 spatial streams (3SS) dual band 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz provides 450Mbps PHY data rate on a single radio. (2) Meet or exceed the following 802.11n/ac PHY Data Rates in the 5 GHz radio band for the features provided. “802.11g/n” client support is required in the 2.4 GHz band. Short guard intervals and channel bonding in either radio band is not required but is permissible. 1.
20 MHz channels 40 MHz channels 80 MHz channels 160 MHz channels MCS Modulation Coding index type rate 800 ns GI 400 ns GI 800 ns GI 400 ns GI 800 ns GI 400 ns GI 800 ns GI 400 ns GI
0 BPSK 1/2 6.5 7.2 13.5 15 29.3 32.5 58.5 65
1 QPSK 1/2 13 14.4 27 30 58.5 65 117 130
2 QPSK 3/4 19.5 21.7 40.5 45 87.8 97.5 175.5 195
3 16-QAM 1/2 26 28.9 54 60 117 130 234 260
4 16-QAM 3/4 39 43.3 81 90 175.5 195 351 390
5 64-QAM 2/3 52 57.8 108 120 234 260 468 520
6 64-QAM 3/4 58.5 65 121.5 135 263.3 292.5 526.5 585
7 64-QAM 5/6 65 72.2 135 150 292.5 325 585 650
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 56 IFB No. 2000002197 8 256-QAM 3/4 78 86.7 162 180 351 390 702 780
9 256-QAM 5/6 N/A N/A 180 200 390 433.3 780 866.7
(3) Overlapping Operating Channels on 2.4 GHz (with no channel bonding): 11 (4) Operating Channels on 5 GHz (with no channel bonding): 21 (5) Operating Channels on 5 GHz (with channel bonding): 9 (disable any operation with this feature unless prior authorization) (6) Non-Overlapping Channels on 2.4 GHz (no channel bonding): 3 (channels 1, 6 ,and 11) (7) Non-Overlapping Channels on 2.4 GHz (with channel bonding): 1 (disable any operation with this feature) (8) Frequency Bands – FCC (a) The number of channels in the 5 GHz band may vary depending on the number of dynamic frequency selection channels included (DFS-2). (b) (2.4 GHz) 2.412 to 2.462 GHz: 11 channels (c) (5 GHz) shall support UNII-1, UNII-2, UNII-2E, and UNII-3 channels (9) Wireless Medium: DSSS/OFDM/MIMO (10) Transmit Power (indoor and outdoor models) (a) 5 GHz: Adjustable power 1. UNII-1 Band up to 50 mW 2. UNII-2 Band up to 250 mW 3. UNII-3 Band up to 1W (b) 2.4 GHz: Adjustable up to 100 mW (20 dBm) 3. The Controller-based system shall meet the following: a. Compliant with the IEEE 802.11n/ac standards. b. Certified by Wi-Fi Alliance organization for interoperability. c. For medium and larger installation, a minimum of 10 Gbps fiber based connection between the controller and the BBS. d. For small installation, a minimum of 2 Gbps connection between the controller and the BBS.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 57 IFB No. 2000002197 e. A minimum of one 10G Ethernet port. Provision the controller’s ports to the BBS based upon the anticipated bandwidth requirements. f. Manage concurrent connections from IEEE 802.11n/ac controller- based Access Points. Controllers shall be sized to support small, medium, and large installations of Access Points in similar groupings to the following: (1) Small: Up to 49 Access Points (2) Medium: 50 to 150 Access Points (3) Large: More than 150 Access Points g. Scalable Controller Based Architecture 1. Controllers shall be scalable to accommodate the number of managed Access Points, in case of exceeding capacity of a single controller under the same management domain. h. Shall be customizable per Access Point Group; (1) 802.11 data rates and MCS rates (2) 2.4/5 GHz transmit power settings (3) 2.4/5 GHz channelization including channel width (4) Client load balancing settings (5) Assisted roaming parameters i. Operational Modes (1) Controllers shall be capable of forwarding wireless traffic between wireless client devices and the wired LAN on behalf of the managed Access Points. (2) Controllers shall be capable of configuring managed Access Points to forward wireless traffic between wireless client devices and the wired LAN. (3) Controllers shall provision managed Access Points to support the Extended Service Set (ESS) operational mode j. Management Structure 2. Controllers shall be capable of supporting a hierarchical management model. At the lowest management tier, controllers manage Access Points. At the highest management tier, a Centralized Controller manages and/or provides backup capability to the Controllers in the lower tier. k. IP Address Management (1) IP Management shall be capable of being manually configured with a static IP address.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 58 IFB No. 2000002197 (2) IP Management shall have the ability to retain a previously assigned static IP address for the Controller and managed Access Points after a voluntary or involuntary reset of either device. (3) IP Management shall be capable of being dynamically configured with an IP address using DHCP services. l. Support VLAN trunks and tags as defined by IEEE 802.1q. This support should allow the network administrator to differentiate client access and services based on their assigned VLAN. (1) Shall support a minimum of 8 VLANs concurrently. (2) Shall allow the native VLAN to be un-tagged. m. Support the IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication standard and the following authentication types: n. Security Standards (1) Wi-Fi WPA, WPA2 (2) 802.11i (3) MD5 (4) HMAC – Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication (5) TLS v1.2 (6) PKI Certificate and CRL Profile o. Authentication/Authorization (1) 802.1x (2) EAP-TLS (3) EAP-TTLS (4) EAP-FAST (5) PEAP or EAP-CHAP v2 (6) RADIUS Authentication (7) Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) p. Management (1) SNMP (2) Telnet (3) SNMP MIB, MIB II (4) HTTP (5) Syslog (6) HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, Serial Communication/Console port access
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 59 IFB No. 2000002197 q. Encryption (1) TKIP-MIC (2) SSL, TLS (3) AES r. Support the IEEE 802.11i key distribution and management standard. s. Provide support for a minimum of eight (8) SSIDs per Access Point. Each SSID must be able to concurrently support multiple disparate encryption types (for example WPA, WPA2). t. Configuration Management (1) Shall allow secure access to Controller using TACACS AAA authentication. (2) Shall be capable of establishing access control lists that allow filtering of designated traffic, based on identifiable attributes within an 802.11 frame. At a minimum, the Controller shall provision the Access Point to provide traffic filtering support based upon MAC address and protocol type. (3) Shall provide support for secured local and remote configuration of the Controller: (a) TACACS AAA authentication (b) HTTPS and/or SSH (4) Shall provide support for secured local and remote firmware upgrades of the Controller and managed Access Points. (5) Shall provide support for enabling and disabling SSID broadcasts; power-save mode; system logging; automatic and manual selection of transfer rates; selecting client authentication modes; beacon intervals; DTIM intervals; RTS thresholds; and fragmentation thresholds on managed Access Points. u. Status and Monitoring (1) Shall provide diagnostic capabilities for the wireless link’s connectivity status and throughput performance on managed Access Points. (2) Shall provision managed Access Points with the capability for radio configuration information including operating channel, transmit power, supported data rates, and regulatory settings can be examined from a remote location (via secure connection). This capability should allow the administrator, from the central management station, to identify clients
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 60 IFB No. 2000002197 associated with the access point, run link tests, determine signal strengths and remotely adjust signal and power levels. (3) Shall support the addition of campus, building, and floor plan maps to the controller’s database or a management system. The maps shall be capable of providing live view depictions of RF coverage. The controller shall have the capability of having a campus map uploaded and stored on the controller or a management system v. WLAN Management (1) Access Points and controllers must have the ability to be securely managed and monitored from a central management system. At a minimum, a WLAN administrator should be able to perform the following activities from the central management and monitoring console: (a) Conduct performance monitoring of the WLAN infrastructure from a central location. (b) Detect (and preferably isolate) non-standard Access Points installed on OWNER network infrastructure. (c) Automatically distribute configuration changes to large groups of Access Points in a single instance. (2) Upgrade Access Point and controller firmware and software from a central management system Access Point shall provide support for remote management using the SNMP and MIB I/II standards. (3) Provisioning of the Central Management System and related components are to be specified and furnished per project scope and requirement. w. Antenna Configuration and RF Management (1) Shall support MIMO and backward compatibility for 802.11g/n. (2) Shall provision managed Access Points to support manual RF management to assign spectrum channels and client associations based upon configurable parameters. x. Power Management (1) Shall provision managed Access Points to allow remote configuration of the radio transmit power to enhance (or constrain) RF coverage areas (2) Shall provision managed Access Points to support the two power management modes as specified by the IEEE 802.11 standard. Theses modes include continuous aware mode (CAM) and power save polling (PSP) mode.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 61 IFB No. 2000002197 (a) When power management is enabled on a wireless client adapter, the Access Point and client station must support traffic indication maps (TIM) for unicast traffic and delivery traffic indication messages (DTIM) for broadcast and multicast traffic. (3) The Controller shall provision managed Access Points with the capability to receive IEEE 802.3af/at compliant inline power over a Category 5e/6 Ethernet cable infrastructure using the following method: (a) Power is distributed to the Access Point via an 802.3af/at compliant LAN switch. y. Bandwidth Management (1) Controller shall provide a bandwidth management functionality (bandwidth allocation per Access Point SSID) to optimize wireless LAN bandwidth for client associations. (2) WLAN System shall be capable of supporting Beamforming. (3) WLAN system shall be capable of identifying, isolating, and containing to non-Wi-Fi interfering devices. z. QoS over Wireless (1) Controller shall provide support for the IEEE 802.11e (QoS) standard for traffic prioritization services over the wireless link. (2) Controller shall be capable of prioritizing wireless traffic based on the IEEE 802.1p tag in the Ethernet header or the IP type of service/Differentiated Services Code Point (TOS/DSCP) bits in the IP header. aa. RF Management Capability (1) Shall support adaptive RF management for managed Access Points to dynamically assign spectrum channels based upon configurable parameters. (2) WLAN System shall be capable of Rogue detection and containment. (3) WLAN shall provide automatic RF interference avoidance by dynamically changing channels to non-effected spectrum. (4) Shall be capable of provisioning managed Access Points to operate in the following mode if required: (a) Repeater Mode – Used to connect wireless clients and/or while providing a wireless uplink connection to a root access point. In this mode the repeater is not connected to a wired Ethernet.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 62 IFB No. 2000002197 (b) Hot Standby Mode – Shall be capable of provisioning managed Access Points to operate as a backup to another Access Point in the event of a failure to one Access Point. bb. Roaming Support (1) Inter-Access Point Roaming (a) The controller shall support 802.11r fast Basic Service Set transition between access points. (b) The controller shall support intra-controller roaming. (c) The controller shall support intra-subnet roaming. cc. Optional Features (1) The Controller shall be capable of supporting an N+1 fault tolerance model when an additional Controller is added. B. The Bridge, as provided only on a case-by-case basis, shall support the following. The Bridge is a station in a wireless LAN that connects two or more wired LANs using RF spectrum. 1. The general requirements for Bridges are as follows: a. IEEE 802.11n/ac b. Operating Channels on 5 GHz (with no channel bonding): 21 c. Operating Channels on 5 GHz (with channel bonding): 9 (disable any operation with this feature unless prior authorization) d. Frequency Bands – FCC 2. Note: The number of channels in the 5 GHz band may vary depending on the number of dynamic frequency selection channels included (DFS-2). e. 5.180 to 5.240 GHz: 4 channels f. 5.2600 to 5.700 GHz: 11 channels, (excludes 5.600 to 5.660 GHz) g. 5.745 to 5.825 GHz: 5 channels h. Wireless Medium: DSSS/OFDM/MIMO i. Transmit Power (indoor and outdoor models) j. Adjustable up to 1 Watt k. Status LEDs: Operational, Activity, Errors l. Power Input: 90 to 240 VAC m. Environmental 3. (1) +25 to +120 degrees Fahrenheit (operational) 4. (2) +20 to +150 degrees Fahrenheit (non-operational) 5. (3) 10 to 90% humidity (non-condensing)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 63 IFB No. 2000002197 2. The Bridge, as provided, shall support the following with the exception of the identified optional features: a. Compliant with the IEEE 802.11n/ac standard. b. Certified by Wi-Fi Alliance organization for interoperability. c. Minimum of one auto-negotiating 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet port. 3. The Bridge shall be capable of operating in the following bridging mode: 3. Root Bridge – In this mode, the bridge connects to the wired network and communicates with other bridges. This configuration is used to create wireless point-to-point connections (and optional point-to- multipoint connections) with the intent to extend LAN services. 4. IP Address Management a. Shall be capable of being manually configured with a static IP address. b. Shall have the ability to retain a previously assigned static IP address after a voluntary or involuntary reset of Bridge. c. Shall be capable of being dynamically configured with an IP address using DHCP services. 5. Support VLAN trunks and tags as defined by IEEE 802.1q. This support should allow the network administrator to differentiate client access and services based on their assigned VLAN. a. Shall support a minimum of eight (8) VLANs concurrently. b. Shall allow for the native VLAN to be un-tagged. 6. Support the IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication standard and the following authentication types: a. EAP-MD5 b. EAP-TLS c. EAP-TTLS d. PEAP e. EAP-MSCHAP v2 7. Shall support the following encryption types: a. WPA-Personal (TKIP) b. WPA2-Personal (TKIP, AES) c. WPA-Enterprise (TKIP) d. WPA2-Enterprise (TKIP, AES)
8. Support the IEEE 802.11i key distribution and management standard.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 64 IFB No. 2000002197 9. Configuration Management a. Shall be capable of establishing access control lists that allow filtering of designated traffic, based on identifiable attributes within an 802.11 frame. At the minimum, the Bridge shall be capable of providing traffic filtering support based upon MAC address or protocol type. b. Shall provide support for secured local and remote configuration of Bridge (e.g., authenticated local user console access and remote HTTP/HTTPS and SSH). c. Shall provide support for secured local and remote firmware upgrades. d. Shall provide support for enabling and disabling SSID broadcasts; power-save mode; system logging; automatic and manual selection of transfer rates. 10. Status and Monitoring a. Shall provide diagnostic capabilities for the wireless link’s connectivity status and throughput performance. b. Shall provide the capability to examine radio configuration information including operating channel, transmit power, supported data rates, and regulatory settings from a remote location (via secure connection). This capability should allow the administrator, from the central management station, run link tests, determine signal strengths and remotely adjust signal and power levels. 11. WLAN Management a. Bridges shall have the ability to be securely managed from a central management and monitoring console location via SNMP and HTTP/HTTPS. At the minimum, a WLAN administrator should be able to perform the following activities from the central management and monitoring console: (1) Automatically distribute configuration changes to large groups of Bridges in a single instance. (2) Upgrade Bridge firmware from a central management system. b. Bridge shall provide support for remote management using the SNMP and MIB I/II standards. 12. External Antenna a. Dual band 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz antenna should be used whenever applicable. 13. Connectors a. Minimum of two 5 GHz RP-TNC or N-type or RP-SMA connectors b. Minimum of two grounding lugs for lightening protection
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 65 IFB No. 2000002197 14. Antenna Configuration and RF Management a. Shall support detachable antennas and provide a variety of FCC- compliant, Omni-directional, and directional antennas as required by Contract Documents. b. Shall support antenna diversity and a configurable option for enabling and disabling diversity mode. c. Shall support manual RF management to assign spectrum channels based upon configurable parameters. d. Fixed wireless Bridges shall support a utility to align the antenna or tune the wireless connection by reading or displaying the signal strength. 15. Power Management a. Shall provide a capability for locally and remotely configuring the radio transmit power to enhance (or constrain) RF coverage areas. b. In addition to supporting local AC power, the Bridge shall be capable of receiving IEEE 802.3af or 802.11at compliant inline power over a Category 5e/6 Ethernet cable infrastructure using the following method: (1) Power is distributed to the Bridge via an 802.3af or 802.11at compliant LAN switch. 16. QoS over Wireless a. Bridge shall provide support for 802.11e (QoS) standard for traffic prioritization services over the wireless link. b. Bridge shall be capable of prioritizing traffic based on the IEEE 802.1p tag in the Ethernet header or the IP type of service/Differentiated Services Code Point (TOS/DSCP) bits in the IP header. 17. Optional Features a. Shall support adaptive RF management to dynamically assign spectrum channels based upon configurable parameters b. The Bridge shall be capable of operating in the following mode as set by an administrator: (1) Repeater Mode – Used to connect wireless clients, while providing a wireless uplink connection to a root access point. In this mode the repeater is not connected to a wired Ethernet. C. Wireless LAN Accessories 1. RF Amplifier – FCC compliant “fixed-linear” amplifiers shall be used to increase RF strength. 2. RF Attenuators –FCC compliant “fixed-loss” attenuators shall be used to reduce RF strength.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 66 IFB No. 2000002197 3. Lightning Arrestors – Shall be installed with all exposed external antenna towers and shall be grounded per California Electrical Code. B. Wireless LAN Enclosures 1. Each access point or bridge shall be mounted and oriented per manufacturer’s recommendations. Access points or bridges are to be mounted to the ceiling, hard lid, or T-bar, installed in an existing or new LDC cabinet with sufficient room, or use an integral AP mounted near the LDC. If this is not possible, use a WDC enclosure, rated as appropriate to the installation environment - unless otherwise noted in the statement of work. a. All enclosures shall be NEMA rated as applicable to the installation environment and designed specifically for WLAN equipment. b. Enclosures shall be constructed of RF transparent materials such as fiberglass or fiberglass reinforced polyester to allow mounting without external antenna. c. Enclosures shall provide passive ventilation sufficient to maintain manufacturers recommended operating temperature range to protect the access point from overheating. d. Enclosures shall contain provisions for mounting the access point and accessories as well as a minimum of two Ethernet ports e. Enclosure shall be lockable with integral locking mechanism or exterior hasp and padlock. f. Wireless access point shall not be installed in an outdoor enclosure unless otherwise approved by the OWNER.
2.03 GROUNDING A. Wiring enclosures, terminal cabinets, outlets, frames of cabinet racks and other enclosures shall be grounded in accordance with requirements of California electrical code and as specified, and as indicated in the ANSI/EIA/TIA applicable standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXECUTION AND INSTALLATION OF WLAN EQUIPMENT A. All WLAN equipment shall be installed as recommended by the product manufacturer (unless otherwise directed by ITD Project Management Office. B. Contract documents shall identify the criteria for the selection and installation of Autonomous Access Points and Controller-based Access Points. C. All Access Points, antennas, and related equipment shall be labeled using a naming system approved by the OWNER. D. The wireless controller must be located in the MDF cabinet and be linked via Gigabit connection(s) to the Backbone Switch.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 67 IFB No. 2000002197 E. Exposed outdoor antenna masts shall be a safe distance from power lines and grounding shall be compliant with the California Electrical Code. Guy wires, gravity mount, and roofing material penetrations are not permitted. F. Any requirements to operate outside the IEEE standard (but within the FCC law), must receive written approval from an authorized OWNER ITD representative prior to installation. G. All access points are to be installed on opposite corners or sides of the classrooms and a minimum of seven (7) feet away from the user work area. Access points are not to be mounted directly over the instructor’s desk. 3.02 CERTIFICATION AND TESTING
A. Certification: Contractor shall certify that equipment used in the WLAN system is in full compliance with FCC requirements.
B. Testing Following the installation of the WLAN equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall participate in the initial Quality Assurance process with the OWNERs Network Engineer as described in Specifications 25569, 25806 and 25810. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all tools and personnel resources needed to ensure that the WLAN coverage and setup is compliant with the Construction Drawings generated by the CONTRACTOR and that the system operates in a manner compliant with this Specification and related Contract Documents. All WLAN components shall be tested for proper installation (per OWNER and manufacturer’s recommendations for configuration). CONTRACTOR shall develop and execute a written test plan to demonstrate the WLAN’s functional compliance with each area of this Specification. The test plan must be accepted in writing from an authorized OWNER representative prior to execution. All final tests shall be conducted during normal school business operation hours with various usage demands generated from each WLAN site individually and collectively. 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all instruments for testing and demonstrate, in presence of the OWNER, that all circuits and wiring test free of shorts and grounds. 2. Prior to calling for a walk test, the CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, instruments, appliances, equipment, and materials necessary to demonstrate to the OWNER the installation performs as required and specified. 3. The OWNER reserves the right to perform independent tests of equipment furnished, to determine whether or not equipment complies with requirements specified, and to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Any test failures that result from faulty CONTRACTOR installations, configurations, hardware, or software must be corrected by the CONTRACTOR (without any additional cost to OWNER). If the OWNER deems that the WLAN system, or parts thereof, does not meet specified performance requirements, further tests must be conducted, including Section II.D –Technical Specifications 68 IFB No. 2000002197 complete sweep analysis to locate faulty or defective components. Defective components, parts, and cables must be replaced before conducting further tests. C. Final Acceptance The CONTRACTOR shall procure written notification from the ITPMO before work is considered fully accepted. If the OWNER deems that the WLAN system, or parts thereof, do not meet specified performance requirements, further tests must be conducted, including complete sweep analysis to locate faulty or defective components. Defective components, parts, and cables must be replaced before conducting further tests. The goal is to ensure the specified throughput in an environment occupied by students and staff. Work for the installation of the WLAN system shall be considered complete after the CONTRACTOR accomplishes the following in compliance with Contract Documents: 1. Demonstrates proper functionality of Access Points, Bridges, Controllers, and Client Adapters as specified in “2.02 Wireless LAN Equipment”. 2. Demonstrates proper functionality of administration and configuration features. 3. Demonstrates proper functionality of WLAN management features. 4. Demonstrates proper functionality of link status and monitoring features. 5. Demonstrates proper functionality of Access Point and client adapter interoperability. 6. Demonstrates proper functionality of required security models. 7. Demonstrates proper functionality of client roaming features. 8. Demonstrates proper functionality of bandwidth management features. 9. Demonstrates proper interoperability of Access Point with multiple CONTRACTOR provided client adapter cards. 10. Demonstrates proper functionality of mixed IEEE 802.11n/ac and 802.11g client adapters associated with the same multimode 802.11n/ac Access Point. 11. Demonstrates proper functionality of 5 GHz band radio IEEE 802.11n/ac client adapters associated with the 802.11n/ac Access Point with the 5 GHz radio. 12. Demonstrates proper client performance in various coverage areas. 13. Demonstrates acceptable performance of WLAN services under varying traffic loads and types. 14. Replaces any equipment failing the test plan with properly functioning equipment at no additional cost to OWNER. 15. All WLAN system asset information has been recorded and required labels have been put in place.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 69 IFB No. 2000002197 16. All system testing has been completed. CONTRACTOR certifies that entire system is in working order and WLAN Test Results have been submitted to OWNER. 17. All construction debris and scrap materials have been removed from project site. 18. All marked up, project record documents have been returned to OWNER. 19. All unused customer material has been returned to OWNER. 20. OWNER ITD PROJECT INSPECTOR has inspected and accepted, in writing, the CONTRACTOR’s equipment installations and test results. 21. Documentation, to include as-built, along with required soft copies and completed cable management database has been turned over to OWNER. D. If the results of the final Quality Assurance testing indicate that the installation does not comply with the approved Construction Drawings, OWNER Specifications, or Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, at no cost to the OWNER, make any necessary adjustments to the system components or configurations in order to bring the WLAN installation into compliance. E. Testing methodology: Prior to the OWNER’s test and acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall test the IEEE 802.11n/ac 2.4 GHz (802.11n only) and 5 GHz band radios. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the test results in numerical order a wireless download of every installed AP. The OWNER network engineer shall evaluate the wireless performance by examining the results of the CONTRACTOR’s wireless captures. The following actions shall take place if the results deem acceptable: 2. While on site and prior to commencing the walk: 6. The OWNER shall validate the installation of all the APs electronically via a TCP session to confirm that the parameters are correct per the CONTRACTOR’s paperwork. 3. During the wireless system test, the following parameters are checked: a. Channel interference - There shall be an adequate separation between adjacent APs on the same channel. b. Connectivity - Shall connect and receive an IP address to each installed AP. c. Check for throughput on each AP’s 802.11n/ac 5 GHz connection - A single user connected to any AP shall provide an average of 100 Megabits per second (100 Mbps throughput). There should be a consistent throughput rate. The throughput rate shall not deviate more than 50% and should not go below a minimum speed of 50 Mbps. d. Check for throughput on each AP’s 802.11n/ac 2.4 GHz (802.11n only) connection - A single user connected to any AP shall provide an average of 50 Megabits per second (50 Mbps throughput). There should be a consistent throughput rate. The throughput rate shall
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 70 IFB No. 2000002197 not deviate more than 50% and should not go below a minimum speed of 25 Mbps. e. Check for retries on each AP - Retries shall be less than 10% f. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a computer running as an FTP or Iperf (with Jperf as the graphical user interface) server that shall be hooked up via Ethernet cable to the campus network on the student VLAN. g. The CONTRACTOR shall have an ITPMO approved wireless network test tool running on their laptop, the tool shall be capable of monitoring and analyzing the wireless traffic and throughput. The same type of wireless NIC shall be used throughout the project. h. At the time of test and acceptance The OWNER Network Engineer shall either: 1. Connect to the FTP server as a wireless client and download a large file to a laptop. This file shall be at least 140 MB in size for 2.4 GHz band radio and at least 1.5 GB in size for 5 GHz band radio. The wireless system shall perform within the parameters listed above for the duration of this download. 2. Connect to the Iperf server via the Iperf (with Jperf as the graphical user interface) client as a wireless client and perform the throughput tests with various parameters. The wireless system shall perform within the parameters listed above for the duration of these tests. i. The CONTRACTOR shall have the Wireless analysis application configured to display the following parameters on screen while the OWNER NE downloads the file. The following parameter shall be shown from the aspect of the connecting client and from the AP. (1) S/N Ratio: There shall be no less than 25 db separation between the strongest signal and noise (2) In/Out KB per second: There shall be a consistent throughput rate. There shall not be periods of time when the throughput drops to zero or near zero (3) RX / TX Retry Frame %: Retry rates should be below 30% (4) RX Rate / TX Rate: 60% of frame rates should be 100Mb or higher on 802.1n/ac. (5) Screen shot(s) from the Air Magnet Laptop Analyzer (now called Wi-Fi Analyzer) or ITPMO approved equivalent program demonstrating the performance index/indices associated with the WLAN technologies implemented. 3.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 71 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Prior to the submittal of any final documentation, the CONTRACTOR shall provide to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office the following for the entire contract: 1. Three (3) electronic (USB flash drive) copies of the hardware manufacturer documentation (PDF format) and software per model number of equipment installed throughout the project. B. Prior to the submittal of final documentation for each site, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the following to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office for review and acceptance: 1. One (1) 24” x 36” hard (paper) copy of the completed full set of As-Built. 2. One (1) electronic (USB flash drive) copy of the completed full set of As- Built in latest or Microsoft Visio file format. 3. Complete set of original red line drawings. 4. One (1) hard (11” x 17” paper) copy and one electronic copy of the asset/inventory list utilizing the OWNER required Excel format 5. One (1) hard (11” x 17” paper) copy and one electronic copy of the inventory list of equipment removed from the site utilizing the OWNER required Excel format. 6. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the final invoice (bill of materials) for all work, E-rate discounted and/or funded through other sources under the contract. 7. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the Visio diagram of the OWNER approved warranty process, the warranty term effective from T&A acceptance, and written narrative that outlines the details the process that includes but is not limited to the following: a. CONTRACTOR’s warranty contact information b. CONTRACTOR’s process for tracking changes during the warranty period following OWNER requirements outlined in the RFP. 8. One (1) electronic (USB flash drive) copy of the complete set of final test results in native format and one hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the test result summary. Included on the electronic (USB flash drive) copy shall be the associated software to read the test results. 9. One (1) electronic (USB flash drive) copy of updated cable schedule reflecting actual field conditions. Table shall represent final record set inclusion. 10. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the cable management plan (in Excel format) as required in Specification 25569. 11. Wireless section to include the following: a. AP summary table
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 72 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Overall site plan signal distribution with AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio overlay. Create one map for “2.4 GHz frequency band” and one map for “5 GHz frequency band.” c. Noise Distribution (electronic copy only) d. Signal Strength versus Signal/Noise Ratio Distribution (electronic copy only) e. Speed/Maximum Measured Data Rate (electronic copy only) f. Retry Rate Distribution (electronic copy only) g. Loss Rate Distribution (electronic copy only) 12. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of all site specific signed RFCs, one (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the General RFC log, and one (1) electronic (USB flash drive) copy of all RFCs for the site. C. Once the above referenced documents have been accepted, the CONTRACTOR shall provide to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office the following for each site: 1. Three (3) electronic closeout electronic copies, one copy on each USB flash drive. Disk label shall include project name, school name, school location code, contents descriptor, table of contents, revision number and date of disk, and CONTRACTOR information. Each electronic closeout copy shall contain the following: a. Submit media in paper sleeve with see thru window. b. A cover page with school name, location code, address, project name, prepared for, prepared by, revision number, and the final revision date of the bound book c. A table of contents d. The asset/inventory list utilizing the OWNER required Excel format e. The final invoice (bill of materials list as required for closeout documentation) for all work, E-rate discounted and/or funded through other sources under the contract f. The complete set of final cable test results in native format and the associated software to read the test results g. The cable test result summary in PDF format h. The cable management plan in required format as specified in Specification 25569 i. A Visio diagram of the OWNER approved warranty process, the warranty term effective from T&A acceptance, and written narrative that outlines the details the process that includes but is not limited to the following: 1) CONTRACTOR’s warranty contact information
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 73 IFB No. 2000002197 2) CONTRACTOR’s process for tracking changes during the warranty period following OWNER requirements 3) The accepted full set of As-Built with required BICSI RCDD/PE stamps and signatures 4) All site specific RFCs and the General RFC log 5) All General RFCs for the project 2. One (1) Mylar record set design submittal BICSI/PE stamped and wet signed – ARCH C size. 3. Three (3) electronic (USB flash drive) copies of the completed full set of As-built in latest AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio file format (layered with accordance to OWNER specifications). 4. Two (2) electronic (USB flash drive) copies, identified with “IT Asset Management,” which shall consist of the following: a. The asset/inventory list utilizing the OWNER required format. b. The inventory list of equipment removed from the site utilizing the OWNER required format. c. A Visio diagram of the OWNER approved warranty process, the warranty term effective from T&A acceptance, and written narrative that outlines the details the process that includes but is not limited to the following: 1) CONTRACTOR’s warranty contact information 2) CONTRACTOR’s process for tracking changes during the warranty period following OWNER requirements 5. All cabinet keys; No keys are to be left with the schools. 6. Unattached accessories for all electronic equipment at the school site (including serial and other cables, adapters, etc.). The OWNER shall identify the quantities required. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall provide to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office and identified as “Facilities Vault” for each site, one (1) electronic (USB flash drive) copy of accepted As-Built in latest AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio file format. 3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until substantial completion. 3.05 OWNER ORIENTATION A. WLAN Equipment: A three-day training course shall be provided, no later than 30 calendar days after equipment installation, for two designated persons from the Information Technology Division (ITD) per site in which WLAN infrastructure is installed. The training shall be provided at a facility located in Los Angeles County or at an OWNER location agreed to by the OWNER. B. The training shall be designed for OWNER IT service personnel and shall provide Section II.D –Technical Specifications 74 IFB No. 2000002197 comprehensive technical information regarding system maintenance, troubleshooting, configuration and operation of the network infrastructure as built. Training shall include Product Features and Technical Specifications; Design and Implementation; Installation and Configuration, Wireless Security Principles, Maintenance and Operations, and Understanding of As-Built documentation including drawings and all associated project documentation. If applicable, Wired LAN and Wireless LAN training may be combined. Coursework shall consist of lecture and hands-on instruction. Each class size is limited to no more than 15 students. 3.06 CLEANUP A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 75 IFB No. 2000002197 PART 4 - Attachments
Attachment a – Wireless LAN Systems checklist
A. Quality Assurance OWNER is to examine the following items based on the criteria defined in section 25810
(Wireless LAN Systems).
OWNER is to examine 100% of wireless access points, wireless bridges, wireless controllers, and antennas. Other items shall be tested at a 10% rate. The entire LAN system is deemed failed if deficiencies are noted during the examination.
Installation Check List Pass Fail Are all CONTRACTOR-furnished systems and related equipment installed as specified? Wireless Access Points? Wireless Bridges? Wireless Controllers? Antennas? Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cables and interface modules? Are all Access Points, Bridges, and Controllers from a single manufacturer? Have all Access Points and Bridges been certified by the Wi-Fi Alliance? Have IP addresses and VLANs been configured on required systems? Has SNMP been configured on all required systems? Have SNMP configurations been tested for remote management as specified? Were all submittals provided as specified in section 1.03?
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 76 IFB No. 2000002197 Functionality Check List Pass Fail Controller-based Wireless Access Points: Operational Modes? IP Address Management? IEEE 802.1x Authentication? Encryption Types? IEEE 802.11i Key Distribution? Multiple Encryption Types per SSID? Configuration Management? Status and Monitoring? WLAN Management? Antenna Configuration and RF Management? Power Management? Client Roaming?
Wireless Controller: Operational Modes? Management Structure? IP Address Management? VLAN Trunk and IEEE 802.1q Tag Support? IEEE 802.1x Authentication? Encryption Types? IEEE 802.11i Key Distribution? Multiple Encryption Types per SSID? Configuration Management? Status and Monitoring? WLAN Management? Antenna Configuration and RF Management? Power Management? Bandwidth Management? IEEE 802.11e QoS? Client Roaming?
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 77 IFB No. 2000002197 Functionality Check List Pass Fail Fault Tolerance? Clustering?
1. Wireless Bridges: Operational Modes? Infrastructure Modes (PTP and PTMP)? IP Address Management? VLAN Trunk and IEEE 802.1q Tag Support? IEEE 802.1x Authentication? Encryption Types? IEEE 802.11i Key Distribution? Multiple Encryption Types per SSID? Configuration Management? Status and Monitoring? WLAN Management? Antenna Configuration and RF Management? Power Management? IEEE 802.11e QoS?
END OF ATTACHMENTS
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 78 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT C – 27 1018 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 1018
LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) SYSTEMS FOR INSTRUCTIONAL LOCATIONS AND SMALL/MEDIUM OFFICE LOCATIONS OWNER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD) IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION TO THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM ITD. part 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY B. Section Includes: All equipment provision, preparations, installation, hardware and software, integration, configuration, testing, training, documentation, standards, and acceptance criteria for 10 Gigabits per second (Gbps) fiber optic backbone and Power-over-Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T switched Ethernet LAN systems. C. The system shall consist of local area network and wide area network / Metropolitan Area Network connectivity equipment, Unshielded Twisted Pair and fiber optic switches providing connectivity for local data ports to the fiber backbone. Devices connected to the cabling system, through various network interface cards, shall be Windows, Apple (Mac), and other computers and printers, servers, copiers, etc.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with current versions of the following applicable codes and standards: 1. EIA/TIA-568C: Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard and all current addenda 2. EIA/TIA-569A: Commercial building standard for telecommunications pathways and spaces 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606A: Administration standard for telecommunications infrastructure of commercial buildings 4. ANSI-J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications EIA/TIA-607: Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications 5. California Building Code (CBC) 6. California Electrical Code (CEC) 7. National and State Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements. 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA-70
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 79 IFB No. 2000002197 9. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 (Ethernet), 802.3u (100 Base-TX/FX), 802.3z (Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber), 802.3ab (Gigabit Ethernet over 4 pair category 5 or higher), 802.3ae (10GbE), 802.3be (40 and 100GbE), 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol, 802.11 (Wireless LAN) including 802.11ac (part 11 amendment 5), 802.11af (PoE), 802.11at (PoE+), 802.1d (spanning tree protocol), 802.1s (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), 802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol), 802.1p (QoS), 802.1q (VLAN tagging), 802.1x (Port Based Network Access Control), RFC 2236/5186 (IGMP v2/v3), RFC 3973/4602 (PIM-DM/SM), RFC 2365 (Administratively Scoped IP Multicast) 10. ANSI, ASTM, UL, NEMA, IEEE and FCC standards as applicable. 11. ADA- Americans with Disabilities Act 12. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition 13. BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual, current edition
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials: Submit a complete list of proposed materials and products. 1. Furnish catalog cuts, technical data, and descriptive literature on components. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data. All UPS submittals shall be accompanied by a manufacturers run time matrix indicating capacity as required in this specification. 2. Shop Drawings shall indicate equipment locations, details, sizes, and a point-to-point interface connection diagram of all systems. Shop Drawings shall indicate interfaces to cabling and equipment and cabling furnished by others, identifying numbers of wires, termination requirements, and other pertinent details. 3. Drawings that are specific to this specification section shall be included in the submittal. “A” size (8.5″x11″) and “B” size (11″x17″) shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes that are bound into the manual. 4. Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns. The first assembly shall be the major head end equipment. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the applicable specification section number, and followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item. The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items other than as specified. This is visually presented below. Column widths should be adjusted for easy reference and use of space.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 80 IFB No. 2000002197 Item Description Applicable Specified Submitted Notes: Number Specification Item Item Section Number
B. The product data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the engineer to evaluate the suitability of the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination. C. Provide a Design Review Summary of no more than two (2) pages. Summarize as appropriate, the design principles, equipment sizing, and/or installation practices used to determine the most cost effective method to meet the OWNER’s requirements. D. Provide a migration plan that details the CONTRACTOR’s transition and integration strategy from the existing LAN systems and connectivity to the new LAN systems and connectivity. This plan should be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ITD Project Management Office. 1. The Network Migration Plan shall define how existing LAN systems shall remain in service during the installation and integration of the new LAN/WLAN and converged systems. E. Provide a material list of all CONTRACTOR-provided or connected systems specifying quantity, part/specification, and serial numbers on an office, classroom, LDF, IDF, MDF, and IP address and room-by-room basis. Use building insurance numbers followed by the architectural classroom number. 1. Submit the following documentation: a. Drawings of network connectivity, as-built, in one hard copy and one copy provided on USB flash drive in the latest version of AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio format for Microsoft Windows. All information shall be clearly legible on all printed drawings. b. OWNER utilizes layers as a key tool in controlling visibility of drawing elements and to provide consistent information between drawings, yet provide control over what is seen on each sheet. LAN Systems shall be shown on a separate layer, labeled as “LAN Systems” that uses building floor plans, conduit supporting structure, and premise wiring layers below as needed. The use of any version control blocks or company logos shall be on a layer separate from the LAN Systems drawings. Diagrams should include, at a minimum: (1) All network connected systems provided by or installed by the CONTRACTOR including device type, model, serial number, OWNER assigned name, date installed, and OWNER provided IP Address. Device symbols should be industry standard symbols or replica of manufacturer’s
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 81 IFB No. 2000002197 equipment. Drawings shall be laid-out to clearly show the logical relationship between devices. (2) All SNMP managed devices connected to the network including device type, model, OWNER assigned name, and OWNER provided IP address. (3) Location of equipment. Location is designated by: (a) Building number as indexed on record drawings (b) Room or location number as indexed on record drawings (c) Distribution Frame number as indexed on record drawings (4) Connections between installed systems including type of connection, interface speed, system interface ID, and cable number used. (5) Rack/cabinet elevations indicating equipment locations. Equipment locations and placement within cabinets shall be approved by the ITI Project Management Office prior to equipment installation. CONTRACTOR and ITI Project Management Office shall agree as to the final location of all devices. c. Inventory of installed systems shall be documented in the OWNER Asset Management Excel Workbook as required by Contract Documents.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS C. Equipment and materials that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S Information Technology project manager. When deviating or proposing material substitutions the following information shall be submitted: 4. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER, and all necessary documents to validate the claims made in the substitution form. 5. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall conform to CCR, Part 3, California Electrical Code. B. Only a qualified CONTRACTOR holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work shall do work. 1. Provide the supervision necessary to install, and configure a complete and operational system.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 82 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Supervisor shall have demonstrated experience in the successful completion of at least three (3) projects of similar size and scope on- time and on-budget. b. Supervisor shall have demonstrated the ability to supervise a telecommunications project of similar size and complexity. C. Provide and obtain approval from ITD for the installation plan, Installation shall conform with ITD approved installation practices. D. Test installation to validate functionality and interoperability with the OWNER WAN and converged systems. E. CONTRACTOR shall be an authorized distributor of the submitted LAN equipment and shall have one or more engineers and/or technicians who have been trained by the manufacturer (or manufacturer authorized organization) and certified in the design, installation, and configuration of the equipment. F. Submit a copy of a letter from the manufacturer of submitted equipment certifying that the installer is an authorized distributor and maintenance provider of the submitted manufacturer’s equipment. G. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Material List Submission a list of five projects of similar scope acceptable to the OWNER and shall have a service organization capable of responding to warranty service requests within 24 hours of receipt of written notification and resolution within 1 day for MDF equipment and 3 days for equipment located either in the classroom, IDF, or LDF. CONTRACTOR shall include the telephone number of the customer’s client contact for each project and a letter signed by a corporate officer, partner, or OWNER of the contracting company describing the service capability of the company and stating the company’s commitment to maintain that service capability through the warranty period. H. The CONTRACTOR shall use adequate numbers of skilled staff who are manufacturer certified, thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary technology and systems, and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work.
1.06 WARRANTY A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of, or failure to, examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 83 IFB No. 2000002197 B. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. C. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than 5 years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. D. Installation CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to OWNER ITD Project Management. E. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that a LAN system component, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate, or repeated failure rate, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems of the same model purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a project manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be: a. Equal to or less than 10% in any 12 month period during the original warranty term. b. Equal to or less than 15% cumulative failures during the entire term of the original warranty. 2. If, at any time during of the life of the products, the failure rate of the LAN systems or components exceeds 20%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition. 4. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days or written notification from the OWNER. 5. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 84 IFB No. 2000002197 F. The warranty shall cover the complete system including fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. G. The warranty shall include onsite 48-hour advanced part replacement. H. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). I. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. J. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, equipment, materials, parts and ancillary components that may be required in addition to the OWNER furnished systems. 1. The BBS is the Backbone Switch and is installed in the MDF and serves as the central point of backbone network termination, and provides network connectivity to IDFs, classrooms, computer labs, libraries, multi-purpose rooms, student nutritional service areas, auditoriums, and offices. The BBS shall provide the primary campus LAN routing/switching functions between user VLANs and the WAN router. 2. For instructional campus sites greater than 10 classrooms and office locations larger than 100 users, provide the minimum capability of a chassis-based modular switch with modular interface cards in the MDF as a Backbone Switch (BBS). 3. The ISM is the Intermediate Switch–Managed (Fiber Switch) serving as the network termination point for secondary fiber backbone cabling from an IDF to CESMs located in LDCs. The ISM aggregates CESMs to the BBS. 4. The ESM is the Edge Switch–Managed serving as the network termination point for copper horizontal cabling from an MDF, IDF or LDF to the work area outlet. 5. The CESM is the Compact Edge Switch-Managed and is a small form factor network access point serving as the network termination point for copper horizontal cabling from an LDC to the work area outlet. 6. The Access Router provides all IP protocol gateway services between the OWNER WAN and LANs at the local site. The Access Router shall be installed in the same MDF as the BBS. The Access Router may be used to provide native DHCP and NTP services for all devices at the local site. The typical Access Router shall connect to the OWAN via scalable Metropolitan
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 85 IFB No. 2000002197 Area Network or T1 (or multiple T1s). Circuits shall be provisioned by the OWNER and service type shall be identified on the Contract Documents. 7. An MDF is the structure that serves as the main cross-connect for backbone cabling and connectivity serving all campus LAN systems. The router and BBS shall be installed in the MDF. The MDF may also serve as an IDF for locations within 90 meters (copper cable length). Patch cables shall be practical in length such that they may be neatly loomed in the cable management system with minimal excess cable and no cable stress points. 8. The IDF provides the network connection point for secondary fiber backbone and /or horizontal copper cabling. The IDF may also provide cross-connect to backbone cabling where CESM are used. IDFs are located between the MDF, LDFs, and LDCs in classrooms, offices, and other end station locations. 9. The LDF is similar to an IDF but provides the network access point for a single room or adjacent rooms. An LDF typically uses a cabinet that serves as the termination point for horizontal copper UTP cabling within the same room and installation site of an ESM. 10. The LDC provides local network access for a single classroom single room. An LDC uses a wall-mounted (recessed or surface mount) cabinet that serves as the termination point for horizontal copper UTP cabling within the same room and installation site of a CESM (as required) within the room/area. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide LAN system equipment hardware, firmware, and software necessary in the MDF, IDF, LDF and classroom locations to provide PoE+ full duplex 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet ports to connect each workstation, server, router, and other end devices designated on the project document. C. The LAN system design and equipment shall provide, at a minimum, fiber based 10GbE backbone (uplink) connectivity from ISM and ESM equipment in IDFs, LDFs; ISM and CESM 1 Gigabit Ethernet fiber base to the BBS located in the MDF as specified in the project document. D. CONTRACTOR shall install, configure, test, and document the LAN equipment in accordance with Part 3 of this specification to provide a fully functional and complete LAN at each location identified in the Contract Documents. Installation shall include all cable patches at end-devices as well as cable patches in all MDFs, IDFs, LDFs, and classrooms to complete device connectivity to the OWNER WAN. E. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate patch cable runs, rack elevations/equipment locations, electrical power pathways, and available electrical capacity with the ITI Project Management Office prior to installation of the LAN systems. CONTRACTOR and the ITI Project Management Office must agree as to the final location/placement of all devices. F. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate patch cable runs, equipment locations, and electrical power requirements with the ITI Project Management Office prior to
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 86 IFB No. 2000002197 installation of the LAN systems. CONTRACTOR and the ITI Project Management Office must agree as to the final location and placement of all devices. G. CONTRACTOR shall test and document all installed systems in accordance with requirements and procedures stated in this specification. H. Provide an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system in the MDF. The UPS shall be sized according to section 2.03.G.
2.02 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. Proposed products must have been commercially available to the general public for a period of at least six (6) months and must be available for purchase at the time of bid submittal. No pioneering, unproven or experimental technologies/products are acceptable. B. In order to establish service stability, all proposed switching equipment e.g. BBS, ISM, ESM and CESM and components exclusive of routers and cabling shall be of like products from a single manufacturer for each site except otherwise approved by the OWNER. 1. In order to establish a standard of quality as required by the OWNER, various manufacturers’ equipment may meet the requirements in this document. As a reference for comparison of CONTRACTORs, the equipment specification sheets on all items shall be included with the submitted bid and design. 2. The Los Angeles Unified School OWNER’s Information Technology Division or designated agent shall establish equivalency and compliance of product or components offered for use on each project. 3. Equipment support of Centralized Management. a. The Los Angeles Unified School OWNER (LAUSD) requires that all networking components deployed on its OWNER-wide Network provide standard support for remote management from its central facility. For the purposes of this document, a network component is defined as any component or device that provides connectivity to the OWNER-wide Network. Examples include, but are not limited to, the following: Routers, Switches, Wireless Access Points and Uninterruptible Power Supplies. b. CONTRACTORs proposing equipment for deployment on the OWNER Network shall ensure that each device as provided meets the following requirements: (1) Each component shall support remote management in compliance with the Simple Network Management Protocol standards with community string authentication. (2) Device operational status, name, descriptive information, and Operating System (OS) and/or firmware versions (e.g., MIB-II System tree).
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 87 IFB No. 2000002197 (3) Interface operational status and traffic/error statistics for all interfaces in use (e.g. MIB-II Interfaces tree). c. For the manufacturer equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall also include and enable for use all manufacturer developed SNMP agents and agent features available for the equipment. The only allowable exception to this requirement is that CONTRACTORs may choose not to include additional-cost agent features that pertain solely to device functions for which the device is not provided. d. For devices with agents supporting private enterprise MIB extensions (ASN.1 Object Identifier .1.3.6.1.4.x) all extensions must be included and enabled for use. Additionally, when requested, the CONTRACTOR shall provide: (1) Electronic documentation for all private enterprise MIB extensions supported by the device in Abstract Syntax Notation number One (ASN.1)/Structure of Management Information (SMI) MIB format. (2) Electronic versions of SNMP manageable equipment shall include accessible Internet links (e.g., URL) to all manufacturer developed documentation regarding the features, use, and/or configuration of the device agent(s). e. If procedures for remote management, configuration, or software/firmware upgrades of the equipment require the use of proprietary or otherwise manufacturer-specific software, the CONTRACTOR shall include in submittal the specification (i.e. name, version, part number) and price for this software sufficient to perform remote management functions. C. Equipment Substitutions 1. Equipment substitutions shall be pre-approved by the OWNER prior to bid date. CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate operation of equipment and compliance with functions and features specified herein. Additionally, CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate interoperability of design and systems with existing systems. Equipment substitutions that were not pre-approved prior to bid date shall be rejected. In the event that no equipment is found to meet all the requirements specified herein, the equipment meeting the most requirements shall be given preferential treatment during the selection process. D. Non-Proprietary Implementation 1. This design and implementation specification precludes the use of any network equipment CONTRACTOR proprietary protocols or capabilities required to either deliver an operational overall system or preclude future implementations that rely on prevailing industry standards.
2.03 LAN EQUIPMENT A. Access Router: The Access Router provides the interface between the local network Section II.D –Technical Specifications 88 IFB No. 2000002197 (LAN) and the Wide Area Network (WAN). The router also provides critical IP services such as QoS, DHCP, and NTP. The router is required to provide a variety of interface capability to support individual site requirements. Many of the named interfaces and protocols may not be required during the initial implementation; however, the ability to implement any of the listed capabilities is required. 1. The general router requirements are as follows: a. Modular configuration with slots supporting different interface module types. b. Hot-swappable, load-sharing or redundant power supplies c. Rack-mountable in standard 19-inch rack. d. WAN interface(s) to meet requirements specified in the project record. See following sections for supported interfaces and “as provided” requirement. e. Up to eight T1 synchronous serial ports with built-in DSU/CSU capabilities - to be specified in the Contract Documents. f. Software and firmware to support the OWNER MAN/WAN requirements. g. Maximize use of internal memory to support the next two major operating system upgrades. External compact flash memory shall not be accepted. 2. The router shall be capable of supporting the following: a. Minimum of four Gigabit Ethernet ports b. 1000 Base-SX, LX, and ZX interfaces through SFP GBIC modules. c. Minimum of one T1 Channelized Primary Rate ISDN (PRI). d. Minimum of eight T1 synchronous serial ports supporting data 1.544Mbps with built-in Data Service Unit/Channel Service Unit (DSU/CSU). e. Minimum of two FXO and two FXS interfaces for PSTN connection, telephone set, fax machine, PBX or PA/IC connection; or have the ability to support Session Initiation Protocol. The router must also be capable of providing Voice over IP PSTN fail-over in the event the WAN IP interface becomes temporarily inoperable. f. Industry standard Voice over IP protocols including MGCP, H.323, and SIP. g. SNMP, syslog, traffic analyzer data e.g. sFlow, Netflow, IPFIX h. Hot-swappable, load-sharing or redundant power supplies. i. Dual stack Internet Protocol IPv4 and IPv6 j. MPLS k. VRF-Lite
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 89 IFB No. 2000002197 l. GRE tunnels m. BFD n. WCCP v2 o. PPP Multi-link of serial interfaces p. QoS with the ability to provision 802.1p priority queues and utilize basic dynamic application detection q. The Access Router’s performance, at the minimum, shall be no less than 1.5 Gbps throughput with any of NAT, ACL, HQoS, or IPSec features enabled utilizing RFC 2544 standard baseline testing method and IMIX packet sizes 3. The router, as provided, shall support the following: a. Minimum of the following ports installed, unless otherwise specified by the OWNER: (1) Three auto-negotiating 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet ports b. Minimum of the following IP routing protocols installed: (1) BGP-4 and MP-BGP (2) IGMP v2 (3) OSPF v2 and OSPF v3 (4) PIM (dense mode and sparse mode) (5) RIP and RIP v2 (6) RIPng c. IP Multicast d. Network management via industry standard protocols including SNMP, remote configuration, remote notification of errors, events, and alerts. e. In-band configuration via command line interface over Telnet, SSH, and SNMP, and out-of-band configuration via direct serial, terminal server, or dial-up (modem) connection. f. Centralized user access control and configurable access levels. g. Support for access control-based security model. For example, access control lists. h. Logging to report user access, configuration changes, system events, traps, and other interface and protocol events, including support for a centralized syslog server. i. Internet Protocol IPv4 and IPv6, MPLS. j. The router shall provide native DHCP and NTP services for all devices at the local site.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 90 IFB No. 2000002197 k. Network Time Protocol (client mode). l. IPSec with NAT, PAT, and NAT-PT m. The Access Router’s performance, at the minimum, shall be no less than 1.5 Gbps throughput with any of NAT, ACL, HQoS, or IPSec features enabled utilizing RFC 2544 standard baseline testing method and IMIX packet sizes B. Broadband Access Router The Broadband Access Router provides the interface between the local network (LAN) and the commercial wireless cellular broadband network. The router is required to provide a variety of interface capability to support individual site requirements. Many of the named interfaces and protocols may not be required during the initial implementation; however, the ability to implement any of the listed capabilities is required. 1. The general Broadband Access Router requirements for non-WiFI are as follows: a. Support dual SIM for cellular 4G. b. IPSec in compliance with IETF. c. 10/100/1000 Ethernet interface. 2. The general The general Broadband Access Router requirements for WiFi are as follows: a. Support dual SIM for cellular 4G. b. IPSec in compliance with IETF. c. 10/100/1000 Ethernet interface. d. Wireless LAN access point in compliance with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n. C. Backbone Switch (BBS): The BBS shall be a modular, rack mountable, chassis based switch with a number of slots as required by the site network configuration. A single BBS shall be used for aggregating LAN system connections (uplinks) and local MDF connectivity for the complete site.
1. The general BBS requirements are as follows: a. Hot swappable, load sharing power supplies (minimum of two installed). b. The BBS shall support in-band configuration via command line interface over Telnet, SSH, or HTTP. c. The BBS shall be of sufficient size to accommodate and of appropriate functional design to support the specified modules regardless of whether all of these modules are required to be furnished at time of installation. d. The optic based Gigabit Ethernet Switch Modules with a minimum of twelve 1000 Base-SX/LX ports per module. The number of such modules configured in the BBS should be sufficient to provide the Section II.D –Technical Specifications 91 IFB No. 2000002197 minimum of one 10 GbE port for each ISM and one 1 GbE port for each CESM uplink connection. SFP GBIC modules are not required for spare ports. e. Fiber optic based 10GbE Switch Modules with a minimum capability of six SFP+ ports per module. The number of such modules configured in the BBS should be sufficient to provide one port for each ESM and one port for each ISM, unless specified otherwise by OWNER staff, configured with a SFP+ 10GbE multi- mode or single mode uplink connection as needed of each type. SFP+ modules are not required for spare ports. Fiber network interface modules shall be designed for multi-mode and/or single- mode fiber as appropriate for the required interface and distance. f. The BBS shall support multiple link aggregation for 10GbE and/or 1GbE uplink connections to support higher bandwidth uplink connections, as required by performance criteria. Aggregated uplink connections shall adhere to the IEEE 802.3ad, Link Aggregation Control Protocol specifications. The BBS shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 4 aggregated ports per uplink. g. The Installing CONTRACTOR shall supply multi-mode and single- mode duplex fiber patch cables, as appropriate, for every fiber interface provided. Patch cables shall be supplied to provide the required duplex interface to the fiber patch facility. Refer to section 3.01.E for general fiber patch cable requirements. Patch Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach maximum, worst-case length, neatly loomed in the wire management system from the switch to the fiber patch facility. For typical BBS site configurations, the minimum length shall be 1 meter and the maximum length shall be 5 meters. h. Maximize use of internal memory to support the next two major operating system upgrades. External compact flash memory shall not be accepted. i. The BBS performance shall provide at a minimum: (1) For instructional sites with greater than 3,000 users; a minimum of layer 2 switching throughput of no less than 900 Gbps. Layer 3 IPv4 200 Mpps and IPv6 100 Mpps of throughput. (2) For instructional sites with equal or less than 3,000 users; a minimum of layer 2 switching throughput of no less than 768 Gbps. Layer 3 IPv4 200 Mpps and IPv6 100 Mpps of throughput (3) For instructional sites with less than 100 users; a minimum of layer 2 switching throughput of no less than 80 Gbps. Layer 3 forwarding rate no less than 60 million packet per second (Mpps) 2. The BBS shall be capable of supporting the following:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 92 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Sufficient redundancy so that despite the failure of any single replaceable processor, management, or switching fabric component (excluding end-device port modules), the BBS shall maintain its configuration information, the ability to enforce Virtual LANs (VLANs), filtering/forwarding policies, perform routing, and to support network management functions. This redundancy does not apply to end device ports or fiber trunks to ISMs, ESMs, or CESMs unless otherwise specified in the procurement document. b. Modules which are compatible with specified uplink modules of corresponding data rates and media types for the provided ESM Switches. c. In order to support future increased efforts to deploy multimedia presentations to the classroom, the Backbone Switch shall be capable of interoperating with other equipment manufacturer routers operating in a standards-based IP environment. d. Modules that provide Industry standard 802.3at or PoE+, power over Ethernet, without the requirement for an external power injector. e. All BBS network modules port-to-backplane throughput shall not exceed; (1) 2-to-1 over subscription on 1G line cards. (2) 3-to-1 over subscription on 10G line cards. f. Network Time Protocol (client mode). g. DHCP snooping or protection h. Uni-Directional Link Detection (UDLD) i. 802.1x compliant with support for multiple policies per port. j. Energy conservation features such as the ability to reduce power consumption at times of little activity. k. Support the following routing protocols: OSPFv2, OSPFv3, IGMP V2, PIM, RIP, RIPv2, and RIPng. l. The BBS shall provide QoS services at the local site. m. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees – The BBS shall be capable of supporting multiple, independent Spanning Tree Domains supporting multiple VLANs per domain. Each Spanning Tree Domain must be able to establish its own root bridge and active path. 3. The BBS, as provided, shall support (or provide) the following: a. Full compliant with the IEEE 802.3ae, 10GbE; unless otherwise noted by OWNER project requirement. b. Network management via industry standard protocols including SNMP, remote configuration, and remote notification of errors,
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 93 IFB No. 2000002197 events, and alerts. c. Static IP address assignment for the network management interface. d. Logging to report user access, configuration changes, system events, traps, and other interface and protocol events. e. Supporting network modules for specified uplink of corresponding data rates and media types for the provided ISM, ESM, and CESM Switches. f. Minimum of one 24-port PoE+ 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet module. The total number of PoE+ 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet ports required in the BBS must be determined on a site-by-site basis based on the Contract Documents for each site. All software features, firmware, and protocol support identified for the BBS in this specification. g. Minimum of one empty module slot with a blank cover for future expansion. h. Interoperate with the same user-created VLANs as on all switches to include the capability for VLANs to span across multiple switches connected to different ports on the BBS. Further, the Backbone Switch shall support a minimum of 1024 VLANs and shall fully support IEEE 802.1q frame tagging functions with native VLAN un- tagged capability. i. Transport and delivery of industry standard IP Multicast. The BBS shall, at a minimum, support IGMP V2 and IGMP snooping. j. IEEE 802.1p quality of service functions. QoS support must honor priority set by end devices to support Voice over IP and Video connections as well as support per port priority settings. k. User configurable to forwarding and filtering decisions based on protocols and applications to include Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) application ports and/or source/destination IP address filtering. The forwarding and filtering decision abilities shall be capable of enforcing policies on communications between different subnets or VLANs within the campus network as well as on communications through the OWAN connection or the Internet. l. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees – The BBS shall be capable of supporting multiple, independent Spanning Tree Domains supporting multiple VLANs per domain. Each Spanning Tree Domain must be able to establish its own root bridge and active path. m. Dual power supplies configuration. D. Intermediatee Switch-Managed (ISM): 1. The ISM shall be a19-inch rack mountable gigabit fiber switch,:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 94 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Full compliant with the IEEE 802.3ae, 10GbE for uplink connection unless otherwise noted by OWNER project requirement. b. The ISM Switches shall provide a minimum of twelve fiber-based 1 Gigabit Ethernet ports each and shall provide a modular slot to accommodate a variety of uplink modules. The available Uplink module options shall include, at a minimum: (1) 1GbE, or; (2) 10 GbE SFP+ c. Fiber interface modules shall be designed for multi-mode and/or single-mode fiber as appropriate for the required interface and distance. d. There are no empty port expansion requirements for an ISM. ISM provision one 10 GbE uplink to the BBS. When applicable, aggregated uplink connections shall adhere to the IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol specifications. e. The ISM switches’ performance shall provide at a minimum: (1) Provide at a minimum wire-speed, fully non-blocking performance within the switch. (2) Provide a worst-case switch throughput of no less than 3 Gbps. (3) Provide no less than 3 million 64-byte packets per second throughput Layer 2 with any or all features enabled. f. Network Time Protocol (client mode). 2. The ISM shall be capable of supporting the following: a. DHCP snooping or protection. b. Uni-Directional Link Detection (UDLD) or equivalent c. 802.1x compliant. d. Energy conservation features such as the ability to reduce power consumption at times of little activity. 3. The ISM, when provided as a Small-Site Backbone Switch (small BBS), shall support (or provide) the following: a. Full compliant with the IEEE 802.3ae, 10GbE uplink; unless otherwise noted by OWNER project requirement. b. Network management via industry standard protocols including SNMP, remote configuration, remote notification of errors, events, and alerts. c. Static IP address assignment for network management.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 95 IFB No. 2000002197 d. In-band configuration via command line interface over Telnet, SSH, or HTTP. e. Remote configuration load via TFTP or FTP. f. Logging to report user access, configuration changes, system events, traps, and other interface and protocol events. g. 1GbE uplink module as appropriate for distance connection to CESMs. h. The switch shall support a minimum of 255 VLANs and shall fully support IEEE 802.1q frame tagging functions with native VLAN un- tagged capability. i. At least one fiber optic port for 1000 Base-SX as required for CESM. The use of media conversion external to the switch is not permitted by the OWNER. j. IEEE 802.1p quality of service functions. QoS support must honor priority set by end devices to support Voice over IP and Video connections as well as support per port priority settings. k. Transport and delivery of industry standard IP Multicast. l. DHCP snooping or protection. m. Uni-Directional Link Detection (UDLD) or equivalent n. 802.1x compliant with support for multiple policies per port. o. Energy conservation features such as the ability to reduce power consumption at times of little activity. 4. The ISM with a single power supply acoustic noise level shall not exceed 46 dB. E. Edge Switch-Managed (ESM): The ESM shall be a modular or workgroup, 19-inch rack mountable switch, and manageable via a single IP address. 1. The general ESM requirements are as follows: a. Full compliant with the IEEE 802.3ae, 10GbE uplink; unless otherwise noted by OWNER project requirement. b. The ESM Switches shall provide a minimum of twenty-four auto- negotiating 10/100/1000 Base-T with atleast one-half of total ports shall be equipped with PoE+. Each and shall provide a modular slot to accommodate a variety of uplink modules. The available uplink module options shall include, at a minimum, 10GbE multimode or single mode SFP+ modules; or 1GbE multimode or single mode uplink module option. c. Fiber interface modules shall be designed for multi-mode and/or single-mode fiber as appropriate for the required interface and distance. d. The ESM switches’ performance shall provide at a minimum:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 96 IFB No. 2000002197 (1) Provide at a minimum wire-speed, fully non-blocking performance within the switch. (2) Provide a worst-case switch throughput of no less than 80 Gbps. (3) Provide no less than 32 million packets per second throughput Layer 2 with any or all features enabled. e. Network Time Protocol (client mode).. 2. The ESM shall be capable of supporting the following: a. DHCP snooping or protection b. 802.1x compliant with support for multiple policies per port. c. Energy conservation features such as the ability to reduce power consumption at times of little activity. 3. The ESM shall meet the following: a. Full compliant with the IEEE 802.3ae, 10GbE uplink; unless otherwise noted by OWNER project requirement. b. Network management via industry standard protocols including SNMP, remote configuration, remote notification of errors, events, and alerts. c. Static IP address assignment for network management. d. In-band configuration via command line interface over Telnet, SSH, or HTTP/HTTPS. e. Remote configuration load via TFTP or FTP. f. Logging to report user access, configuration changes, system events, traps, and other interface and protocol events. g. 10GbE SFP+ multimode or single mode module as appropriate for distance for each connection to the BBS, unless otherwise noted by the OWNER’s project instruction. h. Interface to the BBS Switch and interoperate with the same user- created VLANs as on the ESM Switches to include the capability for VLANs to span across multiple ESMs connected to different ports on the BBS or ISM. The switch shall support a minimum of 255 VLANs and shall fully support IEEE 802.1q frame tagging functions with native VLAN un-tagged capability. i. At least one fiber optic port for 10GbE SFP+ multimode or single mode as required, plus PoE+ 10/100/1000 Base-T ports sufficient to accommodate active horizontal UTP connections. j. IEEE 802.1p quality of service functions. QoS support must honor priority set by end devices to support Voice over IP and Video connections as well as support per port priority settings.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 97 IFB No. 2000002197 k. Transport and deliver of industry standard IP Multipcast. The ISM and ESM shall, at a minimum, support IGMP V2 and IGMP snooping. 4. The ESM with a single power supply acoustic noise level shall not exceed 46 dB. Project proposal must include manufacturer published product datasheets, which shall include acoustic noise information for technical evaluation purposes. F. Compact Edge Switch-Managed (CESM) 1. The general CESM requirements are as follows: a. The CESM shall be 19-inch rack mountable and shall not exceed 1 Rack Unit (1.75”) mounting height and shall not exceed 14 inches mounting depth. b. The CESM shall be of a type that operates silently and does not require a fan (internal or external) for cooling. c. The CESM Switch shall provide at a minimum wire-speed, fully non- blocking performance within the switch. d. Capable of supporting SNMP e. DHCP snooping or protection f. 802.1x compliant. g. Energy conservation features such as the ability to reduce power consumption at times of little activity. 2. The CESM shall meet the following: a. Minimum of seven, but not to exceed twelve, auto-negotiating PoE 10/100/1000 Base-T ports. b. Minimum of one user selectable uplink port capable of supporting 1000 Base-SX, or 1000 Base-LX, designed for use with multi-mode or single mode fiber for connectivity to the corresponding interface in the BBS or ISM switch. c. Fiber interface modules shall be designed for multi-mode or single- mode fiber as appropriate for individual required interfaces, distance, and connectivity to the corresponding modules in the BBS, or ISM Switch. d. Interface with the ISM and BBS switches and interoperate with the same user-created VLANs as on the ISM and BBS switches. Further, the CESM shall fully support IEEE 802.1q frame tagging functions with native VLAN un-tagged capability. e. IEEE 802.1p quality of service functions. QoS support must honor priority set by end devices to support Voice over IP and Video connections as well as support per port priority settings.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 98 IFB No. 2000002197 f. Transport and delivery of industry standard IP Multicast. The CESM shall, at a minimum, support IGMP V2 and IGMP snooping. g. Network management via industry standard protocols including SNMP, remote configuration, and remote notification of errors, events, and alerts. h. Static IP address assignment for the network management interface. i. In-band configuration via command line interface over console Telnet, SSH, or HTTP. j. Remote configuration load/upgrade via TFTP or FTP. G. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): UPS is required for all LAN system equipment in the MDF. 1. The general UPS requirements are as follows: a. Each UPS shall provide network grade line conditioning, lightning protection, surge protection, and protection against voltage swell and sag. b. The UPS shall continue to conduct electricity regardless of the battery condition or state. c. The UPS shall receive one auto-negotiate Ethernet Interface supporting SNMP. d. The UPS systems shall support user replaceable, valve regulated lead acid, batteries. The UPS shall support a bypass mode or otherwise support battery service and replacement without interrupting power to the equipment plugged into the UPS. 2. The UPS shall meet the following: a. Ethernet Interface supporting SNMP. b. Initiating a safe system shutdown by a server. All necessary hardware and software shall be included. c. The UPS shall provide, after a loss of AC power input, the capability to support the continued operation of the connected equipment provided as part of this specification as follows: (1) MDF– 60 minutes run time. (2) IDF/ LDF- UPS not required for non-convergence sites. d. On sites where IP convergence technology is being employed, all UPS’ shall have 60 minutes run time regardless of the type of frame that it is installed in: (1) MDF – 60 minutes run time (2) IDF/ LDF – 60 minutes run time
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 99 IFB No. 2000002197 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. To ensure that the installation does not diminish the existing capabilities of any school and as precursor to the execution and installation of any LAN equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall review the migration plan for each school with the OWNER’s Program Office before a NTP at the school is provided.
3.02 LAN INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTORs implementing network components on the OWNER Network are responsible for the initial configuration of the component in compliance with the following OWNER standards: 1. The device shall be physically connected into the OWNER’s network using OWNER-approved cabling, cabling specifications, and into the connection point specified by OWNER staff. 2. The device shall be configured in a manner that allows its management functions to be successfully verified by central staff. At a minimum, this includes configuration of the management agent with OWNER-provided values for the following configuration items: a. IP address of all network interfaces b. IP address of the gateway c. VLAN` d. Read-Only SNMP Community String e. Read-Write SNMP Community String f. Centralized authentication/access server. g. IP-based SNMP access control h. SNMP trap receiver (destination) 3. All LAN systems shall be installed in accordance with CONTRACTOR installation guidelines and in compliance with the product warranty. B. Routers 1. The router shall provide the interface to connect the local network to the centralized OWAN Distribution point(s). A minimum of three physical LAN interfaces shall be required. A minimum of one OWAN interface shall be required. Refer to the Contract Documentation for specific site requirements. 2. The router shall provide the single point of OWAN connection from the BBS for the entire LAN. A minimum of one OWAN interface shall be required. Refer to the Contract Documentation for site specific requirements. 3. The router shall be installed in the MDF for the site in the cabinets provided and designated for such. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 100 IFB No. 2000002197 4. The router shall be installed in accordance with CONTRACTOR installation guidelines and in compliance with the product warranty. C. Backbone Switch (BBS) 1. Unless otherwise specified in Contract Documentation, there shall be one BBS per location installed in the MDF. 2. The BBS shall be mounted in the designated cabinet, usually the same cabinet or adjacent cabinet to the fiber patch facility and UPS system. 3. The BBS is the central point to which all connections from IDFs and LDFs are terminated. It is also the point at which connection to the OWAN router is made along with connectivity to designated primary campus servers. 4. The Backbone Switch constitutes the intelligent electronics portion of the collapsed backbone architecture upon which the system design is based. The BBS shall provide the primary routing functions between user VLANs, between the user VLANs and the Router, and between the user VLANs and the OWAN if an Access router is not to be installed at the site. 5. Installed in accordance with CONTRACTOR installation guidelines and in compliance with the product warranty. D. Edge Switch–Managed (ESM) 1. ESM Switches (Copper Switches) are used, as required, to provide network connectivity to copper connections that are terminated in IDF and LDF cabinets. The ESM Switches are intended to be located in IDF or LDF cabinets and connect via fiber optic uplink(s) to the BBS. Where ESM switches are located in LDF cabinets fiber optic patch cables installed between secondary backbone and primary backbone fiber patch panels. 2. Each ESM shall be mounted within an IDF or LDF cabinet. 3. An ESM shall be used, when required, to provide connectivity in the following: a. Library b. Multi-purpose room(s) c. Cafeteria d. Gymnasium(s) and Auditorium as specified on the site plan e. Computer Lab(s) as specified on the site plan 4. Installed in accordance with CONTRACTOR installation guidelines and in compliance with the product warranty. E. Fiber Patch Cables 1. The CONTRACTOR shall supply multi-mode and single-mode duplex fiber patch cables, as appropriate, for every fiber interface provided. Patch cables shall be supplied to provide a duplex interface to the fiber patch facility. 2. Unless otherwise defined in the Contract Documents, Fiber Patch facilities Section II.D –Technical Specifications 101 IFB No. 2000002197 shall use the following convention: a. Structured cabling fiber patch facility terminations shall be consistent throughout the facility (LC). b. Sites with 50 micron multi-mode fiber shall use LC patch facility terminations (single mode as well as multimode fiber). 3. All patch cables shall be new and shall be certified by the manufacturer for use on the designated equipment interface and the installed fiber cable plant. 4. Fiber patch cable length shall vary depending on location. All patch cables must be of sufficient length to be neatly loomed in the cable management system between the fiber patch facility and the designated equipment interface. 5. 50 micron multi-mode patch cables shall be aqua, and single mode patch cables shall be yellow. F. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 1. Each MDF shall be installed with a UPS. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the appropriate power connection for each UPS as specified by the UPS manufacturer’s installation requirements and applicable local, state and federal electrical, fire and safety codes. 3. UPS shall be rack mounted at the bottom (or near the bottom) of the cabinet/rack or adjacent rack of the systems for which it shall provide power. If installed in a cabinet in a “raised floor” room, a minimum of 4 inches and maximum of 7 inches of open rack space shall be maintained at the bottom of the rack. 4. Access to the front and back of the UPS shall not be impeded. All service access doors and cages shall be fully accessible. 5. Neither the UPS or associated battery packs shall rest on the bottom of the cabinet, rack or the floor 6. Provision a SNMP interface card for all UPS. Connect and configure the UPS SNMP, Ethernet interface to the network using OWNER provided device name and IP address. Other configuration requirements are contained elsewhere in this specification. 7. Installed in accordance with CONTRACTOR installation guidelines and in compliance with the product warranty.
3.03 RELATED SYSTEMS or SUB-COMPONENT INSTALLATION A. Labeling and Marking 1. Provide complete equipment and cable location charts and as-built documentation in an envelope and attach to the inside rear doors of distribution frame cabinets in wiring spaces. 2. Mark all patch cables with computer-generated labels. Patch cables shall be labeled with the same identifier as on the receptacle faceplate, and/or on the
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 102 IFB No. 2000002197 patch panel. Cable markers shall be located within 2 inches of each end of the cable jacket and shall be directly readable. The cable marker at both ends of the cable shall be identical and shall identify both the source (device/port) and destination (jack, patch panel, or device/port position identifier). A disk with the label files shall be submitted as part of the project record documents.
3.04 CERTIFICATION AND TESTING A. All hardware components (e.g. switches, routers) shall be tested for proper installation (per manufacturers’ recommendations) and configuration. All components shall be tested using standard TCP/IP application utilities that collectively address network layer connectivity, IP packet path routing, and network performance. These tests are to be conducted during normal operation and for each site individually. Test results shall be indexed by site and device tested. Provide one hardcopy (8 ½ x 11 format) and three electronic copies in Microsoft Excel (newest version for Windows) format. The Excel file shall contain columns for the site name, location, device name, interface, and results for each test. 1. Internet Control and Message Protocol (ICMP) Ping Test: This test verifies the network layer for connectivity by using Ether-type frame pings to reach IP target addresses and obtain or verify four results: 1) the target IP address, 2) the local media access control (MAC), 3) the number of responses, and 4) the response time. Each test shall be conducted from all areas to the router interface and from at least one connection per VLAN to at least one connection on all other VLANs, as required. Each test includes two steps, as necessary: a. Obtain the four results by performing an address resolution protocol (ARP) for the target IP address and by verifying the ping. b. If test 1 is unsuccessful, obtain the four results by executing an ARP for the default router, then use the acquired MAC address to determine the IP address, send an ICMP echo request, and monitor for the ICMP reply. c. ICMP Test results shall identify the target device IP address and Pass/Fail result. 2. Trace Route/Path Discover: This test determines the path IP packets follow and reports each router encountered in the path. Testing elicits an ICMP TIME-EXCEEDED response from each router encountered. Each hop is tested three times to help identify changing routes. The delay between each of the three tests shall not be less than 15 seconds and not more than 1 minute. This test shall be conducted from a workstation on each VLAN with a destination address to be provided by the OWNER. a. Trace Router/Path Discover test results shall be recorded as Pass – same route all three tests; or Fail – different route reported in one of the three tests. In the event of Fail, an explanation of why a different route was reported must be provided.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 103 IFB No. 2000002197 3. Configuration Test: This test verifies that each new network port is operational. Perform an ICMP ping from each port not previously tested ensuring each port has link light indicating port operability. Any failures in any one port shall constitute the return of the failed equipment for new network equipment from the appropriate CONTRACTOR. Test results should identify the VLAN, IP address obtained or assigned for each port, the target device IP address, and the Ping results (Pass/Fail). 4. Completion: CONTRACTOR’s work for each school installation shall be considered complete after the following have been accomplished: a. All system testing has been completed, CONTRACTOR certifies that entire system is in working order, and Test Forms and Project Record Documents have been submitted and approved by the OWNER. b. All ceiling panels previously removed have been put back in place. c. All system labels have been put in place. d. All construction and installation debris and scrap materials have been removed from project site. e. All marked up, project record documents have been returned to the OWNER. f. All unused customer material has been returned to the OWNER. g. The OWNER has successfully completed acceptance testing of the network installation. h. The OWNER’s Inspector has inspected and accepted the installation. i. Documentation, to include AS-builts, along with required soft copies has been turned over to the OWNER.
3.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prior to the submittal of any final documentation, the CONTRACTOR shall provide to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office the following for the entire contract: 1. Three (3) electronic copies on USB flash drive of the hardware manufacturer documentation (PDF format) and software per model number of equipment installed throughout the project. B. Prior to the submittal of final documentation for each site, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the following to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office for review and acceptance: 1. One (1) 24” x 36” hard (paper) copy of the completed full set of As-Builts. 2. One (1) electronic (USB flash drive) copy of the completed full set of As- Builts in latest AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio file format. 3. Complete set of original red line drawings.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 104 IFB No. 2000002197 4. One (1) hard (11” x 17” paper) copy and one electronic copy of the asset/inventory list utilizing the OWNER required Excel format 5. One (1) hard (11” x 17” paper) copy and one electronic copy of the inventory list of equipment removed from the site utilizing the OWNER required Excel format. 6. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the final invoice (bill of materials) for all work, E-rate discounted and/or funded through other sources under the contract. 7. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the Visio diagram of the OWNER approved warranty process, the warranty term effective from T&A acceptance, and written narrative that outlines the details the process that includes but is not limited to the following: 7. CONTRACTOR’s warranty contact information 8. CONTRACTOR’s process for tracking changes during the warranty period. 8. One (1) electronic (USB flash drive) copy of the complete set of final test results in native format and one hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the test result summary. Included on the electronic USB flash drive copy shall be the associated software to read the test results. 9. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the cable management plan (in Excel format) as required in Specification 25569. 10. One (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of all site specific signed RFCs, one (1) hard (8 ½” x 11” paper) copy of the General RFC log, and one (1) electronic USB flash drive copy of all RFCs for the site. C. Once the above referenced documents have been accepted, the CONTRACTOR shall provide to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office the following for each site: 1. Three (3) electronic closeout USB flash drive copies. Disk label shall include project name, school name, school location code, contents descriptor, table of contents, revision number and date of disk, and CONTRACTOR information. Each electronic closeout USB flash drive shall contain the following: j. Submit media in paper sleeve with see thru window. k. A cover page with school name, location code, address, project name, prepared for, prepared by, revision number, and the final revision date of the bound book l. A table of contents m. The asset/inventory list utilizing the OWNER required Excel format n. The final invoice (bill of materials list as required for closeout documentation) for all work, E-rate discounted and/or funded through other sources under the contract
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 105 IFB No. 2000002197 o. The complete set of final cable test results in native format and the associated software to read the test results p. The cable test result summary in PDF format q. The cable management plan A Visio diagram of the OWNER approved warranty process, the warranty term effective from T&A acceptance, and written narrative that outlines the details the process that includes but is not limited to the following: r. CONTRACTOR’s warranty contact information s. CONTRACTOR’s process for tracking changes during the warranty period following OWNER requirements outlined in the RFP. t. The accepted full set of As-Builts with required BICSI/PE stamps and signatures u. All site specific RFCs and the General RFC log v. All General RFCs for the project 2. Four (4) electronic USB flash drive copies of the completed full set of As- builts in latest AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio file format. 3. Two (2) electronic USB flash drive copies, identified with “IT Asset Management”, which shall consist of the following: d. The asset/inventory list utilizing the OWNER required format. e. The inventory list of equipment removed from the site utilizing the OWNER required format. f. A Visio diagram of the OWNER approved warranty process, the warranty term effective from T&A acceptance, and written narrative that outlines the details the process that includes but is not limited to the following: 1) CONTRACTOR’s warranty contact information 2) CONTRACTOR’s process for tracking changes during the warranty period 4. All MDF, IDF, and LDF cabinet keys; No keys are to be left with the schools. 5. Unattached accessories for all electronic equipment at the school site (including serial and other cables, adapters, etc.). The OWNER shall identify the quantities required. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall provide to the IT Infrastructure Project Management Office and identified as “Facilities Vault” for each site, one (1) electronic USB flash drive copy of accepted As-Builts in latest AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio file format. 7. One (1) 24” x 36” hard (paper) copy of the completed full set of As-Builts.
3.06 PROTECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 106 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.07 CLEANUP A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.08 OWNER ORIENTATION (TRAINING) A. Before contract closeout of installation, provide to designated OWNER personnel: 1. Provide a minimum a one week training course for OWNER designated representatives. The content of the training is advanced instruction on the use, programming, maintenance and troubleshooting of the LAN/WAN devices associated within this specification. Materials shall include training manuals and hands-on lab exercises. The training shall be delivered during the funding year. The training shall be provided at the equipment manufacturer’s authorized training facility located in Los Angeles County. Training shall consist of classroom instruction including intensive course work covering the following topics: a. Product Features and Technical Specifications b. Implementation and Design as–built including installed LAN/WAN ARCHITECTure, familiarization with drawing sets, symbols and notation as well as other record documents. c. Complete understanding of the system ARCHITECTure and design of implemented solution. d. Complete function and feature analysis on implemented solution including command line interface (CLI) including, but not limited to: (1) CLI Modes and sub-modes (2) CLI Hierarchy (3) CLI Commands e. A fault tree analysis to assist the service technician who troubleshoots and fix problems on implemented solution. f. Basic elements replacement procedures on implemented solution. g. Operating System configuration elements as-built h. VoIP and Network requirements and basics elements check list. i. maintenance and troubleshooting tools of implemented solution j. Support escalation and contact information on implemented solution
END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 107 IFB No. 2000002197 PART 4 - ATTACHMENTs
Attachment A – LAN Systems checklist
A. Quality Assurance OWNER is to examine the following items based on the criteria defined in section 25805 (LAN
Systems).
OWNER is to examine 100% of Backbone Switch, Edge Switch Managed, and Access Router.
Other items shall be tested at a 10% rate. If deficiencies are noted the system shall be failed.
OWNER shall consider continuing testing at a 20% rate to determine the integrity of the system.
Installation Check List Pass Fail Are all CONTRACTOR furnished systems and related equipment installed as specified? Backbone Switch (BBS)? Intermediate Switch Managed (ISM) Edge Switch Managed (ESM)? Compact Edge Switch Managed (CESM) Access Router? Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)? Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cables and interface modules? Fiber Optic Cables and modules (multi-mode and/or single- mode)? Are all required racks and cabinets installed as specified? Is the BBS, and the ESMs, from a single manufacturer? Have IP addresses and VLANs been configured on required systems? Has SNMP been configured on all required systems? Were all submittals provided as specified in section 1.03? Has all documentation been provided as specified in sections 1.05.A.13 & B.4?
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 108 IFB No. 2000002197 Functionality Check List Pass Fail BBS: Static IP Address Support? Hot Swappable Power Supplies? Remote Configuration Load via TFTP or FTP? In-band configuration via Telnet and SSH? Remote SNMP Management? Configuration of VLAN Trunks and IEEE 802.1q Tags? RMON Group 1 & 2 Statistics? IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Domains? Network Time Protocol (NTP) Support? Logging to Report User Access, Configuration Changes, and System Events? IP Multicasting (IGMPv2 and IGMP Snooping)? IEEE 802.1p QoS? IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation? IEEE 802.3at or PoE+ Power over Ethernet? ESM: Static IP Address Support? Hot Swappable Power Supplies? Remote Configuration Load via TFTP or FTP? In-band configuration via Telnet and SSH? Remote SNMP Management? Configuration of VLAN Trunks and IEEE 802.1q Tags? RMON Group 1 Statistics? Network Time Protocol (NTP) Support? Logging to Report User Access, Configuration Changes, and System Events? IP Multicasting (IGMPv2 and IGMP Snooping)? IEEE 802.1p QoS? IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation? IEEE 802.3at or PoE+ Power over Ethernet? Access Router: Static IP Address Support?
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 109 IFB No. 2000002197 Functionality Check List Pass Fail Provides DHCP Services for IP Devices at Local Site? Provides NTP Services for IP Devices at Local Site? Hot Swappable Power Supplies? Remote Configuration Load via TFTP or FTP? In-band configuration via Telnet and SSH? Remote SNMP Management? Access Control-based Security Model (e.g., ACLs)? RMON Group 1 & 2 Statistics? IPsec with NAT and PAT? SNA over IP? Logging to Report User Access, Configuration Changes, and System Events? IP Routing using OSPF? IP Multicast Routing using PIM?
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 110 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT D – 27 3100 CONVERGED IP TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 3100
CONVERGED IP TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes: Equipment provision, installation, integration, configuration, testing, training, documentation, and acceptance criteria of Converged Telecommunication systems. B. The project procurement scenario is defined as follows: 1. CONTRACTOR Furnished, CONTRACTOR Installed. In this scenario the CONTRACTOR will bid both the equipment and installation based on OWNER provided system requirements and deployment scope. In addition, the CONTRACTOR will provide all necessary preparation, equipment configuration, clean-up, project documentation, and consumables necessary to implement a fully functioning system. 2. CONTRACTOR Furnished, OWNER Installed. In this scenario the CONTRACTOR will bid only the equipment based on OWNER provided system requirements. In addition, the CONTRACTOR will provide all necessary preparation and consumable supplies to implement a fully functioning system. 3. OWNER Furnished, CONTRACTOR Installed. In this scenario the CONTRACTOR will bid only the installation of system equipment to be provided by OWNER. Validation of equipment against the OWNER provided network design and design documents is recommended. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for providing all necessary preparation, equipment configuration, clean-up, project documentation, and consumables necessary to implement a fully functioning system.
1.02 REFERENCES A. Complete installation shall meet or exceed the latest edition of following standards: 1. EIA/TIA-568: Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard 2. EIA/TIA-569: Commercial building standard for telecommunications pathways and spaces 3. EIA/TIA-606: Administration standard for telecommunications infrastructure of commercial buildings 4. EIA/TIA-607: Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications 5. California Building Code (CBC)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 111 IFB No. 2000002197 6. California Electrical Code (CEC) 7. ANSI, ASTM, UL, NEMA, IEEE and FCC standards as applicable 8. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition 9. ITU-T G.711, G.722, G.723, G.728, G.729, H.261, H.263, H.264, H.281, H.320, H.323, MGCP, SIP, and T.120 standards 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 (Ethernet), 802.3Z (Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber), 802.3ab (Gigabit Ethernet over 4 pair category 5 or higher), 802.11 (Wireless LAN) 11. DID IC IOR IP Direct Inward Dialing Intercommunications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Division 01. 1. Furnish catalog cuts, technical data, and descriptive literature on components. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data. 2. Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns. a. The first assembly shall be the major head end equipment. b. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the applicable specification section number, and followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item. c. The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items other than as specified. B. Each submittal shall contain product data sheets or catalog cut sheets for each item listed in the Index. These shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is shown, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. 1. The product data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the engineer to evaluate the suitability of the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination. C. Preliminary Plans: Submit documentation including a preliminary installation schedule, architecture and design plan, and call flow patterns to OWNER for review prior to the start of work. Installation Work shall not commence before installation CONTRACTOR receives District approval of design and architecture. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide a migration and integration plan that details the CONTRACTOR’s implementation strategy to complete the Telecommunication or Converged system. This plan shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 112 IFB No. 2000002197 E. Sample Materials: CONTRACTOR shall provide samples of material and equipment as required by the ARCHITECT. If samples are requested, they shall be submitted within 10 days from the date of request. F. Certified Statements: CONTRACTOR shall provide the following certification statements: 1. CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of a letter from the manufacturer of submitted equipment certifying that the installer is an authorized and certified distributor and installer of the submitted equipment. Only a qualified CONTRACTOR holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work, shall do the work. 2. Provide a letter signed by a corporate officer, partner, or OWNER of the contracting company describing the service capability of the company and stating the company’s commitment to maintain that service capability through the initial and extended warranty period. 3. CONTRACTOR shall provide a letter from the Manufacturer assuring the availability of spare parts common to proposed system for a period no less than 5 years on all components. 4. Certification of compliance that California Health and Safety Code requirements for products containing substances identified in the California Lighting Efficiency and Toxics Reduction Act shall not exceed the following allowed content in parts per million (ppm): a. Lead content > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. b. Mercury Content > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. c. Cadmium Content > 0.01% or 100 ppm. d. Hexavalent Chromium > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. e. Polybrominated Biphenyls > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. f. Polybrominated Biphenyls Ether > 0.1% or 1000 ppm. G. Inventory of removed and installed systems shall be documented in the OWNER provided Asset Management Excel Workbook as required by Contract Documents.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS D. Equipment and materials that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S ITD project manager. When deviating or substituting equipment, the following information shall be submitted: 6. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER. 7. OWNER’S approval shall be obtained for any equipment or materials substitutions. Proposed substitutions requests shall provide proof of compliance with OWNER’S criteria described in this specifications. 8. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 113 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Work shall conform to CCR, Title 24 Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulation and National Electrical Code, latest edition. B. Only a qualified CONTRACTOR holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work, shall do the work. C. Installed telecommunications system shall be acceptable to local operating access provider, and shall be registered by the FCC for direct connection to public telephone network. D. Prior to the start of work, verify public utility serving location or access splice location. Determine work required, equipment, and material to be furnished for a complete installation. E. The CONTRACTOR shall use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are manufacturer certified, thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary crafts, and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work. F. Work shall be performed by an installer that has completed at least 5 school systems of equal scope to system described herein and shall have been engaged in business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least 5 years. Installer shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to equipment. G. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a project manager who has demonstrated the ability to supervise a telecommunications project. The project manager must be available to be interviewed by OWNER and/or their representative, and must be deemed acceptable by OWNER and/or their representative. The Project Manager must be available to attend meetings as required. Acceptance will not be unreasonably withheld. H. CONTRACTOR shall assure their ability to service the warranty; see Part I, Paragraph 1.07, Warranty below, on all Work executed and materials furnished to be free from defects of material and workmanship. I. Material or Work damaged during the planning, installation, testing, and clean-up of this project must be replaced or repaired by the CONTRACTOR, at no expense to the District, to meet current District specifications before final acceptance of work. Examination of or failure to examine Work by the District shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from these obligations. J. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate cable runs, and rack equipment locations with the OWNER’s Project Management Office during the initial design of the cable installation. CONTRACTOR and Program Office must agree as to the final location of all devices and the cable plant design. K. CONTRACTOR shall provide manpower and tools required to participate in OWNER’s Quality Assurance Testing. CONTRACTOR is required to refer to Section 25570 for complete understanding of Quality Assurance and Testing requirements. L. Permits and Inspections: CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for required permits and inspections; deliver certificates of inspection to the IOR.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 114 IFB No. 2000002197 M. CONTRACTOR will be required to furnish all labor, supervision, tooling, miscellaneous mounting hardware, consumables, and documentation for all systems furnished and/or installed. In addition, the CONTRACTOR will provide design-build and integration services as specified by the OWNER point of contact. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to propose any and all items required for a complete and operational system.
1.06 WARRANTY A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of, or failure to, examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. B. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. C. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than 5 years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. D. Installation CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to OWNER ITD Project Management. E. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that a Converged IP Public Address and Intercommunication system component, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate, or repeated failure rate, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems of the same model purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a project manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 115 IFB No. 2000002197 1. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be: a. Equal to or less than 10% in any 12 month period during the original warranty term. b. Equal to or less than 15% cumulative failures during the entire term of the original warranty. 2. If, at any time during of the life of the products, the failure rate of the Converged IP Telecommunication systems or components exceeds 20%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition. 4. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days or written notification from the OWNER. 5. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service. F. The warranty shall cover the complete system including fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. G. The warranty shall include onsite 48-hour advanced part replacement. H. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). I. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. J. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty.
1.07 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Principal items of Work in this Section include but are not limited to: 1. Installing and connecting telecommunications equipment cabinet, attendant consoles and telephone instruments with telecommunications system provisions for paging over PA system. 2. Furnishing and installing connections to telecommunications main grounding busbar and power supplies, including backup power. 3. Interfacing and connecting telecommunications system with public utilities telephone lines at the minimum point of entry.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 116 IFB No. 2000002197 4. Furnishing and installing wiring, connectors, and power supplies as specified and as required to comply with requirements. 5. Provide coordination, test and acceptance, materials, and components required to provide a completely operable installation. B. General Converged IP Telecommunications System: 1. The System shall use a server based digital platform, microprocessor- controlled switching equipment, and shall include station and system features found on a typical high-end voice communications system, including station equipment of analog, digital voice, and voice over IP type. 2. Telecommunications systems shall utilize packet voice technology (VoIP). Equipment shall include station and system features found on a typical large enterprise voice communications system. In accordance with the Contract Documents and by direction supplied in OWNER installation drawings, installation drawings are part of the Contract Documents determine the best route and method for cable conveyance throughout the school. 3. System shall provide an open architecture allowing the addition of products from multiple CONTRACTORs. This includes support for the latest open standards such as SIP. 4. For CONTRACTOR systems, the CONTRACTOR shall install baseline operating system, programming, and customized templates furnished by OWNER. No deviations from templates are permitted. 5. Minimum requirements for system configuration shall be detailed in each project specific Scope of Work. 6. The system shall include all call paging access from the VoIP Telephone system, access to individual speaker, zone paging, all calls, other rooms, etc. System shall also provide for interfacing with the clock system for a class change signaling system and Fire Alarm system with override of PA tone signaling capability. The clock system shall include IP based NTP or master clock. 7. System trunks shall provide support for the following feature sets: a. Analog foreign-exchange-office (FXO) Loop and Ground Start or SIP b. SIP trunks and RFC 2833 or SIP c. Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI) support (NI2, 4ESS, 5ESS, DMS250) d. Q.Sig digital trunking to provide interoperability between platforms. e. Automatic Route Selection for Trunk Groups f. Caller ID name and number g. Automatic number identification (ANI)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 117 IFB No. 2000002197 h. Digital trunk support (T1/E1) i. Call Coverage j. Direct inward dialing (DID) k. Direct outward dialing (DOD) l. H.323 trunks with H.450 support. m. Support for fax machines on foreign-exchange-station (FXS) ports or ATA using H.323. Including T.38 for fax support. n. Transcoding with support for G.711 A-Law, G.711 µ-Law, and G.729a codecs. o. SIP interoperability with existing systems e.g. PBX systems, voicemail systems, conference bridges. 8. System shall provide the following feature sets: a. Time of Day Feature b. System speed dial c. Call hold and retrieve d. Message-waiting indicator (MWI) and message center support e. Call transfer and park recall; transfer to voicemail f. Call Park and pick-up on SIP phones g. Call Park assign to extension h. Conference Calling - multiple participant conference call i. Call Forwarding variations including Fixed, Variable, Busy Line, Don’t Answer, and Busy Line/Don’t Answer j. Call forward all restriction control k. Call waiting l. Long distance call restriction control m. Per-call caller ID blocking n. Time-of-day and day-of-week call blocking restriction o. Support of failover and automatic recovery p. Do not disturb (DND), ring with DND set, display of DND state q. Auto answer with headset r. On–hook dialing s. Hook flash pass-through across analog PSTN trunks t. Customization of soft keys u. Support for fax machines of foreign-exchange-station (FXS) ports or ATA using H.323 or SIP
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 118 IFB No. 2000002197 v. 911 Calling Number Identification w. Capability to integrate with future E911 projects x. Send All Calls y. Automatic Route Selection or Least Cost Routing for Trunk Groups z. Media Gateway supporting Trunk side IP call routing aa. Dynamic hunt-group (login or logout) bb. Music on hold (MoH) audio interface cc. Support for third party zone based paging application. dd. Support for single number and paging for SIP endpoints ee. Support for SIP-initiated conference ff. Wideband audio (G.722) gg. Support E.164 standard hh. Night Service (1) Night service bell or call forwarding (2) Night station (3) Trunk group night (4) Trunk answer from any station (5) Night console (6) Hunt group night ii. Bridged Call Appearance (Single line telephone) jj. Bridged Call Appearance (Multi-Appearance Telephone) kk. Privacy (manual/automatic exclusion) ll. Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup mm. Abbreviated Dialing nn. Silent monitoring of calls by an authorized user, or recording of calls using a centralized recording server regardless of phone type used. oo. Last Number Dialed pp. Dial Plans supporting 3 to 11 digit dialing qq. Telephone Display (multiple languages) rr. Directory name lookup ss. Loudspeaker paging access tt. Extension Status (attendant) System shall provide the following feature sets for voicemail integration:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 119 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Integration with third-party voicemail integration (H.323 or SIP). b. Integration with voicemail and Automated-Attendant solution (SMDI). 9. System shall provide the following feature sets for International Localization: a. Per-phone localization for up to five local languages per system, including English, Spanish, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean. 10. System shall provide the following feature sets for Management: a. Centralized management of per-phone localization for up to five local languages per system, including English, Spanish, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean. b. Single GUI for moves, adds, and changes for system and integrated voicemail with three levels of GUI administration: System administrator, customer administrator, and user. c. Telephony-service setup and configuration. d. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support for management by third-party management consoles. B. Equipment specifications for the Project site shall be as indicated on Contract Drawings, Project Manuals, and Request for Proposal and/or as specified herein. D. Catalog and model numbers listed are intended to establish type and quality of equipment and system design as well as required operating features. Any deviations from intended functions of system specified require Architect review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS K. Where applicable, all product components shall be listed by UL. L. Proposed products must have been commercially available to the general public for a period of at least six (6) months and must be available for purchase at the time of bid submittal. No pioneering, unproven or experimental technologies/products are acceptable.
2.02 TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT (OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Telecommunications system shall be furnished with a minimum of one cabinet/rack including capacity to be determined site specific, using fully digital control circuits, line cards, trunk cards, and Ethernet cards. Voice over IP functionality is required. Equipment shall be registered and approved for direct access to line connection of public telephone lines or trunks. System shall be furnished with the following components: 1. Communication Server/Voice Gateway with dual power supplies. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 120 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Interface cards and integration are to be specified per project scope of work (SOW)
2.03 TYPE OF TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS (OWNER FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Converged Voice Gateway shall provide support for the following features: 1. Codecs: G.711 A-Law, G.711 µ-Law, G.729, G.723 2. Signaling/Call Control: H.323, MGCP, SIP, Q.931, QSIG, CAS, E&M 3. Automatic voice/fax codec switching 4. H.323 gatekeeper and SIP proxy server 5. Dial Plans supporting 3 to 11 digit dialing 6. DTMF digit collection and generation 7. Direct Inward Dial (DID) support 8. Voice Activity Detection (VAD) 9. Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) 10. Configurable voice frame sizes 11. T.38 real-time Fax over IP support 12. Fax PCM Pass-Through (G.711) 13. PSTN Interfaces: T1, PRI, and DSL direct or via LAN interface as required 14. Capable of interfacing with PBX via T1, PRI, IP, or SIP trunk as required 15. LAN Interfaces: Minimum of one auto-negotiating 10/100/1000Base-T Ethernet port, or as specified in the procurement documents 16. Foreign Exchange Station (FXS) – minimum of two ports, or as specified in the procurement documents 17. Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) – minimum of two ports, or as specified in the procurement documents 18. Ear & Mouth (E&M) – minimum of two ports, or as specified in the procurement documents (Does OWNER use E&M?) 19. Rack mountable 20. Capable of supporting additional power supply 21. Adaptive dynamic jitter buffers 22. QoS & VLAN Support: DiffServ, 802.1p, 802.1q 23. SNMP v2c manageable (with MIB I/II support) 24. High availability site telephony 25. Configuration Support: CLI, TFTP, Secure Remote over IP network
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 121 IFB No. 2000002197 26. PSTN failover capability when IP network is unstable/unavailable 27. Minimum simultaneous VoIP calls: 50 B. Standard Converged VoIP Handset shall include the following features: 1. Single line; 2. LCD Display; 3. Full Duplex Hands Free Speakerphone; 4. Visual message waiting indicator; 5. Ring volume control; 6. Minimum four (4) Programmable function keys or a soft key interface; 7. Minimum of one (1) 10/100 Ethernet port or better; 8. Phone dialing pad compliant with the ADA. 9. Compliant with standards a. IEEE: 802.3 Ethernet, 802.3af or 802.11at b. ITU Codecs: G.711 A-Law G.711 µ-Law G.722 G.729 c. IETF: SIP, SRTP d. TCP/IP: DHCP e. Voice and signaling encryption i. SRTP for payload ii. TLS and/or IPSec for signaling C. Midrange Converged VoIP Handset shall include the following features: 1. Standard Converged VoIP handset features plus: 2. Minimum two (2) lines; 3. 3 Way conferencing; and, 4. User Configurable Contact Directory. 5. Lines can be any variety of internal or external lines. Unit shall be furnished with hold key, transfer/conference redial key, program/save key, speaker on/off, microphone/mute key, speaker volume control, speaker/microphone assembly, ringer volume control, and ring control. D. Executive Converged VoIP Handset shall include following features: 1. Midrange Converged VoIP handset features plus: 2. Minimum of Two-Port 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet of better 3. Minimum four (4) lines; and, 4. Expansion Module Capability. E. Attendant Converged VoIP Handset shall include following features:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 122 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Attendant Converged VoIP Handset Features 2. Executive Converged VoIP handset features Plus 3. Minimum Six (6) Lines; 4. Expansion Module(s) Capability; 5. USB port for call recording function; and, 6. XML API functionality. F. Conference Room Speaker Phone shall include following features: 1. Integration with video conferencing systems Executive Converged VoIP handset features Plus 2. Voice functionality Expansion Module(s) Capability; 3. Cell phone connection port; XML API functionality. 4. Multi-unit connectivity; and, 5. Expansion microphones included. G. Contact Center System shall include following features: 1. Agent greetings 2. Desktop agent and screen pops capabilities 3. Customer Self Service IVR 4. API for integration with database e.g. Oracle, SQL 5. System wide support for SIP, IP multicast 6. SIP handsets 7. Recording capabilities 8. Multiple roles and responsibilities e.g. Supervisor, Agents 9. LDAP integration 10. Secured web interface for system administration
2.04 NON-TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT A. Auxiliary Equipment and Hardware 1. Uninterruptible Power Supply a. Install a rack mounted uninterruptible power supply capable of sustaining normal operation of complete telecommunications system for a minimum of one hour in event of a commercial power failure. Power supply shall conform to telecommunications manufacturer requirements. The UPS unit shall also provide conditioning of the source power to maintain both frequency and voltage levels. The UPS shall also support Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) addressable and manageable through a standard Ethernet port. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 123 IFB No. 2000002197 install the wiring connection from the UPS Ethernet Port to an available Ethernet Switch Port, as well as configure the UPS with the appropriate, District-provided IP address.
PART 3 - EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION
A. To ensure the Converged IP Telecommunications system installation does not inhibit or disrupt the existing OWNER networking services, the CONTRACTOR must evaluate the proposed solutions against the IP network infrastructure and review service migration/integration/risk mitigation plans with OWNER ITD staff prior to any equipment installations or network configuration changes. B. Cabinets and Racks: Telecommunications system and cabinets/racks shall be installed in accordance with Zone 4 seismic requirements and shall not block any existing removable panels or swing-open doors required for normal system expansion or service. 1. All system component equipment shall be installed as recommended by the product manufacturer (unless otherwise directed by the OWNER authorized ITD personnel). 2. Work shall conform to California Electrical Code regulations and applicable local ordinances. 3. All circuit installations, voice trunks, voice instruments, cable runs, wiring enclosures, labeling, data connectors, and power sources shall be compliant with this Specification and related Specifications. 4. All system components shall be deployed at location(s) based on the CONTRACTOR’s design that was approved by authorized OWNER ITD personnel. 5. All system components shall be deployed at strategic locations approved by authorized OWNER ITD personnel to achieve optimal service performance and availability, and bandwidth management 6. Installation of all system component infrastructures shall be compliant with OWNER security and safety policies. C. PA System Integration: 1. Physical integration interface to PA system server shall be one of the following interface options: FXS, FXO, Ethernet, or T-1. 2. Logical integration interface to PA system server shall be SIP compliant. 3. Connect and test all PA/Intercom functionalities per test and acceptance criteria “ATTACHMENT A” appended at the end of the 25722 Converged IP Public Address/Intercommunications specification. B. Wiring:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 124 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Wiring within communication cabinets/racks shall be installed to conform to ITD 25568 Premise Wiring – Existing Facilities or 25569 Premise Wiring – New Facilities, and shall be terminated on patch panel for all required external connections. 2. Wiring shall be cabled, laced, and securely fastened in place so that it does not hinder system serviceability and weight is not imposed on equipment. C. Cables: 1. Install conductors and cables to devices indicated on Drawings. Provide conductor terminations to devices for complete telecommunications system to function as specified and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Cable runs shall be continuous, no splicing shall be allowed. Terminations shall be in communication cabinets/racks or on telephone backboards. Connections from incoming to outgoing shall be provided with cross- connect wires. Cables shall not directly connect to other cables. 3. Conductors and cables shall be installed within conduits, boxes, and cabinets/racks in a manner, which shall provide an enclosed installation, except where otherwise specified. Furnish and install conductors to connect incoming and outgoing circuits, including spare conductors, to terminal strips in the LAN or telephone equipment room. All in accordance with TIA/EIA 569. b. RELATED COMPONENT INSTALLATION A. Site Conditions: CONTRACTOR shall examine the areas and conditions under which the Work of this Section will be performed. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to OWNER’S personnel before the CONTRACTOR begins work. CONTRACTOR will work with the OWNER ITD Project Management Office to schedule the following converged system infrastructure Work activities as required by Contract Documents: 1. Converged System Equipment: Configure installed converged system equipment with configuration information provided by OWNER ITD PMO. 2. Converged System Cabling: a. All cabling associated with converged system component equipment must be compliant with OWNER specifications and technology standards. b. All circuits associated with the converged system infrastructure must be ordered through the appropriate OWNER organization. 3. Converged System Racks and Cabinets: All racks and cabinets associated with the installed converged system equipment shall be installed as required by the OWNER Architect. B. Uninterruptible Power Supply: Install a floor mounted uninterruptible power supply capable of sustaining normal operation of the complete converged system for a minimum of one hour in event of a commercial power failure. Power supply shall conform to manufacturer requirements. The UPS unit shall also provide
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 125 IFB No. 2000002197 conditioning of the source power to maintain both frequency and voltage levels. The UPS shall also be Simplified Network Management Protocol (SNMP) addressable and manageable through a standard Ethernet port. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the wiring connection from the UPS Ethernet Port to a designated Ethernet Switch Port, as well as configure the UPS with the appropriate, District-provided IP address and SNMP settings. C. Programming Telecommunications System: 1. Compile data need to program telecommunications system. Programming shall not be limited to features specified in this section and shall at a minimum contain architectural names, room numbers, and work station numbers. 2. Programming information will be provided by the District and will be validated with by the CONTRACTOR. This information shall not be changed without prior written approval by the ITD Telecommunications Branch. D. Coordination of Installation of Telecommunication Systems: 1. All Work, including installation or removal, will be coordinated with the OAR. Installer will be responsible for floor plans for cutover, station reviews, and cut sheets. Installer will also provide a complete and detailed scope of work prior to commencement of any implementation. 2. If the scope of the Work includes the extension and/or replacement of an existing telephone system, the cutover and station review must be coordinated with the OAR prior to implementation and every effort must be made to minimize interruption of service during the cutover or at any other time. Cutover should occur outside of normal business hours and should be kept to a minimum. The District will be notified in writing of any disruptions of more than four (4) hours. E. Examination: The IOR shall observe installation of main cable runs. Notify the IOR not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed time of installation. c. OWNERS QUALITY ASSURANCE CERTIFICATION AND TESTING A. All converged system components will be tested for proper installation (per OWNER’s requirements and manufacturer’s recommendations for configuration). CONTRACTOR shall develop and execute a written Test Plan to demonstrate the converged system infrastructure’s functional compliance with each area of this Specification. The test plan must be accepted in writing from an authorized OWNER representative prior to execution. Some tests must be conducted during normal business operation hours with various usage demands generated from each converged infrastructure site individually and collectively. 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all instruments for testing and demonstrate, in presence of the Architect, that all circuits and wiring test free of shorts and grounds. 2. Prior to calling for a walk test, the following shall be completed: Furnish all labor, instruments, appliances, equipment, and materials necessary to Section II.D –Technical Specifications 126 IFB No. 2000002197 demonstrate to the Architect the installation performs as required and specified. 3. The OWNER reserves the right to perform independent tests of equipment furnished, to determine whether or not equipment complies with requirements specified, and to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Any test failures resultant from faulty CONTRACTOR installations, configurations, hardware, or software must be corrected by the CONTRACTOR (without any additional cost to OWNER). C. The contracted project will not be complete until the installation has been fully tested, validated and accepted by the OWNER. Equipment installations must be compliant with all OWNER and associated standards and must meet all operational and performance requirements as designated in this Specification, the Test Plan, and related procurement documents. The CONTRACTOR must receive written notification from an authorized OWNER representative before Work is considered fully accepted. Acceptance of Work will not be unreasonably withheld. D. Provide equipment to accomplish test and acceptance for specified performance. E. Perform a final test of cable runs between wall faceplates and distribution panels. Grid and backbones shall be tested. Tests shall be provided as outlined byTIA/EIA- 568-A/B Category 5e/6 performance specifications. F. Before Substantial Completion, submit test results and related documents to the IOR. G. CONTRACTOR is required to refer to Section 25570 for complete understanding of requirements. d. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. As-Built Documentation: 1. Provide 3 size E (30” X 42”) copies of Project site and building record drawings, indicating location of equipment and type, conduit, cable routing, ground vaults, terminal cabinets, pull boxes, radius of zone coverage of maximum signal strength for each access point installed, and other installation information. 2. Provide two copies of the record Drawings in AutoCAD format prepared using the most recent version for use on a Windows platform. a. OWNER utilizes layers as a key tool in controlling visibility of drawing elements and to provide consistent information between drawings, yet provide control over what is seen on each sheet. Telephone wiring shall be shown on a separate layer, labeled as “Telephone” that uses both building floor plans and conduit supporting structure layers below. The use of any version control blocks or company logos shall be on a layer separate from the premise wiring as-built drawings. 3. Floor plans indicating all devices, terminal cabinets, and cross connect
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 127 IFB No. 2000002197 locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable. a. Drawings shall include block diagrams indicating all items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout. Drawings shall also include as-built single line diagram, cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable. b. Floor plans shall indicate all devices, terminal cabinets and cross connect locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable. B. Operating and Servicing Manuals, Record Drawings: 1. Deliver three copies of operating and servicing manual. Each complete manual shall be bound in three-ring binders and all data shall be typewritten or drafted. a. Each manual shall include all instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include: (1) All measurements and readings obtained during system checkout shall be recorded and included with the manuals and as-built Drawings. (2) A single line diagram of the system indicating all items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout. (3) A complete 2 wire diagram of all connections made between components inside the system console. (4) A wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving console and each rack. (5) Manufacturer’s service manuals equipment schematics provided to the Telecommunications Branch, not to be left at the site. (6) All custom fabricated circuits, components, and connections not detailed in the manufacturer’s manuals shall have wiring diagrams detailing to component level, the manner in which the circuits are connected. (7) A schematic diagram of each component and replacement part number/s. b. Each manual shall also include as-built single line diagram, cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable. Drawings Size A (8-1/2 inches x 11 inches) and size B (11
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 128 IFB No. 2000002197 inches x 17 inches) shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes bound into the manual. Programming forms of each system shall be submitted with complete information. C. Provide a digital photographic record of all cable, cable plant, rack and cabinet elevations, and equipment installations must be provided on USB flash drive in JPEG format with minimum of 24-bit color and 2000 x 1500 pixel resolutions such that all equipment and cabinet labels are clearly legible. Photographs shall be indexed and named according to the predominant equipment, cabinet, or room designation.
3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.06 CLEANUP A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.07 OWNER ORIENTATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct the following orientation training before contract closeout. The training shall be delivered to designated OWNER personnel and shall provide the following: 1. A three-to-five day training course shall be provided, no later than 20 business days after installation of converged IP system component equipment. 2. The training shall be provided at a training facility located in Los Angeles County and agreed to by the District. 3. Class instruction shall consist of lecture and hands-on instruction including the following converged IP infrastructure topics, but not limited to: Product Features and Technical Specifications; a. Design and Implementation; Installation and Configuration b. Maintenance and Operations c. End users 1. The authorized training participants may also participate as observers in the converged IP network installation, configuration, and testing process as the converged IP system component equipment is deployed at the installation site. Each class size is limited to no more than 15 students. B. After Substantial Completion, and before Final Completion, provide two (2) additional one (1) hour “refresher” instruction sessions at times agreed upon by the OWNER.
END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 129 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT E – 27 5117 CONVERGED IP PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION
27 5117 CONVERGED IP PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LAUSD INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD) IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION TO THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM ITD.
PART 2 - GENERAL
2.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Installation of all components, and configuration necessary for the complete installation and functionality of a fully tested and operational IP Converged public address and intercommunication system.
B. The system shall include all call paging access from the VoIP Telephone system, access to individual speaker, zone paging, all calls, other rooms, etc. System shall also provide for interfacing with the clock system for a class change signaling system and Fire Alarm system with override of PA tone signaling capability. The clock system shall include IP based NTP or master clock.
2.02 REFERENCES
A. Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA):
1. EIA 160 Sound Systems
2. EIA-101 Amplifiers for Sound Equipment
3. EIA/TIA-568: Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard. 4. EIA/TIA-569: Commercial building standard for telecommunications pathways and spaces. 5. EIA/TIA-606: Administration standard for telecommunications infrastructure of commercial buildings. 6. EIA/TIA-607: Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications. 7. IEEE 802.3af or 802.3at: Standard for Internet
B. California Electrical and Fire Codes.
C. Building Industry Consultant Service International (BICSI):
1. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 130 IFB No. 2000002197 D. Federal Trade Commission (FTC): 1. Green Guides, 16 CFR Part 260, Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims.
E. Underwriters Laboratory listings and other labels 1. ANSI, ASTM, UL, NEMA, IEEE and FCC standards as applicable.
2.03 Submittals A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Division 01: 1. Materials list: Submit a complete material list for the materials and products of this section. 2. Product Data: Include Product Data sheets and/or catalog cut sheets for all items to be installed. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data. Items shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is indicated, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. Product Data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the ARCHITECT to review the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination. 3. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Product Data list submission, copies of manufacturer certificates that the CONTRACTOR is an authorized distributor of the submitted manufacturer’s products; and each member of the installation crew has been trained and certified in the installation of those products. CONTRACTOR shall submit proof that his/her company has a service organization capable of responding within 24 hours of receipt of written notification and resolution within 1 day. B. Shop Drawings: CONTRACTOR provided Shop Drawings shall indicate the following :
1. Provide detailed and dimensioned Shop Drawings indicating kind, weight and thickness of materials, method of fitting and fastening parts together, location and number of devices and components, and complete details of method of fitting suspension and fastening devices in place. Provide wiring diagrams. Drawings shall contain sufficient information to assemble and install equipment at the Project site without further instructions. 2. Provide, drawn to scale, details of racks, consoles and cabinets with designations, elevations, dimensions, doors, barriers, mounting details, catalog number of locks, finishes and color. 3. Provide a dimensioned detail of console nameplate including school name, address, and power load. Indicate manufacturer’s part numbers for all controls, switches, connectors and indicators. 4. Provide a complete sets of drawings of wiring diagram for each rack, instrument wiring and schematic diagrams of circuits of all equipment. 5. Provide detailed drawings as to interfaces with equipment furnished by others including number of wires, termination requirements, input/output voltages,
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 131 IFB No. 2000002197 input/output signals and other required coordination items, items including point to point connection details for all devices and equipment, 6. Shop drawings shall indicate equipment locations, wiring and schematics, details, configurations, sizes and a point-to-point wiring diagram of all components. Shop drawings shall indicate interfaces to equipment furnished by others, identifying termination interface requirements, and other specific details. 7. Provide one set of full size shop drawings, in the same size as the Record Drawings, and 3 USB flash drive electronic copies. 8. Shop Drawings shall be prepared in the latest version of Windows compatible AutoCAD. 9. Installation and coordination drawings for items in other sections shall be included with submittal of Shop Drawings. Submit blue line copies and one reproducible copy of installation and coordination drawings.
C. Sample Materials: CONTRACTOR shall provide samples of material and equipment as required by the ARCHITECT. If samples are requested, they shall be submitted within 10 days from the date of request.
D. Sound calculations: Submit calculations of sound distribution and dB levels.
E. Certified Statements: CONTRACTOR shall provide the following certification statements:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide a letter from the Manufacturer assuring the availability of spare parts common to proposed system for a period no less than 5 years on all components.
2. Certification of compliance that California Health and Safety Code requirements for products containing substances identified in the California Lighting Efficiency and Toxics Reduction Act shall not exceed the following allowed content in parts per million (ppm):
a. Lead content > 0.1% or 1000 ppm.
b. Mercury Content > 0.1% or 1000 ppm.
c. Cadmium Content > 0.01% or 100 ppm.
d. Hexavalent Chromium > 0.1% or 1000 ppm.
e. Polybrominated Biphenyls > 0.1% or 1000 ppm.
f. Polybrominated Biphenyls Ether > 0.1% or 1000 ppm.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 132 IFB No. 2000002197 2.04 SUBSTITUTIONS E. Equipment and materials that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S ITD project manager. When deviating or substituting equipment, the following information shall be submitted: 9. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER. 10. OWNER’S approval shall be obtained for any equipment or materials substitutions. Proposed substitutions requests shall provide proof of compliance with OWNER’S criteria described in this specifications. 11. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions.
2.05 quality assurance A. Work shall conform to CCR, Title 24 Part 3, Basic Electrical Regulation and National Electrical Code, latest edition. B. Only a qualified CONTRACTOR holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work, shall do the work. C. Persons skilled in trade represented by work, and in accordance with all applicable building codes, shall install system in accordance with best trade practice. D. Work shall be performed by CONTRACTOR that has completed at least 5 school systems of equal scope to system described herein and shall have been engaged in business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least 5 years. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to equipment. E. The CONTRACTOR shall use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are currently manufacturer certified, thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work. F. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate cable runs, and rack equipment locations with the OWNER’s Authorized Representative during the initial design of the cable installation. CONTRACTOR and OAR must agree as to the final location of all devices and the cable plant design. G. The CONTRACTOR shall provide technicians and tools required to participate in OWNER’s Quality Assurance Testing as detailed in Attachment “A” of this specification. 1. Items on check list of Attachment “A” will be examined as a minimum at the Public Address Head End, terminal cabinets, ground vaults and classrooms. Should the examination show deficiencies related to items in the checklist, OWNER’s acceptance testing will be discontinued until corrections have been made. When the CONTRACTOR has completed the corrections, a subsequent Quality Assurance test shall be initiated. This procedure is in addition to the system functionality testing required in section 3.03 below.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 133 IFB No. 2000002197 2.06 warranty M. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of, or failure to, examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. N. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. O. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than 5 years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. P. Installation CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to OWNER ITD Project Management. Q. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that a Converged IP Public Address and Intercommunication system component, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate, or repeated failure rate, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems of the same model purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a project manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be: a. Equal to or less than 10% in any 12 month period during the original warranty term. b. Equal to or less than 15% cumulative failures during the entire term of the original warranty.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 134 IFB No. 2000002197 2. If, at any time during of the life of the products, the failure rate of the LAN systems or components exceeds 20%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition. 4. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days or written notification from the OWNER. 5. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service. R. The warranty shall cover the complete system including fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. S. The warranty shall include onsite 48-hour advanced part replacement. T. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). U. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. V. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty.
2.07 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. The system shall be a combined public address and intercommunication system. Furnish, install, configure and connect all necessary sub-components to provide for functions and requirements specified, including interfaces and cabling to VoIP Telephone system, autonomous systems’ overrides, the Master Clock system and the Fire Alarm system. 1. Provide all labor, engineering, testing, materials, supervision, tools, mounting hardware, cable management, software and components necessary or required to provide a complete operable installation. The system shall be installed in compliance with project documents, applicable codes, and industry standards to deliver a system that meets standards of quality functionality. 2. Provide services on Project site including specified connectivity for all administration areas, classrooms, computer and science laboratories, libraries, auditoriums, multipurpose rooms, P.E. areas, quad area other instructional areas, and work areas as indicated in Project Drawings.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide full configuration services for all CONTRACTOR provided equipment. B. Basic Requirements:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 135 IFB No. 2000002197 1. System shall be packet audio technology IP network based. 2. System shall leverage existing structured cable plant, which is typically consisting of multi/single mode fiber optic backbone and horizontal Cat5e or Cat6. 3. System shall have sufficient capacity for expansion without the need of adding equipment to the head end equipment. 4. System endpoint devices shall be in compliant to applicable standard TCP/IP e.g. IP Multicast, DHCP, DNS, NTP. 5. System endpoint devices shall support IEEE 802.3af or 802.3at. 6. System shall support IETF SIP. 7. System shall be capable of connecting exchanges, IP network audio adapters, IP amplifiers, IP speakers, IP paging stations and various gateway types interfacing to the IP networking infrastructure e.g. LAN, WAN. 8. System shall provide interfaces for full integration with VoIP Telephone systems for emergency 911. The classroom phones shall be provisioned for direct dialing to a 911 operator. 9. System shall be provisioned for direct outbound dialing. 10. System shall be provisioned for inward dialing using the main school number and an extension number. 11. System shall provide local and/or remote authentication e.g. 802.1X, LDAP for system central management, administration, performance tuning, maintenance, and troubleshooting over the IP network. 12. System shall be capable of providing as a minimum three levels of accessibility rights. The levels correspond to multiple user access rights and individuals or group roles and responsibilities as follows: a. Level 1: System Engineer – A person at the enterprise level who possesses an in depth system knowledge and is responsible for the overall system installation, configuration, performance tuning, and modification. b. Level 2: System Technician – A person who possesses relevant skillset, techniques, with a relative practical understanding the system to provide field troubleshooting/resolution in order to support end users. c. Level 3: End User – A person who uses the system on the regular basis. 13. System shall provide set up tool that will view all IP endpoints inventory and provide complete individual, group, or all device programming of those endpoints. 14. System shall provide secured access interface for daily functions such as audio files, events, bell schedules, emergency broadcast, emergency bell schedules, graphical interface, and text to speech. 15. System shall provide the ability to replace an IP device without the system having to be disabled during set up of new device.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 136 IFB No. 2000002197 16. Service shall not be interrupted while replacing an IP endpoint device and setting up the new device. 17. System control shall allow: a. Minimum of 100 independent operating groups/zones. b. Speaker volume shall be software adjustable to individual zones, multiple zones, individual or group of speakers. c. Configuration of individual device or group(s) of devices e.g. zone specific requirements, endpoint device firmware upgrade. d. Alarm notification to administrators/support staff via SMS text or email of non-functioning components that need to be serviced. 18. System shall allow duplex conversation between stations, selective or master call to page all stations, background music or audio playback for common audio digital formats e.g. MP3, WAV, and WMA. 19. System shall provide capability and option to integrate with mass notification systems. System IP endpoints shall be Mass Notification ready and be accessed via the District Office in an emergency. 20. System shall employ echo cancellation that prevents acoustic feedback and echo for duplex hand-free conversations between stations. 21. All call paging access to individual speaker, zone paging, all calls, other rooms, etc. System also provides master clock or interface with the existing master clock system for a class change signaling system, and Fire Alarm system override of PA tone signaling capability and inhibition of all audio outputs including speakers and gateways during a fire alarm event. a. The system shall be equipped with a separate circuit to inhibit all loudspeakers audio outputs when a separate relay contact closure occurs from the Fire Alarm system. The closure shall also require activation of the muting relay circuits to all autonomous PA systems. 22. System shall provide the following Functions and Features: a. Scheduling – class change, bus loading, calendar based, standard or non- standard year round. b. Emergency and overhead paging – send messages to any endpoint e.g. speakers, overrides all communication systems in event of sending/receiving critical messages. c. The system shall automatically reset all clocks at the pre-programmed times and dates of the start and end of daylight saving time. d. The system shall be capable of interfacing with access control systems to initiate immediate lockdown control of all doors. C. Intercommunication System: 1. Communication hardware shall be furnished with the capacity for internal communication between operator and selected classrooms. Calls from classroom
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 137 IFB No. 2000002197 telephones shall be enunciated by an alerting tone and shall appear on liquid crystal display (LCD) on an administrative telephone in Main Office. 2. The main operator shall be able to answer calls in sequence by depressing one button on administrative phone, or out of sequence by dialing the number of the desired classroom. 3. Calls to classrooms shall be announced by either a tone signal over the classroom speaker or by ringing the staff telephone. 4. Predetermination as to whether to ring the telephone or to permit talking over the speaker shall be user selectable when dialing. 5. Direct Dial Telephones: A direct-dial telephone system with electronic switching shall be furnished to accomplish the above description. The central switching private exchange or VoIP communication manager shall utilize standard touch tone signaling in compliance with standard telephone practices and operation. 6. Administrative Telephones: Administrative telephone communication system shall provide the following minimum requirements: a. Shall be a standard touch tone dialing telephone equivalent to those employed by public telephone carrier companies. b. Capability as provided for direct dialing, private, two-way telephone communication between all locations furnished with administrative telephone and staff telephone shall be provided. c. Capability as provided for any administrative telephone to transfer a call from another administrative telephone or any staff or classroom telephones to any other telephone. d. Capabilities, as provided for the instantaneous distribution of emergency announcements simultaneously to all locations furnished with loudspeakers. e. Provisions for restricting access to the emergency announcements to certain administrative telephone. This shall be accomplished by the use of an authorized administrative system programming or secured access interface. f. Capabilities as provided for the origination of normal and priority emergency calls from any staff station. Priority emergency calls shall take precedence over normal calls. g. Capabilities as provided for directory lookup and dial by name. h. Provisions for instantaneous distribution of announcements to prescheduled groups of speakers from an administrative telephone. i. Local diagnostic functions shall be provided to simplify maintenance. j. Programming: Authorized administrative system interface or telephone shall be able to distribute announcements to each individual speaker, intercom, zone page a group of speakers, or distribute all-call. k. Volume level shall be software adjustable to individual zone, multiple zones, individual speaker or group of speakers. l. Audio level of the telephone intercommunication system shall be adjustable at sound levels sufficient to override typical ambient school noise.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 138 IFB No. 2000002197 m. Upon notification from the CONTRACTOR, the OAR shall contact the Network Operations and Telecommunications Branches of LAUSD to arrange for ordering of necessary additions to the voice system to complete the installation of the PA-Intercom system. Any work to the VoIP system will be provided by the OWNER to encompass both hardware/software additions and any necessary programming, and is outside of the scope of this specification. The Network Operations Branch or Telecommunications Branch will manage all connections to the VoIP Telephone system. Any vendor working on the telecommunications system must be pre-approved by the Network Operations Branch or Telecommunications Branch prior to any work commencing. D. Public Address: The system shall provide the following: 1. Reproduction of speech shall be clear, high fidelity and with all frequencies within range of system faithfully reproduced with no detectable noise, humming or distortion. 2. Reproduction of speech shall be attained at sound levels sufficient to override noise levels typical for schools. E. Mass Notification Capabilities for Integration to: 1. Conduct Wide Area Mass Emergency Notification from a central control station to all schools, group of schools, a single school, multiple campus zones, in- building, group of classrooms, or individual classroom. a. Situation may include emergency, non-emergency, other events. b. Message types may include pre-written, Text-to-Speech, pre-recorded, and dynamic. c. Notification may be triggered from system authorized administrative application interface, manual desk phones, web access, cell phone, or email. d. Recipients may include students, school and central administrative staff, first responders, and parents. 2. Notification receiving devices may include but not limited to TV broadcast via District owned and operated KLCS Television station, landline/cellular phones, overhead speakers, SMS/Text messages, automated voice calls, email alerts, social media networking, or desktop. 3. Any reproduction of speech shall be attained at sound levels sufficient to override noise levels typical for schools.
2.08 system description The Public Address/Intercommunications system shall be comprised of 2 integrated systems which shall provide means of performing public address functions and telephone.
A. Public Address and Intercom System.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 139 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Shall provide standard RCA jack for audio messages or music-on-hold (MoH) source input e.g. MP3, CD/DVD players. 2. Any handset on the PA-Intercom shall be able to initiate paging/intercom functions with a pre-program key or dialing a 5-digit key sequence. 3. The all page output with contact closure shall be connected to the telephone signal and telephone page control inputs on the intercom/program distribution control panel. 4. Automatic class change signaling system shall include manual controls to select program and to do all call. The number of class change signaling systems shall be determined by the number of learning communities or other academic entities at the site. The Public Address and Intercommunication system shall be able to support multiple class change signaling needs, by providing additional zones and tones. The class change tones shall be independently programmed to target each learning community on the campus. The selected tone shall be distributed over the loud speaking intercom and P.A. system. In Middle and High schools, the class change signaling system shall be programmed to include dressing and cleanup tones for gymnasiums and shop zones. B. The intercommunication system shall provide communication between classroom telephones, speakers, administrative phones and VoIP Telephone system and shall operate in conjunction with Public Address equipment. The system shall provide the following features and capabilities: 1. VoIP Telephone system shall be the main backend for all call processing. 2. Integration between the VoIP and PA shall allow paging to the overhead speakers from the VoIP phones. 3. Integration may include but not limited to: a. FXO, FXS, T-1 interfaces b. SIP over IP infrastructure 4. System shall be ADA compliant, the equivalent functionality of 2554 type wall mounted or 2500 type desk phones. 5. System shall provide intercom system dial tone for loop start trunk ports from the VoIP Telephone or IP Router. 6. System shall allow calls from the VoIP Telephone to individual intercom stations or to access page functions. 7. System shall be provisioned to allow minimum of eight simultaneous calls from the intercom system to outside lines. Intercoms: System shall provide VoIP phones with equivalent functionality of the 2554 or 2500 series in all rooms.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 140 IFB No. 2000002197 PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.01 system equipment
The Public Address/Intercommunications Systems shall include the following equipment and components as identified on the project contract documents. A. System Equipment Rack: 1. The PA-Intercom Head End Equipment shall be installed inside the Main LAN Room MDF cabinet.
B. Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
1. All PA-Intercom Head End Equipment and Head End network switches that support PA-Intercom connections shall be energized via a 90 minutes runtime battery backed UPS system.
2. All ESM network switches that support PA-Intercom field devices shall be energized via a 90 minutes runtime battery backed UPS system.
3. UPS systems shall support a native SNMP network management interface. C. PA-Intercom Head End Processor 1. The PA-Intercom Head End Processor shall support the following services:
a. Contain the system software that controls system features, functions, scheduling of calendar based events, daily announcements, tones, connections, zones, audio, data and
b. Provide all controls necessary for multi-participants conference calls, where applicable, and two-way intercom communication between any stations.
c. Shall provide automatic controls to adjust the emergency page volume, supervisory tone volume, time tone and to enable or disable the supervisory tone phantom power to microphone inputs.
d. Provisions shall include permitting emergency 911 dialing from classrooms and instructional support/administrative areas.
e. Provisions shall include service availability when WAN/MAN circuits are out of service via direct connection to PSTN e.g. local SIP trunk, PRI or POTS lines.
f. Provisions shall be included to permit emergency paging from a remote telephone, or microphone, which shall capture system priority and override all functions except for the emergency page feature.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 141 IFB No. 2000002197 g. Provisions shall provide all controls necessary for distribution of general announcements or program material to any or all classrooms, and transmission of emergency announcement to all classrooms.
h. Shall support secured web based configuration support for all PA- Intercom.
i. Shall support secured administrative login access.
j. Shall support Common Alerting Protocol (CAP) allowing interoperability with public alerting systems. 2. PA-Intercom Head End Processor hardware shall be provided with the following specification requirements: a. Equipped with SSD b. Minimum of one 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet interface; must be capable of supporting a second 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet interface. c. Shall be capable of supporting FXO/FXS interfaces and SIP allowing integration with PBX or VoIP systems. 3. Shall provide server disk image which include Operating System (OS), all applications and final site configuration for quick service restoration. 4. Shall provide management capabilities: a. Access locally or via programming software or secured web (SSL) interface b. Support local and centralized management for PA/IC system administration, regular maintenance, configuration, and system performance tuning and troubleshooting. c. Support 802.1X, Active Directory, and LDAP for secured access from anywhere on the District IP network. d. Support multiple user/group access privilege levels for their corresponding roles and responsibilities. e. Support SNMP for server status monitoring.
D. PA-Intercom VOIP Telephone Handsets:
1. VOIP telephone handsets shall be OWNER Furnished CONTRACTOR Installed.
2. The District shall provide The CONTRACTOR a Bill of Materials listing all proposed VOIP telephone handsets to be installed by the CONTRACTOR.
3.02 grounding Wiring enclosures, terminal cabinets, outlets, frames of cabinet racks and other enclosures shall be grounded in accordance with requirements of California Electrical Code and as specified, and as indicated in the ANSI/EIA/TIA applicable standard.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 142 IFB No. 2000002197
3.03 Speakers and accessories A. Loudspeakers shall meet or exceed the following performance specification: 1. At the minimum, equipped with one 10/100 auto negotiate Ethernet interface 2. Support 802.3af or 802.3at 3. Support DHCP and static IP addressing 4. Each loudspeaker mechanism shall be mounted in flush back-box or surface baffle as indicated on Drawings and as specified. 5. Adjust power delivered to each speaker, as necessary, to insure a satisfactory sound level, with reproduction of good quality, in each of locations where speakers are installed. 6. Loudspeaker Volume Controls: Loudspeaker volume controls shall be adjustable from the server via administrative programming or secured web interface (SSL). 7. Loudspeaker audio performance shall meet or exceed the following:
a. Average Sensitivity: 95 dB SPL, 1W/1M
b. Loudspeaker Power Rating: 12W RMS EIA 426A Standard
c. Maximum Power Rating: 15W @ 8 Ohms
d. Calculated Output: 102 dB SPL 5W/1M
e. Frequency Response: 65 Hz - 17 kHz EIA 426A Standard
f. Nominal Coverage Angle: 100° Included Angle -6 dB / 2 kHz, Half space
B. Horn Loudspeakers shall meet or exceed he following specification:
1. Horn loudspeakers shall be provided in 15 Watt and 30 Watt options.
2. 15 Watt Horn Loudspeakers shall be furnished for outdoor areas such as lunch shelters, arcades, and walkways.
3. 30 Watt Horn Loudspeakers shall be furnished for large outdoor areas such as playgrounds, physical education fields, and athletic fields.
4. Horn Loudspeakers shall meet the following performance specifications:
a. Network interface shall support at the minimum one 10/100 auto negotiate Ethernet interface
b. Network interface shall support 802.3af or 802.3at
c. Network interface shall support DHCP and static IP addressing
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 143 IFB No. 2000002197 d. Horn Loudspeakers shall be weatherproof vandal-resistant type.
e. Horn Loudspeakers shall be installed with weatherproof cover plates with plastic bushed holes in plates to admit waterproof cable to speaker in drip loops.
f. Each horn speaker assembly shall be mounted in a vandal-resistant steel enclosure. 5. Horn Loudspeaker audio performance shall meet or exceed the following:
a. Average Sensitivity: 120dB at 15 Watts (peak) 114dB at 15 Watts / 1 Meter (avg) 700-5,500Hz
b. Minimum Loudspeaker Power Rating: 12W RMS EIA 426A Standard
c. Maximum Power Rating: 15W/30W @ 8 Ohms
d. Calculated Output: 102 dB SPL 5W/1M
e. Frequency Response: 600-14,000Hz (nominal) 700-5,500Hz (± 5dB)
f. Nominal Coverage Angle: 95° (-6dB, 2000Hz octave band)
3.04 Network SWITCHING equipment A. Networking switching equipment shall be OWNER Furnished CONTRACTOR Installed. B. The District shall provide The CONTRACTOR a Bill of Materials listing all proposed Network Switching Equipment to be installed by the CONTRACTOR.
3.05 ip talkback and one-way speaker A. At the minimum, talkback speaker shall support: 1. At the minimum, one 10/100 auto negotiate Ethernet interface 2. IEEE 802.3af or 802.3at 3. Network Time Protocol (NTP) 4. DHCP or statically IP addressable 5. Software volume control capability per speaker 6. Frequency response 80Hz to 15kHz 7. Input: 45Ω / 12Watts B. One-way speakers 1. At the minimum, one 10/100 auto negotiate Ethernet interface 2. IEEE 802.3af or 802.3at 3. Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 144 IFB No. 2000002197 4. DHCP or statically IP addressable 5. Software volume control capability per speaker 6. Frequency response: 80Hz to 15kHz
3.06 NON-IP talkback and one-way speaker A. At the minimum, talkback speaker shall support: 1. Software volume control capability per speaker 2. Frequency response 80Hz to 15kHz 3. Input: 45Ω / 12Watts B. One-way speakers 1. Software volume control capability per speaker 2. Frequency response: 80Hz to 15kHz
3.07 integrated IP clock/speaker A. As provided, integrated clock/speaker shall support: 1. At the minimum, one 10/100 auto negotiate Ethernet interface 2. IEEE 802.3af or 802.3at 3. Network Time Protocol (NTP) 4. DHCP or statically IP addressable 5. Does not require a master clock 6. Time zones and automatic update system clock for annual Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time changes 7. Automatic time correction after complete power outage. B. Power options 1. Primary source is PoE
3.08 call button A. A call button unit shall be installed in each classroom at the location as indicated on the contract drawings or at a location as directed by the project ARCHITECT of Record. B. The “Acknowledge Lockdown” action to be activated by engaging this call button to a registrar headend reporting location (e.g. classroom, confined office, etc.) is in the lockdown status. C. The registrar lockdown status console must be accessible at any District designated location(s). D. The “Call Office” button shall establish 2-way hand-free communication between classrooms over the talkback speaker and the main office designated device(s). E. The call button shall meet the following requirements:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 145 IFB No. 2000002197 1. A single unit Two (2) button assembly (Red for “Acknowledge Lockdown” status report and Black or Navy Blue for classroom to “Call Office” the main office) capable of generating discrete critical and/or non-critical alerting to the Head End Processor.
2. Both “Acknowledge Lockdown” and “Office Call” buttons share the same wire pair.
3.09 Gateway/Contact closure A. IP/Analog gateways
1. Interfacing field analog devices (e.g. speakers, handsets) to IP network.
B. Contact Closures
1. Interfacing the PA-Intercom with other systems (e.g. fire alarm, autonomous PA) for signal overriding.
3.010 cabling system A. All system and sub-components shall be interconnected using the existing standard installed per EIA/TIA-568, 569, 606, 607 specifications data network cabling plant with no further modification. Solutions require non-standard custom cabling terminations are not acceptable. B. Addition to the existing cabling plant shall be compliant with 27 0536 Cable Tray and 27 1014 Structured Cabling.
3.011 Labeling
A. Cable labeling shall be consistent with labeling requirements as defined in specification 27 1014 Part 3-Execution and Installation Subsection 3.04C.
3.012 keys and locks A. Provide keys and locks for all cabinets and equipment; locks shall be keyed to a Corbin #90 key, for access to operate equipment and to service equipment.
3.013 portable equipment A. Furnish and deliver to the OAR, one auxiliary console microphone with coiled cord and press-to-talk switch. B. Portable equipment shall remain in individual boxes and be delivered to the OAR.
PART 4 - execution and installation
4.01 installation
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 146 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Install equipment as specified, as indicated on Shop Drawings, and as required. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and applicable codes. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and applicable codes. B. Systems that are re-designed with the intention to increase station or port capacity of systems shall not be accepted. C. Systems not installed as manufacturer instructions shall not be accepted.
4.02 Related system or sub-component installation
A. Public Address system installation
1. Rack Equipment Installation: All equipment within each rack shall be logically arranged for accessibility of convenient maintenance. Cables to shall be dressed only from the right side of the rack, as viewed from the rear. Cable bundle must be dressed neatly to allow room for system service.
B. Administrative display telephones 1. Unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings, provide, program, install and connect a minimum of one administrative telephone in the Main Office, in each Academic Entity on the campus SLC and in each Academy.
C. Intercom instruments 1. Wall-mounted: Install where indicated modular wall plate.
2. Desk mounted: Install and connect where indicated and specified.
D. Special programming requirement 1. Privacy a. The system shall be configured to prohibit the initiation of a two way conversation from any telephone or speaker to any speaker connected to the system without the presence of a supervisory or permitted privacy. This requirement extends to calls from the office to any classroom, from a classroom to any other classroom and from any classroom to any office. b. The tone shall have sufficient volume to alert the occupant of a classroom with typical ambient sound that a two-way communications path has been initiated.
4.03 certifications and testing A. Provide all instruments for testing and demonstrate, in presence of the OWNER, that all circuits and wiring test free of shorts and grounds. B. Provide test and reception gear to test for specified performance of active equipment. C. Furnish all labor, instruments, appliances, equipment, and materials necessary to demonstrate to the OWNER the installation performs as required and specified. D. Before Substantial Completion, submit test results and related documents to the IOR.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 147 IFB No. 2000002197 E. The OWNER reserves the right to perform independent tests of equipment furnished, to determine whether or not equipment complies with requirements specified, and to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.04 project record documents A. As-Built Documentation 1. Provide 3 Blue line copies size E (30” X 42”) of Project site and building plans, indicating location of equipment, conduit, cable routing, ground vaults terminal cabinets, pull boxes and other installation information. 2. Provide 3 copies on USB flash drive of the system CPU programming and configuration. 3. Provide two copies of the record Drawings in AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio format prepared using the most recent version of Windows compatible AutoCAD on a USB flash drive for use on a Windows platform. a. LAUSD utilizes layers as a key tool in controlling visibility of drawing elements and to provide consistent information between drawings, yet provide control over what is seen on each sheet. Public Address wiring shall be shown on a separate layer, labeled as “Public Address” that uses both building floor plans and conduit supporting structure layers below. The use of any version control blocks or company logos shall be on a layer separate from the premise wiring as-built drawings. b. All software copies supplied shall be multi-layer drawings with the following layers as a minimum: (1) Layer 1 shall contain title blocks only. (2) Layer 2 shall contain building or site plan backgrounds only. (3) Layer 3 shall contain devices, cabling and other system components. 4. Floor plans indicating all devices, terminal cabinets and cross connect locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable. a. Drawings shall include block diagrams indicating all items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout. Drawings shall also include as-built single line diagram, cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable. b. Floor plans shall indicate all devices, terminal cabinets and cross connect locations, conduit runs, ground vaults, wire types, cable routing of all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit fill and count, and as-built coding used on each cable B. Operating and Servicing Manuals, Record Drawings:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 148 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Deliver three copies of operating and servicing manual. Each complete manual shall be bound in three ring binders and all data shall be typewritten or drafted. a. Each manual shall include a page with Project site and Project name, date of Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR name, address, telephone, and fax numbers. b. Each manual shall contain a letter, signed by an officer of the company indicating the beginning and ending date of any warranties described in subsection 1.07 of this specification and shall describe the companies’ commitment to service the warranty during the terms specified. c. Each manual shall include all instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system and shall include: (1) A single line diagram of the system indicating all items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor and site plan layout. (2) A complete 2 wire diagram of all connections made between components inside the system console. (3) A wiring destination schedule for each circuit leaving console and each rack. (4) All custom fabricated circuits, components and connections not detailed in the manufacturer’s manuals shall have wiring diagrams detailing to component level, the manner in which the circuits are connected. Provide details of input/output voltages and input/output signal levels. (5) A schematic diagram of each amplifier and other components, transistor complements and replacement part numbers. d. Each manual shall also include as-built single line diagram, cable site plot plan and floor plans indicating all cables, both underground and in each building with conduit, and as-built coding used on each cable. Drawings Size A (8-1/2 inches x 11 inches) and size B (11 inches x 17 inches) shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes bound into the manual. Programming forms of each system shall be submitted with complete information.
4.05 cleanUp A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
4.06 TRAINING A. Before Substantial Completion, provide an eight-hour training instruction period to designated OWNER personnel. Contact OAR first, if assistance is needed in scheduling an appropriate time, location, or list of attendees for this training. B. Instruction shall be based on manufacturers written operating instructions covering those features of interest to the OWNER and applicable to the Work. Instruction shall include the following:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 149 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Making normal calls from intercom telephone to other intercom telephones or to the intercom administrative station. Revisit office staff preferred method for clarity and understanding of function and methodology.
2. Answering normal calls from intercom telephones.
3. Transferring loudspeaker intercom calls from the speaker to the intercom phone.
4. Answering normal or emergency calls from the intercom administrative station.
5. Returning calls shown in the administrative station display queue.
6. Answering calls shown on the wall display from VoIP Telephone phones (remote answer feature).
7. Answering calls ringing at a secondary station from admin phone or assigned intercom phone.
8. Placing calls from VoIP Telephone phones to intercom station.
9. Placing calls from intercom stations to VoIP Telephone phones.
10. Placing calls from intercom telephone to the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
11. Making intercom calls from PA/IC rack to classrooms. 12. Show how to set the passing bell schedules if selector switch is located on PA rack but might have been replaced by a remote selector in the main office. 13. Making an emergency all call from the rack, program all call, zone all call and individual announcement from the admin telephone and VoIP Telephone, and all- call from the hand held microphone located in the main office. Explain that emergency all-call from rack activates the hearing assistance system. Also explain where these hear assistance systems and the autonomous systems are located. 14. Show distribution of radio and media player programs. 15. Provide copies of manufacturer user’s manual to training staff and explain all users’ manual functions described. Provide 3 quick user’s functions reference guides in a plastic laminated form. The training shall include hands on equipment. C. After Substantial Completion and before contract completion, provide two additional one hour “refresher” instruction sessions at times agreed upon by the OWNER.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 150 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT “A” PUBLIC ADDRESS AND INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM OWNER’S QUALITY ASSURANCE Site Location Code/Name Network Engineer IOR PM Recommendation Electrical
OWNER is to examine the following items based on the criteria defined in sections 25821 (Public Address System) and section 25750 (Intercommunication System). OWNER is to examine 100% of rack contents. Other items not included in main rack will be tested at 10% rate. If deficiencies are noted, the system will be failed. OWNER will consider continuing testing at a 20% rate to determine the integrity of the system.
PA System Check List YES NO N/A Pass/Fail Is all equipment installed as indicated in as-built? Does workmanship installation follow industry standards and specifications?
Are terminations at console and terminal cabinet done the following specifications? Terminal cabinets and cross-connect to be installed indoors.
Use punch blocks to terminate field cable (110 blocks). Is cabling in terminal cabinets and console loomed and helically wrapped? Are shields grounded at one end only? Are all terminations at console and terminal cabinets, including identifiable page and 911 lines labeled properly? Does cable number match list posted? Are cables marked clearly and indelibly? Are all charts posted at console and terminal cabinets? Are all inside and outside speakers installed as specified? Are all jumpers or cross-connect wires neatly loomed through cable distribution rings and separated field feeding cables? Are all cables in UG (under-ground) vaults racked as specified? Is all classroom equipment (phone, speaker and raceway) installed as specified? If equipped, has the wall display in main office been installed?
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 151 IFB No. 2000002197 Verify physical connection and labeling of VoIP to PA/IC. CONTRACTOR to provide the system program downloadable to laptop or disk and examine. Main System Functionality YES NO N/A Pass/Fail Does an all call with radio or other sound source and check for clarity and sound level in the following areas. Perimeter areas farthest away from system. A percentage of classrooms. Do gyms and auditoriums have equipment (speakers and phones) attached to main PA. Verify emergency all call. Verify each group all call (zone paging). Verify single classroom announcement. Verify volume controls are working. Verify acceptable level of loudness and clarity for outside, inside, and hallway speakers. Manually test passing tones, verify specific tones for gyms. Are all automatic PA system tones defeated when the Fire Alarm system is in alarm? (first fire alarm relay) Are all manual tones from the main PA console defeated when the Fire Alarm system is in alarm? (also first relay) Are all loudspeaker audio sources defeated when the Fire Alarm system is in alarm? (second fire alarm relay) Intercommunication Systems YES NO N/A Pass/Fail Does classroom phone have dial tone when picked up? Make call to main office, and check for clarity and sound level. Receive call from main office, and check for clarity and sound levels. Receive room PA announcement and passing tone from main office, checking for clarity and sound level in both instances. Verify code to access the VoIP and make the connection to a station. Repeat for a total of four times to test all lines. Verify emergency call to main office. Verify hands free communication to main office and check for clarity and sound level.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 152 IFB No. 2000002197 Demonstrate that the supervisory tone is present during all calls placed from VOIP, System administrative and Intercom staff phones to any speaker on the system. VOIP System YES NO N/A Pass/Fail Verify VOIP station transfer to IC system. Verify paging from VOIP. Test 4X (MS, HS) 2X (EL) Verify true 911 dial from all classrooms by sample testing several rooms. Contact with 911 operator shall not require dialing any extra digits (98-9-911 is not acceptable)
End Of section
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 153 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT F – 27 1015 PREMISES WIRING NEW INSTALLATION
SECTION 27 1015
PREMISES WIRING FOR CONVERGENCE OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
EDITNOTE: OWNER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD) IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION TO THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM ITD.
PART 5 - GENERAL
5.01 SUMMARY A. This specification includes equipment provisioning, installation, integration, configuration, testing, and documentation of wiring/cabling and associated pathways for Local Area Networks, Signal Terminal Cabinets and Telephone systems at the Los Angeles Unified School District (OWNER). This specification uses 50 micron multi mode fiber and Category 5e/6/6a UTP cable and shall be used for new cable plant construction, when completely replacing an existing cable plant or for modernization of cable plant where 50 micron multi mode optical fiber is required and Category 5e/6/6a UTP was previously installed. Pertinent sections are broken down to reflect the requirements for each system individually.
5.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Applicable listings and ratings. B. UL 50, Cabinets and Boxes C. UL 943, GFCI. D. UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers. E. National Electric Code, Article 384 F. National Electric Code (Articles 770, 800, latest issue). G. National, State, and Local Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) building and fire codes. H. NEMA PB1. I. Federal Specifications W-P- 115C and WC-375B. J. ANSI/TIA/EIA Telecommunications Building Wiring Standards. K. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568: Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard and all current addenda. L. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Annex A, Centralized Optical Cabling
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 154 IFB No. 2000002197 M. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, current issue N. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-1, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces Addendum 1 - Surface Raceways (March 2000). O. ANSI/EIA/TIA-598-A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding, current issue P. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606, The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building, current issue Q. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, Telecommunication Bonding and Grounding R. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current issue S. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 (Ethernet), 802.3Z (Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber), 802.3ab (Gigabit Ethernet over 4 pair category 5 or higher), 802.11 (Wireless LAN). T. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual U. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Part 68.50. V. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). W. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA-70. X. CCR Part 3 - California Electrical Code. Y. CCR Part 2 - Uniform Building Code.
5.03 SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials: Submit a complete list of proposed materials. As a minimum include the following information: catalog cuts, product technical data and descriptive literature of all components. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data necessary for evaluation and acceptance. B. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed and dimensioned Shop Drawings indicating kind, weight and thickness of materials, equipment locations, wiring and schematics, details, panel configurations, sizes and a point-to-point wiring diagram of all circuits, method of fitting and fastening parts together. Drawings shall contain sufficient information to assemble and install equipment at the Project site without further instructions. 1. Shop drawings shall indicate interfaces to equipment furnished by others, identifying numbers of wires, termination requirements, and other pertinent details. Responsibility for each end of interfaces shall be noted on shop drawings. 2. Shop Drawings shall include a front elevation indicating cabinet dimensions, make, location and capacity of equipment, size of gutters, type of mounting, finish, and catalog number of locks. Provide general layout of internal devices, wiring drawings with wire numbers and device
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 155 IFB No. 2000002197 connections, cut sheets of devices in enclosure and bill of materials listing description, manufacturer, part numbers, and quantity of items. C. Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns. The first assembly shall be the major head end equipment. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the applicable specification section number, and followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item. The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items other than as specified. D. Each submittal shall contain product data sheets or catalog cut sheets for each item listed in the Index. These shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is shown, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with an arrow. The product data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the engineer to evaluate the suitability of the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide Shop Drawings, in the same size as the Drawings, prepared and signed by a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). Shop Drawings shall be prepared in latest version of AutoCAD or Microsoft Visio with 3 USB flash drive electronic copies submitted along with full sized Shop Drawings. F. Submit Shop Drawings prepared, signed, and sealed by structural engineer licensed in the State of California. Details shall be provided indicating the proposed means of support and attachment of all wall and floor mounted racks. Calculations shall be based on the maximum load rating of the cabinet by the manufacturer in a Zone 4 seismic environment, not the weight at time of occupancy. MDF racks or cabinets shall support a minimum of 750 pounds of static weight. IDF racks or cabinets shall support a minimum of 250 pounds of static weight. LDF racks or cabinets shall support a minimum of 125 pounds of static weight. If applicable, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a Network Protection Plan that defines how an existing school or campus Local Area Network (LAN) will remain in service during the installation of either new LAN cabling or additional LAN cabling segments in a manner that ensures the installation shall not interfere with or disable any portion of existing, working LANs during the project. This plan should be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ARCHITECT prior to the start of work. G. Samples: CONTRACTOR shall provide samples of material and equipment as required by the ARCHITECT. If Samples are requested, they shall be submitted within 10 days from date of request. H. Submit one (1) electronic and one (1) paper copy of all cable records. Refer to Attachment 1 for format of required cable records.
5.04 SUBSTITUTIONS F. Equipment, Material or components that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S Information Technology Department authorized representative. When proposing deviations the following shall be submitted:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 156 IFB No. 2000002197 12. Substitution request form indicating reasons and benefits to OWNER. 13. OWNER’S approval shall be obtained. G. Substitutions: Submittals must comply with contract general provisions.
5.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall use adequate numbers of skilled personnel who are manufacturer certified, thoroughly trained and experienced on the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work. B. The work of this section shall conform to California Code of Regulations, Part 3, and all other applicable codes and standards. C. Permits and Inspections: Obtain and pay for required permits and inspections; deliver certificates of inspection to the IOR. D. The work shall be performed by a qualified CONTRACTOR holding the licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 1. CONTRACTOR shall have completed at least five (5) projects of equal scope to systems described herein and shall have been in the business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least five (5) years. 2. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Product Data list submission, copies of current manufacturer certificates indicating that the CONTRACTOR is an authorized distributor of the manufacturer products, has been trained in the installation of those products, and has a service organization capable of responding within 24 hours of receipt of written notification and resolution within 1 day for MDF equipment and 5 days for equipment located either in the classrooms, IDFs or LDFs. a. Material or work damaged during the planning, installation, testing, and clean-up of this project must be replaced or repaired, at no expense to the OWNER, to meet current OWNER specifications before final acceptance of work. Examination of or failure to examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. b. Installation shall be performed in accordance with applicable building codes, industry standards, and best trade practices. c. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Material List Submission copies of the manufacturers’ certifications that the CONTRACTOR is a current authorized distributor of the submitted manufacturers’ products and CONTRACTOR’s staff has been adequately trained and certified in the installation of those products. This requirement applies to all structured cable components and cable described in this specification. d. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate cable runs, and rack equipment locations with the OWNER’s Authorized Representative prior to start of construction. CONTRACTOR and OWNER’s Authorized
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 157 IFB No. 2000002197 Representative must agree as to the final location of all devices and the cable plant design.
5.06 WARRANTY A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all materials furnished shall be free from defects of material for a period of five (5) years excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that workmanship for a period of five (5) years from Substantial Completion, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of or failure to examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide a performance warranty for the installed data cabling system and components for a minimum of fifteen years after system is turned over to the OWNER. All components of the optical data backbone cable system including cables, distribution shelves, LIUs and connectors must carry a fifteen year single manufacturer’s applications warranty at speeds of 1 or 10 Gbps.
5.07 systems requirements A. The premises wiring shall comply with the following system requirements: 1. Local Area Network Wiring: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, supervision, tooling, miscellaneous mounting hardware, materials and consumables, including patch cables for all systems installed; in addition, the CONTRACTOR shall provide construction and integration services to achieve connectivity for all classrooms, computer laboratories, libraries, instructional areas, offices, and work areas, as specified by the OWNER point of contact. a. New segments, installations, modifications, shall not interfere with or disable any portion of existing, working LANs. b. Conduct underground survey to ensure constructability of all outside plant pathway routing. c. Provide exterior and interior optical fiber and copper cabling that is in compliance with TIA/EIA 568-B standards. Cabling system colors shall be coordinated using consistent colors for the same type of cabling as indicated elsewhere in this specification. d. Install and connect rack mounted uninterruptible power supplies and Ethernet switches in all equipment cabinets at locations with active equipment. IDFs’ and LDFs’ are exempt from the UPS requirement. e. Furnish and install cabinets/racks, vertical power strips, cable trays and cable management at the MDF.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 158 IFB No. 2000002197 f. Furnish and install modular T-568-B patch panels for termination of UTP within the MDF, IDF, and LDF where copper drops are provisioned. Use fiber patch cabinets for all fiber optic cable terminations located in the MDF, IDF and LDF. g. Furnish and install connectors and faceplates and terminate cables as specified. h. Furnish and install all high impact plastic wall and/or faceplate covers and connector housings for all communication systems outlet locations i. Furnish and install contiguous optical fiber and copper, link and distribution cables. No splices are permitted between designated termination points. j. Furnish and install floor mounted equipment racks, with zone 4- rated seismic bracing and associated accessories in telecommunications spaces where required k. Furnish and install grounding and bonding of all communications components per ANSI/TIA/EIA-607. (1) All Telecommunication Entrance Facilities, Minimum Point of Entry locations and MDF locations shall be equipped with a telecommunications main grounding busbar or telecommunications grounding busbar as appropriate to the installation environment.
(2) Grounding Equalizers or Telecommunications Bonding Backbone Interconnecting Bonding Conductors are not required except in buildings exceeding two occupied stories which use building steel to ground electrical service panels. (3) In buildings with two stories or less, where electrical panels are grounded using CEC compliant grounding conductors CABLE DESIGNATION TYPE DESCRIPTION A Service entrance cables installed by the service provider. B Interior grade, multi-pair PVC jacketed cables to be terminated on 110-type blocks. C Interior PVC multi-pair cables, or exterior shielded cables for installation on buried conduits. These cables connect to patch panel(s) either by means of anphenol connector or punch down connector. D Category 5e/6/6a cables terminated on patch panel on one end and on an RJ-45 wall jack insert on the other end.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 159 IFB No. 2000002197 directly connected to the building ground electrode, all IDFs, and LDFs, equipment chassis and associated peripherals shall use local panel ground via the equipment branch circuit grounding conductor. l. Furnish and install full labeling of the entire installation prior to testing in accordance with Part 3.04 paragraph C of this specification. m. All Premise cable shall be tested in compliance with Specification 27 0126. Testing of each LAN optical fiber element and connector with Power Meters and OTDR. For multi-pair copper communications cable, test all pairs within counts and binder groups to ensure that no less than 99% of the pairs of a multi-pair cable achieve continuity and operation in voice band tests. For Category 5e/6/6a copper cable, test and certify 100% of all drops using test equipment certified for Level III test equipment. Cable designations: B. TelephoneSystems Wiring: The telephone wiring system consists of distribution and feeder cables that permit connection of telephone handsets or other interfacing devices, through cross connecting panels, back to connecting blocks associated with an OWNER-furnished, OWNER installed PBX System. The installation of the PBX system and related powering systems is outside the scope of this specification. a. The quantity of Telephone System cabling shall be designed based upon the size and scope of the project, or in accordance with drawings furnished by a designer. Telephone cables installed between the Main Distributing Frame (MDF) or PBX system location and respective Intermediate Distribution Frames shall be the sum of current telephone requirements plus a 40% growth factor of spare cable pairs. b. Equipment specifications for the Project site shall be as indicated on Drawings, the scope of work, and/or as specified herein. c. Install and connect OWNER furnished telecommunications equipment cabinet, attendant consoles, and telephone instruments as indicated on Drawings or Scope of Work. d. Furnish, install, and connect ground wire, and power supplies as specified and/or required. Coordinate provision of dedicated power outlets. e. Furnish and install connecting wiring and modular jacks to each individual phone location as indicated on Drawings. This includes all necessary cross connect blocks, and cross connect wiring in cabinets/racks, as necessary to provide for functions and requirements specified. All cables shall be installed in conduits, cable trays or raceways unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Cabling system colors shall be coordinated using consistent colors for the same type of cabling as described in section 2.04 of this specification.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 160 IFB No. 2000002197 f. Provide and install pathway and inside cabling from the MDF to the Minimum Point of Entry (MPOE) and install pathways from MPOE to the property-line Public Switch Telephone Network demarcation. g. Provide infrastructure and facilities for interfacing the site’s telecommunications infrastructure with public utilities telephone lines at the MPOE. Provide underground telephone service conduit from public utility serving location to main telephone terminal as indicated on Drawings and in compliance with requirements of access provider. h. Provide and coordinate the location of surge-protected outlets in all equipment cabinets and enclosures where active equipment is scheduled. i. Furnish and install 110 type telephone punch blocks at PBX location using multi-pair cable for interconnection to the MDF and IDFs, as required. j. Provide coordination, testing, materials, and components required for a complete and operational installation. C. Signal Terminal Cabinets: Signal terminal cabinets shall meet the following: a. Terminal cabinets shall be flush type, with 2-inch trim or surface mounted type, or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. Terminal cabinets shall be furnished with sections and barriers to separate each system. Sections over 24 inches in width shall be provided with double doors and locks. Terminal cabinets shall measure 12 inches long x 18 inches high x 5-3/4 inches deep, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Trims for sectional cabinets shall be of one-piece construction. b. Terminal cabinets shall be furnished with 3/4-inch thick plywood backboards within cabinets, fastened in place with machine screws. Backboards shall be largest size cabinet and conduit terminations will permit. c. Flush-mounted terminal cabinets shall be finished as specified for flush- mounted panelboard cabinets. Surface and semi-flush mounted terminal cabinets shall be finished as specified for surface-mounted panelboard cabinets. d. Terminal Cabinets for exterior Ethernet drop locations shall be NEMA Type 3R continuous hinge cover enclosure with a padlockable draw pull catch or cylinder lock on the opposite side. The enclosure and cover shall be built of 16 gauge galvanized steel and shall carry an IEC IP32 rating. The enclosure shall be large enough to fit a weatherproof single gang deep box and an industrial type Category 5e/6/6a patch cord 10 feet long as described in section 2.02.N. of this specification. CONTRACTOR shall provide a padlock or cylinder lock keyed to Corbin CAT 90 for each enclosure. e. Signal terminal cabinets shall conform to the Specifications in section26 2416, except as modified herein. f. Terminal cabinets shall be flush or surface type with 2-inch trim or surface mounted type, as indicated on Drawings. Terminal cabinets shall be provided in sufficient quantity to allow no more than one signal system per
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 161 IFB No. 2000002197 cabinet. Terminal cabinets shall measure a minimum of 12 inches wide x 18 inches high x 5-3/4 inches deep, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Trims for sectional cabinets shall be of one-piece construction. g. Cabinet Boxes shall be fabricated of galvanized steel compliant with NEMA 250; unless otherwise noted. Boxes shall be flush or surface type with removable end-walls, and dimensioned as indicated on Drawings. Provide 3/4-in.-thick plywood backboard fastened in place with machine screws and painted matte white with fireproof paint for mounting terminal blocks. Backboards shall be largest size cabinet and conduit terminations will permit. h. Cabinet Fronts shall be fabricated of steel compliant with NEMA 250, unless otherwise noted. Fronts shall be flush or surface type as indicated on Drawings; with screw cover front and gray baked enamel finish. Doors shall be cut true, and shall accurately fit opening and finish smoothly across joints. Rabbets shall be inside. Hinges shall be entirely concealed except for barrels and pins. Hinge flanges shall be welded to door and trim. Doors shall be equipped with flush type, spring-latching, Corbin locks for metal doors, keyed to Corbin No. 90 keys. i. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. j. Terminal Cabinets shall be located so they are readily accessible and not exposed to physical damage. k. Cabinet locations shall provide sufficient working space around panels to comply with the California Electrical Code and the BICSI TDMM. l. Terminal Cabinets shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface by at least 4 points. m. Unused openings in cabinets shall be effectively closed. n. Cabinets shall be grounded as specified in Article 250 of the California Electrical Code. o. Conduits shall be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the enclosure. p. Maintain the required bending radius of cable and conductors inside the cabinet. q. Clean the cabinets of foreign material such as cement, plaster, metal filing, and paint. r. Remove debris from terminal cabinet interior. D. Underground service entrances are required for connections to: 1. Telephone Service Provider. 2. Community Antenna Television (CATV) Access Provider.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 162 IFB No. 2000002197 PART 6 - PRODUCTS
6.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Where applicable all components installed under this Contract shall be listed by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). B. Equipment Requirements. 1. Various manufacturers’ equipment may meet the standards of quality set by the OWNER. As a reference and for comparison of vendors, the equipment specification sheets on all items must be included with the submitted bid. 2. The OWNERs Quality Control representative or designated agent will establish equivalency and compliance of product or components offered for use under this Contract.
6.02 Local area network CABLING A. Multi-Mode Optical Fiber Cables. 1. The optical fiber shall be multimode, graded-index optical fiber waveguide with nominal 50/125 micron core/cladding diameters. The optical fiber shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA-492AAAC. 2. The mechanical and environmental specifications for multi-mode fiber distribution cables shall be indoor/outdoor, riser rated, tight-buffered type cables. The cable shall meet the requirements of the California Electrical Code (CEC) section 770 and the requirements of TIA-455-82B water ingress test. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm that the cable is listed for the specified application. 3. Each cabled optical fiber shall meet the graded-index attenuation performance specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B including current sub sections and addendum. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-46, -53, or -61. Information transmission capacity shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-51 or -30. The cable shall be measured at 23 °C ± 5 °C. 4. Multi-mode fiber optic cable shall meet the following minimum performance requirements: a. Attenuation: The maximum attenuation of the multi-mode OM4 fiber shall be 3.5db/km or less at 850nm and 1.5db/km or less at 1300nm. b. Utilize OM4 50/125 multi-mode fiber to meet or exceed standard bandwidth and distance limitations. Cable manufacturer shall guarantee that the multi-mode optical cable will support 802.3z 1000BASE-SX Ethernet transmission up to 1000 meters and 802.3ae 10GBASE-SR Ethernet transmission up to 500 meters using VCSEL based SX optics.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 163 IFB No. 2000002197 c. At 850 nanometers (nm), the minimum bandwidth capability required is 4700 MHz-Kilometer. Actual bandwidth will vary by cable manufacturer. d. 1300nm, the minimum bandwidth capability required is 500 MHz- Kilometer. B. Single-Mode Fiber Cables. 1. Single-mode optical fibers shall be Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single- mode Optical Fibers and shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA-492CAAB. Fiber conductors shall have a nominal core diameter of 8.7 microns. Cable shall have transmission window centered at 1310 and 1550 nanometer wavelengths. 2. The mechanical and environmental specifications for single-mode fiber distribution cables shall be indoor/outdoor, riser rated, tight-buffered type cables. The cable shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) section 770 and the requirements of TIA-455-82B water ingress test. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm the cable is listed for the specified application 3. Each cabled optical fiber shall meet the attenuation performance specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA – 455-78A or –61. The cable shall be measured at 23 °C ± 5 °C. C. Fiber Optic Connectors. All fiber optic connectors shall be Duplex LC type, MM or SM connector. D. Fiber Optic Light Interconnection Units (LIUs). Rack mounted with the capacity to handle a minimum of 18 terminated fibers. Complete kit to include all panels’ bulkheads and supporting hardware. E. Fiber Optic Distribution Shelves. 72 port rack mountable, with LC-compatible bulkheads and built-in cable management. F. Fiber Optic Jumper Cables. 1. Multi-mode or Single-mode duplex cable. Length: 3 meters, at a minimum, pre-manufactured with LC-LC connectors with same transmission characteristics as the terminated fibers as defined in section 2.02. 2. Fiber optic patch cables shall be supplied in sufficient quantity to connect each active fiber pair at intermediate cross-connect locations identified in the construction documents. Patch cables are not required for spare fibers. Intermediate cross connect locations include the following: a. MDF – cross connect between the MDF and MPOE and MPOP. b. IDF – cross connect between primary backbone and secondary backbone or horizontal fiber. 3. Fiber optic patch cables shall be OFN type, jacketed with polyvinyl chloride with yellow indicating a single-mode patch cable and aqua indicating a 50/125 multi-mode patch cable. The cable shall meet all requirements of
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 164 IFB No. 2000002197 TIA/EIA-568 except for the more stringent requirements on bandwidth and attenuation identified in this Specification. G. Fiber Optic Innerduct. Materials: one-inch and/or one and one half inch, orange corrugated with pullrope, rated as required by code. H. Category 5e/6/6a data Cable. Horizontal Category 5e/6/6a cabling shall be 24 AWG, 4-pair UTP, UL/NEC rated, with appropriately rated PVC (riser) or FEP (plenum) jacket as appropriate to the installation environment and N.E.C. Individual conductors shall be FEP or polyethelene insulated as appropriate to the installation environment. Cables installed in cable trays or on “J”-hooks shall carry a CMP rating regardless of the installation environment. Cable shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA minimum requirements for return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, NEXT loss, PSNEXT loss, FEXT loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT for 4-pair Category 5e/6/6a cabling as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568. Category 5e/6/6a data cabling and patch cables shall be yellow or green. I. Flooded Category 5e/6/6a cable for all underground applications or ground level in-slab environments: Category 5e/6/6a cabling shall be 24 AWG, 4-pair UTP, UL/NEC rated, with appropriately rated polyethylene jacket with water blocking flooded core. Individual conductors shall be polyethylene insulated. Cable shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA minimum requirements for return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, NEXT loss, PSNEXT loss, FEXT loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT for 4-pair Category 5e/6/6a cabling as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568. J. Category 5e/6/6a Inserts. All Category 5e/6/6a data inserts shall be wired to the T568B wiring pattern. Category 5e/6/6a data inserts shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA minimum requirements for return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, NEXT loss, PSNEXT loss, FEXT loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT for Category 5e/6/6a connecting hardware as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568. Category 5e/6/6a data inserts shall be yellow or green in color as consistent with the cable jackets for this system K. Exterior Category 5e/6/6a data drops shall be embedded in an environmentally sealed enclosure with an IEC IP67 rating for Protection from live or moving parts, dust and protection from immersion in water and with ADC 110 punchdown contacts for field termination of horizontal backbone cable of specified length. The connector shall combine existing RJ-45 connector technology with weatherproof housing assemblies and shall be compatible with standard Category 5e/6/6a RJ-45 connectors. The exterior Category 5e/6/6a connector shall interlock with exterior patch cord as described in Section 2.02.N of this Specification, and provide a seal with an IP67 rating. All Category 5e/6/6a data inserts shall be wired to the T568B wiring pattern. Category 5e/6/6a data inserts shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA minimum requirements for return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, NEXT loss, PSNEXT loss, FEXT loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT for Category 5e/6/6a connecting hardware as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568. L. Category 5e/6/6a Patch Cords. Patch cords shall be Category 5e/6/6a rated, 24 AWG, 4 pair assemblies. Patch cords shall be factory assembled by the manufacturer of the cabling system. LAN Patch cords shall be the same color,
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 165 IFB No. 2000002197 yellow or green, as the cabling system. The Premise Wiring CONTRACTOR shall provide and install Category 5e/6/6a patch cords as follows: 1. One 2-meter Category 5e/6/6a patch cord for each work area outlet installed. 2. In the wiring closets, Category 5e/6/6a patch cords shall be provided in a like manner - one per user port. Patch cords shall be provided in varying lengths to accommodate a patch that can be neatly loomed into the cable management system. In wiring closets and passive patch locations, all patch cords shall be installed and shall cross connect structured cabling to LAN equipment ports. In LDF locations in cabinets with less than 26” rack space, Patch cables shall be provided in the following distribution of lengths – 30% 1 foot; 40% 2 feet; 30% 3 feet. In MDF, IDF, and LDF locations in stand-alone cabinets with between 26” and 56” of rack space, patch cords shall be provided in the following distribution of lengths – 60% 1 meter; 40% 2 meters. In MDF and IDF locations in cabinets with more than 56” of rack space, or ganged cabinets, patch cords shall be provided in the following distribution of lengths – 20% 1 meter; 40% 2 meters; 40% 3 meters. M. Category 5e/6/6a patch cords for exterior locations: The patch cord shall combine existing Category 5e/6/6a RJ-45 plug technology with weatherproof assemblies and shall be compatible with standard Category 5e/6/6a RJ-45 connectors. One end of the ten foot patch cord shall be a Category 5e/6/6a RJ-45 plug embedded in a housing that creates an environmental seal, a strain relief, and a locking mechanism when mated to exterior Category 5e/6/6a connector, and an ingress protection of IP67. See Section 2.02 L of this Specification. The other end of the patch cord shall be a standard Category 5e/6/6a RJ-45 plug connector. N. Category 5e/6/6a Patch Panels. Patch Panels shall be provided in 24 or 48 port compliments with modular jack ports wired to T568B. Patch panels shall be augmented with cable support bars in rear to properly dress cable. All patch panels shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA minimum requirements for return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, NEXT loss, PSNEXT loss, FEXT loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT for Category 5e/6/6a connecting hardware as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 Quantity and size of patch panels must be selected to provide 20% expansion capacity. One EIA rack unit of horizontal wire management shall be provided adjacent to each patch panel both above and below. O. Outlet Gang Boxes. As a minimum, the telecommunications outlet box shall be capable of housing four Category 5e/6/6a terminations or two terminated optical fibers. The outlet box shall have the ability to secure the optical fiber cable and provide for a minimum fiber bend radius of 1 in. Typically, the telecommunications outlet/connector box shall consist of a 4 inch by 4-inch electrical box or surface mount box.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 166 IFB No. 2000002197 P. Weatherproof single gang outlet box shall be NEMA 3R rated, either flush mount of surface mount as shown on the Drawings. The weatherproof single gang outlet box shall be used for mounting exterior Ethernet outlets. See Section 2.02.L of this Specification. This outlet box shall be mounted inside a terminal cabinet for exterior Ethernet outlet. Q. Faceplates. Faceplates shall be constructed of ABS molding compound and have the ability to accommodate one insert. R. Exterior faceplate shall be a single gang, two ports, and stainless steel plate. The faceplate shall be pre-punched for mounting use with weatherproof housing assemblies (Section 2.02 L.). The faceplate shall be gasketed and have an IP55 rating. S. Fiber Faceplates. Fiber faceplates shall be constructed of ABS molding compound and have the ability to accommodate a minimum of two angled duplex multi mode or single mode LC connectors. T. Horizontal Cable Management panels shall be 19-inch rack mount with a minimum of four-management rings one-rack unit (1.75 inches) in height. Rings shall not exceed more that 1.75 inches in depth unless otherwise noted in the construction documents. U. Floor Standing Cabinet. Floor-standing equipment cabinet for MDF or IDF installation use as required. Cabinet shall provide at least 84 inches (48 EIA/TIA rack units) of total mounting space for 19-inch panels and 36 inches of usable interior depth. If two cabinets are required in an MDF, all structured cabling components shall terminate within the same rack with the Backbone Switch. Cabinet shall be constructed of steel, with 14-gauge carbon steel front and rear adjustable mounting rails tapped for #10-32 screws on EIA spacing front and rear. Cabinet shall be tested and certified to the seismic specifications set forth by NEBS Telcordia Technologies GR-63-CORE. Cabinet shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled heat dissipation fan; textured antique finish; matching side panels and louvered top panel; a hinged, key locking, bronze-tinted acrylic window door in front keyed to Corbin Cat 90; and a full length, hinged, key-locking rear door keyed to Corbin Cat 90. Cooling fan thermostat shall be set at 78 degrees Fahrenheit. When installed, both doors shall be able to swing fully open. Cabinets shall be UL listed. V. Wall-Mounted Cabinet. Wall-mounted equipment rack for IDF and LDF locations. IDF cabinet shall provide at least 45 inches of mounting space for 19-inch panels (26 EIA/TIA rack units), a 22 inch main body and a minimum of 24 inches of usable interior depth. LDF cabinet shall provide at least 24 inches of mounting space for 19-inch panels (13 EIA/TIA Rack Units), a 22 inch main body and 24 inches of usable interior depth. Cabinet bodies shall be 14 gauge or better, all welded steel construction with 14-gauge carbon steel front and rear adjustable mounting rails, tapped for #10-32 screws on EIA spacing, fully adjustable front-rear. All hinges shall be heavy duty welded to cabinet body. Allowable deflection of an open cabinet, when loaded to its maximum weight capacity, shall not exceed .75 inches (3/4 inches) Wall mount IDF and LDF cabinets shall be configured to have a minimum of 18 inches from front to rear rack-mounting rails. Cabinet shall have
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 167 IFB No. 2000002197 factory made top or side ventilation capability and a thermostatically controlled heat dissipation fan rated at no more than 32dBA, a Plexiglas front door, and flush mounted locks on both front and rear sections. The front lock shall be keyed to Corbin CAT 90 and the rear lock shall be keyed to Corbin CAT 90. Cooling fan thermostat shall be set at 78 degrees Fahrenheit. Cabinets shall be provided with white powder coat finish. Cabinets shall be UL listed.
6.03 Signal Terminal Cabinets A. Cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel or blue steel; fronts, doors, and trim shall be code gauge furniture steel. Cabinets shall be furnished with at least 6-inch high gutters at top and bottom where feeder cable size exceeds 4 gauge or where feeder cable passes through cabinet vertically. Cabinets shall be furnished with top and bottom gutters sized as required by inspection department having jurisdiction, but never less than 6 inches where more than one feeder enters top or bottom of cabinets. Side gutters shall not be less than 4 inches wide. Width of cabinets shall be 20 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Doors shall be cut true, shall accurately fit opening and finish smooth across joints. Rabbets shall be inside. Door shall be sized as required to permit removal of devices intact. Gutters shall be provided at sides and top of compartment. Hinges shall be entirely concealed except for barrels and pins. Hinge flanges shall be welded to door and trim. Doors shall be equipped with flush type, spring-latching, Corbin locks for metal doors, keyed to Corbin No. 90 keys. C. Outdoor cabinets shall be NEMA Type 3R. Construction shall be formed from code gauge galvanized steel with ANSI No. 61 gray enamel finish. Provide heavy-duty, 3-point latching, vault type door handles with padlocking provisions. Provide stainless steel butt hinges on doors. Padlocks shall be furnished, keyed to Corbin No. 90 keys. Outdoor terminal cabinets shall be used only if approved by the OWNER.
6.04 telephone systems A. Wiring: 1. Telephone Trunk Cables: Cables shall be rated for inside installation, PVC insulated 22 AWG solid conductor cables unless otherwise specified by access provider. Cables shall be available in standard increments of 25, 50, 100, 200, 600, 800, 1,000 and 1,200 pairs. Any cable that exits the building must be rated for exposed environments and graded as outside plant cable. 2. Installed telephone cable terminations, on 110-type terminating blocks, shall be installed in signal terminal cabinets, on ¾ inch plywood backboards, painted using fire-retardant paint. Cables shall be dressed in orderly fashion on entrance to the cabinets, properly secured with cable D- Rings that preclude snagging or inadvertent movement of the cables. 3. Telephone Trunk Cables shall be terminated at the MDF locations using 110 type blocks that meet Category 5e/6/6a data specifications (i.e., Siemons, or equivalent). Cross connects in the MDF at these blocks will then distribute to interior PVC-jacketed, Riser grade, or outside Plant Grade
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 168 IFB No. 2000002197 cables that connect to individual IDF locations, depending on whether IDFs are located in the same building, a different floor, or in a different building. 4. Category 5e/6/6a Cable, when used to connect voice telephones to the nearest IDF location shall carry the same rating and specifications as listed in the Local Area Data Networking (section 2.02). Category 5e/6/6a telephone wiring systems shall use blue or red-jacketed cable. 5. Flooded Category 5e/6/6a cable for all underground applications: Category 5e/6/6a Cable, when used to connect voice telephones to the nearest IDF location shall carry the same rating and specifications as listed in the Local Area Data Networking (section 2.02). 6. Category 5e/6/6a Inserts. All Category 5e/6/6a data inserts shall be wired to the T568B wiring pattern. Category 5e/6/6a data inserts shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA minimum requirements for return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, NEXT loss, PSNEXT loss, FEXT loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT for Category 5e/6/6a connecting hardware as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568. Inserts shall be blue or red in color as consistent with cable color for the system 7. Category 5e/6/6a Patch Cords. Patch cords shall be Category 5e/6/6a rated, 24 AWG, 4 pair assemblies. Patch cords shall be factory assembled by the manufacturer of the cabling system. Telephone system patch cords shall be the same color (blue or red) as the telephone cabling system. 8. Category 5e/6/6a Patch Panels. Patch Panels shall be provided in 12, 24 or 48 port compliments with modular jack ports wired to T568B. Patch panels shall be augmented with cable support bars in rear to properly dress cable. All patch panels shall meet ANSI/TIA/EIA minimum requirements for return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, NEXT loss, PSNEXT loss, FEXT loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT for Category 5e/6/6a connecting hardware as detailed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 Quantity and size of patch panels must be selected to provide 20% expansion capacity. One EIA rack unit of horizontal wire management shall be provided adjacent to each patch panel both above and below. 9. Telephone Modular Jacks: CONTRACTOR Furnished, CONTRACTOR Installed (CFCI). a. Provide modular jacks, 8-position, TIA-568, Category 5e/6/6a, using T568B wiring pattern. Jacks shall be UL verified and listed, Category 5e/6/6a with 110 contacts and blue or red in color whichever is consistent with the systems cable sheath color. Provide duplex faceplate mounting straps, where required. Provide wall and floor outlet plates as indicated in Section 16050: Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. B. TELECOMMUNICATIONS RELATED EQUIPMENT 1. Telephone Type T7: CONTRACTOR Furnished, CONTRACTOR Installed (CFCI).
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 169 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Type T7 shall be a modular telephone jack - type RJ-11 - on an independent line, separate from the telecommunications system. Provide independent line modular jacks at Administration fax machines two (2), each elevator room, pay telephones (typically at multipurpose room, gymnasium, and auditorium lobbies), and/or as indicated on Drawings. Each independent line will be terminated at the backboard in the MPOE. Termination of Category 5e/6/6a cable to an RJ-11 jack shall use the green and green/white conductors for typical tip and ring connections. The green conductor shall be terminated at the jack on the tip side.
PART 7 - EXECUTION AND INSTALLATION
7.01 PREMISE WIRING INSTALLATION A. Site Conditions: CONTRACTOR shall examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to OWNER before the CONTRACTOR begins work. B. Conduit Subsystem: 1. Excavation. a. Call the OWNER’s Authorized Representative at least 48 hours prior to excavation. b. Locate and protect existing construction, plant life and utilities. Before excavation, contact the "Underground Service Alert of Southern California" (USASC) for information on buried utilities and pipelines. 2. Inter-building Conduits. a. Provide and install 2 inner ducts of 1-1/2 inches and one inner duct of one inch with indexed pull cords. b. Ductbanks shall have a continuous slope downward toward ground vaults and away from buildings with a pitch of not less than 4 inches in 100 feet. c. Inter-building exterior and underground conduit runs shall not exceed 200 feet and shall not contain more than two bends of 90- degrees or less between pullboxes or vaults. Distances of up to 600 feet between underground pull boxes may be allowed if the conduit run between pull boxes has no bends, and is indicated on Drawings. d. Stagger joints of the conduit by rows and layers so as to provide a duct line having maximum strength. e. During and after construction, protect partially completed duct lines from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of a duct line is completed from ground vault to ground vault, draw a stiff bristle brush of the proper diameter through each duct until the conduit is clear of
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 170 IFB No. 2000002197 particles of earth, sand, and gravel; then immediately re-install conduit plugs. f. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40%. 3. Intra-building Conduits a. Interior (all) conduits for multiple cables to communication outlets are to be a minimum of 1-1/4 inches and dedicated conduits shall serve outlet boxes. b. No more than 6 feet of flexible conduit shall be used in any conduit run. (1) Flexible conduit shall not be used in concealed or inaccessible areas such as interstitial wall spaces or hard lid ceilings. (2) Where flexible conduit is used, the conduit fill shall be under rated by one trade size. 4. Entrance/Access Provider Conduits: a. Entrance Conduit for Telecommunications: (1) Telecommunications entrance conduits for small and medium size sites less than 100 classrooms shall consist of One 4 inch trade size) conduit plus 1 spare of equal size. (2) Telecommunications entrance conduits for large secondary school sites of 100 classrooms or more shall consist of Two 4 inch trade size conduits plus 1 spare of equal size. (3) Each installed conduit shall be equipped with a 5/16-inch polypropylene pullrope. (4) The primary entrance conduit shall be provisioned with two 1.5 inch and one 1-inch inner ducts each installed with indexed pull cords, unless AP representative indicates other requirements. b. Entrance conduits for CATV Access Provider: (1) CATV entrance conduit for all sites shall be One 3 inch trade size conduit. (2) Each installed conduit shall be equipped with a 5/16 polypropylene pull rope. c. Construction of underground ductbanks: (1) Construct underground ductbanks of individual conduits encased in concrete. The concrete encasement surrounding the bank shall be rectangular in cross-section and shall provide at least 3 inches of concrete cover for ducts.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 171 IFB No. 2000002197 (2) Separate conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 3 inches. Provide plastic duct spacers between ducts, at a maximum 5-0 ft O.C. (3) The top of the concrete envelope shall not be less than 24 inches below grade. (4) Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward ground vaults and away from buildings with a pitch of not less than 4 inches in 100 feet. (5) Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of 36 inches. (6) Stagger joints of the conduit by rows and layers so as to provide a duct line having maximum strength. (7) During and after construction, protect partially completed duct lines from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of a duct line is completed from groundvault to groundvault, or groundvault to building, draw a brush through having the diameter of the duct, and having stiff bristles until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs. (8) No underground conduit run, without a pull box, is to be longer than 200 feet and shall contain no more than two bends of 90-degrees or less. (9) Pull boxes or ground vaults shall not be used in place of conduit bends. (10) Conduit types shall be limited to rigid metal conduit and schedule 40 PVC. Flexible metallic conduit and EMT shall not be used in entrance systems. (11) Conduit shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges and terminated with an insulated bushing. (12) Joint trench methods shall not be used in entrance facility ductbanks. d. Ground Vaults and Pull Boxes. (1) Ground Vaults and pull boxes shall be installed in paved areas wherever possible. Top of box shall align with finish surface of paving. Wherever possible, install boxes where runoff water will not drain to the box. If vaults or boxes must be installed in an unpaved area subject to runoff, top of box shall be raised to allow no less than one inch of clearance from grade to top of box. In all cases, the top of vault or box shall be at or above the highest point in the runoff area.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 172 IFB No. 2000002197 (2) Provide pulling irons on opposite walls and below horizontal centerlines of ducts and cemented openings, and in bottom. Install pulling irons with each end hooked around a reinforcing bar. (3) Install a floor drain into sump containing two cubic yards of crushed rock, minimum size 48 inches deep and 36 inches diameter. Provide a 36-inch length of 6-inch diameter perforated tile pipe extending down into sump and fill with gravel. Cover sump with grille. (4) Install ground rod in each concrete pull box. Locate near a wall with 6-inch projection above floor for ground clamps. Permanently ground all metal equipment cases, cable racks, etc. in pull boxes. All ground conductors shall be #4-0 bare stranded copper. e. Above grade exterior and interior conduit systems (1) Conduits placed and mounted to exterior and interior portions of a building to extend conduit pathways from the ground vaults to the site’s MPOP shall be Rigid Metallic Conduit (RMC). (2) All conduits shall be bonded and grounded. (3) Securely fasten all entrance conduits to the building so they can withstand a typical placing operation performed by the AP. (4) Pull boxes, if needed, must be accessible. Do not place pull boxes above fixed ceilings, HVAC ducts, or piping. (5) No interior conduit is to be longer than 100 feet between pull boxes, and shall contain no more than two bends of 90- degrees or less. (6) Pull boxes shall not be used in place of conduit bends unless site conditions do not allow the use of conduits with data sweeps. (7) Where not required elsewhere in District Specification or Code, pull boxes shall be sized per the BICSI TDMM 10th Edition, Chapter 5, Table 5.13. (8) An UL-approved fire stop applicable to the installation must be used when penetrating fire rated walls or floors. f. Conduit termination in MPOP. (1) For conduits entering telecommunications room from below grade point, conduits shall extend 4 inches above the finished floor. (2) For conduits entering from ceiling height conduits shall terminate 4 inches below the finished ceiling.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 173 IFB No. 2000002197 (3) Keep the area around an entrance conduit free of any construction, storage, mechanical apparatus, etc. (4) Seal the inside- the- building end of a conduit to prevent rodents, water, or gases from entering the building. Use rubber conduit plugs, a water plug, or duct sealer, depending upon the conditions. C. Local Area Network MDFs/IDFs/LDFs. 1. Backboards for MDFs, IDFs and LDFs shall be ¾-inch fire-retarding ACX plywood with the A side out and painted with two coats of flat light colored fire-retarding paint on all sides. The size of the backboards will be determined by the size of the building and space provided. 2. Provide an MDF, and IDFs, and LDFs at each campus. The MDF shall be co-located at, or located as close to the MPOE as practical. IDFs shall be located within the campus buildings and in sufficient quantity to maintain compliance with the horizontal cable running distance limitations as specified in TIA/EIA 568. IDFs will distribute network connections to the classrooms. LDFs will provide connection for the workstations within offices, student nutritional service areas, multi-purpose rooms, computer labs and libraries. 3. Provide an LDF in each student nutritional service area, multi-purpose room, computer laboratory, and library. LDF’s shall consist of a wall- mounted cabinet containing the data switches, Category 5e/6/6a patch panels, patch cords, connectors, and wire management required to distribute each Category 5e/6/6a data drop to the workstations located within the room. However, if the LDF is within compliant distance from an otherwise adjacent MDF or IDF cabinet, the LDF may be physically co-located within that MDF/IDF cabinet. 4. MDF cabinets shall normally be installed in a LAN or Information Services room and may be used for support to some local data drops. CONTRACTOR shall provide all receptacles, cabling and pathways to those local drops. 5. MDF/IDF/LDF Category 5e/6/6a Termination Installation. a. Category 5e/6/6a patch panels shall be installed in 24 or 48 port compliments. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install all necessary patch cords, both copper and fiber optic, for internal cabinet interconnections. b. One EIA rack unit of horizontal wire management shall be provided adjacent to each patch panel both above and below. c. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with TIA/EIA- 568, manufacturer recommendations, and this Specification. d. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed one half an inch for Category 5e/6/6a connecting hardware.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 174 IFB No. 2000002197 e. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less then 4 times the outside diameter of the cable. f. Cables shall be neatly bundled, not overly tight, and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Cable wraps shall not be tight enough to disturb the internal cable pair twists and positioning. g. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point. h. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. i. Patch cords used at the rack or cabinet shall include single-mode and multi-mode duplex fiber, and Category 5e/6/6a, 24 AWG, 4-pair assemblies, as required. 6. MDF/IDF/LDF Fiber Termination Hardware Installation: a. Stripped fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber termination panel. No stripped slack loops shall be allowed external to the fiber panels. Fiber loops must not be smaller than minimum bend radius of the cable. b. All cables shall be individually attached to the respective termination panels by mechanical means. c. Each fiber cable shall be stripped upon entering termination panels and the individual fibers routed neatly into termination panels. d. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the termination panel. e. Dust caps shall be installed on unused connectors and couplings. 7. Backbone Cabling: a. Proper bending radius and pulling strength requirements of cables shall be followed during handling and installation. Cables, splice cases, punch-down frames, LIUs, patch panels and supporting hardware shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. Outside plant fiber shall be installed in 1-1/2 inch or one inch corrugated inner duct installed within the backbone conduit. c. Interior innerduct and cable shall be Plenum or Riser rated, as required by applicable code regulation or standard. Riser rated innerduct as a minimum shall be installed on floor-to-floor fiber optic cabling. d. Interior fiber not installed in cable tray, conduit or raceways shall be installed in Plenum rated innerduct. Innerduct shall be installed properly strapped and supported every 4 feet in concealed spaces
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 175 IFB No. 2000002197 only. Innerduct shall be rated for indoor or outdoor use as applicable by code. e. Cables in panels, cabinets, trays, and racks shall be neatly grouped and strapped using hook and loop cable straps. Cables shall be placed in a manner that allows equipment installation without rerouting. Full rack rail travel adjustments shall not be impeded by cable installation. Cables and panels shall be clearly identified at both ends with a unique cable numbering system and in compliance with TIA 606. Refer to Section 16135 for Cable Tray requirements. f. When cable runs are being installed, provide additional slack at both ends to accommodate future cabling system changes. The minimum amount of allowable slack at the: (1) MDF shall be 10 ft. (2) IDFand LDF shall be 3 feet. (3) Include the slack in all length calculations to ensure that the cable does not exceed maximum allowable lengths as defined herein. Do not store slack in bundled loops. Store cable slack in an extended loop or in a figure 8 configuration to alleviate stress. Cable slack loops of any kind are not permitted in mid span for any J-Hook pathway. g. The backbone fiber optic cable shall be installed in configurations based upon the physical topology and logical connections required as follows: 1) If the MDF-to-IDF cabling distance is 400 meters or less: a) The installed cable from MDF-to-IDF shall be a minimum of 24 strands multi-mode and 12 strands single-mode. b) If the total combined length of the primary backbone plus the secondary backbone is less than 400 meters install additional multi-mode fiber optic strands in multiples of 12 including a minimum of 10% spare multi-mode fiber strands after all required fiber optic links are connected. c) If the total combined length of the primary backbone plus the secondary backbone is greater than 400 meters install additional single-mode fiber optic strands in multiples of 12 including a minimum of 10% spare single-mode fiber strands after all required fiber optic links are connected. 2) If the MDF-to-IDF cabling distance is greater than 400 meters: a) The installed cable from MDF-to-IDF shall be a minimum of 24 strands single-mode. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 176 IFB No. 2000002197 b) The single-mode and multi-mode fiber optic strands shall both be installed in multiples of 12 with a minimum of 10% spare single-mode fiber strands after all required fiber optic links are connected. h. All fiber optic strands shall be terminated and no fiber cable shall be spliced. i. Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and best industry practices. j. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the NEC maximum fill for the particular raceway type. k. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination with no splices. l. The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded. m. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any cable damaged or subjected to installation practices outside of those specified within this document. 8. Secondary Backbone Cable: a. Fiber distribution cable for data circuits from IDFs to LDFs shall be multimode or single mode fiber optic cable, OFNR or OFNP rated as required. (1) The secondary backbone fiber cable for the LDF supporting computer labs, libraries, and food services areas shall be a minimum of 12 strands terminating on duplex LC connectors. Network drops shall be collocated within the LDF installation - described in this Specification. a) If the total combined length of the primary backbone plus the secondary backbone is less than 400 meters install 12 strands of Multi-Mode fiber optic cable. b) If the total combined length of the primary backbone plus the secondary backbone is greater than 400 meters install 12 strands of single mode fiber optic cable. (2) All fiber cable shall be installed in conduit, cable tray, raceways, or in innerducts when installed in S-hooks. No cable shall be installed laying on ceiling tile. Cable supports shall be installed to independently carry the cable without pinching or crimping the cable in any way. The CONTRACTOR shall make an effort to vary the spacing of supports to prevent frequency dependent aberrations. All fiber hung on J-Hooks shall be installed in innerduct, with supports every four feet.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 177 IFB No. 2000002197 (3) Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and best industry practices. (4) Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the NEC maximum fill for the particular raceway type. (5) Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination with no splices. (6) When cable runs are being installed, provide additional slack at both ends to accommodate future cabling system changes. The minimum amount of allowable slack at the:
a) MDF shall be 10 ft.
b) IDFand LDF shall be 3 feet.
c) Include the slack in all length calculations to ensure that the cable does not exceed maximum allowable lengths as defined herein. Do not store slack in bundled loops. Store cable slack in an extended loop or in a figure 8 configuration to alleviate stress. (7) The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded. (8) J-Hook or trapeze system shall be used only if shown on drawings to support cable bundles in dropped ceiling or concealed ceiling spaces. J-Hooks shall not be used to distribute optical fiber cables within classrooms. All horizontal cables distributed using J-hooks shall be supported at a maximum of four-foot intervals and shall be in full compliance with the Codes and Standards as listed in Section 1.04 of this Specification. Cable slack loops of any kind are not permitted in mid span for any J-Hook pathway. (9) At no point shall cable(s) rest on or attach to acoustic ceiling grids or panels. (10) Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler and systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. (11) Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. (12) The CONTRACTOR shall replace any cable damaged or subjected to installation practices outside of those specified within this document and the Codes and Standards listed in Section 1.04 of this Specification. 9. Horizontal Cabling:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 178 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Copper Horizontal distribution cable shall be TIA/EIA-568, Category 5e/6/6a, 4-pair unshielded twisted pair, and CMP or CMR rated cable, as required. Each Category 5e/6/6a cable shall be terminated on an 8-position, 8-conductor Category 5e/6/6a jack at the workstation location or on a patch panel in the MDF/IDF/LDF. All terminations shall be wired in accordance with T568B. Associated faceplates shall accommodate four jacks. Quantities of cables to each outlet shall be in accordance with the location type and project document. (1) Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and best industry practices. (2) Copper horizontal cable shall not exceed 90 meters in length. (3) Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the NEC maximum fill for the particular raceway type. (4) Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination, no splices or cross-connects are permitted). (5) The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded. (6) Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends less than four times the cable outside diameter. (7) When cable runs are being installed, provide additional slack at both ends to accommodate future cabling system changes. The minimum amount of allowable slack at the: a) MDF, IDF, LDF will be 3 ft. b) Work Area Outlets will be 12 inches (8) If a J-Hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles in dropped ceiling or concealed ceiling spaces, all horizontal cables distributed using J-Hooks shall be supported at a maximum of four-foot intervals. At no point shall cable(s) rest on or attach to acoustic ceiling grids or panels. a) Cable slack loops of any kind are not permitted in mid span for any J-Hook pathway. b) Cable installed above fire-sprinkler systems shall not be attached to the system plumbing or any ancillary equipment or hardware. c) Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. (9) Pulling tension on 4-pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25 pounds for a single cable or cable bundle.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 179 IFB No. 2000002197 (10) The CONTRACTOR will replace, before terminations are completed, any cables damaged or subjected to installation practices outside of those specified within this document, at CONTRACTOR’s expense. b. The following identifies the minimum number of Category 5e/6/6a and fiber drops to be installed into each area identified. Additional areas and additional drops may be required and will be identified on the project documents. Cable and termination requirements are identified in part 2.02 of this specification. (1) Standard office, workstation, or cubicle will receive three (3) Category 5e/6/6a drops in a single 4-position faceplate. Two Category 5e/6/6a drops will be marked for Data, the other for Voice. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. (2) Administrative office core areas shall receive three (3) Category 5e/6/6a drops in a single 4-position faceplate per user or desk indicated on the drawings. Two Category 5e/6/6a drops will be marked for Data, the other for Voice. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. (3) Conference rooms will receive up to eight (8) Category 5e/6/6a drops; 4 each at two separate locations in the room. Each group of four drops will terminate in a single faceplate with two Category 5e/6/6a indicated for Voice and two for Data. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. (4) Classroom: A minimum of four (4) student Category 5e/6/6a drops, and one (1) Category 5e/6/6a drop at the teacher’s location. All classroom Category 5e/6/6a drops shall be distributed from the IDF location and terminate on two port faceplates. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts (5) Library: A minimum of one (1) 4-strand fiber drop to the LDF in the Library and a minimum of twelve (12) Category 5e/6/6a data drops distributed from the LDF. Larger Libraries shall provide up to 40 drops. Category 5e/6/6a drops must be grouped with two Category 5e/6/6a jacks and two blank jacks per faceplate. Drops must be distributed within the room according to the Project documents. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. (6) Computer Laboratories: A minimum of one (1), 6-strand fiber drop to the LDF in the Computer Laboratory and forty (40) Category 5e/6/6a data drops distributed from the LDF. Category 5e/6/6a drops shall be grouped with up to six
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 180 IFB No. 2000002197 Category 5e/6/6a jacks per faceplate. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. Drops must be distributed within the room according to the Project documents. (7) Student Nutritional Support Areas: One (1), 4-strand fiber drop to the LDF and up to twenty (20) Category 5e/6/6a data drops distributed from the LDF. Category 5e/6/6a drops must be grouped with two Category 5e/6/6a jacks and two blank jacks per faceplate. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. Drops must be distributed within the room according to the Project documents. (8) Student Nutritional Support Areas - Exterior Locations: Each location shall receive two (2) Category 5e/6/6a drops in an environmentally sealed enclosure as described in section 1.02 B. 4 of this specification. (9) Multi-purpose rooms shall contain a total of: eight (8) Category 5e/6/6a data drops distributed from the closest LDF or IDF location. Category 5e/6/6a drops must be grouped with two Category 5e/6/6a jacks per faceplate. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. Drops must be distributed within the room according to the Project documents and consistent with the descriptions below. a) In the stage area of a multipurpose room, there shall be two (2) Category 5e/6/6a drops and one (1), four- strand, multimode fiber optic drop located either at stage apron or the proscenium arch. b) On the other three walls of the multipurpose room, two (2) Category 5e/6/6a data drops shall be evenly distributed and installed. (10) Additional non-instructional and office work area horizontal fiber and Category 5e/6/6a cabling requirements will be indicated on the Project documents. 10. Labeling and Marking: a. Provide complete cable location chart and as-built documentation in an envelope and attach to the inside rear doors of distribution frame cabinets in wiring spaces. b. Mark distribution panels, cables and cover plates with computer- generated labels. Drops shall be labeled with the same identifier on the receptacle faceplate, inside each junction box, on the cable at the jack, on the cable at the patch panel, on the termination side of the patch panel, and on the patch side of the patch panel. Cable markers shall be located within 2 inches of the end of the cable jacket and
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 181 IFB No. 2000002197 shall be directly readable. Panel labels shall be computer-generated and printed using a laser printer. A disk with the label files shall be submitted as part of the project record documents. D. Racks/Cabinets: 1. Racks and cabinets shall be bolted to the floor or wall mounted, as required, and provided with all additional accessories as required for a complete functional system. Racks and cabinets shall be seismically braced and attached to horizontal ladder racking or cable tray with ¾ inch threaded rod. 2. MDF/IDF cabinets shall be placed to accommodate 36-inch aisles in the front and rear. When wall mounted, cabinet placement shall allow a minimum of 31 inches clear on each side and 36 inches in front 3. Provide keys and locks for cabinets and equipment with locks keyed to a Corbin No. 60 key for access to operate equipment and Corbin No. 80 key for access to service equipment. 4. If backboards are necessary for mounting IDF’s, and LDF’s, they are to be ¾ inch plywood, ACX grade surface with the "A" side exposed and painted with 2 coats of flat light, colored fire-retarding paint on all sides. The size of the backboards will be determined by the size of the space provided. All cut edges of plywood shall be sanded smooth. 5. Unused openings in cabinets shall be effectively closed. 6. Cabinet doors shall close without striking installed components. 7. Cabling in cabinets shall be installed and loomed is a manner that allows full travel in rack rail adjustment. Cabling shall not infringe on space used for equipment mounting. 8. Cabinets shall be grounded as specified in Article 250 of the California Electrical Code. 9. Conduits shall be installed so as to prevent moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the enclosure. 10. Conductor lengths shall be maintained to a minimum within the wiring gutter space. Conductors shall be long enough to reach the terminal location in a manner that avoids strain on the connecting lugs. 11. Maintain the required bending radius of conductors inside the cabinet. 12. Clean the cabinets of foreign material such as cement plaster and paint. 13. Distribute and arrange conductors neatly in the wiring gutters. E. Telephone Systems: 1. Terminals, Cabinets, and Racks: Telecommunications system and auxiliary cabinets/racks shall be installed and wall-mounted in accordance with Zone 4 seismic requirements and shall not block any existing removable panels or swing-open doors required for normal system expansion or service. a. Terminal Blocks: See appendix 3 for typical network diagram.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 182 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Furnish terminal blocks in terminal cabinets/racks, and where indicated on Drawings, as required to provide a termination for conductors in communication cabinets/racks and backboards. c. Terminal blocks shall be 110 Series, solder-less, push-on type, solid, and 22 - 26 AWG. Terminals for connections to external circuits shall be properly labeled. Terminal blocks shall be installed on mounting legs and installed within cabinets/racks as required. Terminal blocks shall be installed on inside back of cabinets/racks only, not on side. Cross-connect and wire management shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568, Category 5e/6/6a performance standards. Terminal blocks shall be pairs of 25 or 100 with mounting legs. d. Terminal Cabinets/racks: (1) Lines and cables within cabinets/racks and on main terminal backboards shall be secured with cable straps. Cables shall be formed in rectilinear configuration. Insulation between conductors and ground shall be properly maintained. Cables shall be properly numbered in numerical order and shall maintain the same numbering system throughout the Project site. (2) Conductors shall be color-coded per EIA/TIA 568 standards. Individual cables shall be run out and tagged with laser- printed cable markers. Cable index strips shall be typed and installed on terminal cabinet door. Index strips shall be covered with clear plastic adhesive covers. Terminal cabinet cable codes shall be typed on record drawings. (3) Terminations and connections shall be on 110 Series blocks. Cables shall be identified as to buildings and rooms served and terminated in terminal cabinets/racks and backboards. (4) Cables to PA system consoles and amplifier inputs shall terminate on 110 Series blocks where PA system is required. (5) Cables from PA consoles and amplifier outputs shall terminate on 110 Series blocks. (6) Cables to telecommunications switches, trunk inputs, shall terminate on 110 Series blocks. (7) Cables from telecommunications switches (extensions, consoles, night bells, etc.) shall be terminated on 110 Series blocks. Provide blocks and cables for maximum possible system configuration. (8) Cables to satellite terminal locations and classrooms shall be terminated on 110 Series blocks. Provide blocks as needed, plus 2 vertical rows for future expansion, at main cross- connect locations only.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 183 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Wiring: Wiring within communication cabinets/racks and backboards shall be installed to conform to TIA/EIA-568, Category 5e/6/6a performance standards, and shall be terminated on terminal strips for all required external connections. Wiring shall be cabled, laced, and securely fastened in place so that weight is not imposed on equipment, controls, switches, or terminals. Input circuits and terminal strips shall be installed to provide separation necessary for proper operation. Wires shall be identified by number and chart, and 120VAC wiring shall be in a required conduit or raceway. 3. Cables: All discussion of cable terminations and location of blocks are subject to provisions of the Terminal Signal Cabinet section above. a. Install conductors and cables to devices indicated on Drawings. Provide conductor terminations to devices for complete telecommunications system to function as specified and as indicated on Drawings. b. Cable runs shall be continuous, no splicing shall be allowed. Terminations shall be in communication cabinets/racks or on telephone backboards. Connections from incoming to outgoing shall be provided with cross-connect wires. Cables shall not directly connect to other cables. c. Conductors and cables shall be installed within conduits, cable trays, boxes, raceways, and cabinets/racks in a manner, which shall provide an enclosed installation, except where otherwise specified. Furnish and install conductors to connect incoming and outgoing circuits, including spare conductors, to terminal strips in the LAN or telephone equipment room. All in accordance with TIA/EIA 569. d. Cables and 4-pair wires shall be behind 110 Series blocks in space created by stand-offs and shall be neatly laced and securely bundled.
7.02 RELATED SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
A. Telephone Systems: 1. Coordination of Installation of Telecommunication Systems: a. All Work, including installation or removal, will be coordinated with the OAR. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for floor plans for cutover, station reviews, and cut sheets. b. If the scope of the Work includes the extension and/or replacement of an existing telephone system, the cutover and station review must be coordinated with the OAR prior to implementation and ever effort must be made to minimize interruption of service during the cutover or at any other time. c. Examination: The IOR shall observe installation of main cable runs. Notify the IOR not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed time of installation.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 184 IFB No. 2000002197 7.03 CERTIFICATION AND TESTING A. Provide the OWNER’s Authorized Representative (OAR) with copies of factory calibration certificates for each test set used in the testing procedures. All test equipment used shall have been factory calibrated within the previous 12 month period. Operators of the test equipment shall have factory training in the use of the equipment and its software. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cable performance under installed conditions. All conductors of each installed cable shall he verified useable by the CONTRACTOR prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed. B. Local Area Network: 1. Copper: a. Each cable shall be tested for continuity on all pairs and/or conductors. b. Enhanced Category 5e/6/6a data cable shall be performance verified using an automated test set for Category 5e/6/6a link configurations. c. Test set shall be certified Level III. To ensure verifiable equipment calibration, the OWNER shall require field calibration each time a new set of tests are performed. Test for the continuity parameters defined above, and provide results for the performed tests. This test set shall be capable of testing for the continuity and length parameters defined above, and provide results for the following tests: (1) Attenuation (2) Wire Map (3) Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (ACR) (4) Pair-to-pair NEXT loss (5) PSNEXT loss (6) Return Loss (7) Pair-to-pair ELFEXT (8) PSELFEXT (9) Propagation delay (10) Delay skew (11) Cable length d. Cable length shall be tested using the cable manufacturers’ published Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) parameter. OWNERs Quality Assurance Agent shall verify the NVP setting
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 185 IFB No. 2000002197 prior to commencement of the testing process. Generic settings not using the published NVP parameter will not be accepted. e. Test results shall be automatically evaluated by equipment, using the most up-to-date criteria from the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 standard and the result shown as pass/fail. f. Test results shall be printed directly from the test unit in native format, and both hard and soft copies in native format shall be provided to the OWNER. The printed test results shall include tests performed, the expected test result, and the actual test result. 2. Fiber Optics: a. CONTRACTOR shall terminate, test and document all multi-mode and single-mode fiber optic cables with approved connectors at the drop locations and on approved fiber optic patch panels at the MDF, IDFs, and LDFs. No fiber optic cables shall remain un-terminated. b. Fiber optic cables shall meet all EIA/TIA performance standards and shall be tested in accordance with all applicable standards. Light source and power meter tests shall be dual wavelength and shall be tested in both directions at each wavelength on each fiber strand. Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) tests shall be performed with an instrument suitable for testing campus cable plants. OTDR tests shall be conducted at both wavelengths from the MDF with sufficient launch cables installed at both ends of the fiber run to clearly identify the mated connectors. OTDR launch and landing cables shall not be less than 100 meters in length. The light pulse duration used shall not be greater than 50 nanoseconds. Sampling resolution shall not be less than 5 feet per 100 meters. (1) Multi-mode fiber optic cable runs shall be tested in both directions at each frequency with a power meter and light source combination that can verify distance and attenuation. Wavelengths tested shall include 850nm and 1300nm. (2) Single-mode fiber optic cable runs less than or equal to 400m shall be tested in both directions at each frequency with a power meter and light source combination that can verify distance and attenuation. Wavelengths tested shall include 1310nm and 1550nm. (3) Single-mode fiber optic cable runs greater than 450m shall be tested with a power meter and light source combination and with an OTDR. Wavelengths tested shall include 1310nm and 1550nm. 3. Completion: CONTRACTOR’s work for each school installation shall be considered complete after the following have been accomplished: a. All system testing has been completed; CONTRACTOR certifies that entire system is in working order Cable Test Forms and
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 186 IFB No. 2000002197 equipment specific test documentation, both electronic files and paper records, have been submitted to the OWNER. b. All ceiling panels previously removed have been put back in place. c. All system labels have been put in place. d. All construction debris and scrap materials have been removed from project site. e. All marked up, project record documents have been returned to the OWNER. f. All unused customer material has been returned to the OWNER. g. The OWNER has successfully completed acceptance testing of the network wiring installation. h. The OWNER’s Inspector has inspected and accepted the installation. C. Signal Terminal Cabinets: 1. Cabinets will be securely bolted to the floor and the wall or ceiling as required by seismic requirements. 2. Cabinet will be serviceable and lockable. D. Telephone Systems: 1. Provide test and reception gear to test for specified performance. 2. For multi-pair copper communications cable, test all pairs within counts and binder groups to ensure that no less than 99% of the pairs of a multi-pair cable achieve continuity and operation in voice band tests. For Category 5e/6/6a copper cable, test and certify 100% of all drops for using test equipment certified for 10/100/1000 validation and operation. 3. For Category 5e/6/6a cabling, all requirements of section 3.03A above 4. Before Substantial Completion, submit test results and related documents to the IOR.
7.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. As-Built Documentation: 1. Block diagrams indicating all items and their point-to-point connections in a manner following floor plan layout. B. Operating and Servicing Manuals, Record Drawings: 1. Deliver three (3) copies of operating, specification descriptions, and/or service manual. Each complete manual shall be bound in a three ring binder, and all data shall be typewritten or drafted. a. Each manual shall include a page with Project site and Project name, date of Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR name, address, telephone, and fax numbers.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 187 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Each manual shall contain a letter, signed by an officer of the company indicating the beginning and ending date of any warranties described in subsection 1.07 of this specification and shall describe the companies’ commitment to service the warranty during the terms specified. c. Each manual shall include all specifications and instructions necessary for proper operation and servicing of system. d. Each Manual shall include installation and coordination drawings specifically related to this section shall be included as follows: (1) Size A (8-1/2 inch x 11 inch) and size B (11 inch x 17 inch) shall be bound into the manual. (2) Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes and bound into the manual. 2. Deliver two (2) copies of Record drawings on USB flash drive representative of the work performed shall be presented at completion of work in the most recent Autodesk’s AutoCAD format or Microsoft Visio, for Microsoft Windows. a. The submittal shall contain all systems wiring installed including telephone, LAN, and any other low voltage system CONTRACTOR-installed wiring. b. The submittal shall consist of two electronic copies on USB flash drive and three paper record copies on no less than “E” size drawings, presented prior to the acceptance inspection. c. OWNER utilizes layers as a key tool in controlling visibility of drawing elements and to provide consistent information between drawings, yet provide control over what is seen on each sheet. Premise wiring shall be shown on a separate layer, labeled as “Premise Wiring” that uses both building floor plans and conduit supporting structure layers below. The use of any version control blocks or company logos shall be on a layer separate from the premise wiring as-built drawings. d. All electronic files supplied shall be multi-layer drawings with the following layers as a minimum: (1) Layer 1 shall contain title blocks only. (2) Layer 2 shall contain building or site plan backgrounds only. (3) Layer 3 shall contain terminal cabinets, devices, cabling and other system components. C. Cable Numbering Records: 1. OWNER requires both labeling and record documentation at the conclusion of each cable installation project. Labels and cable records allow the OWNER to locate, identify and diagnose cases of trouble more efficiently.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 188 IFB No. 2000002197 They are required for each cable installation project regardless of size and scope. 2. Installation CONTRACTOR shall provide a cable management spread sheet that shall include the following: a. Cable Schedule/ b. Cable Test Forms. c. Cable Labels. d. Net work planning chart. 3. Present the data in an Excel spreadsheet that will operate on Windows XP/ Windows 7 platforms. Information shall be presented in paper and electronic forms in a format that will be provided by the OWNER. 4. A paper copy of the cable schedule in a transparent plastic sleeve shall be affixed to the front door of each Intermediate and Local Distribution Frame (IDF and LDF). In the MDF cabinet, the cable schedule shall be affixed to the rear door of the cabinet. 5. The following information is provided to assist ARCHITECTs, engineers and installation CONTRACTORs in understanding and complying with the requirements of this specification. OWNER’s cable numbering is based on a defined format which readily identifies cable type, and allows maintenance technicians to determine originating and terminating locations by means of cable labels, as required in other sections of the specification. 6. Refer to Attachment 2 for a diagram that describines all functional cabling and network connection elements standardized by the OWNER. This cable information is consistent with but exceeds the requirements of EIA/TIA Specification 606. Terminating Points In (TPI) and Terminating Points Out (TPO) may be 110-Type blocks, 110-Type blocks, 24 or 48 density RJ-45 Patch Panels, or Fiber Optic Patch Panels. Termination point equipment is not part of cable records. 7. Each cable sheath shall be identified by laser-generated labels, and on the cabling record document by means of a 9-digit alpha/numeric number. In addition to the 9-digit sheath/cable number, CONTRACTORs will need to provide 3-digit, numeric pair/strand-numbering information specific to each cable/sheath number. The pair/strand number will be documented in the cable record document. Refer to Attachment 3 for definitions and use of each field. 8. The following are the permissible characters that may be entered into each field. a. Cable Definitions (Field #1): T Trunk – Voice from MPOE to MDF W Wide Area – Data from MPOE to MDF F Feeder – Voice from MDF or PBX to IDF B Backbone – Data from MDF to IDF
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 189 IFB No. 2000002197 D Distribution – Voice IDF to LDF (see note below) S Secondary Backbone – Data IDF to LDF B Building cable drops – Voice IDF to User Jack H Horizontal – Data IDF or LDF to User Jack b. Cable Types (Field #2): C Multi-pair copper cable F Multi-pair fiber optic cable c. Destination Number (Fields #3-5): Fields 3 -- 5 taken together will be a 3-digit sequential number identifying the IDF or LDF destination. The first digit of this destination number (field #3) will be structured to identify whether the destination is an IDF, or LDF.using the following convention: 4. IDFs are identified in field #3 by the numbers “0” through “1”. 5. LDFs are identified in field #3 by the numbers “2” through “3”. 6. For each situation, fields #4 and #5 will be a sequential number identifying unique, specific IDF, or LDF locations. d. By this convention, each IDF and LDF will be represented by a unique three digit number. IDFs will be numbered in the range 000—199, LDFs will be numbered in the range 200—399. e. Cable Number (Fields #6-8) This will be a unique and sequential three digit number assigned to each cable sheath. f. Field #9 is reserved and will be represented using a dash “-“. g. Pair/Strand Number (Fields #10-12) This will be a unique and sequential three digit number for each copper cable pair or fiber strand within a sheath.
Note: Code “D” in the Cable Definition Field is a non-standard cable configuration and normally not used. OWNER serves voice jacks directly from IDF’s. The OWNER must approve, in advance of construction or installation, any installation that brings voice communications through an LDF.
7.05 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
7.06 CLEANUP A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
7.07 OWNER ORIENTATION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 190 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Completed shop drawings, as specified in Article 3.04 above shall serve as the OWNER’s orientation. END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 191 IFB No. 2000002197 Attachment 1 Cable Record document Cable Installation Record Page: # of # Project Name: Date Work Completed: Installation Inspected by: CONTRACTOR:
Cable Strand/Pair Termination #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 Room Number T C 0 0 1 0 0 1 - 0 0 1 - 0 0 2 - 0 0 3 - 0 0 4 - 0 0 5 - 0 0 6 - 0 0 7 - 0 0 8 - 0 0 9 - 0 1 0 - 0 1 1 - 0 1 2 - 0 1 3 - 0 1 4 - 0 1 5 - 0 1 6 - 0 1 7 - 0 1 8 - 0 1 9 - 0 2 0 - 0 2 1 - 0 2 2 - 0 2 3 - 0 2 4 - 0 2 5 T C 0 0 1 0 0 2 - 0 0 1 - 0 0 2 - 0 0 3 - 0 0 4 - 0 0 5 - 0 0 6 - 0 0 7 - 0 0 8 - ● - ● SAMPLE ONLY LAUSD - Cable Record (Revision 1b - 06/01/06)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 192 IFB No. 2000002197 Attachment 2 FUNCTIONAL CABLING AND NETWORK CONNECTION ELEMENTS
Cable Nomenclature
Voice Entrance Cable Trunk Cable Feeder Cable Distribution Cable Building Cable Data Entrance Cable Wide Area Cable Fiber Backbone Cable Secondary Fiber Backbone Horizontal Cable
LDF #1 T T data data IDF P P fiber term MPOP MPOE MDF #1 I O DATA T T term T T T T T T P P voice voice P P P P P P I O term I O I O I O data VOICE data term LDC voice voice fiber #1 term term T T Service Provider data data P P Demarcation voice term voice I O term Property Line IDF Cable PBX #n Vault T T P P I O LDF #n T T data data fiber P P term term I O
voice voice term
Legend
Multi-Pair Copper Cable LDC voice voice Fiber Optic Cable #n term UTP (data) T T data data UTP (voice) P P term Patch Cable (fiber or UTP) I O TPI = Termination Point In TPO = Termination Point Out
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 193 IFB No. 2000002197 Attachment 3 CABLING DEFINITION AND DESIGNATION
Cable Number Pair/Strand Number
A A N N N N N N - N N N
Cable Cable Definition Type Cable No. Destination No. Destination No. Destination Cable Number Cable Number Cable Number Pair/Strand Number Pair/Strand
------
#11 Pair/Strand Number #12 Pair/Strand Number #10 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 Reserved #9
A=alpha characters only; N=numeric character only
END OF ATTACHMENTS
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 194 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT G – 28 1000 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS)
SECTION 28 1000
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS (ACS)
EDIT NOTE: 1. LAUSD INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD) IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION TO THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM ITD.
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Access Control System monitoring, badging and field hardware that includes cards/fobs, card readers, door contacts, request-to-exit devices, input boards, output boards, field controllers and supporting power, cabling and network infrastructure. B. Access Control System shall be integrated with LAUSD’s Security Management System (SMS).
1.02 REFERENCES A. IEC/EN/UL 60950-1: – Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements. B. IEC/EN/UL 60950-22: Technology Equipment Safety – Part 22: Equipment to be Installed Outdoors. C. IEEE 802.3at (Power over Ethernet Plus) – Power over Ethernet Plus. D. IEEE 802.1X (Authentication) – Standard for Local and metropolitan area .networks-Port-Based Network Access Control (Authentication). E. IPv4 (RFC 791) – Internet Protocol Version 4. F. IPv6 (RFC 2460) – Internet Protocol Version 6. G. QoS – DiffServ (RFC 2475) – Scalable End-to-End Quality of Service Model. H. IEC/EN 60529 IP66 (Ingress protection) – Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code). I. NEMA 250 Type 4X – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. J. IEC/EN 62262 IK10 – Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment against external mechanical impacts (IK code).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 195 IFB No. 2000002197 A. List of Materials: Submit a complete list of proposed materials. B. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed and dimensioned Shop Drawings indicating kind, weight and thickness of materials, method of fitting and fastening parts together, location and number of parts or modules, sizes, and complete details of method of fitting suspension and fastening luminaires in place. Provide wiring and cabling diagrams. Drawings shall contain sufficient information to assemble and install equipment at the Project site without further instructions. C. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions for luminaires and accessories.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS H. Equipment and materials that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S Information Technology project manager. When deviating or proposing material substitutions the following information shall be submitted: 14. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER, and all necessary documents to validate the claims made in the substitution form. 15. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions. 16. The CONTRACTOR assumes all responsibility for additional costs, directly or indirectly, associated with proposing and installing an approved substitution products. All substituted products must meet the intent of form and function identified in the specification.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR or security sub-CONTRACTOR shall be a licensed security CONTRACTOR with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing and servicing systems of similar scope and complexity, and evidence that CONTRACTOR has completed at least three (3) projects of similar scope, and is currently engaged in the installation and maintenance of systems herein described. B. All installation, configuration, setup, program and related work shall be performed by electronic technicians thoroughly trained by the manufacturer in the installation and service of the equipment provided. C. The CONTRACTOR or designated sub-CONTRACTOR shall submit installer’s third party verified credentials of completion of manufacturer certification. The CONTRACTOR system programmer shall have attended manufacturer training and obtained the highest level certifications in Integrated Security Management System (ISMS) that supports the ACS and VMS. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide four (4) current references from clients with systems of similar scope and complexity that became operational in the past three (3) years. At least three (3) of the references shall be utilizing the same system components, in a similar configuration as the proposed system. E. The access control system shall be in compliance with applicable industry standards listed under article 1.04-References.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 196 IFB No. 2000002197 1.06 WARRANTY B. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of, or failure to, examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. C. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. D. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than 5 years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. E. Installation CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to OWNER ITD Project Management. F. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that a Access Control system component, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate, or repeated failure rate, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems of the same model purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a project manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be: a. Equal to or less than 10% in any 12 month period during the original warranty term. b. Equal to or less than 15% cumulative failures during the entire term of the original warranty.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 197 IFB No. 2000002197 2. If, at any time during of the life of the products, the failure rate of the Access Control systems or components exceeds 20%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition. 4. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days or written notification from the OWNER. 5. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service. G. The warranty shall cover the complete system including fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. H. The warranty shall include onsite 48-hour advanced part replacement. I. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). J. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. K. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS a. SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The ACS shall be an enterprise class IP access control software solution. It shall be fully embedded within a unified security platform (USP) as part of the Integrated Security Management System (ISMS). This platform shall allow the seamless unification of the ACS with an IP video management system (VMS). B. The ACS shall be scalable to support configurations consisting of estimated 10,000 doors with facilities spanning multiple geographic areas. C. The ACS shall support an unrestricted number of logs and historical transactions (events and alarms) with the maximum allowed being limited by the amount of hard disk space available. D. The ACS shall support a variety of access control functionalities, including but not limited to: 1. Controller management, door management, elevator management, and area management. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 198 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Cardholder and cardholder group management, credential management, and access rule management. 3. Badge printing and template creation. 4. People counting, area presence tracking, and mustering. 5. Offering a framework for third party hardware integration such as card and signature scanner. E. Certifications. The ACS shall have the following certifications: 1. UL-294. 2. ULC-S319. 3. EN-60839-11-1. b. ACS ACCESS MANAGEMENT A. The ACS shall be based on an open architecture able to support multiple access control hardware manufacturers. The ACS shall be able to integrate with multiple non-proprietary interface modules and controllers, access readers, and other third party applications. B. The ACS shall be an IP enabled solution. All communication between the ACS and hardware controllers shall be based on standard TCP/IP protocol. C. Access Manager Role 1. The Access Manager Role shall be the server that synchronizes all access control hardware units under its control, such as door controllers and IO modules. It shall also be able to validate and log all access activities and events when the door controllers and IO modules are online. 2. The Access Manager Role shall maintain the communication link with the hardware controllers under its control. It shall also continuously monitor whether the controllers are online or offline. 3. Synchronization of hardware units shall be automated and transparent to users and shall occur in the background. It shall also be possible to manually synchronize units or to synchronize units on a schedule. 4. The Access Manager Role shall support doors and controllers located within one or more facilities. The Access Server shall support a minimum of 200 readers and up to 1024 readers per computer. D. The Access Server shall store all access events associated with the doors, areas, hardware zones (hardware input points), elevators, and controllers under its direct control. c. ACS GLOBAL CARDHOLDER MANAGEMENT A. The ACS shall support global cardholder management and synchronization between a central independent site and remote independent sites, all of which can have their own Directory and databases.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 199 IFB No. 2000002197 B. It shall be possible to synchronize the following entities and their configuration data: 1. Cardholders (incl. custom fields) 2. Cardholder groups 3. Credentials 4. Badge templates C. Cardholders and other synchronized entities can be added centrally and synchronized to remote sites for central cardholder management. D. Cardholders and other synchronized entities can be added at remote sites and synchronized to the central site and other remote sites. E. The ACS shall support the assignment of a single card per cardholder across all of an organization’s sites. F. Manual and scheduled synchronization shall be supported. d. ACS HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY LIST A. The ACS shall have an open architecture that supports the integration of third party IP-based door controllers and IO modules. The ACS shall simultaneously support mixed configurations of access control hardware from multiple vendors. B. The ACS shall support multiple types of hardware devices: single-reader controllers, 2-reader controllers, 1- to 64-reader controllers, integrated readers and door controllers, and Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) enabled door controllers. C. The ACS shall support most industry standard card readers that output card data using the Wiegand protocol and Clock-and-Data. D. The ACS shall support the IP-enabled controllers. e. SEAMLESS UNIFICATION WITH VMS A. Through the USP, the ACS shall support integration with an IP Video Surveillance System (VSS). Integration with an IP video surveillance system shall permit the user to view live and recorded video. B. Users shall be able to associate one or more video cameras to the following entity types: doors, elevator, and hardware zone (input points) and more. C. The Monitoring UI shall present a true Unified Security Interface for access control and video surveillance. Advanced live video viewing and playback of archived video shall be available through the Monitoring UI. D. It shall be possible to view video associated with access control events when viewing a report. f. ACS CONTROLLER (UNIT) MANAGEMENT A. The ACS shall support the discovery, configuration, and management of IP enabled controllers and IO modules (hardware units). A user shall be permitted to add, delete, or modify a controller if he or she has the appropriate privileges.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 200 IFB No. 2000002197 B. The ACS shall support automatic unit discovery. The user shall establish the settings for discovery ports and for the types of unit discovery and the ACS shall automatically detect all connected devices. C. The ACS shall support a unit swap utility for swapping out an existing controller with a new controller. The unit swap utility shall avoid the reprogramming of the system whenever a unit is replaced. All logs and events from the old unit shall be maintained. D. The ACS shall support pre-configuration of the system prior to the physical hardware installation. g. ACS CARD HOLDER AND CARDHOLDER GROUP MANAGEMENT A. The ACS shall support the configuration and management of cardholders and cardholder groups. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify a cardholder or cardholder group if he or she has the appropriate privileges. B. Custom fields shall be supported for both cardholders and cardholder groups. C. The ACS shall permit the following activation/expiration options for a cardholder’s profile: delayed activation of a cardholder’s profile, expiration based on the date of first use of credentials, or expiration on a user-defined date. D. It shall be possible to associate a picture to a cardholder’s profile. The picture shall be imported from a file, captured with a digital camera, or captured from a video surveillance camera. When a cardholder event occurs, the picture of the cardholder shall be displayed in the Monitoring UI. The ACS shall support multiple standard picture formats. E. Cardholder groups shall enable the grouping of cardholders to facilitate mass changes to system settings. It shall be possible to assign cardholder groups to access rules, thus avoiding the assignment of one cardholder at a time. F. It shall be possible to search by picture association, custom fields, names and credential codes. G. It shall be possible to select multiple cardholders for immediate deactivation or reactivation. H. The ACS shall support the synchronization of cardholders and cardholders group through Active Directory including the credentials and pictures of the cardholders. (Specifier, Active Directory integration requires a license and available in Professional and up). h. ACS CREDENTIAL MANAGEMENT A. The ACS shall support the configuration and management of credentials, e.g. access cards and keypad PIN numbers. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify a credential if the user has the appropriate privileges. B. Users shall be able to add Custom Fields (user-defined fields) to credentials. Creating a new credential shall be accomplished either manually or automatically.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 201 IFB No. 2000002197 C. Automatic creation shall allow the user to create a credential entity by presenting a credential to a selected reader. The ACS shall read the card data and associate it to the credential entity. It shall be possible to automatically enroll any card format (128 bits or less). D. The ACS shall support multiple credentials per cardholder without necessitating duplicate cardholder information. The ACS shall automatically detect and prevent attempts to register an already-registered credential. E. Batch enrollment of credentials shall be supported. F. The ACS shall provide a workflow for badge issuance and card requests. i. ACS CUSTOM CARD FORMAT A. A custom card format feature shall allow the administrator to add additional custom card formats. j. ACS BADGE DESIGNER A. A The badge designer shall allow the creation of badge templates that define the content and presentation format of a cardholder badge to be printed. B. Badge production shall consist of selecting the credential, the badge template, and clicking print. C. Batch printing of cards shall be available. D. The contents of a badge template can include: cardholder’s first and last name, picture, custom fields, bitmap graphics, lines, ovals, rectangles, dynamic text labels linked to custom fields and static text labels, and barcodes (Interleaved 2 of 5, Extended Code 39). E. Copy and paste of badge template objects shall be available. F. It shall be possible to set the border thickness, and color, the fill color of badge objects (content), and the color of text labels. G. Settings, such as object transparency, text orientation, and auto-sizing of text shall be available or transparent to the user. H. Dual-sided badges shall be supported. k. ACS DOOR MANAGEMENT A. The ACS shall support the configuration and management of doors. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify a door if he or she has the appropriate privileges. B. The ACS shall permit multiple access rules to be associated to a door. C. The ACS shall support the following forms of authentication: Card Only, Card or Keypad (PIN), or Card and Keypad (PIN). It shall be possible to define a schedule for when Card Only or Card and Keypad authentication modes shall be required. D. It shall be possible to set an extended grant time on a per-door basis (in addition to the standard grant time). Cardholder properties shall include the option of using the extended grant time. When flagged cardholders are granted access, the door shall
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 202 IFB No. 2000002197 be unlocked for the duration of the extended grant time instead of the standard grant time. E. The ACS shall allow the configuration of the relocking mode on doors such as on door open, after a definite time, or on door close. F. The ACS shall support the ability to enable access rules for other cardholders once a supervisor has accessed an area. G. The ACS shall support the ability to enable unlocking schedule on a door once an employee has entered the facility. H. Readerless doors. 1. The ACS shall support doors configured solely with a lock, a REX, and a door contact but without readers. 2. The implementation of a readerless door shall be possible with the use of standard access hardware IO modules. External hardware such as timers, shall not be required. 3. Unlocking schedules shall be programmable for readerless doors. 4. Standard door activity reports shall also be possible with readerless doors. I. Unlocking schedules and exceptions to unlocking schedules shall be associated with a door. An unlocking schedule shall determine when a door should be automatically unlocked. The ACS shall also support the use of a specific offline unlocking schedule. Exceptions to unlocking schedules shall be used to define time periods during which unlocking schedules shall not be applied, such as during statutory holidays. J. The ACS shall support one or more cameras per door. Video shall then be associated to door access events, such as access grant or access denied. l. ACS ELEVATOR MANAGEMENT A. The ACS shall support the configuration and management of elevators. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify an elevator if he or she has the appropriate privileges. B. The ACS shall be able to control access to specific floors using a reader within the elevator cab. Control shall be available through the use of a controller with an interface to a reader and to multiple output modules with relays. C. Elevator floor selections shall be tracked using a controller with an interface to multiple input modules. Floor tracking shall be available within an elevator activity report. D. The elevator control module shall continue to function in offline mode should communication between the ACS and the controller fail. E. The ACS shall support one or more cameras per elevator cab. Video shall then be associated to elevator access events, such as access grant or access denied. m. ACS PEOPLE COUNTING AND AREA PRECENSE TRACKING (MUSTERING) Section II.D –Technical Specifications 203 IFB No. 2000002197 A. The ACS shall support people counting (or area presence tracking). The ACS shall be able to monitor and report the number of cardholders in an area in real-time and for all areas. Monitoring shall be based on the entire access control infrastructure, for both local areas and those in remote geographic locations. People counting can also be used to perform mustering. B. Active presence count without exit card reads is not acceptable. C. The ACS shall be able to generate an area presence report listing the cardholders located in one or more areas, accessible through the Application UI. It shall be possible to filter the report by area and time period. The report shall also include activity from sub-areas (nested areas). D. The ACS shall be able to determine the entry of a cardholder based on a dedicated sensor. n. ACS CUSTOM FIELDS (USER-DEFINED FIELDS) A. The ACS shall permit the creation of custom fields. Custom fields shall be supported for the following entities: cardholders, cardholder groups, credentials, and visitors. B. Supported custom fields shall include: text, integers, decimal numbers, dates, Users shall be able to define a default value for a custom field. C. The creation of new custom field types shall be possible. New custom field types shall be based on the standard custom fields supported. They shall support user- defined values from which an operator must make a selection. D. Administrators have the ability to define which users can view and modify specific custom fields. This shall limit the access to custom field data to users with pre- defined privileges. The ACS shall support querying and report generation using custom fields. E. Custom fields can be grouped and ordered within these groups as defined by the user. o. ACS IMPORT TOOLS
A. The ACS shall support an integrated Import Tool to facilitate the import of existing cardholder and credential data. The import of data shall be through the use the CSV file format. The tool shall be available from the Configuration UI. B. The Import Tool shall also support the ability to manually import data that has been exported from a third party database if it is in CSV format. C. The import tool shall permit the import of the following data: 1. Cardholder name, descriptions, email, and status. 2. Cardholder group information. 3. Credential name, status, format, and card number (including credentials with custom formats). 4. Custom fields.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 204 IFB No. 2000002197 D. Full flexibility in selecting the fields to be imported during an import session shall be available. E. The option to use a custom and unique cardholder key shall be specified during the import process to ensure that cardholders with duplicate names will not have their data overwritten. Cardholder key generation shall be automated. The end user shall have the option to select which fields will be used to create this unique key, e.g. credential number, custom fields, cardholder name. F. The ACS shall also support re-importing a CSV file containing new information to update existing information in the ACS database. Re-importing shall enable bulk amendments to existing access control data. p. GENERAL CLIENT SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS A. The Applications configuration and monitoring over any network and be accessible locally or from a remote connection. B. The CSA shall consist of the Configuration UI for system configuration and the application UI for monitoring. The CSA shall be Windows-based and provide an easy-to-use graphical user interface (UI). C. The CSA shall seamlessly merge access control, license plate recognition (ALPR) event integration, and video functionalities within the same user application. D. All applications shall provide an authentication mechanism, which verifies the validity of the user. As such, the administrator (who has all rights and privileges) can define specific access rights and privileges for each user in the system. E. Logging on to a CSA shall be done either through locally stored USP user accounts and passwords or using the operators Windows credentials when Active Directory integration is enabled. F. To enhance usability and operator efficiency, the Application UI shall support many of the latest UI such as: 1. Consolidated and consistent workflows for video, ALPR event capture, and access control. 2. Single click functionality for reporting and tracking. The Application UI shall support both single-click reporting for access control, ALPR, and video, as well as single-click tracking of areas, cameras, doors, zones, cardholders, elevators, ALPR entities, and more. Single-click reporting or tracking shall create a new task with the selected entities to report on or track. q. CONFIGURATION USER INTERFACE A. General 1. The Configuration UI application for ACS shall allow the administrator or users with appropriate privileges to change the system configuration from anywhere on the IP network.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 205 IFB No. 2000002197 2. The ACS Configuration UI shall include a variety of tools such as troubleshooting utilities, import tools, and a unit discover tool, amongst many more. 3. The ACS Configuration UI shall include a static reporting interface to: a) View historical events based on entity activity. The user shall be able to perform such actions as printing a report and troubleshooting a specific access event from the reporting view. b) View audit trails that show a history of user/administrator changes to an entity. 4. Common entities such as users, schedules, alarms and many more, can be reused by all integrated systems (VMS, and ALPR). r. ACS CLIENT USER INTERFACE A. The Application UI shall fulfill the role of a Unified Security Interface that is able to monitor video, ALPR events, and access control events and alarms, as well as view live and recorded video. B. The Application UI shall provide a graphical user interface to control and monitor over any IP network. It shall allow administrators and operators with appropriate privileges to monitor their unified security platform, run reports, and manage alarms. C. The Application UI shall support multiple event lists and display maps, including: 1. Event/alarm list layout only 2. Display map onlyDalarm/event list combination 3. alarm/event list combination D. User workspace customization 1. Event or alarm lists shall span anywhere from a portion of the screen up to the entire screen and shall be resizable by the user. The length of event or alarm lists shall be user-defined. Scroll bars shall enable the user to navigate through lengthy lists of events and alarms. 2. The Application UI shall support multiple display tile patterns either natively, or in concert with VCS video wall capability (e.g. 1 display tile (1x1 matrix), 25 tiles (5x5 matrix), and multiple additional variations). 3. The Application UI shall support as many monitors as the PC video adapters and Windows Operating System are capable of accepting. E. The Application UI shall provide an interface to support the following tasks and activities common to access control, ALPR, and video: 1. Monitoring the events from a live security system (ACS and/or VMS and/or ALPR). 2. Generating reports, including custom reports. 3. Monitoring and acknowledging alarms.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 206 IFB No. 2000002197 4. Displaying graphical maps and floor plans as well as executing actions from graphical maps and floor plans. 5. Management and execution of hot actions and macros. F. The Application UI shall be able to monitor the activity of the following entities in real-time: areas, ALPR entities, doors, elevators, cameras, cardholders, cardholder groups, zones (input points), and more. The Application UI shall provide an interface to support the following access control tasks and capabilities: 1. Monitoring and management of access events and alarms. 2. Viewing of cardholder picture or badge IDs. 3. Visitor management event viewing 4. Mustering reports 5. Door control, including remotely unlocking doors, overriding a door’s unlocking schedules, and enabling door maintenance mode. 6. Generation of ACS configuration and activity reports. 7. Viewing of alarm instructions. G. Entity Monitoring 1. The Application UI shall provide the option to filter which events shall be displayed in the display tile layout and/or event list layout. 2. It shall be possible to lock a Application UI display tile so that it only tracks the activity of a specific entity (e.g. specific door or camera). 3. Event, alarm, monitoring/tracking, and report lists shall contain cardholder pictures where possible. s. ACS CLIENT USER INTERFACE SERVER ADMINISTRATOR USER INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS A. The Server Administrator to apply the license, and more. B. The Server Administrator shall be a web-based application. Access to the Server Administrator shall be protected via login name, password, and encrypted communications. C. The Server Administrator shall allow the administrator (user) to perform the following functions: 1. Manage the system license. 2. Manually back up and/or restore the server database(s), as well as configure scheduled backups of the databases. 3. Configure the network communications hardware, including connection addresses and ports. t. HEALTH MONITOR (OPTIONAL)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 207 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Propose an application framework to monitor the health of the system, log health- related events, and calculate statistics. B. Develop with customer, relevant features for tracking services, roles, agents, units, and client apps will trigger health events. C. Track health events related to roles, services, and client apps. D. A dedicated role, the Health Monitoring Role, shall perform the following actions: 1. Monitor the health of the entire system and log events. 2. Calculate statistics within a specified time frame (hours, days, months). 3. Calculates availability for clients, servers and video/access/ALPR units. E. A Health Monitoring task and Health History reporting task shall be available for live and historical reporting. F. A web-based, centralized health dashboard shall be available to remotely view unit and role health events. u. PSIM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The PSIM shall be an enterprise class IP-enabled security and safety software solution. B. The PSIM shall support the seamless unification of IP access control system (ACS), IP video management system (VMS), and IP automatic license plate recognition system (ALPR) under a single platform. The PSIM user interface (UI) applications shall present a unified security interface for, monitoring, and reporting of integrated ACS, VMS, and ALPR systems and associated edge devices. C. Functionalities available with the USP shall include: 1. Integration of integrated systems, such as ACS, ALPR, and VMS systems. 2. Live event monitoring. 3. Live video monitoring and playback of archived video. 4. Alarm management. 5. Reporting, including creating custom report templates and incident reports. 6. Capability for monitoring, reporting, and alarm management of multiple remote and independent ACS and/or VMS systems spread across multiple facilities and geographic areas. 7. Intrusion device and panel integration (live monitoring, reporting, and arming/disarming). 8. Dynamic graphical map viewing. D. Licensing 1. A single central license shall be applied centrally on the configuration server for the PSIM application.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 208 IFB No. 2000002197 2. There shall be no requirement to apply a license at every server computer or client workstation. 3. Based on selected options, one or more integrated systems shall be enabled or disabled. E. Hardware and Software Requirements 1. The PSIM and integrated systems (video, license plate recognition, and access control) shall be designed to run on a standard PC-based platform loaded with a Windows operating system. The preferred operating system shall be coordinated with the Owner following the manufacturer supported operating systems. 2. The PSIM shall be compatible with virtual environments, including but not limited to VMware and/or Microsoft Hyper-V. v. PSIM ARCHITECTURE A. The PSIM shall be an IP enabled solution. All communication shall be based on standard TCP/IP protocol B. The PSIM shall support the feature whereby multiple independent ACS and VMS installations can be merged into a single large virtual system for centralized monitoring, reporting, and alarm management. C. The PSIM shall support an unrestricted number of logs and historical transactions (events and alarms) with the maximum allowed being limited by the amount of hard disk space available. D. Roles-Based Architecture 1. The PSIM shall consist of a role-based architecture. Each role shall execute a specific set of tasks related to either core system, automatic license plate recognition (ALPR), video (VMS), or access control (ACS) functionalities, among many others. Installation shall be streamlined through the ability of the PSIM to allow administrators to: a) Activate and deactivate roles as needed. b) Centralize role configuration and management. c) Support remote configuration. 2. Directory Role a) Support the integration of the following components common to the ACS, ALPR, and VMS sub-systems: 1) Security Partitions, users and user groups. 2) Areas. 3) Zones, input/output (IO) linking rules, and custom output behavior. 4) Alarms. Schedules, and scheduled tasks. 5) Custom events. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 209 IFB No. 2000002197 6) Macros or custom scripts. b) support the integration of the following components specific to VMS: 1) Video servers and their peripherals 2) PTZ. 3) Camera sequences. 4) Recording and archiving schedules. c) support the integration of the following components specific to ACS: 1) Door controllers, and input and output (IO) modules. 2) Doors, Elevators, and Access rules. 3) Cardholders and cardholder groups, credentials, and badge templates. d) support the integration of the following components specific to ALPR: 1) ALPR units and cameras. 2) Hotlists, permit lists, and overtime rules. w. VIDEO AND ACCESS CONTROL UNIFICATION A. The ACS UI shall present a Interface for live monitoring and reporting of the ACS and VMS. Advanced live video viewing and playback of archived video shall be available through the UI. B. The user shall be able to associate one or more video cameras to the following entity types: areas, doors, elevators, zones, alarms, intrusion panels, and more. C. It shall be possible to view video associated to access control events when viewing a report. D. It shall be possible to view video associated to intrusion panel events when viewing a report. x. PSIM ALARM MANAGEMENT A. The PSIM shall support the following Alarm Management functionality: 1. Create and modify user-defined alarms. An unrestricted number of user- defined alarms shall be supported. 2. Assign a time schedule or a coverage period to an alarm. An alarm shall be triggered only if it is a valid alarm for the current time period. 3. Set the priority level of an alarm and its reactivation threshold. 4. Define whether to display live or recorded video once the alarm is triggered. 5. Provide the ability to display live and recorded video
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 210 IFB No. 2000002197 6. Provide the ability to group alarms by source and by type. 7. Define the time period after which the alarm is automatically acknowledged. 8. Define the recipients of an alarm. Alarm notifications shall be routed to one or more recipients. Recipients shall be assigned a priority level that prioritizes the order of reception of an alarm. 9. Define the alarm broadcast mode. Alarm notifications shall be sent using either a sequential or an all-at-once broadcast mode. 10. Define whether to display the source of the alarm, one or more entities, or an HTML page. 11. Specify whether an incident report is mandatory during acknowledgment. B. The workflows to create, modify, add instructions and procedures, and acknowledge an alarm shall be consistent for access control, ALPR, and video alarms. C. The PSIM shall also support alarm notification to an email address or any device using the SMTP protocol. D. The ability to create alarm-related instructions can be supported through the display of one or more HTML pages following an alarm event. The HTML pages shall be user-defined and can be interlinked. E. The user shall have the ability to acknowledge alarms, create an incident upon alarm acknowledgement, and put an alarm to snooze. F. The user shall be able to spontaneously trigger alarms based on something he or she sees in the system. G. An alarm shall be configured in such a way that it remains visible until the source condition has been acknowledged. H. The user shall be able to investigate an alarm without acknowledging it. y. PSIM THREAT LEVELS.
A. The PSIM shall support Threat Levels to dynamically change the system behavior to respond to critical events. B. Threat Levels shall be activated and deactivated by an operator with the right privilege. C. Threat Levels shall be set on an area or on the entire system. D. Threat Levels shall affect the system behavior by executing any action available in the PSIM such as: trigger output, start recording, block camera, override recording quality, arm zone, set a door in maintenance mode, and more. E. The following specific actions shall be available with Threat Level: 1. Set minimum security clearance to restrict or permit access to cardholders on specific areas on top of the restrictions imposed by the access rules.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 211 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Set minimum user level to automatically log out user from the PSIM. 3. Set reader mode to change how the doors are accessed (e.g. card and PIN, or card or PIN). F. A visible notification shall be displayed for all PSIM operators when a Threat Level is activated. z. PSIM ADVANCED TASK MANAGEMENT A. PSIM shall support an infrastructure for managing Application UI tasks used for live monitoring, day to day activities, and reporting. B. Administrators shall be able to assign tasks and lock the operator`s workspace. The user management of their workspace shall be limited by their assigned privileges. C. Operators shall be able save their tasks as either Public Tasks or Private Tasks and in a specific partition. Public tasks shall be available to all users. Private tasks shall only be available to the owner of the task. D. Operators shall be able to share their tasks by sending them to one or more online users. Recipients shall have the option to accept the sent task. aa. PSIM REPORTING A. The PSIM shall support report generation (database reporting) for access control, ALPR, video, and intrusion. B. Each and every report in the system shall be a PSIM task, each associated with its own privilege. A user shall have access to a specific report task if he or she has the appropriate privilege. C. The workflows to create, modify, and run a report shall be consistent for access control, ALPR, and video reports. D. Reports shall be federated, allowing global consolidated reporting across multiple independent USP, ACS, and VMS systems. E. Access control and ALPR reports shall support cardholder pictures and license plate pictures, respectively. F. The PSIM shall support the following types of reports: 1. Alarm reports. 2. Video-specific reports (archive, bookmark, motion, and more). 3. Configuration reports (cardholders, credentials, units, access rules, readers/inputs/outputs, and more). 4. Activity reports (cardholder, cardholder group, visitor, credential, door, unit, area, zone, elevator, and more). 5. ALPR-specific reports (mobile ALPR playback, hits, plate reads, reads/hits per day, reads/hits per ALPR zone, and more). 6. Health activity and health statistics reports.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 212 IFB No. 2000002197 7. Other types of reports, including visitor reports, audit trail reports, incident reports, and time and attendance reports. G. Generic Reports, Custom Reports and Report Templates 1. The user shall the option of generating generic reports from an existing list, generating reports from a list of user-defined templates, or creating a new report or report template. 2. The user shall be able to customize the predefined reports and save them as new report templates. There shall be no need for an external reporting tool to create custom reports and report templates. Customization options shall include setting filters, report lengths, and timeout period. The user shall also be able to set which columns shall be visible in a report. The sorting of reported data shall be available by clicking on the appropriate column and selecting a sort order (ascending or descending). 3. These templates can be used to generate reports on a schedule in PDF or Excel formats. 4. An unrestricted number of custom reports and templates shall be supported. H. The PSIM shall support comprehensive data filtering for most reports based on entity type, event type, event timestamp, custom fields, and more. I. The PSIM shall support the following actions on a report: print report, export report to a PDF/Microsoft Excel/CSV file, and automatically email a report based on a schedule and a list of one or more recipients. bb. PSIM EVENT/ACTION MANAGEMENT A. The PSIM shall support the configuration and correlation of events for video and ALPR. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify an action tied to an event if he has the appropriate privileges. B. The PSIM shall receive all incoming events from one or more ACS and/or VMS. The PSIM shall take the appropriate actions based on user-define event/action relationships. C. The PSIM shall receive and log the following events: 1. System-wide events. 2. Application events (clients and servers). 3. Area, camera, door, elevator, and ALPR events (reads and hits). 4. Cardholder and credential events. 5. Unit events. 6. Zone events. 7. Alarm events. 8. First Person In and Last Person Out events and antipassback events. 9. Intrusion events.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 213 IFB No. 2000002197 10. Asset management events. D. The PSIM shall allow the creation of custom events. E. The PSIM shall have the capability to execute an action in response to an access control, video, and ALPR event. F. The PSIM shall allow a schedule to be associated with an action. The action shall be executed only if it is an appropriate action for the current time period. cc. PSIM SCHEDULES AND SCHEDULED TASKS A. Schedules 1. The PSIM shall support the configuration and management of complex schedules. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify a schedule if he or she has the appropriate privileges. 2. The USP shall provide full flexibility and granularity in creating a schedule. The user shall be able to define a schedule in 1-minute or 15-minute increments. 3. Daily, weekly, ordinal, and specific schedules shall be supported. B. Scheduled Tasks 1. The PSIM shall support scheduled tasks for access control, video, and ALPR. 2. Scheduled tasks shall be executed on a user-defined schedule at a specific day and time. Recurring or periodic scheduled tasks shall also be supported. 3. Scheduled tasks shall support all standard actions available within the USP, such as sending an email or emailing a report. dd. PSIM MACROS AND CUSTOM SCRIPTS A. The PSIM shall enable users to automate and extend the functionalities of the system through the use of macros or custom scripts for access control, video, and ALPR. B. Custom macros creation options shall be available. C. A macro shall be executed either automatically or manually. ee. PSIM DYNAMIC GRAPHICAL MAPS (DGM) A. PSIM USP shall support mapping functionality for access control, video surveillance, intrusion detection, ALPR, and external applications. B. The PSIM shall provide a map centric interface with the ability to command and control all capabilities from a full screen map interface. C. It shall be possible to span the map over all screens of the PSIM client station. D. The DGM shall support one or more of the following file formats and protocols for importing map background: 1. PDF
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 214 IFB No. 2000002197 2. JPG 3. PNG 4. Web Map Service (WMS) defined by the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) 5. BeNomad E. The DGM shall provide one or more of the following online map providers for use as map background and provide the ability to manage their service license if they require one: 1. Google Map, aerial, terrain (Licensed) 2. Bing Map, aerial, satellite, hybrid (Licensed) 3. OpenStreet Map aerial 4. OVI hybrid F. The DGM shall provide the ability to display all native entities of the PSIM including: 1. Cameras, fix, and PTZ 2. Doors 3. Camera sequences 4. Areas 5. Intrusion areas 6. Intrusion zones 7. License Plate Recognition cameras 8. Digital inputs 9. Digital outputs 10. Intercoms 11. Alarms G. The DGM shall provide the ability to draw and display information over the map in the form of: 1. Vectoriel shapes: line, rectangles, polygones, ellipse 2. Pictures 3. Text H. The DGM shall provide the ability to display layer of information I. The DGM shall provide the ability to the operator to manage layers of entities displayed over the map, being able to turn them on and off and changing the superposition order. J. The DGM shall offer built-in map data backup and restore for both map background and layers of entities.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 215 IFB No. 2000002197 K. The DGM shall offer failover capabilities. L. The DGM shall scale up to several thousands of entities on a single map and hundreds of maps. M. The DGM shall offer a user friendly graphical map designer to configure the maps. N. The DGM shall provide a user friendly and intuitive navigation that includes: 1. The ability to create hierarchies of maps to facilitate navigation within and between various sites and buildings. 2. The possibility to create links between maps. The map links shall allow the link from one map to multiple maps representing the floors of a building. 3. A history log of positions. O. It shall be possible to monitor the state of entities on the map. It shall be possible to customize the icons of any entities represented on the map. P. The DGM shall offer the ability to optionally set a graphical display notification of the motion detection. Q. It shall be possible to access live and playback video from the map. R. It shall be possible to monitor from the DGM all entities event notifications. Users shall be able to turn notifications on and off per entity. S. The DGM shall offer the ability to fully operate alarm monitoring. It shall be possible to: 1. Center the map on entities related to the alarm. 2. Visualize the Alarm notifications on the map, and access the related videos from the map. 3. Trigger and receive alarms. 4. Act on the alarm from the DGM, including acknowledgements, forwarding, and investigation. 5. Visualize that an alarm occurred in an underlying linked map. T. The DGM shall provide the following search capabilities: 1. Search and center by entity name. U. Any update of map content by an administrator shall be immediately and dynamically pushed to all DGM users. V. The DGM shall support the use of GIS maps or private maps or a combination of both for map background. W. The DGM shall be compatible with any GIS compliant maps with the OGC and supporting WMS. This includes, but is not limited to, ESRI maps. X. The DGM shall provide an intuitive built-in map designer for entity positioning on the map using drag and drop. Any configuration shall be graphic. Y. Various actions shall be available within maps for execution through simple and intuitive double-click, right-click, or drag-and-drop functionality. Examples of
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 216 IFB No. 2000002197 actions available through maps shall include unlocking a door and acknowledging an alarm. Z. Through the following functionality, the DGM shall allow the management of PSIM alarms from the map: 1. Locate on the map entities related to the alarm. 2. Display entities of the alarm with a specific icon, color, transparency level, and blinking rate. 3. List, select, and locate alarms. 4. Auto center the map on the highest priority alarm. 5. Handle the alarm from the map, including acknowledgement, forwarding and investigation. 6. All map containers, such as hotspots or map links shall reflect the alarm status of the contained entities. AA. The DGM shall provide the following search capabilities: 1. Search within the map by entity name, street name, or point of interest. 2. Drag and drop entities from the USP to the map to center their location. BB. The DGM shall allow overlay map information for both GIS and private maps. Movable objects shall be supported. CC. Any updating of map content by an administrator shall be immediately and dynamically pushed to all operators displaying the map. ff. PSIM AUDIT AND USER ACTIVITY TRAILS (LOG) A. The PSIM shall support the generation of audit trails. Audit trails shall consist of logs of operator/administrator additions, deletions, and modifications. B. Audit trails shall be generated as reports. They shall be able to track changes made within specific time periods. Querying on specific users, changes, affected entities, and time periods shall also be possible. C. For entity configuration changes, the audit trail report shall include detailed information of the value before and after the changes. D. The PSIM shall support the generation of user activity trails. User activity trails shall consist of logs of operator activity on the USP such as login, camera viewed, badge printing, video export, and more. gg. PSIM INCIDENT REPORTS
A. Incident reports shall allow the security operator to create reports on incidents that occurred during a shift. Both video-related and access control-related incident reports shall be supported. B. The operator shall be able to create standalone incident reports or incident reports tied to alarms.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 217 IFB No. 2000002197 C. The operator shall be able to link multiple video sequences to an incident, access them in an incident report, and change the date or time of the sequences later on. D. It shall be possible to create a list of Incident categories, tag a category to an incident, and filter the search with the category as a parameter. E. Incident reports shall allow the creation of a custom form on which to input information on an incident. F. Incident reports shall allow entities, events, and alarms to be added to support at the report’s conclusions. hh. PSIM THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION A. Microsoft Active Directory Integration 1. The PSIM shall support a direct connection to one or multiple Microsoft Active Directory server via the Active Directory Role(s). B. Intrusion Detection Integration. 1. The PSIM shall integrate with third party intrusion panels and devices over an IP network. 2. Integration with intrusion panels shall be possible outside the release cycle of the PSIM. It shall be possible to add new integrations at any point in time. 3. Functionality available via the integration of intrusion devices with the PSIM shall include the following (where supported by the intrusion panel): a) Arm and disarm intrusion devices (manually, on schedule, or following a PSIM event). b) Activate or trigger intrusion device outputs. c) View intrusion events and alarms. d) Monitor the status, including arming status, of the intrusion devices. e) Video verification of intrusion events and alarms with video panels. f) Create PSIM zones using intrusion device inputs. ii. CONTROL PANEL A. Primary Power: twelve to twenty-four volts of direct current (12-24VDC) +/- 10%. B. Communication Ports: 1. Host Port 0: 10/100 Ethernet; and/or 2. Adapters-485 port C. Tamper detection D. Temperature: zero to sixty degrees Centigrade (0 to 60° C) operational, E. Humidity: ten to ninety-five percent (10 to 95%) relative humidity, non- condensing (RHNC)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 218 IFB No. 2000002197 F. Standards: 1. UL294 Recognized, , UL1076 2. FCC Part 15 Class A. G. Technical Features: 1. Connectivity Primary Port: 10/100 Ethernet 2. Access Control: a) 132,000 Cardholder capacity b) 20,000 event T buffer. jj. INPUT BOARDS A. Primary Power, in expansion module, from main control panel, or standalone: 1. 12-24Vdc ±10%, 350mA maximum. 2. 12Vdc at 300mA nominal. 3. 24Vdc at 220mA nominal. B. Inputs: Eight (8) or sixteen (16) general purpose programmable type Outputs: two (2) relays – Form-C, 5 Amp, 28Vdc via expansion board (8 relays). C. Temperature: 0 to 60 degrees Centigrade operational, Humidity: 10 to 95 percent RHNC. kk. OUTPUT BOARDS A. Primary Power, in expansion module, from main control panel, or standalone: 1. 12-24Vdc ±10%, 1100 mA maximum 2. 12Vdc at 850mA nominal 3. 24Vdc at 450mA nominal B. Outputs: eight (8) per expansion module, with option to add multiples per controller board. Or, standalone: sixteen (16) relays – Form-C, 5 Amp at 28Vdc. C. Temperature: 0 to 55 degrees Centigrade operational Humidity: 10 to 95 percent RHNC. ll. DOOR CONTROLLER A. Primary Power: 1. PoE+ power. 2. 12-48VDC UL-listed power supply B. Communication: 1. Primary Port: Ethernet 10/100/1000. 2. 2-wire RS-485, 4,000 feet using Belden 9841.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 219 IFB No. 2000002197 3. Reader Interface: two reader ports2. LED: one-wire bi-color LED support or two-wire. 4. Buzzer: one-wire LED mode. C. Keypad support Reader Power: 1. Pass through or 12Vdc regulated power 2. Two alarm inputs 3. One door relay, One auxiliary output relay supporting optional wet power setting 4. Temperature: 0 to 60 degrees Centigrade operational Humidity: 10-95 percent RHNC D. Standards: UL 294 and UL 1076 recognized. mm. GATE ACCESS CONTROLLER A. System General Requirements, standards and interoperability: 1. Video stream (ONVIF) Profile S. 2. The system shall be capable of communicating under the following protocols: TCP/IP, IPv4, IPv6, SIP, HTTP/HTTPS, DHCP or static IP address assignment, DNS, RTP/RTSP, SMTP, NTP. 3. Network communications: IEEE 802.3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT with support 802.3af/at support. 2. Audio/Video encoding and compression format: a. Audio encoder: G.711 b. Video compression format: H.264 B. Calling Station 1. Door Control/Release Requirements: a. Minimum of two (2) independent outputs for door control. b. Programmable dry contact. c. Cabling shall be in compliance with LAUSD Guide Specification 27 1013 Premises Wiring, or 2-wire (18 to 24AWG) ranging distance from 325 to 1,500 feet with IEEE 802.3af/at (PoE/PoE+). 2. Audio/Video Requirements: a. 720p Video quality. b. Night vision. c. Local flash memory recording. 3. Enclosure Requirements: a. ADA compliant (e.g. braille engraving, TTY/TDD). b. Vandal and weather resistance minimum rating: IP65, IK07. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 220 IFB No. 2000002197 4. Security and Protocols: a. IEEE 802.1X authentication b. Shall be able to rename manufacturer default username and password. 5. Manageability: a. Ability to provide central management station of field deployed device operational status. b. Ability to upgrade software/firmware from central management station. C. Dedicated Master Receiving Station: 1. Touch screen with brightness control. 2. SIP integration with District’s existing VoIP infrastructure. 3. Full Video/Audio communication from/to Calling Station shall be able to initiate. 4. Network Communication: IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT or 802.11n interface. 5. Power sources: IEEE 802.3af/at (PoE/PoE+) or local power. D. Dedicated Software Application Master (Receiving) Station 1. Provide equivalent functionalities of a manufacturer Dedicated Master Receiving Station. 2. Option of hand-free operations. 3. Simplex Push-to-Talk (PTT) capability. 4. Provide equivalent functionalities of a manufacturer Dedicate Master Receiving Station. E. SIP Master Receiving Station 1. Shall be able to integrate fully with District’s existing SIP infrastructure (e.g. video, VoIP). 2. Shall be able to provide full Video/Audio communication from/to Calling Station the equivalent functionalities of a manufacturer Dedicated Master Receiving Station. 3. Shall provide full door control functionalities equivalent to the Dedicated Master Receiving Station. 4. Network Communication: IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT. F. Central Management System 1. Ability to access field deployed equipment over existing IP infrastructure for problem determination/resolution purposes including but not limited to Master Receiving Stations, Calling Stations. 2. Ability to push software/firmware upgrade to field deployed equipment (e.g. Calling Stations, Master Station) over existing IP infrastructure.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 221 IFB No. 2000002197 3. Ability to receive equipment alarms/alerts from field deployed equipment.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully follow instructions in documentation provided by the manufacturer to ensure all steps have been taken to provide a complete, reliable, and easy-to-operate system. B. All equipment shall be tested and configured in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacturer prior to installation. C. All firmware found in products shall be the latest and most up-to-date provided by the manufacturer, or of a version as specified by the integrator of the ACS system. D. All equipment requiring users to log on using a password shall be configured with user/site-specific password/passwords. No system/product default passwords shall be allowed.
3.02 TESTING A. The ACS system shall be tested in accordance with the following: 1. Conduct a complete inspection and test of all installed access control system components. This includes testing and verifying connection to equipment of other divisions. 2. Provide staff to test all devices and all operational features of the system. 3. Correct deficiencies until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Submit written copies of test results. B. Provide a complete checklist for all equipment and components tested.
3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.04 OWNER ORIENTATION TRAINING A. Before contract closeout provide the following training and orientation: 1. Provide a minimum 48 hours training for LAUSD designated representatives. The content of the training is advanced instruction on the use, programming, maintenance and troubleshooting of the access control system, devices and components. 2. Materials shall include training manuals and hands-on lab exercises. 3. The training shall be provided at the equipment manufacturer’s authorized training facility located in Los Angeles County. 4. Training shall consist of classroom instruction including intensive course work covering the following topics: a) Product Features and Technical Specifications. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 222 IFB No. 2000002197 b) Implementation and Design as–built documentation, including familiarization with drawing sets, symbols and notation as well as other record documents. c) Complete understanding of the system architecture and design of implemented solution. d) Complete function and feature analysis on implemented solution including programming, operation, trouble shooting, error messages, etc.
3.05 CLEANUP A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 223 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT H – 28 1600 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS (IDS)
SECTION 28 1600
INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
EDIT NOTES: 1. OWNER INFORMATION TECHNOL OGY DIVISION IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION OF THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATION SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF ITD.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes fully functional, state-of-the-art, digital Intrusion Detection System (IDS) including control panels, sub-panels, wiring, keypads, system control devices, and an appropriate array of zones and sensors that provide effective security coverage. B. Principal items of Work in this Section include but are not limited to: 1. Infrared motion detectors and associated power supplies, batteries, and cables. 2. Door switches and cables. 3. Controller, annunciator, expansion modules, power modules, TCP/IP network modules and batteries. 4. Connect Intrusion Detection System equipment to adequate electrical grounding in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. 5. Installation of power and signal circuits for all equipment, including associated raceway, wiring and terminal cabinets as required for a complete and operable system.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA):
1. EIA/TIA-568: Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard. 2. EIA/TIA-569: Commercial building standard for telecommunications pathways and spaces. 3. EIA/TIA-606: Administration standard for telecommunications infrastructure of commercial buildings. 4. EIA/TIA-607: Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications.
B. California Electrical and Fire Codes.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 224 IFB No. 2000002197 C. Building Industry Consultant Service International (BICSI):
1. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
D. Federal Trade Commission (FTC): 2. Green Guides, 16 CFR Part 260, Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims.
E. Underwriters Laboratory listings and other labels
F. ANSI, ASTM, UL, NEMA, IEEE and FCC standards as applicable.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials list: Submit a complete material list for the materials and products of this section. Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally by columns. The first assembly shall be the major head end equipment. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next shall be the description, followed by the applicable Specification section number, followed by the specified item, which is followed by the submitted item. The rightmost column shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason for submitting items, other than as specified. B. Product Data: Include Product Data sheets and catalog cut sheets for items listed in index. Items shall be arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item is indicated, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked appropriately. Product Data shall be sufficiently detailed to allow the Architect to review the product and to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide Shop Drawings, in the same size as the Drawings. Shop Drawings shall be prepared in latest version of AutoCAD with three electronic copies submitted along with full sized Shop Drawings. 2. Shop Drawings shall indicate typical wire connections and cable types for detectors and detector wiring, single gang deep box location for security key switch and keypad locations for all main and remote security panels. Provide wiring schematics including point-to point, terminal blocks, connections to batteries, and power supplies, including the estimated anticipated wiring lengths required for all connection points (i.e., zone and system communications bus runs) within the system. Indicate interfaces to equipment furnished by others. 3. Submit dimensioned Shop Drawings indicating mechanical layout of all intrusion detection equipment, including cabinets and interconnecting conduit for the main security panel, typical remote security panel and single gang deep box for security key switch, keypad and indicator locations, identifying all parts by manufacturer and part number. Indicate mounting details for the motion detectors appropriate to each ceiling type. 4. Shop Drawings shall be accompanied by engineering documentation including: a. Floor Plans indicating components, raceways, and terminal boxes and cabling.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 225 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Riser diagram indicating connections in a manner following the floor plan layout. c. Cabling diagram indicating the CONTRACTOR’s designed routing and number of cables in specific raceways or conduits, from the main alarm panel connecting to other sub-panels, modules or devices. Diagram shall include length, in wire feet, and capacitance calculation charts for all Bus cables. d. Zone schedule indicating code numbers and its protected areas. e. Infrared motion detector mounting and all other necessary details. 5. Submit preliminary design calculations and system architecture plan For OWNER’s review prior to the start of work. Installation shall not commence prior to CONTRACTOR receiving OWNER’s acceptance of design and architecture. 6. Installation and coordination drawings for items in other sections shall be included with Shop Drawings submittals. D. Permits and Inspections: CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for required permits and inspections; deliver certificates of inspection to the PROJECT INSPECTOR. E. Burglar Alarm Licensing: Provide evidence that the CONTRACTOR is properly licensed by the Bureau of Security and Investigative Services of the State of California Department of Consumer Affairs, including, but not limited to the following licenses: Alarm Company Operator, Qualified Manager, and/or Alarm Agent. F. CONTRACTOR shall have completed at least five projects of equal scope to systems described herein and shall have been in the business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least five years. G. Include in the Material List Submission copies of the manufacturers’ certifications that the CONTRACTOR is an authorized distributor and service provider of the submitted manufacturers’ products and CONTRACTOR’s staff has been adequately trained and certified in the installation of those products. H. Provide a letter from the Manufacturer guaranteeing the availability of spare parts common to proposed system for a period no less than five years on all components. I. Provide Samples of material and equipment as required by the ARCHITECT. If Samples are requested, they shall be submitted within 10 days from date of request.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS I. Equipment and materials that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S ITD project manager. When deviating or substituting equipment, the following information shall be submitted: 17. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER. 18. OWNER’S approval shall be obtained for any equipment or materials substitutions. Proposed substitutions requests shall provide proof of compliance with OWNER’S criteria described in this specification. 19. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Section II.D –Technical Specifications 226 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Use adequate numbers of skilled personnel who are manufacturer certified, trained and experienced on the necessary crafts and familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work. B. Only a qualified CONTRACTOR holding licenses required by legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work, shall do the work. C. Only persons skilled in trade represented by work, and in accordance with all applicable building codes, shall install system in accordance with best trade practice. D. Burglar Alarm Licensing: Provide evidence that the CONTRACTOR is properly licensed by the Bureau of Security and Investigative Services of the State of California Department of Consumer Affairs, including, but not limited to the following licenses: Alarm Company Operator, Qualified Manager, and/or Alarm Agent. E. CONTRACTOR shall have completed at least five projects of equal scope to systems described herein and shall have been in the business of supplying and installing specified type of systems for at least five years. F. Include in the Material List Submission copies of the manufacturers’ certifications that the CONTRACTOR is an authorized distributor and service provider of the submitted manufacturers’ products and CONTRACTOR’s staff has been adequately trained and certified in the installation of those products. G. Provide a letter from the Manufacturer guaranteeing the availability of spare parts common to proposed system for a period no less than five years on all components. H. Provide Samples of material and equipment as required by the Architect. If Samples are requested, they shall be submitted within 10 days from date of request. I. Coordinate cable runs, and equipment locations with OWNER’s Authorized Representative prior to the start of installation. CONTRACTOR and OWNER representative must agree as to the final location of all devices and the cable plant design. J. Provide sufficient personnel and tools required to participate in OWNERs Quality Assurance testing as detailed in Attachment A of this specification. 1. Items on check list of Attachment “A” will be examined as a minimum at the Alarm Head End and one remote security panel. Should the examination show deficiencies related to items in the checklist, OWNERs acceptance testing will be discontinued until corrections have been made. When the CONTRACTOR has completed the corrections, a subsequent Quality Assurance test shall be initiated. This procedure is in addition to the system functionality testing required below.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Supply, as a condition of final payment and acceptance, three complete bound sets containing the following documentation: 1. Each manual shall include a page with Project site and Project name, date of Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR name, address, telephone, and fax numbers. 2. Each manual shall contain a letter, signed by an officer of the company indicating the beginning and ending date of any warranties described in Article
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 227 IFB No. 2000002197 1.07 of this section and shall describe the companies’ commitment to service the warranty during the terms specified. 3. One page shall contain a list describing all furnished materials by Manufacturer and model number. 4. Site and building zone maps and zone codes indicating areas served, materials, brochures, wiring and connection diagrams of equipment, plot plan of Project site indicating conduit and cable runs and cable counts between termination points, and cable identification. A sample of a typical site plan zone map is included in this specification as an example of the required finished product. a. The project site plan zone map shall be supplied in a single drawing on two USB drives that include all project drawings in AutoCAD format as well as three paper copies, and shall contain the following information: 1) Site layout of buildings indicating the physical locations of all buildings on the campus. The drawing shall coincide with the architectural as builts of the project as constructed. 2) Each building shall be labeled with hardware zones of coverage as built. (An example of typical labels is: Administration Building – Z1-8). 3) Site Zone maps shall show School Location Code, School Name and School Address on the upper right side of Drawing. Refer to Attachment C for sample. b. Floor Plans on separate drawings shall show each building, all equipment placement locations with: areas of coverage, room numbers or other designators if numbers are not available, and the individual hardware zones for each room or covered area. Each device and its location, including but not limited to PIR’s, all modules, point to point cabling and all panels, shall be clearly shown. c. AutoCAD files (software copies) supplied shall be multi-layer drawings with the following layers as a minimum: 1) Layer 1 shall contain title blocks only. 2) Layer 2 shall contain building or site plan backgrounds only. 3) Layer 3 shall contain hardware zone identifiers only. 4) Layer 4 shall contain all devices and cabling only. 5. One complete riser, site and building drawing set. Size A (8-1/2 inch by 11 inch) and size B (11 inch by 17 inch) shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes and bound into the manual. 6. A block diagram showing how the LX/Keypad-Bus (es) feeds from the main panel controller to re-power modules, with modules numbered in enrollment sequence, and labeled as to physical location. Diagram should also include how the re-power module(s) feed(s) LX-Keypad-Bus (es) to keypad, Expansion modules and any other modules. 7. Index of material in bound set including page numbers.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 228 IFB No. 2000002197 8. Manufacturer maintenance brochures. B. Record Drawings: Prior to start of system Testing, submit three paper record copies on “E” size, and two copies of drawing representations on a labeled USB drive (DWG drawing format prepared with current Microsoft Windows version of AutoCAD). Layer information shall be organized as required in section 3.04 of this specification.
1.07 WARRANTY A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of, or failure to, examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. B. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. C. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than 5 years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. D. Installation CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to OWNER ITD Project Management. E. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that an Intrusion Detection system component, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate, or repeated failure rate, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems of the same model purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a project manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER.
1. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be:
a. Equal to or less than 10% in any 12 month period during the original warranty term.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 229 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Equal to or less than 15% cumulative failures during the entire term of the original warranty.
2. If, at any time during of the life of the products, the failure rate of the Intrusion Detection systems or components exceeds 20%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
3. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition.
4. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days or written notification from the OWNER.
5. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service. F. The warranty shall cover the complete system including fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. G. The warranty shall include onsite 48-hour advanced part replacement. H. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). I. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. J. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty. A. Warranty that materials and workmanship provided are free from defects of material for a period of three years excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period. B. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, defective material or work discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of or failure to examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. C. Equipment or materials failure rates of 10% or more during the warranty period: 1. The OWNER will monitor the performance and reliability of the installed base of Equipment and Materials installed in this Contract. Any deficiencies or malfunctions will be referred to the CONTRACTOR for repairs or equipment replacement. D. If the OWNER detects a defect within a warranty period as defined here in, it shall notify the CONTRACTOR Representative in writing (“Notice of Defect”). The CONTRACTOR shall make available and provide the OWNER with the telephone Section II.D –Technical Specifications 230 IFB No. 2000002197 number of a fax machine and email address to receive Notices of Defect. This fax machine and email address shall be available to receive faxes and emails 24 hours per day 7 days per week, including all weekends and holidays. E. Upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER of any failure or defect (“Defect”) in any such Equipment or Work, the CONTRACTOR shall diligently perform all work necessary to determine the cause thereof, and the time necessary to remedy the Defect, and shall propose in writing to the OWNER how and in what manner it will remedy the Defect. If the OWNER determines that the proposal complies with the terms of the Contract, it shall authorize CONTRACTOR to proceed to redesign, repair, or replace the defective or failed Equipment or Work within the agreed time period. F. In determining the cause of the Defect, the CONTRACTOR shall perform such investigations and tests as may be required to determine the cause, and to verify that such redesign, repairs, and replacements comply with the requirements of the Contract Document. All cost associated with such investigation, redesign, repair, replacement, and testing, including, but not limited to, the removal, replacement, and reinstallation of equipment and materials necessary to gain access to defective Equipment, shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to promptly make the necessary investigations, redesign, repair, replacement, and test, the OWNER may perform or cause to be performed the same at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. G. The CONTRACTOR will warrant the redesigned, repaired, or replaced Equipment against defective design, materials, and workmanship for the remainder of the warranty period or a period of to five (5) years from and after the date of acceptance of the redesigned, repaired or replaced Equipment thereof, whichever occurs later. H. The CONTRACTOR shall be liable for the satisfaction and full performance of the warranties as set forth herein. I. All warranties hereunder are deemed and acknowledged to explicitly extend to the future performance of the Equipment warranted. J. The rights and remedies provided for herein are cumulative, and shall not be exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law, whether in contract or tort, or under this Contract. K. CONTRACTOR is deemed and acknowledged to be a merchant with respect to all components and replacement parts furnished pursuant hereto, and the OWNER is acknowledged not to be a merchant with respect thereto. L. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers any extended warranty not specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost to the OWNER. M. All warranties and guarantees of Suppliers of any tier and Manufacturers, whether expressed or implied, are deemed to be made for the benefit of the OWNER regardless of whether stated as such, and CONTRACTOR shall enforce such warranties and guarantees for the benefit of the OWNER. N. CONTRACTOR shall include a letter signed by a corporate officer, partner, or OWNER of the contracting company describing their service organization, its capabilities and commitment to servicing the warranty on all work executed and materials furnished. PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS Section II.D –Technical Specifications 231 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Detectors/ Sensors: 1. Shall support passive infrared and microwave motion detection. 2. Shall be tightly integrated with OWNER’s Integrated Security Management System (ISMS) platform. Refer to Specification Division 28 0500 Integrated Security Management System for compliance. 3. UL listed. 4. All motion detectors shall be field adjusted for sensitivity and correct aim per manufacturer’s specification. 5. Wall mounted detectors shall be used only if shown on Drawings or as directed by OWNER Authorized Representative (OAR). B. Glass Break Detectors: a. Shall detect shattering of framed glass by direct impact. b. Contractor shall test the installed detectors for true range with an FG-701 glass break simulator/tester. c. Glass break detectors shall be ceiling mounted adjacent to windows and store fronts that are accessible from the exterior. C. Contacts: a. Operational up to 5 years using a single user replaceable AAA lithium battery. b. Provide contacts at Café refrigerator doors and Café freezer doors. c. The door switches shall be concealed recessed units mounted at the top of each leaf, opposite the hinge side, 12 inches from outer edge of door. D. Cables: Zone cables shall be, as follows: 2. Shall be in conformance with equipment manufacturer products specifications. 3. Four-conductor, #22 West Penn 240 or equal, for power and detector contact for indoor applications. 4. Four-conductor, #22 West Penn AQC240 or equal for detector contact and power for outdoor and underground applications. 5. Two conductor door switch cables, #22 West Penn 221, or equal. Larger size conductor shall be furnished when higher mechanical strength is required. 6. Four conductor bus cables, #22 West Penn 240, or equal, for indoor applications and West Penn AQC 240 or equal for outdoor applications, in accordance with Intrusion System Manufacturer’s specifications and installation practices, unless otherwise noted herein. 7. Power cable shall be 2 #12 for 120 VAC and 2 #18 for 16 VAC. 8. Wire and cables shall meet FR-1 Flame Test and shall be UL listed. 9. Wire and cables shall be indexed with a code marker and identified on a sheet, one copy of which shall be left in each equipment cabinet and one copy placed in as-built data. 10. Wire and cables shall be installed in raceway, partitioned cable tray or conduit. 11. Cable not directly connected to circuit board or terminal equipment shall be terminated on 66M blocks mounted on 89B mounting spacers.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 232 IFB No. 2000002197 12. Cabling Topology: Loop or Hierarchical Star as indicated on drawings. E. Locks/Keys: 13. Each panel door shall be furnished with a flush type lock, Corbin or equivalent, keyed for CCL Cat. 102 key. 1. Provide raceway, deep box, and cable for OWNER-furnished, OWNER- installed bypass key switch as required on Drawings. F. Component Enclosure: Housings; power supply enclosures, terminal cabinets, control units, and other component housings, collectively referred to as enclosures shall be so formed and assembled as to be sturdy and rigid. If sheet steel is used in the fabrication of enclosures, it shall be not less than an 18 gauge door with a 20 gauge box frame. Where exposed pins, the hinges shall be of the tight pin type or the ends of hinge pins shall be tack welded to prevent ready removal. Doors having a latch edge length of less than 24 inches shall be provided with a single lock. Where the hinged door latch edge is 24 inches or more in length, doors shall be provided with three-point latching device with lock; or alternatively with two locks, one located near each end. G. Electronic Components 1. All system electronic components shall be solid-state type, mounted on printed circuit boards. Light duty relays and similar switching devices shall be solid- state type or electromechanical. 2. The panel shall have an over current notification LED that lights when devices connected to the Keypad Bus and Loop Expansion LX-Bus(es) draw more current than the panel is rated for. When the over current LED lights, the Loop Expansion LX-Bus (es) and Keypad bus are shut down. H. Main Security Panel (MSP): 1. A battery test shall be automatically performed to test the integrity of the standby battery. The test shall disconnect the standby battery from the charging circuit and place a load on the battery. This test shall be performed no more than every 180 seconds. 2. The control unit shall be capable of operating and supervising notification appliance devices as well as addressable initiating detection devices and an integrated supervised dual line digital communicator. 3. Control unit must be “Flash ROM” updatable, and program must be held in non- volatile RAM. The panel shall be able to function while the update is in process. 4. Control unit shall be capable of operating using an optional built in Encrypted Alarm Router application that is certified by NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) for 128-bit or 256-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) Encryption communications. 5. The optional built-in Encrypted Alarm Router shall be capable of compliance with and UL 2050 standards. I. Remote Security Panels: 1. The system shall support a maximum of sixteen (16) supervised remote annunciators with the identical capabilities, functions and display layout. Operation of the remote annunciators shall be limited to authorized users by the use of a code or key. Section II.D –Technical Specifications 233 IFB No. 2000002197 2. The remote annunciators shall be capable of operating at a maximum wiring distance of 15,000 feet from the control unit on unshielded, non-twisted cable. J. Control Designations: Controls shall be provided to ensure ease of operation of all specified characteristics. Where applicable, clockwise rotation of controls shall result in an increasing function; controls, switches, visual signals and indicating devices, input and output connectors, terminals and test points shall be clearly marked or labeled on the hardware to permit quick identification of intended use and location. K. Test Function: 1. The system shall include a provision that permits testing from any alphanumeric keypad. The test shall include standby battery, alarm bell or siren, and communication to the central station. 2. The system shall include a provision for an automatic, hourly, daily, weekly, thirty (30) day, or up to sixty (60) day communication link test from the control panel installation site to the central station. 3. The system shall include a provision for displaying the internal system power and wiring conditions. Internal monitors shall include the bell circuit, AC power, battery voltage level, charging voltage, panel box tamper, phone trouble line 1 and trouble line 2, transmit trouble, and network trouble. L. Power Supplies: 1. Power supplies for the control unit shall operate from 120V AC, supplied at the respective protected areas. Standby batteries shall be supplied to power the system in the event of a utility power failure. Batteries shall be sized to provide 105% capacity for eight hours. Standby batteries shall be sealed lead-acid. Power supplies shall be all Solid State. 2. Controls shall be designed to maintain full battery charge when alternating current is available. Batteries shall be recharged to 85% capacity within 24 hours from battery use. The system shall be automatically transferred to battery power upon loss of alternating current power and return to alternating current power upon restoration. Intrusion alarms shall not be initiated during switch over; a signal shall be initiated upon failure of battery or alternating current power. M. Software: 1. The system shall interface with computer software with the capability to fully program the panel by connecting to the panel through: a. Direct cable connection interface card. b. Receiver phone line connection. c. Standard phone line connection. d. Ethernet network connection. e. Network connection across the Internet. f. Cellular network connection using the 263C or 263H Cellular Communicators. 2. The system shall interface with computer software capable of locking down all controlled doors.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 234 IFB No. 2000002197 3. The system shall interface with computer software capable of monitoring and logging all events. 4. The system shall interface with computer software capable of exporting reports in the following file formats: Excel spreadsheet (*.xlsx) Text (*.txt) Rich Text (*.rtf) Comma-separated (*.csv) Windows Metafile (*.wmf) HTML document (*.htm) QuickReport (*.qrp)
5. The system shall interface with computer software capable of printing custom, filtered reports including: All Events Door Access Granted Zone Action Door Access Denied Arming/Disarming Opening/Closing Schedule Changes Area Late to Close System Monitors User Code Changes System Events
N. Control Panel Capability 1. The minimum requirements for the control panel are as follows: a. Zone Requirement:
(1) Programmable zones: 500
(2) Control panels zones: 8
(3) Control panel fire zones: 2
(4) Hardwired expansion zones: 500
(5) Wireless expansion zones: 500
(6) Powered smoke zones up to: 200
(7) Shall be capable of zone expansion buses
(8) Shall be capable of zone expander modules
b. Keypad Requirement:
(1) Minimum supervised keypad: 16
(2) Minimum access doors: 8
(3) Shall be full keypad programmable
c. User Information Requirement:
(1) User codes/access cards: 100
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 235 IFB No. 2000002197 (2) Event memory: 1,000
(3) Zone monitor.
d. System Information Requirement:
(1) Shall support Contact ID (CID) format
(2) Reporting paths: 4
(3) Shall be Remote Access Compatible.
e. Communication Requirement:
(1) LAN/WAN/IP Network Communication
(2) Cellular Communications
f. False Alarm Reduction Requirement:
(1) Cross zoning
(2) Abort reporting
(3) Programmable Entry/Exit delay
(4) Transmit delay
(5) Swinger zone bypassing
(6) Report bypass to central station
(7) Unique duress code
(8) Support applications for IOS and Android mobile devices
g. Security Features Requirement:
(1) Encryption: AES 128 or 256 bit
(2) Two-Man rule
(3) Card plus pin by areas
(4) Early morning ambush
h. Compliance Requirement:
(1) ANSI/UL 365 Police Connected Burglar
(2) ANSI/UL 609 Local Burglar
(3) ANSI/UL 1610 Central Station Burg
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 236 IFB No. 2000002197 (4) SIA-CP-01-2010 False Alarm Reduction
(5) ULC-S304 Standard for Central and Monitoring Station Burglar Alarm Units
2.02 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
A. System Description 1. The system areas and zones shall be programmable, and the system shall store, log, display, and transmit specific custom designations for system areas, zones, and user names. 2. To ensure continued, one-call support, the system shall be constructed of sensing components provided directly by the system manufacturer or manufacturer’s authorized VARs, such as power supplies, motion detectors, door and window position switches, glass break detectors, or other sensing devices that the manufacturer offers. 3. The system controller, user interfaces, zone input devices, relay output devices, and the system signal receiving equipment shall be engineered, manufactured, assembled, and must be distributed from a location within the United States of America. 4. The system shall support user interaction by way of a keypad, web browser, system software, key switch, or radio frequency wireless control, text messaging, or smart phone application using integrated or auxiliary devices provided by the system manufacturer. 5. The system shall support controller zone input connections, system keypads, system zone expansion modules, and wireless zone input modules, and must support zone input connections by way of at least two competitive products. 6. The system shall provide capability for addressable modules. 7. System relay outputs shall have the capability of being triggered as a result of a command from the user interface, changes in system status, changes in zone status, or by a programmable schedule. 8. System relay output states shall be programmable for momentary, maintained, pulsed, or must follow the state of an associated system zone input. 9. The system shall be completely programmable either locally from a keypad or remotely through a standard dial-up, and network connections by way of a LAN, WAN, and/or by way of the Internet, cellular communications paths. 10. The control unit shall be completely programmable using remote annunciators, and/or using upload/download software that communicates using SDLC or IP addressed data network. 11. The control unit shall be equipped with an anti-reversing circuit breaker to prevent damage due to accidental reversal of battery leads.
B. Zone Configuration 1. Each zone shall function in any of the following configurations: Night, Day, Exit, Supervisory, Emergency, Panic, Auxiliary 1, Auxiliary 2, Fire Verification, Cross Zone, Priority, and Key Switch Arming.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 237 IFB No. 2000002197 2. The digital SLCs and the annunciator/keypad bus shall be able to operate from the control panel. All related cabling shall be in conformance with manufacturer equipment specifications. 3. Each zone shall function in any of the following configurations:
Night Supervisory Auxiliary 1 Cross-Zone Day Emergency Auxiliary 2 Priority Exit Panic Arming
C. Communication 1. The system shall be capable of signaling to 4 remote monitoring station receivers. Paths shall be capable of being assigned as either a “primary” or “backup” path. In such a manner the system shall have multiple primary paths to multiple remote monitoring stations as well as multiple backup paths to multiple monitoring stations. 2. The system shall allow a backup communication path programmed for Network or Cellular to switch to the backup path should the Primary path become unavailable and automatically reverse back to the Primary path upon restoration of service. 3. The system shall leverage the enterprise IP infrastructure which may include, but not limited to, PSTN, existing data networks, satellite communication, fiber optic networks, LAN, Wireless LAN, WAN, cellular communication, and retail data networks.
D. Network Communication 1. The control panel shall be capable of asynchronous network communication with a retry time between 2 and 240 minutes and a fail time of 2 and 240 minutes. If communication is unsuccessful the control panel shall be capable of attempting backup communication through any of the available communication methods to the same receiver or a backup receiver. 2. Network communication between the control panel and the receiver shall be in a proprietary communication format. 3. The control panel shall be capable of supporting Dynamic Host Communication Protocol (DHCP) Internet Protocol (IP) addressing. 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) shall list network communication by the control panel for Standard or Encrypted Line Security. 5. The control panel shall be capable of two-way network communication using standard Ethernet 10/100 BaseT in a LAN, WAN, or Internet configuration. 6. The control panel shall be capable of communication by means of a 128-bit or 256-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) Encryption. 7. The control panel shall be UL listed.
2.03 INTEGRATED INTRUSION ALARM AND ACCESS CONTROL OPERATION A. Access Authority Levels: The system shall be capable of programming access credentials authority levels to check whether the user has access to a specific area and also has the authority to disarm or arm the area. If the user access credential has access and disarm/arm authority the system shall provide the user the option to disarm the area simultaneously upon opening the door, or to open the door and begin an entry delay Section II.D –Technical Specifications 238 IFB No. 2000002197 timer. With the timer option the user then disarms the area using an intrusion control keypad inside the area. If the user only has access authority to the area and the area is in an armed condition, the user is denied access to the area.
B. Common Area: The system shall be capable of programming a common area to be armed when the last area in the system is armed and disarmed when the first area in the system is disarmed. To ensure the common area works properly it shall not have any user codes assigned to the common area. The system shall also be capable of programming multiple common areas. C. Area Access Control 1. The system shall be capable of integrating area access control capability where specified into the same control panel with the ability to have up to 10,000 user credentials. User access is limited to custom profiles and/or schedules. Anti- passback shall be available. The networked version shall support a Two-Man Rule feature. The system shall support up to sixteen (16) access doors, connected to the system using a manufacturer-approved interface module. 2. The System shall support a minimum of eight (8) access doors connected to the system using a manufacturer-approved interface module. D. Access Control Equipment: Access Control equipment shall communicate to the system by way of the control panel keypad bus. E. Use designated special code to test the system. The One-Man Walk Test feature allows a single technician to check the panel response to burglary, fire, panic, and supervisory zones. F. Multi-lingual Display Option: The system shall be programmed to display the User Menu and Status Display text in multiple languages. G. User Inactivity Audit: System shall allow user code inactivity to notify the central station after a programmable period of days of no activity. The system shall be programmable from 0-365 days. H. Communication Function Diagnostics: The system shall have enhanced diagnostic menu that enables technicians to check network and cellular communication status and cell signal strength from the keypad. I. GUEST Operation: The system shall be capable of in the Home/Sleep/Away with Guest House operation, create up to three separate systems (main and two guests). J. Keypads in each system can selectively arm the perimeter, interior, or bedrooms for only their protected areas. Main system users can add authorized users to all protected areas, but guests can add users only for their protected system.
2.04 CERTIFICATION AND TESTING A. Overview: Intrusion detection system shall detect entry through a door-switched door or motion of a body taking no more than two steps in an area secured with motion detection equipment. B. Prior to calling for a walk test, the following shall be completed: (a) Submit to the ARCHITECT the Project Site Map and Installation Worksheets described below. C. Alarm System Initialization: Section II.D –Technical Specifications 239 IFB No. 2000002197 (a) Upon notification from the CONTRACTOR, the PROJECT INSPECTOR will contact the OWNER and request a pre-walk test meeting and a two-day system test buffer report. (b) System shall be complete and properly operating. In addition to other completion criteria, the event buffer shall be free of unexplainable false alarm reports and system errors. D. Walk Test: (b) Prior to start of system Testing, complete and submit to the PROJECT INSPECTOR the six program sheets referred to as Attachment B. (c) Walk the system with the PROJECT INSPECTOR before or after normal building hours, holidays or Saturdays at OWNER’s option. Coordinate time of test with the PROJECT INSPECTOR. A “Walk Test” shall be performed with the PROJECT INSPECTOR present to verify correct programming and functionality of each zone. Any improperly placed or malfunctioning equipment shall be noted. Upon repair of discrepancies, system shall be walk-tested again, until no further problems exist. The PROJECT INSPECTOR will keep a record of problems noted, and the date they were repaired. A copy of this log shall be supplied to OWNER and ITD Project Manager upon successful resolution of discrepancies. (d) Provide minor necessary adjustments to system in presence of the PROJECT INSPECTOR. (e) Upon completion of a successful walk test and prior to time testing, provide the programming sheets included within this specification and AutoCAD files, showing all areas of coverage and the corresponding hardware zones as delineated in section 3.04 of this specification. Time testing will not begin until these files have been delivered to the OWNER and the accuracy of the files has been ascertained. (f) Upon completion of the walk test and delivery of zone maps, a time test shall be performed by connection to the alarm test bed of the OWNER. During the test, the OWNER shall remotely monitor the system for a period of not less than one week. At the conclusion of the test, correct unexplained errors or false notifications. Upon completion of the test and any required adjustments, OWNER shall provide a statement of acceptance based on Substantial Completion.
2.05 BURGLARY CONTROL A. Burglary Standards: The Burglary system shall be listed as a Power Limited Device and be listed under the standards below. Each system shall be supplied with complete details on all installation criteria necessary to meet the following listings: 1. ANSI/UL 1076; ANSI/UL 1610 2. SIA CP-01-2010 False Alarm Reduction 3. UCL-S304 Standard for Central and Monitoring Station Burglar Alarm Units B. Area System Mode
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 240 IFB No. 2000002197 1. The system user shall be capable of selectively arming and disarming any one or more of 32 areas within the intrusion detection system based on the user PIN code and/or keypad used. 2. The system user shall be capable of assigning an opening and closing schedule to all areas or to each area separately. Each area shall be able to arm or disarm automatically by a schedule. The system shall have the capacity for common areas that automatically disarm when any other area disarms and that automatically arm when all others areas arm. C. All/Perimeter Mode: The system shall be capable of being configured into the All/Perimeter configuration to enable the selective arming of both the interior and perimeter when armed “All” or arming just the perimeter devices if arming “Perimeter”.
1.01 INSTALLATION A. System Component Installation: Materials shall be installed in strict compliance with all local, state, county, province, district, federal and other applicable building, safety, and fire standards, laws, codes, regulations, and guidelines including, but not limited to, all appendices and amendments and the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and best practices. 1. Motion Detectors: a. End of Line resistors shall be installed on the motion detectors. b. Motion Detectors shall be "ON" at all times, unless noted otherwise. Main security keypad turns zone alarms Partitions on and off and reports to OWNER School Police. Alarms are annunciated at all times in the Project site annunciator when the system is either in the "Armed" or "Disarmed" condition, but will not report to the OWNER School Police when the system is in the "Disarmed" condition. c. A 90-degree motion detector shall be installed in the corner of a room, facing away from sunlight, heating elements, HVAC outlets and any turbulent air movements. All 360-degree motion detectors shall be installed in the center of the room. The PROJECT INSPECTOR shall confirm these locations on site. All motion detectors shall be field adjusted for sensitivity and correct aim per manufacturer’s specifications. 2. Glass Break Detectors: a. End of Line resistors shall be installed on the glass break detectors. b. Glass Break Detectors shall be "ON" at all times, unless noted otherwise. Main security keypad shall turn zone alarms partitions on and off and report to OWNER School Police. Alarms shall be annunciated at all times in the Project site annunciator when the system is either in the "Armed" or "Disarmed" condition, but will not report to the OWNER School Police when the system is in the "Disarmed" condition. c. Install glass break detectors in ceilings at a distance of fifteen (15) feet away from windows or glass store fronts. 3. Door Switches:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 241 IFB No. 2000002197 a. End of Line resistors shall be installed on the door switch. b. Perimeter Doors: Install J-Box (es) six inches above door switch facing inside of a room. Door switches shall be installed at top of door, opposite the hinge side, 12 inches from outer edge of door. c. Café refrigerators and Freezers: A J-box shall be installed six inches above each door switch facing inside of a room. Door switches to be installed at top of door, opposite the hinge side, 12 inches from outer edge of door. Special surface-mounted, watertight aluminum boxes shall be provided to accommodate surface mounted magnetic door switch on outside of walk-in freezer and refrigerator. 4. Main Security Controller: a. Controller shall be powered by a dedicated, unswitched 120 VAC power source. The circuit number shall be clearly identified and noted on both Electrical panel directory, record drawings, and on alarm panel. 5. LCD Keypad: a. The Main display keypad for each controller shall be installed in the Main Office as shown on drawings. An additional service keypad shall be installed immediately adjacent to each Controller if the controller is not located in the Main Office. b. The location and distance from the main system panel along with the total quantity of keypads must be considered in the wiring capacitance calculations. LCD display keypad locations may be placed in some or all of the following locations, as specified in the project design drawings. c. In Elementary Schools: 1) Main Building in main office. 2) Multi-purpose building. 3) Kitchen. 4) Cafeteria. 5) Computer Classrooms. d. In Secondary Schools: 1) Main Building in Main Office. 2) Auditorium/Multi-purpose Building. 3) Kitchen. 4) Cafeteria. 5) Laboratories (Computer, Science, Multi-Media). 6) Gymnasiums. 7) Adult School Administrative Areas. 8) Student Store. 9) Music or Band Room.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 242 IFB No. 2000002197 6. Provide lock-on device on all circuit breakers serving security equipment. Switch panel locations shall be as indicated on Drawings. 7. Main and remote security panels shall be placed only in telecommunications equipment rooms unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 8. Graphic Annunciator: a. The system should support a Graphic Annunciator panel, using a computer generated map overlay shall display an outline of coverage areas, with a single LED indicating each zone. Map overlay shall be produced using a method that will not fade or wash out, on a media that will not yellow or degrade from natural light exposure. Laser printing, Silkscreen, or Archival Ink, on UV stabile Vellum or other translucent material shall be used to create the map overlay. Where there are large quantities of zones on a single map, it is permissible to combine two or more zones onto a single indicator, provided these zones cover the same localized area of the map. As an example, two separate zones that provide adjacent coverage to the same entrance area of a building, or cover areas of large room, may display status on a single LED of the annunciator to represent the general area of coverage. b. On small zone systems (12 or fewer zones), provide a durable, written zone description mounted on the face of the GA in lieu of a map overlay. 9. Batteries: a. Calculations shall be made and submitted to guarantee that the batteries in each panel location are sized for a minimum of eight (8) hours back- up protection for all modules powered at that location. b. Battery installation date shall be clearly marked on each battery in a location easily read upon opening cabinet. c. Battery shall be located in the same cabinet housing the control module or in a NEMA box adjacent to the control module cabinet.
1.02 RELATED SYSTEMS INSTALLATION L. Wiring Installation: Provide 120V wiring in conduit, as required, for all equipment. 120V outlets shall be located in a separate NEMA enclosure adjacent to required device cabinets. This NEMA enclosure shall be sized to allow any required power adapters. Low voltage wiring from power adapter to controller shall be in raceway or conduit. Wiring from sensor to controller or terminal cabinet shall be in raceway, cable tray or conduit. Wiring shall conform to the California Electrical Code. M. Labeling and Marking: 2. Mark all panels, devices and cables with laser printer generated labels. 3. Each system panel shall have a comprehensive index placed in a plastic envelope secured to the inside of the panel door. Final system test and acceptance shall not commence until all completed index cards are installed. 4. At the Main Security Panel, the index shall indicate zones that are covered by the MSP, cross-referenced to cable labels, Remote Security Panels connected, and LX/Keypad cable identifiers for cables entering and leaving the cabinet.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 243 IFB No. 2000002197 This identification shall include all cable references including those to telecommunication or networking connections. 5. At Remote Security Panels, the index shall indicate zones that are covered by the respective RSP, cross-referenced to cable level, the cable connecting to MSP, and the LX/Keypadcable identifiers for cables entering and leaving the cabinet. This identification shall include all cable references including the telecommunication or networking connection. 6. Each cable shall be labeled with the same identifier on the cable at the terminal device, on the cable at the alarm panel, and at all other cable and device termination points. Cable markers shall be located within two inches of the end of the cable jacket and shall be directly readable. All labels shall be printed by a laser printer. 7. Each device shall be labeled to indicate the associated zone. Labels shall be TBD N. Wire Terminating: 1. Conductors shall be terminated on Terminal blocks that shall be solderless push- on (#20 to 22 gage solid) with integral fanning strip. Solderless push-on type blocks shall be Siemon Company 66-Series or equivalent. Terminals for connections to external circuits shall be properly labeled. 66B blocks shall be mounted directly to terminal location without use of mounting legs. 66M blocks shall be mounted on 89B mounting spacers. Install the required terminal blocks as necessary within a NEMA 3R with hinged cover, wooden backboard, and flush type lock, Corbin or equivalent, keyed for CCL Cat. 60 key. 2. Terminal blocks shall be installed on back of cabinets only, not on sides. Incoming cables shall be terminated on outside pins of terminal blocks and outgoing cables shall be terminated on second pin from buttside edge. This method shall be provided at satellite terminal locations. 3. Wires shall be consistently color-coded. Wire nuts, shall not be installed. a. Wires shall be provided with code marker tags and be indexed to equipment and noted on as-built Drawings, and on index sheet or cards placed in all equipment cabinets and in as-built data folder. b. Provide wire termination index sheets or cards in all terminals and equipment cabinets and include a Project site zone plot plan in relay cabinets. 8. Provide all terminal boxes with screw type terminals allowing sufficient terminals for all conductor termination.
1.03 PROTECTION 2. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. Material or work damaged during the planning, installation, testing, and clean-up of this project must be replaced or repaired, at no expense to the OWNER, to meet Project specifications before final acceptance of work.
1.04 CLEANUP
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 244 IFB No. 2000002197 3. CONTRACTORs work for each school installation shall be considered complete when all of the aforementioned requirements specified in this document have been met. This includes (but is not limited to) the following: 4. Ceiling panels previously removed have been put back in place. 9. System labels have been put in place. 10. Construction and installation debris and scrap materials have been removed and legally disposed of from project site. 11. System testing has been completed, CONTRACTOR certifies that entire system is in working order, and Test Forms and Project Record Documents have been submitted and approved by the OWNER. 12. Marked up, project record documents have been returned to the OWNER. 13. Unused customer material has been returned to the OWNER. 14. The OWNER has successfully completed acceptance testing of the network installation. 15. The PROJECT INSPECTOR has inspected and accepted the installation. 16. Documentation, to include as-builts, Zone Maps and Programming sheets along with required soft copies has been turned over to the OWNER. END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 245 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT A IDS OWNERs Quality Assurance
Site Location Code/Name Network Engineer PROJECT INSPECTOR PM Recommendation Electrical
OWNER is to examine the following items based on the criteria defined in section 281600. If deficiencies are noted, the system will be failed. As a courtesy, OWNER will consider continuing testing at a 20% rate to determine the integrity of the system. Intrusion Alarm Check List Pass Fail Does the Site Plan Zone Map accurately show the zones as deployed at the school? Does each main panel have a dedicated data drop? Has the correct cable been used for LX-Bus and zone wiring? Are all cables clearly and indelibly identified? Have lock on devices been installed at each circuit breaker serving alarm equipment throughout site? Are all circuit boards, cross connects and power supplies located in interior, secure locations? Have keypads and door switches been located in the areas required by specification? Does system layout and device location(s) match the locations shown on the as-built? Have zone sheets been correctly and accurately filled out? Main Panel Is the panel (and keypad) located in a secure, nonpublic area? Does each re-power used have its own local power? Are all wired connections labeled and under screw terminals? Remote Panels Is the Communication Bus being re-powered locally? Does each re-power used have its own local power? Are expansion modules powered exclusively by the power on the re-power modules? Are all wired connections labeled and on 66M type blocks? Do all cabinets have index sheets, identifying zones served, installed inside the door? Are all power supplies installed in separate cabinets? Does each remote panel have a dedicated 6 hour gel cell battery?
Detectors Are detectors being powered from a power supply? Have end of line (EOL) resistors been installed on all detectors? Is there only one detector per hardware zone? Does each detector have a dedicated zone cable? Are Passive Infrared Detectors installed in all areas as indicated on as-built drawings? Important Note: Failure on any category, constitute failure of the entire system
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 246 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT B Installation Worksheet (Page 1 of 6)
School Name School Code School Main Phone Phone Install Tech Install Date Panel Type/Version Revision
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 247 IFB No. 2000002197 Main Panel Zone Assignments (Page 2 of 6)
Terminal Panel Partition Point Main Location of Sensors/Switches No. Panel Zones
EXAMPLE: Detailed Physical Location Panel Partition No.
Z-12 Math Building - Room #222 on Second Floor #1 - 3/4/5
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 248 IFB No. 2000002197 Expansion Module Zone Assignements (Page 3 of 6)
Terminal Point Panel Partition Location of Sensors/Switches Expansion No. Modules
EXAMPLE: Detailed Physical Location Panel Partition No.
Z-27 "A" Building Computer Lab Room 108 #1 - 1/7
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 249 IFB No. 2000002197 714-xx Expansion Modules (Page 4 of 6)
BOARD TYPE NUMBER ZONES LOCATION OF BOARD
714-______# 1
714-______# 2
714-______# 3
714-______# 4
714-______# 5
714-______# 6
714-______# 7
714-______# 8
714-______# 9
714-______# 10
714-______# 11
714-______# 12
714-______# 13
EXAMPLE:
Type Enrolled as No. Zone (First 8 Detailed Physical Location on main panel)
714-8 # 2 11 to xx Main Office Bldg. - Main Hallway, Southside Electric Room
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 250 IFB No. 2000002197 RE-Power Modules (Page 5 of 6)
Module FUNCTION/PURPOSE LOCATION OF BOARD NUMBER 1
2
3
4
5
6
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 251 IFB No. 2000002197 Keypad Information (Page 6 of 6)
KEYPAD KEYPAD PARTITION MODULE MODEL LOCATION OF KEYPAD NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 252 IFB No. 2000002197
ATTACHMENT C
LOCATION CODE SAMPLE
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 253 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT I – 28 2300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS (VSS)
SECTION 282300
VIDEO MONITORING AND SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (CCTV)
EDITNOTE: 1. LAUSD INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD) IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION TO THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM ITD.
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Digital Video Monitoring and surveillance system, including card access control systems. System components include cameras, terminal cabinets, conduits, cables, monitors, switchers, digital video recorders, connectors, speaker/microphones, combiners, sound activated monitor base station with listen/talkback amplifier companion, call stations, alarming base station, and other materials and equipment. B. Video surveillance system shall be integrated with LAUSD’s Integrated Security Management and Monitoring System (ISMS).
1.02 REFERENCES A. IEC/EN/UL 60950-1: – Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements B. IEC/EN/UL 60950-22: Technology Equipment Safety – Part 22: Equipment to be Installed Outdoors C. SMPTE 296M (HDTV 720p) - 1280 x 720 Progressive Image Sample Structure – Analogue and Digital Representation and Analogue Interface. D. SMPTE 274M (HDTV 1080p) - 1920 x 1080 Image Sample Structure, Digital Representation and Digital Timing Reference Sequences for Multiple Picture Rates. E. SMPTE ST 2036-1 (UHDTV): Ultra High Definition Television (UHDTV) F. ISO/IEC 14496-10 Advanced Video Coding (H.264) – Advanced Video Coding (H.264) G. IEEE 802.3at (Power over Ethernet Plus) – Power over Ethernet Plus
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 254 IFB No. 2000002197 H. IEEE 802.1X (Authentication) – Standard for Local and metropolitan area networks-Port-Based Network Access Control (Authentication) I. IPv4 (RFC 791) – Internet Protocol Version 4 J. IPv6 (RFC 2460) – Internet Protocol Version 6 K. QoS – DiffServ (RFC 2475) – Scalable End-to-End Quality of Service Model L. Relevant ONVIF “S”profile as defined by the ONVIF Organization. M. IEC/EN 60529 IP66 (Ingress protection) – Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code) N. NEMA 250 Type 4X – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment O. IEC/EN 62262 IK10 – Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment against external mechanical impacts (IK code)
1.03 SUBMITTALS D. List of Materials: Submit a complete list of proposed materials. E. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed and dimensioned Shop Drawings indicating kind, weight and thickness of materials, method of fitting and fastening parts together, location and number of parts or modules, sizes, and complete details of method of fitting suspension and fastening luminaires in place. Provide wiring and cabling diagrams. Drawings shall contain sufficient information to assemble and install equipment at the Project site without further instructions. F. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions for luminaires and accessories.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS J. Equipment and materials that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S Information Technology project manager. When deviating or proposing material substitutions the following information shall be submitted: 20. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER, and all necessary documents to validate the claims made in the substitution form. 21. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions. K. The CONTRACTOR assumes all responsibility for additional costs, directly or indirectly, associated with proposing and installing an approved substitution products. All substituted products must meet the intent of form and function identified in the specification.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE F. The CONTRACTOR or security sub-CONTRACTOR shall be a licensed security CONTRACTOR with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing and servicing systems of similar scope and complexity, and evidence that
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 255 IFB No. 2000002197 CONTRACTOR has completed at least three (3) projects of similar scope, and is currently engaged in the installation and maintenance of systems herein described. G. All installation, configuration, setup, program and related work shall be performed by electronic technicians thoroughly trained by the manufacturer in the installation and service of the equipment provided. H. The CONTRACTOR or designated sub-CONTRACTOR shall submit installer’s third party verified credentials of completion of manufacturer certification. The CONTRACTOR system programmer shall have attended manufacturer training and obtained the highest level certifications for the ISMS, ACS and VMS. I. The CONTRACTOR shall provide four (4) current references from clients with systems of similar scope and complexity that became operational in the past three (3) years. At least three (3) of the references shall be utilizing the same system components, in a similar configuration as the proposed system. J. The video surveillance system shall be in compliance with applicable industry standards listed under article 1.03-References.
1.06 WARRANTY O. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of, or failure to, examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. K. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. L. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than 5 years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. M. Installation CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to OWNER ITD Project Management. N. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that a Video Monitoring and Surveillance system component, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate,
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 256 IFB No. 2000002197 or repeated failure rate, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems of the same model purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a project manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER. 6. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be: a. Equal to or less than 10% in any 12 month period during the original warranty term. b. Equal to or less than 15% cumulative failures during the entire term of the original warranty. 7. If, at any time during of the life of the products, the failure rate of the Access Control systems or components exceeds 20%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 8. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition. 9. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days or written notification from the OWNER. 10. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service. O. The warranty shall cover the complete system including fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. P. The warranty shall include onsite 48-hour advanced part replacement. Q. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). R. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. S. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 257 IFB No. 2000002197 a. CAMERAS AND CAPABILITIES A. General Requirements: 1. System overall shall be capable of intelligent video analytic and triggers actions based on programming requirements. 2. Cameras shall be IP-based and comply with established network and video standards. 3. Cameras shall support true day/night vision modes using IR cut filters. 4. Camera enclosure shall be rated as follow; a. Vandal resistance – IK10 b. Ingress protection – IP67, NEMA 4X, or higher 5. The primary power source of cameras shall be powered by data nework switches equipped with PoE/PoE+/UPoE capabilities as specified by Section 27 1018 Local Area Network (LAN) Systems. The secondary power sources (e.g. injectors, midspans, local power) shall be reviewed and approved by OWNER on a case by case basis. 6. Cameras shall be fully supported by an open and published API (Application Programmers Interface), which shall provide necessary information for integration of functionality into third party applications. Manufacturers SDK (software development kit) must be available to the general public. 7. Cameras shall be in conformance with profile S as currently defined by the ONVIF Organization (www.onvif.org/conformant-products) including firmware upgrade to meet future revisions. 8. Camera types listed below describing various resolutions, form-factor and features shall be supplied by a single manufacturer per site, and meet or exceed the following requirements: a. The camera shall be equipped with IR progressive scan sensor. b. The camera shall provide true day/night functionality. c. The camera shall be equipped with shall provide local video storage (e.g. a microSD/microSDHC/microSDXC memory card expansion). 9. The camera shall allow for video to be transported over: a. HTTP (Unicast) b. HTTPS (Unicast) c. SRTP (Unicast & Multicast) d. RTP over RTSP (Unicast) e. RTP over RTSP over HTTP (Unicast) 10. The camera shall support Quality of Service (QoS) for traffic prioritization.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 258 IFB No. 2000002197 11. User Interface shall comply with the following: a. The camera shall contain a built-in web server making video and configuration available to multiple clients in a standard operating system and browser environment using HTTP, without the need for additional software or specialty plugins b. The camera shall be accessible via camera IP address directly using client software supported by the equipment manufacturer 12. Protocol Requirements: a. At the minimum, camera shall incorporate support for IPv4/v6, HTTP, HTTPS, SSL/TLS, QoS, TCP, ICMP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), RTSP, RTP, SRTP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, SMTP, FTP, DHCP, ARP, DNS, DynDNS, SOCKS, SSH, NTP, CIFS/SMB. 13. Text overlay requirement: a. Provide embedded on-screen text with support for date & time, and a customer-specific text, camera name, minimum of 45 ASCII characters. b. Provide the ability to apply privacy masks to the image. c. Allow for the overlay of a graphical image, such as a logotype, into the image. 14. Security a. The camera shall support the use minimum of 128 bit encryption for secured authentication and communication of both administration data and video streams. b. The camera shall support IEEE 802.1X authentication. c. The camera shall provide support for restricting access to pre- defined IP addresses only. d. The camera shall restrict access to the built-in web server by usernames and passwords at three different levels. e. The camera shall not allow third party firmware to be loaded onto the camera. 15. The camera shall be equipped with basic intelligent video analytic functionality that can be triggered by: a. Intelligent Video Detection b. Audio Detection (optional) c. Live Stream Accessed d. Camera tampering e. Auto tracking f. Scene alteration detection (e.g. removed object detection)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 259 IFB No. 2000002197 16. Response to triggers shall include capability of: a. Send SNMP trap or email notification b. Send images, using FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share or email c. Send video clip, using FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, network share or email 17. The camera shall incorporate a function for image stabilization 18. The camera shall provide remote focus, remote zoom, and alignment 19. Hardware interface requirements a. Network interface (1) The camera shall be equipped with one (1) auto- negotiating10/100 Base-T Ethernet port. 20. Environmental operational requirements a. Operate in a temperature range of -40 °C to +60 °C (-40 °F to 140 °F). b. Operate in a humidity range of 10–100% RH (condensing). 21. Installation and maintenance: a. The camera shall be supplied with management software which allows the assignment of IP addresses, upgrade of firmware and backup of the cameras’ configuration. b. The camera shall allow updates of the software (firmware) remotely over the IP network infrastructure. c. The camera shall provide Autorotation functionality. B. Type 1 Camera Requirements 1. Illumination: The camera shall meet or exceed the following illumination specifications: a. Color: 0.3 with WDR image processing capability; b. B/W: 0.02 lux with WDR image processing capability 2. Target Resolution: a. Ability to distinguish an object from background within 125 feet (*) b. Provide 20 pixels per linear foot. Contractor shall provide a pixel count per linera foot. 3. Encoding - The camera shall support the following video encoding algorithms: a. Compression Format: (1) Motion JPEG (2) H.264 (Baseline/Main/High Profiles)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 260 IFB No. 2000002197 (3) The camera shall provide configurable compression levels. b. The camera shall in H.264 support Variable Bit Rate (VBR) for video quality adapted to scene content. To protect the network from unexpected bit rate spikes the camera shall support Constant Bit Rate (CBR) or Maximum Bit Rate (MBR). B. Type 2 Camera Requirements 1. Illumination: The camera shall meet or exceed the following illumination specifications: a. Color: 0.1 lux with WDR image processing capability. Minimum WDR of 120 db. 2. Target Resolution: a. Ability to classify an object class within 95 feet. b. Provide 40 pixels per linear foot. 3. Encoding - The camera shall support the following video encoding algorithms and format: a. Motion JPEG b. H.264 (Baseline/Main/High Profiles) c. The camera shall provide configurable compression levels. d. The camera shall in H.264 support Variable Bit Rate (VBR) for video quality adapted to scene content. To protect the network from unexpected bit rate spikes the camera shall support Constant Bit Rate (CBR) or Maximum Bit Rate (MBR). C. Type 3 Camera Requirements: 1. Illumination: The camera shall meet or exceed the following illumination specifications: a. Color: 0.2 with WDR image processing capability and minimum WDR of 120 db. b. B/W: 0.008 lux with WDR image processing capability and minimum DWR of 120 db. 2. Target Resolution: a. Ability to describe the object in details within 45 feet. b. Provide 80 pixels per linear foot. c. The camera shall provide both landscape format (4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratio) as well as corridor format (3:4 and 9:16 aspect ratio). 3. Encoding: a. The camera shall support the following video encoding algorithms and format: (1) Motion JPEG
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 261 IFB No. 2000002197 (2) H.264 (Baseline/Main/High Profiles) (3) The camera shall provide configurable compression levels. b. The camera shall in H.264 support Variable Bit Rate (VBR) for video quality adapted to scene content. To protect the network from unexpected bit rate spikes the camera shall support Constant Bit Rate (CBR) or Maximum Bit Rate (MBR). D. Onboard Camera Minimum Requirements: 1. Electronic day/night 2. Meet EN 50115 (vibration and shock) and ISO 16750-3 3. Maximum power consumption: 4 watts 4. Illumination: The camera shall meet or exceed the following illumination specifications: a. Minimum sensitivity of 1.0 lux with WDR image processing capability; (with minimum WDR of 70db) 5. Target Resolution: a. Ability to describe an object in details within 45 feet. b. Provide 80 pixels per linear foot. 6. Encoding - The camera shall support the following video encoding algorithms: a. Compression Format: (1) Motion JPEG (2) H.264 (Baseline/Main/High Profiles) (3) The camera shall provide configurable compression levels. b. The camera shall in H.264 support Variable Bit Rate (VBR) for video quality adapted to scene content. To protect the network from unexpected bit rate spikes the camera shall support Constant Bit Rate (CBR) or Maximum Bit Rate (MBR). b. NVR AND RELATED COMPONENTS C. NVR general requirements: 7. The NRVshall be based on a true open architecture that shall allow the use of non- proprietary workstation and server hardware, non-proprietary network infrastructure and non-proprietary storage. 8. The NVR shall be a pre-assembled appliance solution, or software based supporting VM (e.g. VMWare, Microsoft hypervisor). Other solution platforms be reviewed and approved by the OWNER on the case by case basis. 9. The NVR shall be an IP enabled solution. All communication with the VSS system shall be based on standard TCP/IP protocol and have the capability to use network security.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 262 IFB No. 2000002197 10. The NVR shall provide minimum of two (2) 1Gbps Ethernet network ports 11. The NVR shall support user authentication with claims-based authentication using external providers. 12. The NVR shall offer a complete and scalable video surveillance solution that shall allow cameras to be added on a unit-by-unit basis. 13. The NVR shall interface with analog-to-digital video encoders and IP cameras. 14. All video streams supplied from analog cameras or IP cameras shall be digitally encoded in MPEG-4, MPEG-2, MJPEG, H.264, H265, Wavelet, or JPEG2000 compression formats and recorded simultaneously in real time. 15. All audio streams supplied from IP video servers shall be digitally encoded in G.711 (u-law), G.721, G.723, or AAC compression formats and recorded simultaneously in real time. 16. Each camera’s bit rate, frame rate, and resolution shall be set independently from other cameras in the system, and altering these settings shall not affect the recording and display settings of other cameras. 17. The NVR shall to support only secured media stream requests, unless explicitly configured otherwise. Or have the capability to leverage network security controls. Secured media stream requests shall be secured with strong certificate based authentication leveraging RTSPS (aka RTSP over TLS). Client authentication for media stream requests is claims-based and may use a limited lifetime security token. 18. The NVR shall have the ability to encrypt the media stream, including video, audio, and metadata with authenticated encryption for transmission. Media stream encryption shall be done at rest and in transit and be a certificate based AES 128b bits encryption. The VMS shall: a. Allow encryption to be set on a per camera basis for all or some of the cameras. b. Allow encrypted streams to be exported. 19. The NVR shall support end to end encrypted streams with cameras supporting Secure RTP (SRTP) both in unicast and multicast from the camera. 20. The NVR shall be able to use multiple VSS keyboards to operate the entire set of cameras throughout the system, including brands of cameras from various manufacturers and including their PTZ functionalities. 21. The NVR shall be able to retrieve and set the current position of PTZ cameras using XYZ coordinates. 22. The NVR shall support PTZ camera protocols from multiple manufacturers, including analog and IP protocols. 23. The NVR shall arbitrate the user conflict on PTZ usage based on user levels per camera.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 263 IFB No. 2000002197 24. The NVR shall support Audio and Video storage configuration for the NVR shall support: a. Internal or external computer data storage in RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, or 10 configuration. b. Within the overall storage system, the Audio and Video shall have the capability to include disks located on: (1) Local. (2) Network Attached Servers (NAS). (3) Storage Area Networks (SAN). D. NVR RECORDING FUNCTION 25. The Recorder shall use an event and timestamp database for the advanced search of audio/video archives. This database shall use a SQL database. 26. The Recorder shall protect archived audio/video files and the system database against network access and non-administrative user access. 27. The Recorder shall digitally sign recorded video using 248-bit RSA public/private key cryptography. 28. The Recorder shall have the capacity to configure the key frame interval (I- frame) in seconds or number of frames. 29. The Recorder shall provide a pre-alarm and post-alarm recording option that can be set between one second and 5 minutes on a per camera basis. 30. The Recorder shall provide the functionality of storing of video and audio streams based on triggering events, such as: a. Digital motion detection. b. Digital input activation. c. Macros. d. Through SDK application recording. 31. The Recorder shall be capable of intelligent video analytic detection on each individual camera leveraging management template or levearage external server video analytics. Detection can be set into four different modes: a. Full Screen: All 1320 blocks on screen are activated and a general threshold for the overall detection in the entire image can be set, and when it is reached, it can trigger recording and a motion event or a custom event. b. Full Screen Unit: This is the same as the Full Screen but the motion detection takes place in the DVS. c. Detection Zone: Six overlapping zones can be defined in the 1320 blocks on screen with each of these zones having its own threshold, and, when that threshold is reached, each one of them can trigger recording and a motion event or a custom event. Each zone triggering its own event
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 264 IFB No. 2000002197 allows for the configuration of directional motion detection events and other complex motion detection logic. d. Detection Zone Unit: This is the same as the Detection Zone, but the motion detection takes place in the DVS and only one zone is supported. e. Disabled: No motion detection is performed on this camera. 32. The Recorder shall allow for multiple recording schedules to be assigned to a single camera. Each schedule shall be created with the following parameters: a. Recording mode: (1) Continuous. (2) On Motion/Manual. (3) Manual. (4) Disabled. b. Recurrence pattern: (1) Once on specific days. (2) Specific days on a yearly basis. (3) Specific days on a monthly basis. (4) Specific days on a weekly basis. (5) Daily. c. Time coverage: (1) All day. (2) Specific time range(s). (3) Daytime or night time based on the times of sunrise and sunset that are automatically calculated from the time of year and a geographical location. Provision shall be given to offset the calculated sunrise or sunset time by plus or minus 3 hours. 33. The Recorder shall allow each camera (video source) to be encoded multiple times for each camera stream in the same or different video formats (MPEG-4, MPEG-2, MJPEG, H.264, H.265, Wavelet or JPEG2000), limited only by the capabilities of each DVS. 34. The Recorder shall have the capacity to manage up to 10,000 video endpoints from one operation manager. 35. The Recorder shall allow users to view up to 5 million camera feeds across a federation model. 36. The Recorder shall have open APIs allowing integration into 3rd party applications, internally development applications and/or data connectivity for deeper analytics.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 265 IFB No. 2000002197 37. Whenever multiple video streams are available from the same camera, users shall be free to use any one of them based on their assigned usage. The standard video stream usages are: a. Live. b. Recording. c. Remote. d. Low resolution. e. High resolution. 38. The Recorder shall allow the video quality to vary according to predefined schedules. Such schedules shall have the same configuration flexibility as the recording schedules mentioned earlier. The video quality shall be based on, but not limited to, the following parameters: a. Maximum bit rate. b. Maximum frame rate. c. Image quality. d. Key frame interval. 39. The Recorder shall have the ability to dynamically boost the quality of the "recording stream" (see previous bullet) based on specific events: a. When recording is started manually by a user. b. When recording is triggered by a macro, an alarm or detected motion. 40. The Recorder shall have the capacity to communicate using 128 bits SSL encryption and HTTPS secure protocol. 41. The Recorder shall have the capacity to redirect audio/video streams to active viewing clients on the network using unicast UDP or TCP. 42. The Recorder shall empower the administrator with a full range of disk management options: a. The Recorder shall allow the administrator to choose which disks to use for RECORDING and to set a maximum quota for each. b. The Recorder shall allow the administrator to spread the RECORDING of different cameras on different disk groups (groups of disks controlled by the same controller) so that RECORDING could be carried out in parallel on multiple disks. 43. The Recorder shall offer the following options to clean up old archives, on a camera by camera basis: a. After a preset number of days. b. Write over the oldest archives first when disks are full (FIFO – First In First Out). c. Stop RECORDING when disks are full.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 266 IFB No. 2000002197 44. The Recorder shall allow important video sequences to be protected against normal disk cleanup routines. 45. Users shall have the following options when protecting a video sequence: a. Until a specified date. b. For a specified number of days. c. Indefinitely (until the protection is explicitly removed). 46. The Recorder shall allow the administrator to put a cap on the percentage of storage space occupied by protected video. 47. The Recorder shall have the capacity to down-sample video streams for storage saving purposes. The down-sampling options available are the following: a. For H.264, MPEG-4, and H.265, streams the down-sampling options are: all key frames, 1 fps, 2 sec./frame, 5 sec./frame, 10 sec./frame, 15 sec./frame, 30 sec./frame, 60 sec./frame, 120 sec./frame. b. For MJPEG streams the down-sampling options are: 15 fps, 10 fps, 5 fps, 2 fps, 1 fps, 2 sec./frame, 5 sec./frame, 10 sec./frame, 15 sec./frame, 30 sec./frame, 60 sec./frame, 120 sec./frame. E. VMS CLIENT USER INTERFACE (UI) 48. The Client Application shall provide the user interface for VSS configuration and monitoring over any network and be accessible locally or from a remote connection. 49. The Client Application shall provide an easy-to-use graphical user interface (UI). 50. The Client Application shall allow users to access up to 10,000 video end points. 51. The Client Application shall allow users the capability to access up to 5 million video end points when in federator type of architecture. 52. The client application for monitoring shall support running oin 64-bit mode. 53. Logging on to a Client Application shall be done either through locally stored user accounts and passwords the operator’s credentials when Active Directory integration is enabled. 54. When integrated with Microsoft’s Active Directory, the Client Application shall authenticate users using their Active Directory credentials. 55. The Client Application shall fulfill the role of a Unified Security Interface that is able to monitor intrusion detection and access control events and alarms, as well as view live and recorded video. 56. The Client Application shall provide a graphical user interface to control and monitor VSS. It shall allow administrators and operators with appropriate privileges to monitor their unified security platform, run reports, and manage alarms.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 267 IFB No. 2000002197 57. The Client Application shall include advanced video capabilities, including: a. Advanced live video viewing functionality. b. Advanced archive playing and video playback functionality. c. Monitoring and management of video system events and alarms. d. Intercom or duplex audio or SIP based application. e. Generation of video reports. f. Control of PTZ cameras. g. Creating and monitoring archive transfer requests. h. Display metadata overlaid on live or playback video. 58. The live video viewing capabilities of the Client Application shall include: a. The ability to display all cameras attached to the NVR’s. b. Support for live video monitoring on each and every display tile within a task in the user’s workspace. c. The ability to drag and drop a camera into a display tile for live viewing. d. The ability to drag and drop a camera from a map into a display tile for live viewing. e. Support for digital zoom on live camera video streams. f. The ability for audio communication with video units with audio input and output. g. The ability to control pan-tilt-zoom, iris, focus, and presets. h. The ability to bookmark important events for later retrieval on any RECORDING camera and to uniquely name each bookmark in order to facilitate future searches. i. The ability to start/stop recording on any camera in the system that is configured to allow manual recording by clicking on a single button. j. The ability to activate or de-activate viewing of all system events as they occur. k. The ability to switch to instant replay of the video for any RECORDING camera with the simple click of button. l. The ability to take snapshots of live video and be able to save or print the snapshots. m. The ability to view the same camera multiple times in different tiles. 59. The video playback (archive playing) capabilities of the Client Application shall include: a. Support for audio and video playback for any time span. b. Support for video playback on each and every display tile.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 268 IFB No. 2000002197 c. The ability to instantly replay the video for any RECORDING camera with the simple click of a button. d. The ability to select between instant synch of all video streams in playback mode, allowing operators to view events from multiple angles or across several camera fields, or non-synchronous playback. e. The ability to simultaneously view the same camera in multiple tiles at different time intervals. f. The ability to control playback with: (1) Pause. (2) Lock Speed. (3) Forward and Reverse Playback at: 1x, 2x, 4x, 6x, 8x, 10x, 20x, 40x, 100x. (4) Forward and Reverse Playback frame by frame. (5) Slow Forward and Reverse Playback at: 1/8x, 1/4x, 1/3x, 1/2x. (6) Loop playback between two time markers. 60. The ability to display a single timeline or one timeline for each selected video stream, which would allow the operator to navigate through the video sequence by simply clicking on any point in the timeline. 61. The ability to display the level of motion at any point on a timeline. 62. The ability to clearly display bookmarked events on the timeline(s). 63. The ability to query archived video using various search criteria, including, but not limited to, time, date, camera, and area. 64. The tool necessary for searching video and associated audio based on user- defined events or motion parameters. 65. The ability to define an area of the video field in which to search for motion as well as define the amount of motion that will trigger search results with the client or with intelligent video analytics. The Client Application shall then retrieve all archived video streams that contain motion that meets the search parameters. There shall be a graphical timeline on which the time of each search hit shall be indicated. 66. The ability to browse through a list of all bookmarks created on the system and select any bookmarked event for viewing. 67. The ability to add bookmarks to previously archived video for easier searching and retrieval. 68. Support for digital zoom on playback video streams. 69. Still image export to PNG, JPEG, GIF, and BMP format with Date and Time stamp, and Camera Name on the image (snapshot). 70. Tools for exporting video sequences in standard video formats, such as ASF.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 269 IFB No. 2000002197 71. The ability to encrypt exported video files. 72. The ability for an operator to load previously exported video files from their computer or network. 73. The ability for queries to be saved upon closing the Client Application and reappear when the application is reopened. 74. The ability to dynamically block, on demand, video stream dynamically to lower level users to prevent access, for a specific time, to live and recorded video. 75. A tool building and exporting a set of videos into a single container. This tool shall allow the operator to build sequences of video to create a storyboard and allow the export of synchronous cameras. 76. The ability to store the video export and still image export at a pre-defined storage location. 77. An interface with the ability to list, search, and manipulate previously generated video exports. 78. The ability to export sequences of video in open standards including ASF and MP4 79. Visual Tracking a. The Client Application shall support the ability to manually track a moving target with the single click of a button. b. The ability to switch from one camera view to an adjacent camera shall be done within a single display tile. c. Switching between camera streams shall be accomplished by simply clicking on a semi-transparent shape or overlay. d. Visual tracking shall be available with both live and recorded video. F. WEB CLIENT 80. The VSS shall provide a desktop application and a web client interface for configuration, management, and/or viewing. 81. The web client shall be a truly thin client with no download required other than an internet web browser or standard web browser plugins. 82. The web client shall be platform independent and run within Microsoft Internet Explorer, Firefox, Safari, and Google Chrome. 83. Video Stream shall be redirected to the Web Client with no stream transformation or re-encoding for all streams in H264, H265, and Mpeg4 ISO. 84. The CONTRACTOR shall provide up to 10 number of simultaneous Web Clients. 85. Functionalities:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 270 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Login using name and password or Active Directory support shall be available. b. Encrypted communications for all transactions. c. Print reports and export to CSV file. d. Video (1) Live and playback video at 320 x 240, 640 x 480 or 1280 x 1024 @ 15 fps. (2) Video export. (3) 1, 4, 6 or 9 tiles. (4) Basic PTZ Controls (Pan/Tilt, Zoom, go to presets, start pattern). (5) Start / Stop recording. (6) Alarm report.
G. MOVILE APPLICATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 86. The VSS shall support mobile apps for various off-the-shelf smartphones and tablets. The mobile apps shall communicate with the Mobile Server of the VSS over any WiFi or mobile network connection. 87. Mobile apps shall communicate with the VSS via a Mobile Server. Communication between the mobile device and the Mobile Server shall support optional encryption. 88. Supported manufacturers shall include: a. Apple IOS devices. b. Android based tablets and Smartphones. c. Microsoft Windows based devices. 89. It shall be possible to download the mobile apps from the Central application store (Apple iTunes App Store, Google Play, Windows Store). 90. Functionalities: a. Live monitoring and command and control of the VSS. b. Receive alarm push notifications from the Apple Push Notification Server or from the Google Android push server. c. Alarm management (view and acknowledge alarms, video tied to alarms). d. View VSS hierarchy and search for entities. e. Stream video from the mobile device using the built-in camera. f. Video streams from mobile devices shall be available in the VSS to be viewed in live and recorded on the Archiver.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 271 IFB No. 2000002197 g. Video system shall provide the following: (1) View live and playback video at 320 x 240, 640 x 480 or 1280 x 1024 @ 15 fps. (2) Monitor camera status. (3) View up to 6 video feeds. (4) Control PTZ functionality of a camera, including access to PTZ presets. (5) Save snapshots locally on the device. (6) View video tied to access control events, and alarms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DEPLOYMENT
H. Deployment Management Service 1. The Deployment Management service from the vendor shall include a Project Manager acting as the single point of contact for all communications between the CONTRACTOR and the vendor organization and who will be responsible for: a. Conducting a Risk Assessment of the impact of potential risk factors on the operation of the vendor's ISMS. b. Providing a project plan for the deployment of the vendor's ISMS. c. Managing the development and deployment of the custom solution components that will be integrated into the vendor's ISMS (if applicable). d. Providing a scope of work detailing the services to be provided by the vendor to assist in the deployment of the vendor’s ISMS. e. Coordinating and scheduling the vendor field services with the CONTRACTOR to assist with the deployment of the vendor’s ISMS. f. Providing regular project status updates to the CONTRACTOR regarding the development of custom solutions (if applicable) and the deployment of the vendor’s ISMS. 2. System Configuration and Commissioning Service. The System Configuration and Commissioning service from the vendor shall include a Field Engineer who will be responsible for: a. Assisting the CONTRACTOR’s or subcontractor’s onsite/remote technicians with the configuration and commissioning of the vendor’s ISMS at the client site.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 272 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Conducting a test of the ISMS following the deployment of the system using real-world operator scenarios to ensure optimal system performance. c. Providing the CONTRACTOR with a Service Report detailing the tasks completed during the deployment of the ISMS at the client site, as well as any recommendations for improving the performance of the ISMS that must be implemented by the CONTRACTOR. d. Providing a knowledge transfer of the vendor's ISMS to the CONTRACTOR following the deployment of the ISMS at the client site.
3.06 INSTALLATION I. The CONTRACTOR or subcontractors main resources within the project shall carry proper professional certification issued by the manufacturer and verified by a third party organization to confirm sufficient product and technology knowledge. J. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully follow instructions in documentation provided by the manufacturer to ensure all steps have been taken to provide a reliable, easy- to-operate system. K. All equipment shall be tested and configured in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacturer prior to installation. L. All firmware found in products shall be the latest and most up-to-date provided by the manufacturer, or of a version as specified by the integrator of the VSS system. M. All equipment requiring users to log on using a password shall be configured with user/site-specific password/passwords. No system/product default passwords shall be allowed. N. A proper installation shall meet NEC (National Electrical Code) per the guidelines of that year’s revision. When properly installed equipment meets Low Voltage, Class 2 classification of the NEC.
3.07 NAMING CONVENTIONS O. Cameras - All cameras shall be named in the NVR configurations using the following labeling scheme: LOCATION CODE CAMERA NUMBER CHANNEL
8 4 3 6 - 0 0 1 - 0 1
Example 1 à 8436-001-01 Camera No. 1 Channel 1
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 273 IFB No. 2000002197
8 4 3 6 - 0 0 1 - 0 1 Example 2 à 8436-102-04 Camera No. 2
Channel 4 P. Weather proof labels showing the corresponding camera number shall be applied to each camera’s housing.
3.08 TESTING Q. The VSS system shall be tested in accordance with the following: 5. Conduct a complete inspection and test of all installed access control and security monitoring equipment. This includes testing and verifying connection to equipment of other divisions such as intrusion detection and access control systems. 6. Provide staff to test all devices and all operational features of the Security Management System for witness by the Owner’s representative and authorities having jurisdiction as applicable. 7. Correct deficiencies until satisfactory results are obtained. R. Submit written copies of test results. Complete Checklist for Security VSS provided in Appendix A.
3.09 PROTECTION B. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.10 OWNER ORIENTATION (TRAINING) A. Before contract closeout provide the following training and orientation: 1. Provide a minimum 48 hours training for LAUSD designated representatives. The content of the training is advanced instruction on the use, programming, maintenance and troubleshooting of the video surveillance system, devices and components. a. Materials shall include training manuals and hands-on lab exercises. b. The training shall be provided at the equipment manufacturer’s authorized training facility located in Los Angeles County. c. Training shall consist of classroom instruction including intensive course work covering the following topics: (1) Product Features and Technical Specifications (2) Implementation and Design as–built documentation, including familiarization with drawing sets, symbols and notation as well as other record documents.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 274 IFB No. 2000002197 (3) Complete understanding of the system architecture and design of implemented solution. (4) Complete function and feature analysis on implemented solution including programming, operation, trouble shooting, error messages, etc.
3.11 CLEANUP A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 275 IFB No. 2000002197 APPENDIX A Checklist for Security CCTV
The following criteria must be met before ITD will accept this system for maintenance.
CCTV Installation Check List Y N Initials
Is all equipment installed as specified?
Monitors (For campus CCTV, verify its location is a secured)
NVR Image Server (For campus CCTV, recording is limited to 30 days max)
Video/Matrix Controllers Make______Model______
Cameras Verify cameras are not viewing area off campus, aimed towards rest room entrances, or any other areas with an expectation of privacy)
Camera housings and brackets for inside and outside applications
Rack and terminal cabinets/ cable and connectors Does installation follow industry standards and specifications? Does installation comply with LAUSD Video Surveillance Policy? Are all cable terminations in terminal cabinets labeled properly?
Are cables marked clearly and indelibly marked?
Does cable number match with posted list?
Are all outdoor cameras protected from direct sunlight?
Are charts posted at console and terminal cabinets?
Is cabling in terminal cabinets and console loomed and helically wrapped? Is there other media cabling sharing the conduit? Have the proper connectors and crimpers been used? Are cameras which are out of reach of ladders and require a lift for maintenance, located where a lift can easily be placed underneath?
Circle One: Cameras use data network (IP-based, VLAN 4), or use separate, isolated fiber and/or Cat 5E/6 cabling.
Explicit approval documentation provided for any Wireless Cameras
If wireless cameras are used, list approved Security features ______Are terminal cabinets and cross-connects installed indoors? Are ground connections to specification?
Have zones coverage been identified? Is each camera’s coverage as specified?
# of pan/tilt/zoom cameras: ______# of fixed cameras: ______Can 16 cameras output be displayed individually, quad format, 9 split screen, 10 split screen and all at once.
Is image and color display on playback and real time clear?
Functionality Check List Pass Fail Initials Can camera controls be adjusted manually and remotely? Pan/Tilt/Zoom Operation. Has a joystick for pan/tilt/zoom been provided?
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 276 IFB No. 2000002197 List make and model of PTZ cameras: Make/Model______List make and model of fixed cameras: Make/Model______Iris control and focus Test recording modes - Motion activated - Time activated - Continuous recording - Alarm activated - Pre-alarm and Post-alarm recording Is recording storage capacity as specified? Is recording storage configured for RAID V? Does the system resume operations after a power outage? (With no operator assistance) Does the system provide notice of an alarm by visual notification, callback, pager, or e-
mail to designated operator without interrupting the recording process? Does the system provide an alarm history buffer as specified? (1000 incidents) All above criteria has been verified: (check all that apply) Type of CCTV System: Front Door/Main Office Intercom-CCTV Staff Parking Lot CCTV Campus CCTV Location/address
School Principal (Print Name) Signature Date OWNER/Project Manager (Print Name) Signature Date ITD QA Representative (Print Name) Signature Date ITD Quality Assurance Deputy Director (Print Name) Signature Date
School Accepted? Yes______No______Date ______
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 277 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT J – 28 4100 INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (ISMS) SECTION 28 4100 INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING SYSTEM (ISMS)
OWNER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD) IS THE ONLY AUTHORITY FOR CHANGES OR MODIFICATION TO THIS SPECIFICATION. NO CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT SPECIFIC APPROVAL FROM ITD.
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The ISMS shall support the seamless unification of IP access control system (ACS), IP video management system (CCTV), and IP intrusion detection system (IDS) under a single platform. The ISMS user interface (UI) applications shall present a unified security interface for the management, configuration, monitoring, and reporting of embedded ACS, CCTV, and IDS systems and associated edge devices. 1.02 CERTIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. The specified system shall meet relevant parts of the following video standards: 1. SMPTE 296M (HDTV 720p) 2. SMPTE 274M (HDTV 1080p) 3. SMPTE ST 2036-1 (UHDTV) B. The specified system shall meet the following standards 1. MPEG-4: a. ISO/IEC 14496-10 Advanced Video Coding (H.264) 2. Networking: a. IEEE 802.3at (Power over Ethernet Plus) b. IEEE 802.1X (Authentication) c. IPv4 (RFC 791) d. IPv6 (RFC 2460) e. QoS – DiffServ (RFC 2475) 3. Network video a. Relevant ONVIF profile as defined by the ONVIF Organization.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 278 IFB No. 2000002197 C. General abbreviations and acronyms
1. AGC: Automatic gain control 2. API: Application Programming Interface 3. IDS – Intrusion Detection System 4. Aspect ratio: A ratio of width to height in images 5. ACS – Access Control System 6. Bit Rate: The number of bits/time system sent over a network 7. CSA – Client Software Application 8. DGM – Dynamic Graphical Maps 9. DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 10. DNS: Domain Name System 11. EIS: Electronic Image Stabilization 12. FPS: Frames per Second 13. FTP: File Transfer Protocol 14. H.264 (Video Compression Format) 15. IEEE 802.1x: Authentication framework for network devices 16. IP: Internet Protocol 17. IR light: Infrared light 18. JPEG: Joint Photographic Experts Group (image format) 19. LAN: Local Area Network 20. LED: Light Emitting Diode 21. Lux: A standard system of illumination measurement 22. MBR: Maximum Bit Rate 23. MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group 24. Multicast: Communication between a single sender and multiple receivers on a network 25. NTP: Network Time Protocol 26. NTSC: National Television System Committee – a color encoding system based on 60Hz
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 279 IFB No. 2000002197 27. ONVIF: Global standard for the interface of IP-based physical security products 28. PoE: Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af/at) standard for providing power over network cable 29. Progressive scan: An image scanning technology which scans the entire picture 30. PTZ: Pan/Tilt/Zoom 31. QoS: Quality of Service 32. SIP: Session Initiation Protocol 33. SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 34. SMPTE: Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers 35. SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol 36. SSL: Secure Sockets Layer 37. SDK – Software Development Kit 38. SMA – Software Maintenance Agreement 39. TCP: Transmission Control Protocol 40. TLS: Transport Layer Security 41. Unicast: Communication between a single sender and single receiver on a network 42. UPnP: Universal Plug and Play 43. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply 44. VBR: Variable Bit Rate 45. WDR: Wide dynamic range 46. UI – User Interface 47. ISMS – Integrated Security Monitoring and Management System 48. USW – Unified Web Client 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals described in this section shall be submitted by the Vendor with the original proposal. A. Product Data
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 280 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Submit manufacturer technical specifications, typical installation drawings, system overview drawings and sample images of items included in this section. B. Proposal Delta 1. It is the duty of the CONTRACTOR to provide a working system. Any omissions or errors or differences between this document and the CONTRACTOR’s submitted proposal shall be clearly outlined in a separate document labeled “[VENDOR NAME] Proposal Deltas”. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS L. Equipment and materials that deviate from these requirements shall not be accepted without written approval from OWNER’S ITD project manager. When deviating or substituting equipment, the following information shall be submitted: 22. Substitution request form substantiating reasons and benefits to OWNER. 23. OWNER’S approval shall be obtained for any equipment or materials substitutions. Proposed substitutions requests shall provide proof of compliance with OWNER’S criteria described in this specification. M. Submittals must comply with contract general provisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR or security sub-CONTRACTOR shall be a licensed security CONTRACTOR with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience installing and servicing systems of similar scope and complexity and evidence that is completed at least three (3) projects of similar design and is currently engaged in the installation and maintenance of systems herein described. B. All installation, configuration, setup, program and related work shall be performed by electronic technicians thoroughly trained by the manufacturer in the installation and service of the equipment provided. C. The CONTRACTOR or designated sub-CONTRACTOR shall submit credentials of completed manufacturer certification, verified by a third party organization, as proof of the knowledge. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide four (4) current references from clients with systems of similar scope and complexity that became operational in the past three (3) years. At least three (3) of the references shall be utilizing the same system components, in a similar configuration as the proposed system 1.06 WARRANTY P. CONTRACTOR shall warranty that all work executed and materials furnished shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum period of five (5) years from date of installation acceptance, excluding specific items of work that require a warranty of a greater period that may be set forth in this Specification. In the event a manufacturer’s warranty is longer than five (5) years, the manufacturer’s warranty shall be the warranty period. Immediately upon receipt of written notice
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 281 IFB No. 2000002197 from the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace at no expense to the OWNER, any defective material or work that may be discovered before final acceptance of work or within the warranty period; any material or work damaged thereby; and adjacent material or work that may be displaced in repair or replacement. Examination of, or failure to, examine work by the OWNER shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from these obligations. T. All warranty shall provide the OWNER direct access to manufacturer Technical Assistance Center (TAC), software updates, and defect support. U. Manufacturer of provided equipment shall guarantee availability of parts common to provided system and/or full replacement units, for a period not less than 5 years. Parts for the supplied systems shall be available within 30 calendar days during the 5 year period. V. Installation CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations necessary to ensure continuation of the manufacturer’s warranty. If the installation CONTRACTOR cannot install manufacturer’s equipment in such a manner, it is the responsibility of the installation CONTRACTOR to provide written, timely notification to OWNER ITD Project Management. W. OWNER monitors equipment service records and failure rates. In the event that the OWNER determines that a Integrated Security Management and Monitoring system component, or model part, provided through this specification exceeds acceptable failure rate, or repeated failure rate, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all systems of the same model purchased through this procurement with a new model that meets or exceeds the same functional requirements. Units or components exceeding either the acceptable or repeated failure rates shall be known as a “mass failure.” The CONTRACTOR shall provide qualified technicians to install the replacement systems and a project manager to coordinate replacement schedule with ITD. Replacement of mass failing systems, labor, and project management shall be provided and completed in accordance with this specification and related OWNER installation guidelines at no additional cost to the OWNER. 11. The acceptable failure rate/repeat failure rate for a single system model or individual modular model part, at a single site, or OWNER-wide, shall be: a. Equal to or less than 10% in any 12 month period during the original warranty term. b. Equal to or less than 15% cumulative failures during the entire term of the original warranty. 12. If, at any time during of the life of the products, the failure rate of the Integrated Security Management and Monitoring systems or components exceeds 20%, the CONTRACTOR shall extend the original warranty term by one year, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 13. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacement of any failed equipment provided by the CONTRACTOR, during the warranty period or the extended warranty period. This includes equipment that falls under the “mass failure” definition.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 282 IFB No. 2000002197 14. In the event of a “mass failure” the CONTRACTOR shall replace all units and/or affected components with equal or better products within 60 days or written notification from the OWNER. 15. Upon replacement of each unit or component, the replaced unit warranty shall continue as if the original equipment were still in service. X. The warranty shall cover the complete system including fan assembly, power supplies, and the device itself. Y. The warranty shall include onsite 48-hour advanced part replacement. Z. The warranty shall include all labor to service and/or replace warranted system(s). AA. In the event any Supplier or manufacturer offers additional warranty, at no additional cost, beyond that specified herein, CONTRACTOR shall state the terms of such warranty or warranties in writing and shall extend the same to the OWNER without additional cost. BB. Equipment manufacturers shall have E-mail trouble reporting and response mechanisms in place and a toll free 24-hour help center to assist with troubleshooting and operation of the equipment at no additional cost to the OWNER, or as part of the warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS a. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Integrated Security Monitoring and Management System (ISMS) shall be an enterprise class IP-enabled security and safety software solution. A. The ISMS shall be based on a true open architecture that shall allow the use of non- proprietary workstation and server hardware, non-proprietary network infrastructure and non-proprietary storage. B. The ISMS shall support the seamless unification of IP access control system (ACS), IP video management system (CCTV), and IP intrusion detection system (IDS) under a single platform. The ISMS user interface (UI) applications shall present a unified security interface for the management, configuration, monitoring, and reporting of embedded ACS, CCTV, and IDS systems and associated edge devices. C. The ISMS shall integrate legacy DVR’s using the DVR native SDK or using ONVIF industry standards to interface to the DVR: D. Functionalities available with the ISMS shall include: 1. Configuration of embedded systems, such as ACS, IDS, and CCTV systems. 2. Live event monitoring. 3. Live video monitoring and playback of archived video.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 283 IFB No. 2000002197 4. Alarm management. 5. Reporting, including creating custom report templates and incident reports. 6. The feature for global monitoring, reporting, and alarm management of multiple remote and independent ACS, IDS and/or CCTV systems spread across multiple facilities and geographic areas. 7. Microsoft Active Directory integration for synchronizing ISMS user accounts and ACS cardholder accounts. 8. Intrusion device and panel integration (live monitoring, reporting, and arming/disarming). 9. SIP Intercom device integration for bi-directional communication. 10. Integration with third party systems and databases via plug-ins (access control, video analytics, point of sale, and more). 11. Dynamic graphical map viewing. E. The ISMS shall be deployed in one or more of the following types of installations: 1. Unified access, IDS, video platform, and any combination thereof. 2. Standalone access control, IDS, or CCTV platform. F. Licensing: 1. A single central license shall be applied centrally on the configuration server. 2. There shall be no requirement to apply a license at every server computer or client workstation. G. Hardware and Software Requirements 1. The ISMS and embedded systems (video, intrusion and access control) shall be designed to run on a standard PC-based platform loaded with a Windows operating system. 2. The core client/server software shall be built in its entirety using the Microsoft .NET software framework and the C# (C-Sharp) programming language. 3. The ISMS database server(s) shall be built on Microsoft’s SQL Server. The preferred SQL version shall be coordinated with the Owner and compatible with the ISMS. 4. The ISMS shall be compatible with virtual environments, including VMware and Microsoft Hyper-V.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 284 IFB No. 2000002197 5. The ISMS shall use the latest user interface (UI) development and programming technologies such as Microsoft WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation), the XAML markup language, and .NET software framework. b. ISMS ARCHITECTURE A. The ISMS shall be based on a client/server model. The ISMS shall consist of a standard Server Software Module (ISMS) and Client Software Applications (CSA). B. The ISMS shall be an IP enabled solution. All communication between the ISMS and CSA shall be based on standard TCP/IP protocol and shall use TLS encryption with digital certificates to secure the communication channel. C. The ISMS shall be a Windows service that can be configured to start when the operating system is booted and run in the background. The ISMS shall automatically launch at computer startup, regardless of whether or not a user is logged on the machine. D. Users shall be able to deploy the ISMS on a single server or across several servers for a distributed architecture. The ISMS shall not be restricted in the number of ISMS deployed. E. The ISMS shall protect against potential database server failure and continue to run through standard off-the-shelf solutions. F. The ISMS shall support up to one thousand instances of CSA connected at the same time. However, an unrestricted number of CSA can be installed at any time. G. The ISMS shall support an unrestricted number of logs and historical transactions (events and alarms) with the maximum allowed being limited by the amount of hard disk space available. H. The ISMS shall support uninterrupted video streaming. The CSA shall keep existing video connections active in the event that an ISMS (except Archiver) becomes unavailable. c. ISMS VIDEO, INTRUSION AND ACCESS CONTROL UNIFICATION A. The Monitoring UI shall present a true Unified Security Interface for live monitoring and reporting of the ACS, IDS and CCTV. Advanced live video viewing and playback of archived video shall be available through the Monitoring UI. B. The Configuration UI shall present a true Unified Security Interface for the configuration and management of the ACS and CCTV. C. The user shall be able to associate one or more video cameras to the following entity types: areas, doors, elevators, zones, alarms, intrusion panels, and more.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 285 IFB No. 2000002197 D. It shall be possible to view video associated to access control events when viewing a report. E. It shall be possible to view video associated to intrusion panel events when viewing a report. F. The ISMS shall support the following Alarm Management functionality: 1. Create and modify user-defined alarms. An unrestricted number of user-defined alarms shall be supported. 2. Assign a time schedule or a coverage period to an alarm. An alarm shall be triggered only if it is a valid alarm for the current time period. 3. Set the priority level of an alarm and its reactivation threshold. 4. Define whether to display live or recorded video, still frames or a mix once the alarm is triggered. 5. Provide the ability to display live and recorded video within the same video tile using picture-in-picture (PiP) mode. 6. Provide the ability to group alarms by source and by type. 7. Define the time period after which the alarm is automatically acknowledged. 8. Define the recipients of an alarm. Alarm notifications shall be routed to one or more recipients. Recipients shall be assigned a priority level that prioritizes the order of reception of an alarm. 9. Define the alarm broadcast mode. Alarm notifications shall be sent using either a sequential or an all-at-once broadcast mode. 10. Define whether to display the source of the alarm, one or more entities. 11. Specify whether an incident report is mandatory during acknowledgment. G. The ISMS shall also support alarm notification to an email address or any device using the SMTP protocol. H. The ability to create alarm-related instructions shall be supported through the display of one or more HTML pages following an alarm event. The HTML pages shall be user-defined and can be interlinked. I. Alarm unpacking and packing shall be supported where all the entities associated to an alarm can be display in the Monitoring UI with the single click of a button.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 286 IFB No. 2000002197 J. The user shall have the ability to acknowledge alarms, create an incident upon alarm acknowledgement, and put an alarm to snooze. K. The user shall be able to spontaneously trigger alarms based on something he or she sees in the system. L. An alarm shall be configured in such a way that it remains visible until the source condition has been acknowledged. M. The user shall be able to investigate an alarm without acknowledging it. d. ISMS REMOTE TASK A. The ISMS shall provide, through a Remote Task, capabilities to remotely monitor and control the content of other workstations running the CSA (Monitoring UI) that are part of the same system. B. The ISMS shall support video wall applications by connecting and controlling multiple workstations and monitors simultaneously. C. The Remote Task shall be a graphical interface showing a replication of the remote workstation running the CSA (Monitoring UI). D. The Remote Task shall allow the connection to other workstations using a low bandwidth mode to receive only snapshots of video viewed remotely. E. The Remote Task shall allow the connection to other workstations using a spy mode to remain invisible to the remotely connected workstation. F. The functionality provided by the remote monitoring and control capability shall include: 1. Remote monitoring and control of the monitoring and alarm monitoring tasks. 2. Ability to remotely switch cameras, doors and zones into display tiles. 3. Ability to remotely control live and playback video. 4. Ability to remotely change the tile pattern. 5. Ability to remotely create and delete tasks. 6. Ability to remotely start/stop task cycling. 7. Ability to remotely go into full screen mode. 8. Ability to remotely save and reload the workspace. e. ISMS REPORTING A. The ISMS shall support report generation (database reporting) for access control, IDS, video, and intrusion.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 287 IFB No. 2000002197 B. Each and every report in the system shall be a ISMS task, each associated with its own privilege. A user shall have access to a specific report task if he or she has the appropriate privilege. C. The workflows to create, modify, and run a report shall be consistent for access control, IDS, and video reports. D. Reports shall be federated, allowing global consolidated reporting across multiple independent ISMS, ACS, and ISMS systems. E. Access control and IDS reports shall support cardholder pictures and license plate pictures, respectively. F. The ISMS shall support the following types of reports: 1. Alarm reports. 2. Video-specific reports (archive, bookmark, motion, and more). 3. Configuration reports (cardholders, credentials, systems, access rules, readers/inputs/outputs, and more). 4. Activity reports (cardholder, cardholder group, visitor, credential, door, system, area, zone, elevator, and more). 5. IDS-specific reports (mobile IDS playback, hits, plate reads, reads/hits per day, reads/hits per IDS zone, and more). 6. Health activity and health statistics reports. 7. Other types of reports, including visitor reports, audit trail reports, incident reports, and time and attendance reports. G. Generic Reports, Custom Reports and Report Templates 1. The user shall the option of generating generic reports from an existing list, generating reports from a list of user-defined templates, or creating a new report or report template. 2. The user shall be able to customize the predefined reports and save them as new report templates. There shall be no need for an external reporting tool to create custom reports and report templates. Customization options shall include setting filters, report lengths, and timeout period. The user shall also be able to set which columns shall be visible in a report. The sorting of reported data shall be available by clicking on the appropriate column and selecting a sort order (ascending or descending). 3. All report templates shall be created within the Monitoring UI. 4. These templates can be used to generate reports on a schedule in PDF or Excel formats.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 288 IFB No. 2000002197 5. An unrestricted number of custom reports and templates shall be supported.
H. A reporting task layout shall consist of panes with settings (report length, filters, go and reset commands, etc.), the actual report data in column format, and a pane with display tiles. The user shall be able to drag and drop individual records in a report onto one or more display tiles to view a cardholder’s picture ID, playback a video sequence, or both. I. The ISMS shall support comprehensive data filtering for most reports based on entity type, event type, event timestamp, custom fields, and more. J. The user shall be able to click on an entity within an existing report to generate additional reports from the Monitoring UI. K. The ISMS shall support the following actions on a report: print report, export report to a PDF/Microsoft Excel/CSV file, and automatically email a report based on a schedule and a list of one or more recipients. f. ISMS EVENT/ACTION MANAGEMENT A. The ISMS shall support the configuration and management of events for video and IDS. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify an action tied to an event if he has the appropriate privileges. B. The ISMS shall receive all incoming events from one or more ACS and/or IDS. The ISMS shall take the appropriate actions based on user-define event/action relationships. C. The ISMS shall receive and log the following events: 1. System-wide events. 2. Application events (clients and servers). 3. Area, camera, door, elevator, and IDS events (reads and hits). 4. Unit events. 5. Zone events. 6. Alarm events.
D. The ISMS shall allow the creation of custom events. E. The ISMS shall have the capability to execute an action in response to an access control, video, and IDS event. The ISMS shall support the following list of actions, without being limited to: 1. Add bookmark
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 289 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Email a report 3. Email a snapshot 4. Export report 5. Go to preset 6. Override recording quality 7. Play a sound 8. Run a macro 9. Run a pattern 10. Send a message 11. Send an email 12. Set threat level 13. Start/Stop applying video protection 14. Start/Stop recording 15. Start/Stop transfer 16. Trigger alarm 17. Trigger output F. The ISMS shall allow a schedule to be associated with an action. The action shall be executed only if it is an appropriate action for the current time period. g. ISMS SCHEDULES AND SCHEDULED TASKS A. Schedules 1. The ISMS shall support the configuration and management of complex schedules. A user shall be able to add, delete, or modify a schedule if he or she has the appropriate privileges 2. The ISMS shall provide full flexibility and granularity in creating a schedule. The user shall be able to define a schedule in 1-minute or 15- minute increments. 3. Daily, weekly, ordinal, and specific schedules shall be supported.
B. Scheduled Tasks 1. The ISMS shall support scheduled tasks for video, and IDS.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 290 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Scheduled tasks shall be executed on a user-defined schedule at a specific day and time. Recurring or periodic scheduled tasks shall also be supported. 3. Scheduled tasks shall support all standard actions available within the ISMS, such as sending an email or emailing a report. h. ISMS DYNAMIC GRAPHICAL MAPS (DGM) A. The ISMS shall support mapping functionality for access control, video surveillance, intrusion detection, and external applications. B. The ISMS shall provide a map centric interface with the ability to command and control all the UPS capabilities from a full screen map interface. C. It shall be possible to span the map over all screens of the ISMS client station. In the scenario where the map is spanned over all the screens of the ISMS client station it shall be possible to navigate the map including pan and zoom, and the map’s moves shall be synchronized between all screens. Spanning the map over multiple screen must provide the same command and control capabilities than in a single screen display D. The DGM shall support the following file format and protocol for importing map background: 1. PDF 2. JPG 3. PNG 4. Web Map Service (WMS) defined by the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) 5. BeNomad
E. The DGM shall provide the following online map providers for use as map background and provide the ability to manage their service license if they require one: 1. Google Map, aerial, terrain (Licensed) 2. Bing Map, aerial, satellite, hybrid (Licensed)
F. It shall be possible to configure a mixed set of maps made of GIS, online providers and private imported files and link them together G. The DGM shall provide the ability to display all native entities of the UPS including: 1. Cameras, fix, and PTZ
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 291 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Doors 3. Camera sequences 4. Areas 5. Intrusion areas 6. Intrusion zones 7. License Plate Recognition cameras 8. Digital inputs 9. Digital outputs 10. Intercoms 11. Alarms 12. Macros
13. Police Car Patrollers H. The DGM shall offer a smart selection tool to access the video simply by clicking the location the user wants to see, the DGM shall automatically select the cameras that can see this location and move the PTZ towards that location. This smart selection tool shall take into consideration the obstacle and not display cameras that cannot see the location because of a wall. I. It shall be possible to access live and playback video from the map. J. It shall be possible to monitor from the DGM all entities event notification. User shall be able to turn on and off the notification per entity. K. The DGM shall offer the ability to fully operate alarm monitoring. It shall be possible to: 1. Center the map on entities related to the alarm. 2. Visualize the Alarms notification on the map access the related video from the map. 3. Trigger and receive alarms. 4. Act on the alarm from the DGM, including acknowledgements, forwarding, and investigation. 5. Visualize that an alarm occurred in an underlying linked ma i. ISMS Incident Reports
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 292 IFB No. 2000002197 A. Incident reports shall allow the security operator to create reports on incidents that occurred during a shift. Both video-related and access control-related incident reports shall be supported. B. The operator shall be able to create standalone incident reports or incident reports tied to alarms. C. The operator shall be able to link multiple video sequences to an incident, access them in an incident report, and change the date or time of the sequences later on. D. It shall be possible to create a list of Incident categories, tag a category to an incident, and filter the search with the category as a parameter. E. Incident reports shall allow the creation of a custom form on which to input information on an incident. F. Incident reports shall allow entities, events, and alarms to be added to support at the report’s conclusions. j. ISMS Third Party Integration A. Microsoft Active Directory Integration: 1. The ISMS shall support a direct connection to one or multiple Microsoft Active Directory server via the Active Directory Role(s). Active Directory integration shall enable the synchronization of information from the Active Directory server to the ISMS. 2. Active Directory integration shall permit the central management of the ISMS users, user groups, cardholders, and cardholder groups. The ISMS shall be able to connect to and synchronize data from multiple Active Directory servers (up to 10). 3. The ISMS shall support synchronizing Active Directory Universal Groups as well as security groups belonging to other domains within the same forest. 4. The ISMS shall support Microsoft Active Directory encryption using LDAP SSL. When enabled, Active Directory shall manage user logon to the ISMS client applications through the user’s Windows credentials. Logging to the ISMS shall utilize native Active Directory password management and authentication features. 5. It shall be possible to synchronize the following ISMS entities and their information from Active Directory with the ISMS: 6. Users (username, first and last names, email address, and more). 7. User groups (user group name, description, and group email address). 8. Active Directory attributes to ISMS custom fields.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 293 IFB No. 2000002197 9. When enabled, the addition, removal, or suspension of a user’s Windows account in Active Directory shall result in the creation, deletion, or disabling of the equivalent user account in the ISMS. 10. Supported synchronization methods for additions, modification, and deletions of synchronized entities shall include: on first logon (users only), manual synchronization, and scheduled synchronization. 11. The ISMS shall support user connections across independent organizations by connecting to an external ADFS (Active Directory Federation Services) service using claims-based authentication. B. Intrusion Detection Integration 1. The ISMS shall integrate with third party intrusion panels and devices via an Intrusion DDK. The Intrusion Manager Role shall manage communications with the intrusion panels. Communications with intrusion devices shall be over serial communications and/or an IP network. 2. Integration with intrusion panels shall be possible outside the release cycle of the ISMS. It shall be possible to add new integrations at any point in time. 3. Functionality available via the integration of intrusion devices with the ISMS shall include the following (where supported by the intrusion panel): a. Arm and disarm intrusion devices (manually, on schedule, or following a ISMS event). b. Activate or trigger intrusion device outputs. c. View intrusion events and alarms. d. Monitor the status, including arming status, of the intrusion devices. e. Video verification of intrusion events and alarms with video panels. e. Create ISMS zones using intrusion device inputs. 4. Currently supported intrusion panels include: a. DSC Power Series panels. b. Bosch G Series panels. c. DMP XR Series panels. d. Honeywell Galaxy Dimension panels. C. Additional Third Party Integrations
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 294 IFB No. 2000002197 1. The ISMS shall support multiple approaches to integrating third party systems. These shall include: Software Development Kits (SDKs), Driver Development Kits (DDKs), REST-based Web Service SDKs, RTSP Service SDKs, and more. 2. The ISMS ARCHITECTure shall support the addition of new connectors to integrate to third party system integration, such as: a. Video analytics. b. Third party video systems. c. Third party access control systems. k. SECURITY REQUIREMENTS A. The ISMS shall support only secured media stream requests, unless explicitly configured otherwise. Secured media stream requests shall be secured with strong certificate based authentication leveraging SRTP and/or RTSPS (aka RTSP over TLS). Client authentication for media stream requests is claims-based and may use a limited lifetime security token. B. The ISMS shall offer the ability to encrypt the media stream, including video, audio, and metadata with authenticated encryption. Media stream encryption shall be done at rest and in transit and be a certificate based AES 128b bits encryption. The ISMS shall: 1. Allow encryption to be set on a per camera basis for all or some of the cameras. 2. Provide up to 20 different certificates for different groups of CSA or users who have been granted access to decrypted streams. 3. Not decrease the recording performance by more than 50% when encryption is enabled. 4. Use Secure RTP (SRTP) to encrypt the payload of a media stream in transit and allow multicast and unicast of the encrypted stream. 5. Use a random encryption key and change periodically. 6. Allow encrypted streams to be exported. 7. The ISMS shall support end to end encrypted streams with cameras supporting Secure RTP (SRTP) both in unicast and multicast from the camera. l. FAILOVER AND STANDBY REQUIREMENTS A. The ISMS shall support native and off-the-shelf failover options.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 295 IFB No. 2000002197 1. The Standby Server shall act as a replacement ISMS on hot standby, ready to take over as the acting server in case the primary server fails. The failover shall occur in less than 1 minute. No action from the user shall be required. 2. The Standby Server shall keep its configuration database synchronized with the primary Directory. 3. The Standby Server shall support disaster recovery scenarios where a server can be located in another geographic area (or building) and only take over if all other Directories become offline. 4. The Standby Server shall support synchronization of the configuration databases using a backup and restore mechanism. The synchronization period shall be configurable from 15 minutes to 1 week. 5. The Standby Server shall support real-time synchronization of the configuration databases using SQL Mirroring or SQL Always On. B. Off-the-shelf standby/failover options shall include: 1. Windows Clustering. 2. NEC ExpressCluster X LAN m. GENERAL CLIENT SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS A. The Client Software Application (CSA) shall provide the user interface for ISMS configuration and monitoring over any network and be accessible locally or from a remote connection. B. The CSA shall consist of the Configuration UI for system configuration and the Monitoring UI for monitoring. The CSA shall be Windows-based and provide an easy-to-use graphical user interface (UI). C. The CSA for monitoring shall support running in 64-bit mode. D. The Server Administrator shall be used to configure the server database(s). It shall be web-based and accessible locally or across the network. E. The CSA shall seamlessly merge access control, intrusion detection, and video functionalities within the same user application. F. The ISMS shall use the latest user interface (UI) development and programming technologies such as Microsoft WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation), the XAML markup language, and the .NET software framework. G. All applications shall provide an authentication mechanism, which verifies the validity of the user. As such, the administrator (who has all rights and privileges) can define specific access rights and privileges for each user in the system.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 296 IFB No. 2000002197 H. Logging on to a CSA shall be done either through locally stored ISMS user accounts and passwords or using the operators Windows credentials when Active Directory integration is enabled. I. When integrated with Microsoft’s Active Directory, the CSA shall authenticate users using their Windows credentials. J. To enhance usability and operator efficiency, the Configuration UI and Monitoring UI shall support many of the latest UI such as: 1. A customizable Home Page that includes favorite and recently used tasks. 2. Single click functionality for reporting and tracking. The Monitoring UI shall support both single-click reporting for access control, intrusion detection, and video, as well as single-click tracking of areas, cameras, doors, zones, cardholders, elevators, K. Configuration UI and Monitoring UI Home Page and Tasks 1. The Configuration UI and Monitoring UI shall be task-oriented. 2. A task shall be user interface design patterns whose goal is to simplify the user interface by grouping related features from different systems such as video and access, in the same display window. Features shall be grouped together in a task based on their shared ability to help the user perform a specific task. 3. Tasks shall be accessible via the Home Page of either the Configuration or the Surveillance CSA. 4. Newly created tasks shall be accessible via the Configuration or the Monitoring UI taskbar. 5. Similar tasks shall be grouped into the following categories: a. Operation: Access control management, LRP management, and more. b. Investigation: Video bookmark/motion/archive reports, access control activity reports, visitor activity reports, alarm reports, intrusion detection reports, and more. c. Maintenance: Access control and video configuration reports, troubleshooters, audit trails, health-related reports, and more. 6. An operator shall be able to launch a specific task only if he or she has the appropriate privileges. 7. The Home Page content shall be customizable through the use of privileges to hide tasks that an operator should not have access to and
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 297 IFB No. 2000002197 through a list of favorite and recently used tasks. In addition, editing a ISMS XML file to add new tasks on the fly shall also be possible. 8. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an unlimited number of simultaneous Clients. n. CONFIGURATION USER INTERFACE (UI) A. General 1. The Configuration UI application shall allow the administrator or users with appropriate privileges to change the system configuration. The Configuration UI shall provide decentralized configuration and administration of the ISMS system from anywhere on the IP network. 2. The configuration of all embedded ACS, CCTV, and IDS systems shall be accessible via the Configuration UI. 3. The Configuration UI shall have a home page with single-click access to various tasks. 4. The Configuration UI shall include a variety of tools such as troubleshooting utilities, import tools, and a system discover tool, amongst many more. 5. The Configuration UI shall include a static reporting interface to: a. View historical events based on entity activity. The user shall be able to perform such actions as printing a report and troubleshooting a specific access event from the reporting view. b. View audit trails that show a history of user/administrator changes to an entity. 6. Common entities such as users, schedules, alarms and many more, can be reused by all embedded systems (ACS, CCTV, and IDS). B. Video management system 1. The Configuration UI shall allow the administrator or users with appropriate privileges to change video configuration. 2. The Configuration UI shall provide the ability to change video quality, bandwidth, and frame rate parameters on a per camera (stream) basis for both live and recorded video. 3. The Configuration UI shall provide the ability to change video quality by a selection of predefined video quality template. 4. The Configuration UI shall provide the ability to configure brightness, contrast, and hue settings for each camera on the same NVR.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 298 IFB No. 2000002197 5. The Configuration UI shall provide the capability to enable audio recording on NVR systems that support audio. 6. The Configuration UI shall provide the ability to change the audio parameters, serial port and I/O configuration of individual NVR systems. 7. The Configuration UI shall provide the capability to rename all NVR systems based on system topology and to add descriptive information to each NVR. 8. The Configuration UI shall provide the ability to set recording schedules and modes for each individual camera. The recording mode can be: a. Continuous. b. On motion and Manual. c. Manual only. d. Disabled. 9. The Configuration UI shall support the creation of schedules to which any of the following functional aspects can be attached: a. Video quality (for each video stream per camera). b. Recording (for each camera). c. Motion detection (for each detection zone per camera). d. Brightness, Contrast, and Hue (for each camera) e. Camera sequence execution 10. The Configuration UI shall support the creation of unlimited recording schedules and the assigning of any camera to any schedule. 11. The Configuration UI shall detect and warn user of any conflict within assigned schedules. 12. The Configuration UI shall provide the capability to set a PTZ protocol to a specific DVR serial port and shall allow mixing domes of various manufacturers within a system. 13. User shall have the ability to configure a return to home function after a predefined time of inactivity for PTZ cameras. This period of inactivity time shall be configurable from 1 to 7200 seconds. o. MONITORING USER INTERFACE (UI)
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 299 IFB No. 2000002197 A. The Monitoring UI shall fulfill the role of a Unified Security Interface that is able to monitor video, IDS, and access control events and alarms, as well as view live and recorded video. B. The Monitoring UI shall provide a graphical user interface to control and monitor the ISMS over any IP network. It shall allow administrators and operators with appropriate privileges to monitor their unified security platform, run reports, and manage alarms.
C. To enhance usability and operator efficiency, the Monitoring UI shall support the following UI concepts: 1. Dynamically adaptive interface that adjusts in real-time to what the operator is doing. 2. A dynamic dashboard loaded with entity-specific widgets (e.g. door and camera widgets). 3. Use of transparent overlays that can display multiple types of data in a seamless fashion. 4. Display tile menus and quick commands. 5. Consolidated and consistent workflows. 6. Tile menus and quick commands easily accessible within every display tile of the user workspace. 7. Single click functionality for reporting and tracking. The Monitoring UI shall support both single-click reporting for access control, IDS, and video, as well as single-click tracking of areas, cameras, doors, zones, cardholders, elevators, IDS entities, and more. Single-click reporting or tracking shall create a new task with the selected entities to report on or to track. D. Monitoring UI Home Page and Tasks. Similar tasks shall be grouped into the following categories: 1. Operation: Access control/LRP/video surveillance, visitor management, mustering, access control and video alarm monitoring, and more. 2. Investigation: Video bookmark/motion/archive reports, access control activity reports, visitor activity reports, alarm reports, IDS activity reports, and more. 3. Maintenance: Access control and video configuration reports, troubleshooters, audit trails, and more.
E. Dynamically Adaptive UI, Dashboard, and Widgets
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 300 IFB No. 2000002197 1. The Monitoring UI shall dynamically adapt to what the operator is doing. This shall be accomplished through the concept of widgets that are grouped in the Monitoring UI dashboard. 2. Widgets shall be mini-applications or mini-groupings in the Monitoring UI dashboard that let the operator perform common tasks and provide them with fast access to information and actions. 3. With a single click on an entity (e.g. door or camera) the specific widgets associated to that entity appear and other non-relevant widgets disappear dynamically (instantly). Widgets shall bring the operator information such as door status and camera stream information, as well as user actions, such as door unlock, PTZ controls, and more. 4. Specific widgets include those for a door, camera, alarm, zone, display tile, video stream (statistics), PTZ camera, and more.
F. Operator Workflows 1. A workflow shall be a sequence of operations an operator or administrator shall execute to complete an activity. The “flow” relates to a clearly defined timeline or sequence for executing the activity. 2. The Monitoring UI shall be equipped with consistent workflows for the IDS, video, and access control systems that it unifies. 3. Generating or printing a report, setting up or acknowledging an alarm, or creating an incident report shall follow the same process (workflow) whether the operator is working with video, IDS, or access control, or with both video and access control. G. Each task within the Monitoring UI shall consist of one or more of the following items: 1. Event list. 2. Logical tree. Doors, cameras, zones, IDS systems, and elevators shall be grouped under Areas in a hierarchical fashion. 3. Entities list of all entities being tracked. 4. Display tiles with various patterns (1 x 1, 2 x 2, and more). 5. Display tile menu with various commands related to cameras, doors, PTZ, and tile controls. 6. Dashboard with widgets. H. The Monitoring UI shall support multiple event lists and display tile patterns, including:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 301 IFB No. 2000002197 1. Event/alarm list layout only 2. Display tile layout only 3. Display tile and alarm/event list combination 4. IDS map and alarm/event list combination I. User workspace customization 1. The user shall have full control over the user workspace through a variety of user-selectable customization options. Administrators shall also be able to limit what users and operators can modify in their workspace through privileges. 2. Once customized, the user shall be able to save his or her workspace. 3. application on the network. 4. Display tile patterns shall be customizable. 5. Event or alarm lists shall span anywhere from a portion of the screen up to the entire screen and shall be resizable by the user. The length of event or alarm lists shall be user-defined. Scroll bars shall enable the user to navigate through lengthy lists of events and alarms. 6. The Monitoring UI shall support multiple display tile patterns (e.g. 1 display tile (1x1 matrix), 16 tiles (8x8 matrix), and multiple additional variations). 7. The Monitoring UI shall support as many monitors as the PC video adapters and Windows Operating System are capable of accepting. 8. Additional customization options include: show/hide window panes, show/hide menus/toolbars, show/hide overlaid information on video, resize different window panes, and choice of tile display pattern on a per task basis.
J. The Monitoring UI shall provide an interface to support the following tasks and activities common to access control, IDS, and video: 1. Monitoring the events from a live security system (ACS and/or CCTV and/or IDS). 2. Generating reports, including custom reports. 3. Monitoring and acknowledging alarms. 4. Creating and editing incidents and generating incident reports. 5. Displaying dynamic graphical maps and floor plans as well as executing actions from dynamic graphical maps and floor plans.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 302 IFB No. 2000002197 6. Management and execution of hot actions and macros.
K. The Monitoring UI shall be able to monitor the activity of the following entities in real-time: areas, IDS entities, doors, elevators, cameras, cardholders, cardholder groups, zones (input points), and more. L. The Monitoring UI shall include advanced video capabilities, including: 1. Advanced live video viewing functionality. 2. Advanced archive playing and video playback functionality. 3. Monitoring and management of video system events and alarms. 4. Intercom or duplex audio. 5. Generation of video reports. 6. Control of PTZ cameras. 7. Creating and monitoring archive transfer requests. 8. Display metadata overlaid on live or playback video.
M. The Monitoring UI shall leverage the Graphical Processing Unit (GPU) for video decoding. 1. The following GPU technologies shall be supported: a. NVidia CUDA b. Intel Quick Sync 2. The Monitoring UI shall have the ability to decode video through the optimal simultaneous use of the GPU and Computer Processing Units (CPU). N. The live video viewing capabilities of the Monitoring UI shall include: 1. The ability to display all cameras assigned to the ISMS and all cameras attached to connected systems. 2. Support for live video monitoring on each and every display tile within a task in the user’s workspace. 3. The ISMS shall support uninterrupted video streaming. The system shall keep existing video connections active in the event that an primary system becomes unavailable. 4. The ability to drag and drop a camera into a display tile for live viewing.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 303 IFB No. 2000002197 5. The ability to drag and drop a camera into a display tile for live viewing on an analog monitor connected to an IP hardware decoder (converting an IP encoded stream into an analog video signal). 6. The ability to drag and drop a camera from a map into a display tile for live viewing. 7. Support for digital zoom on live camera video streams. 8. The ability for audio communication with video systems with audio input and output. 9. The ability to control pan-tilt-zoom, iris, focus, and presets. 10. The ability to bookmark important events for later retrieval on any archiving camera and to uniquely name each bookmark in order to facilitate future searches. 11. The ability to start/stop recording on any camera in the system that is configured to allow manual recording by clicking on a single button. 12. The ability to activate or de-activate viewing of all system events as they occur. 13. The ability to switch to instant replay of the video for any archiving camera with the simple click of button. 14. The ability to take snapshots of live video and be able to save or print the snapshots. 15. The ability to view the same camera multiple times in different tiles. O. The video playback (archive playing) capabilities of the Monitoring UI shall include: 1. Support for audio and video playback for any time span. 2. Support for video playback on each and every display tile. 3. The ability to instantly replay the video for any archiving camera with the simple click of a button. 4. The ability to select between instant synch of all video streams in playback mode, allowing operators to view events from multiple angles or across several camera fields, or non-synchronous playback. 5. The ability to simultaneously view the same camera in multiple tiles at different time intervals. 6. The ability to control playback with: a. Pause.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 304 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Lock Speed. c. Forward and Reverse Playback at: 1x, 2x, 4x, 6x, 8x, 10x, 20x, 40x, 100x. d. Forward and Reverse Playback frame by frame. e. Slow Forward and Reverse Playback at: 1/8x, 1/4x, 1/3x, 1/2x. f. Loop playback between two time markers. 7. The ability to display a single timeline or one timeline for each selected video stream, which would allow the operator to navigate through the video sequence by simply clicking on any point in the timeline. 8. The ability to display the level of motion at any point on a timeline. 9. The ability to clearly display bookmarked events on the timeline(s). 10. The ability to query archived video using various search criteria, including, but not limited to, time, date, camera, and area. 11. The tool necessary for searching video and associated audio based on user- defined events or motion parameters. 12. The ability to define an area of the video field in which to search for motion as well as define the amount of motion that shall trigger search results. The Monitoring UI shall then retrieve all archived video streams that contain motion that meets the search parameters. There shall be a graphical timeline on which the time of each search hit shall be indicated. 13. The ability to browse through a list of all bookmarks created on the system and select any bookmarked event for viewing. 14. The ability to add bookmarks to previously archived video for easier searching and retrieval. 15. Support for digital zoom on playback video streams. 16. Still image export to PNG, JPEG, GIF, and BMP format with Date and Time stamp, and Camera Name on the image (snapshot). 17. Tools for exporting video and a self-contained video player on various media such as USB keys or CD/DVD-ROM. This video player shall be easy to use without training and shall still support reviewing video metadata, such as bookmark, or navigating the video with functions like panoramic camera view dewarping. 18. Tools for exporting video sequences in standard video formats, such as ASF.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 305 IFB No. 2000002197 19. The ability to encrypt exported video files. 20. The ability for an operator to load previously exported video files from their computer or network. 21. The ability for queries to be saved upon closing the CSA and reappear when the application is reopened. 22. The ability to dynamically block, on demand, video stream dynamically to lower level users to prevent access, for a specific time, to live and recorded video. 23. A tool building and exporting a set of videos into a single container. This tool shall allow the operator to build sequences of video to create a storyboard and allow the export of synchronous cameras. 24. The ability to store the video export and still image export at a pre- defined storage location. 25. An interface with the ability to list, search, and manipulate previously generated video exports. 26. The ability to export sequences of video in open standards including ASF and MP4 P. The Monitoring UI shall provide an interface to support the following IDS tasks and capabilities: 1. Monitoring and management of IDS events and alarms. 2. Verification of IDS events against live and recorded video. Q. Entity Monitoring 1. The ISMS shall permit the user to select multiple entities to monitor from the Monitoring UI by adding the entities one by one to the tracking list. 2. The Monitoring UI shall provide the option to filter which events shall be displayed in the display tile layout and/or event list layout. 3. It shall be possible to lock a Monitoring UI display tile so that it only tracks the activity of a specific entity (e.g. specific door or camera). 4. The user shall be able to drag and drop an event from an event list (or an alarm from an alarm list) onto a display tile to view cardholder picture ID, badge ID, or live/archived video, among other options. 5. Event, alarm, monitoring/tracking, and report lists shall contain cardholder pictures where applicable.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 306 IFB No. 2000002197 6. The user shall be permitted to start or pause the viewing of events within each display tile. R. Display Tile Packing and Unpacking 1. The Monitoring UI shall support single-click unpacking and packing for IDS hits, IDS reads, areas, doors, zones, camera sequences, and alarms. 2. The packing and unpacking of entities shall allow operators to quickly obtain additional information and camera views of a specific entity. 3. The unpacking of an entity shall display associated entities. For example, unpacking a door with multiple associated cameras shall display all cameras associated with that door. Unpacking shall reconfigure the display tiles to be able to display all associated entities. For example, unpacking a door (or a zone or alarm) that is currently in a 1 x 1 tile configuration and that has 3 cameras tied to it shall create a 1 x 3 display tile arrangement for viewing all associated entities. 4. Packing shall return the display to the original tile pattern. S. Visual Tracking 1. The Monitoring UI shall support the ability to manually track a moving target with the single click of a button. 2. The ability to switch from one camera view to an adjacent camera shall be done within a single display tile. 3. Switching between camera streams shall be accomplished by simply clicking on a semi-transparent shape or overlay. 4. Visual tracking shall be available with both live and recorded video. p. SERVER ADMINISTRATOR USER INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS A. The Server Administrator shall be used to configure the ISMS and the Directory Role (main configuration) and its database(s), to apply the license, and more. B. The Server Administrator shall be a web-based application. Through the Server Administrator, it shall be possible to access the ISMS across the network or locally on the server. C. Access to the Server Administrator shall be protected via login name, password, and encrypted communications. D. The Server Administrator shall allow the administrator (user) to perform the following functions: 1. Manage the system license.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 307 IFB No. 2000002197 2. Configure the database(s) and database server for the Directory Role, 3. Activate/Deactivate the Directory Role. 4. Manually back up the Directory Role database(s) and/or restore the server database(s), as well as configure scheduled backups of the databases. 5. Define the client-to-server communications security settings. 6. Configure the network communications hardware, including connection addresses and ports. 7. Configure system SMTP settings (mail server and port). 8. Configure event and alarm history storage options. q. UNIFIED WEB CLIENT (UWC) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The UPS shall support a unified web client (UWC) for access control and video.
B. The UWC shall be a truly thin client with no download required other than an internet web browser or standard web browser plugins. C. The UWC shall be platform independent and run within Microsoft Internet Explorer, Firefox, Safari, and Google Chrome. D. Web pages for the web client shall be managed and pushed by the Mobile Server.Microsoft IIS or any other web hosting service shall not be required given that all the web pages shall be hosted by the Mobile Server. E. Video Stream shall be redirected to the Web Client with no stream transformation or re-encoding for all streams in H264, H265, and Mpeg4 ISO. F. The CONTRACTOR shall provide up to XX number of simultaneous Web Clients. G. Functionalities: 1. Login using name and password or Active Directory support shall be available. 2. Encrypted communications for all transactions. 3. Print reports and export to CSV file. 4. Video a. Live and playback video at 320 x 240, 640 x 480 or 1280 x 1024 @ 15 fps. b. Video export.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 308 IFB No. 2000002197 c. 1, 4, 6 or 9 tiles. d. Basic PTZ Controls (Pan/Tilt, Zoom, go to presets, start pattern). e. Start / Stop recording.
5. Alarms a. Alarm report. r. SMARTPHONE AND TABLET APP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The ISMS shall support mobile apps for various off-the-shelf smartphones and tablets. The mobile apps shall communicate with the Mobile Server of the ISMS over any WiFi or mobile network connection. B. Mobile apps shall communicate with the UPS via a Mobile Server (same as the Unified Web Client or UWC). Communication between the mobile device and the Mobile Server shall support optional encryption. C. Supported device manufacturers shall include 1. Apple iPod Touch, iPhone, and iPad 2. Android based tablets and Smartphones 3. Windows and Windows Phone 8.1. D. It shall be possible to download the mobile apps from the Central application store (Apple iTunes App Store, Google Play, Windows Store). E. Functionalities: 1. Live monitoring and command and control of the ISMS. 2. Receive alarm push notifications from the Apple Push Notification Server or from the Google Android push server. 3. Alarm management (view and acknowledge alarms, video tied to alarms). 4. View ISMS hierarchy and search for entities. 5. Stream video from the mobile device using the built-in camera. a. Video streams from mobile devices shall be available in the ISMS to be viewed in live and recorded on the Archiver. 6. Video a. View live and playback video at 320 x 240, 640 x 480 or 1280 x 1024 @ 15 fps. b. Monitor camera status.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 309 IFB No. 2000002197 c. View up to 6 video feeds. d. Control PTZ functionality of a camera, including access to PTZ presets. e. Save snapshots locally on the device. f. View video tied to access control events, and alarms. s. HEALTH MONITOR A. The ISMS shall monitor the health of the system, log health-related events, and calculate statistics. B. ISMS services, roles, agents, systems, and client apps shall trigger health events. C. The ISMS shall populate the Windows Event Log with health events related to ISMS roles, services, and client apps. D. A dedicated role, the Health Monitoring Role, shall perform the following actions: 1. Monitor the health of the entire system and log events. 2. Calculate statistics within a specified time frame (hours, days, months). 3. Calculates availability for clients, servers and video/access/IDS systems. E. A Health Monitoring task and Health History reporting task shall be available for live and historical reporting. F. A web-based, centralized health dashboard shall be available to remotely view system and role health events of the ISMS. G. Detailed system care statistics shall be available through a web-based dashboard providing health metrics of ISMS entities and roles, including Uptime and mean- time- between-failures. H. Health events shall be accessible via the SDK (can be used to create SNMP traps). t. SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT (CM) A. An operator of the ISMS shall be able to, within the ISMS Monitoring UI, initiate calls to and answer calls from other operator and edge voice devices such as intercoms, emergency call stations, information desks, softphones, or phone devices. B. The ISMS shall support CM between the ISMS client User Interface and SIP endpoint devices.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 310 IFB No. 2000002197 C. SIP endpoints shall be able to register to the UPS using a standard SIP protocol. D. The ISMS shall support CM between two SIP endpoint devices. D. The ISMS shall allow the configuration of SIP trunk connections to multiple SIP E. Servers supporting SIP Trunks. (Specifier, requires Sipelia™ Trunk license) F. The CM shall support the management of calls to and from other SIP Servers connected though SIP Trunks. G. The CM is a service of the ISMS and shall not require the addition of any third party software. H. The CM shall support the following audio compression formats: 1. PCMA (G.711 aLaw). 2. PCMU (G.711 uLaw). 3. G.722. 4. G.729. I. The CM shall certify SIP devices from the following manufacturers: 1. Axis. 2. Castel. 3. Cisco. 4. Code Blue. 5. Commend. J. The CM shall provide the flexibility for the administrator to define the network ports used to communicate between the ISMS servers and : 6. ISMS Operator Client User Interfaces. 7. SIP devices. 8. SIP servers. PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 DEPLOYMENT SERVICES AND SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. General Requirements 1. The CONTRACTOR shall engage the services of the ISMS vendor to assist in the management of the deployment of the ISMS at the end- user site on projects that involve:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 311 IFB No. 2000002197 a. Multiple CONTRACTORs or subCONTRACTORs that shall be responsible for deploying the ISMS at multiple client sites in different geographical regions. b. Complex enterprise installations involving advanced functionality (e.g. The Federation feature, failover, plugins) and/or multiple systems (e.g. access control, video, IDS) and/or third party integrations. c. Extensive use of customized solutions/plugins developed by the vendor that shall be integrated into the ISMS. 2. The ISMS vendor services shall include Deployment Management and System Configuration and Commissioning. B. Deployment Management Service: The Deployment Management service from the vendor shall include a Project Manager acting as the single point of contact for all communications between the CONTRACTOR and the vendor organization and who shall be responsible for: 1. Conducting a Risk Assessment of the impact of potential risk factors on the operation of the vendor's ISMS. 2. Providing a project plan for the deployment of the vendor's ISMS. 3. Managing the development and deployment of the custom solution components that shall be integrated into the vendor's ISMS (if applicable). 4. Providing a scope of work detailing the services to be provided by the vendor to assist in the deployment of the vendor’s ISMS. 5. Coordinating and scheduling the vendor field services with the CONTRACTOR to assist with the deployment of the vendor’s ISMS. 6. Providing regular project status updates to the CONTRACTOR regarding the development of custom solutions (if applicable) and the deployment of the vendor’s ISMS. C. System Configuration and Commissioning service from the vendor shall include a Field Engineer who shall be responsible for: 1. Assisting the CONTRACTOR’s or subCONTRACTOR’s onsite/remote technicians with the configuration and commissioning of the vendor’s ISMS at the client site. 2. Conducting a test of the ISMS following the deployment of the system using real-world operator scenarios to ensure optimal system performance.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 312 IFB No. 2000002197 3. Providing the CONTRACTOR with a Service Report detailing the tasks completed during the deployment of the ISMS at the client site, as well as any recommendations for improving the performance of the ISMS that must be implemented by the CONTRACTOR. 4. Providing a knowledge transfer of the vendor's ISMS to the CONTRACTOR following the deployment of the ISMS at the client site.
3.02 MANUFACTURER END USER OPERATOR TRAINING A. The CONTRACTOR shall engage the services of the ISMS vendor to assist in the end user training of the ISMS at the end-user site. B. Training shall be based on half-day sessions charges plus expenses. C. CONTRACTOR shall submit a training plan for OWNER’s approval 30 days after contract award.
END OF SECTION
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 313 IFB No. 2000002197 ATTACHMENT K – DATA CENTER HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS
The equipment configurations provided herein are for the District’s minimum specifications only. The District reserves the right to modify, alter and/or upgrade certain components (i.e. memory, storage, etc.) and shall be covered under the provision of this contract.
1. DASD STORAGE
A. High Performance Storage for Tier 1 a. Minimum three active redundant nodes. b. Must be capable of providing 1,000,000 IOPS c. Must be capable of providing 10GB/s of throughput d. Must have a minimum of 1 PB of usable capacity before any space savings technology (compression, deduplication, etc.) e. Must have uptime of six nines (99.9999%) or higher f. Must support multi-petabyte capacity in a single system g. Must support the following Operating Systems: RHEL compatible kernels, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, SUSE Linux, and Windows. h. Must support the following Hypervisors: Hyper-V, Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization, and VMware. i. Must have minimum 16 8Gb/s Fiber Channel ports j. Must have minimum of 8 10Gb/s Ethernet ports k. Must detect problems and provide automatic links to remote analysis and support or call home feature l. Must be able to install or remove internal drives non-disruptively m. Must have redundant power, cooling, adapters, buses, and processor complexes n. Have graphical interface for centralized management o. Must have error detection and correction capability p. Must have 5 year warranty 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum.
B. High Performance Storage for Tier 2 a. Minimum two active redundant nodes. b. Must be capable of providing 750,000 IOPS c. Must be capable of providing 6GB/s of throughput d. Must have a minimum of 500 TB of usable capacity before any space savings technology (compression, deduplication, etc.) e. Must have uptime of six nines (99.999%) or higher f. Must support the following Operating Systems: RHEL compatible kernels, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, SUSE Linux, and Windows. g. Must support the following Hypervisors: Hyper-V, Red Hat Enterprise Virtualization, and VMware. h. Must have minimum 12 8Gb/s Fiber Channel ports i. Must have minimum of 4 10Gb/s Ethernet ports
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 314 IFB No. 2000002197 j. Must detect problems and provide automatic links to remote analysis and support or call home feature k. Must be able to install or remove internal drives non-disruptively l. Must have redundant power, cooling, adapters, buses, and processor complexes m. Have graphical interface for centralized management n. Must have error detection and correction capability o. Must have 5 year 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum
2. SCALE OUT NAS STORAGE
A. Scale Out NAS Storage a. Must be able to support heavy applications such as “big data” analytics and large file environments. b. Must support a distributed file system. c. Must provide a minimum of 200TB of disk capacity d. Must be able to scale to 10 PB of storage in a single file system e. Must support concurrent multi-node access to data f. Must support multiple network protocols – NFS, CIFS/SMB g. Must integrate to Active Directory or LDAP Services h. Must have capabilities to manage quotas, SMB policy based file access, snapshots, and data replication i. Must have 2 10 GB Ethernet/node at a minimum j. Must have 5 year 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum
3. DATA CENTER SERVERS
A. Mission Critical Servers a. Minimum 4 sockets per chassis b. Scalable to 8 sockets minimum per system c. Must have 2 480GB SSD as a minimum d. Must have 6 dual port 16GB FC as a minimum e. Must have 6 dual port 10Gbe NIC including SFP as a minimum f. Must have 2 TB of memory at a minimum g. Must be able to support Oracle and MS SQL Database h. Must have redundant and hot-swap components for reliability and availability i. Must have 5 year 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum
B. Rackmount Servers – Tier 1 a. Minimum 4 sockets per system b. Must be able to support LINUX, Windows Operating System, VMware and Hyper-V c. Must have 2 240GB SSD as a minimum d. Must have 1.5TB of memory at a minimum e. Must have 2 dual port 16GB FC as a minimum Section II.D –Technical Specifications 315 IFB No. 2000002197 f. Must have 2 dual port 10Gbe NIC including SFP as a minimum g. Must have redundant and hot-swap components for reliability and availability h. Must have 5 year 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum C. Rackmount Servers – Tier 2 a. Minimum 2 sockets per system b. Must be able to support LINUX, Windows Operating System, VMware and Hyper-V c. Must have 2 240GB SSD d. Must have 384GB of memory at a minimum e. Must have 2 dual port 16GB FC as a minimum f. Must have 2 dual port 10Gbe including SFP as a minimum g. Must have redundant and hot-swap components for reliability and availability h. Must have 5 year 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum
D. Blade Servers a. Minimum 2 sockets per blade b. Must be able to support LINUX, Windows Operating System, VMware and Hyper-V c. Must have a ESXI flash boot device at minimum d. Must have 384GB of memory at a minimum e. Must have 2 dual port 20GB Converged Network Adapter f. Must have redundant and hot-swap components for reliability and availability g. Must have 5 year 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum
E. Blade Server Enclosure a. Must have redundant converged networking switches b. Must have 4 10GB uplinks at a minimum c. Must have redundant management components d. Must have redundant and hot-swap components for reliability and availability e. Must have 5 year 24x7 4 hour response time at a minimum
4. HYPER CONVERGED INFRASTRUCTURE
A. Hyperconverged Infrastructure a. Must be in the 2018 Gartner’s Leaders and Challengers Quadrant for Hyperconverged Infrastructure b. Must be able to provide a full stack of compute, virtualization, storage and networking c. Must support data deduplication and compression d. Must have Backups and Disaster Recovery capability built into the solution. e. Must be a minimum 4 node system configuration f. Must be a minimum of 2.5 TB of SSD storage per node g. Must have 2 socket, 10 core each, Intel 2.4 Xeon Gold 5115 CPU or equivalent. h. Must have 384 GB Ram Balanced Configuration per node i. Must support 10 GB Networking with 6 Ports minimum j. Must have 2 1GB Ports for management minimum.
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 316 IFB No. 2000002197 5. PALO ALTO EQUIPMENT AND TRAINING
A. Palo Alto Networks Equipment and Maintenance a. Must be a part of the NextWave Partner Program b. Must be able to provide pricing for Security Equipment, Software (including any ELA/ELO/ESA), Subscriptions, Accessories, Maintenance, Configuration, Consulting and other Miscellaneous Items. c. Must include the following products, sub-components, and licenses: PA-7000s PA-5000s Threat Prevention PAN-DB URL Filtering Global Protect Gateway Global Protect Portal WildFire Device Management License Lab Bundles BrightCloud URL Filtering
i. Must also cover additional hardware products software products, sub- components, and licenses purchased under Palo Alto j. Provide annual maintenance renewal for years 2, 3, 4, and 5 k. Provide related on-site services such as configuration
B. Palo Alto Training a. Must be a Palo Alto Authorized Education Partner, Authorized Services Provider, or Authorized Education Reseller (must provide proof) b. Provide a bid for pricing for each student. Provide pricing for each additional student and corresponding volume discount if applicable. c. Here are the following learning paths:
Firewall Course Description: Firewall 8.1 Essentials: Configuration and Management (EDU-210) Firewall 8.1: Optimizing Firewall Threat Prevention (EDU-214) Panorama 8.1: Managing Firewalls at Scale (EDU-220) Firewall 8.1: Troubleshooting (EDU-330)
Endpoint Course Description: Traps 4.2: Install, Configure, and Manage (EDU-281) Traps 4.2: Deploy and Optimize (EDU-285) Traps: Cloud Service Operations (EDU-290) Palo Alto Networks Ignite Conference
6. F5 NETWORK EQUIPMENT AND MAINTENANCE
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 317 IFB No. 2000002197 A. F5 Network Equipment and Maintenance a. Must be a part of the F5 Unity Partner Program b. Must be able to provide pricing for Security Equipment, Software (including any ELA/ELO/ESA), Subscriptions, Accessories, Maintenance, Configuration, Consulting and other Miscellaneous Items. c. Must include the following products, sub-components, and licenses: Platforms Virtual Editions iSeries Appliance VIPRION Chassis Security Access Policy Manager Advanced WAF Advanced Firewall Manager Silverline Managed Security Services Cloud Edition Big-IP Cloud Edition Availability/Performance Local Traffic Manager DNS Perpetual Licensing (GBB
d. Must cover additional hardware products, software products, sub-components, and licenses purchased under F5.
c. Must provide annual maintenance renewal for years 2,3,4, and 5.
B. F5 Training a. Must be an F5 Authorized Education Partner, Authorized Service Provider, or Authorized Education Reseller. b. Must provide bid for pricing for each student. Provide pricing for each additional student and corresponding discount if applicable. c. Here are the following Certification Paths: F5 Certified BI-IP Administrator F5 Certified Technology Specialist – LTM F5 Certified Technology Specialist – BIG-IP F5 Certified Technology Specialist – ASM F5 Certified Technology Specialist – APM
7. SOFTWARE AND SERVICES SPECIFICATIONS
A. VMware Software License, Services, Training and Annual Maintenance Renewal a. Must be a VMware Authorized Partner/Reseller
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 318 IFB No. 2000002197 b. Must include the following products, sub-components, and agents. c. Must also cover additional software products, sub-components, and agents categorized under the VMware Software Licenses including but not limited to: VMware vCenter VMware vSphere VMware vSAN VMware Site Recovery Manager VMware AppDefense VMWare NSX Platform VMWare vRealize Suite VMWare Horizon VMware Horizon Cloud VMware Workspace One VMWare VeloCloud VMware Pivotal Container Service VMware Professional Services Credits (PSO) VMWare Subscription Purchasing Program Credits d. Provide Annual Maintenance Renewal for years 2, 3, 4, and 5
B. Red Hat Linux a. Must be a Red Hat Authorized Partner/Reseller b. Must include the following products, sub-components, and agents. c. Must also cover additional software products, sub-components, and agents categorized under Red Hat for the following: • Platforms • Application Services • Cloud Computing • Storage • Application Development • Automation and management d. Provide Annual Maintenance Renewal for years 2, 3, 4, and 5
C. Varonis a. Must be a Varonis Authorized Partner/Reseller b. Must include the following products, sub-components, and agents. c. Must also cover additional software products, sub-components, and agents categorized under Varonis for the following:
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 319 IFB No. 2000002197 • Data Security Platforms • Data Classification Engine • DatAdvantage • DatAlert d. Provide Annual Maintenance Renewal for years 2, 3, 4, and 5
Section II.D –Technical Specifications 320 IFB No. 2000002197 SECTION II
E. BIDDER QUESTIONNAIRE
TO THE BIDDER: The following questionnaire is a part of the complete bid and must be submitted as such. The information provided therein will be used solely for evaluating the qualifications of the Bidder to satisfactorily perform the contractual terms and conditions set forth. This questionnaire must be filled out accurately, completely and submitted with the bid. In addition, the documentation required in #’s 3b, 4, 5, and 6 must be attached to this Questionnaire. Any error, omissions or fraudulent information may be considered as a basis for the rejection of the bid and may be grounds for the cancellation of any subsequent agreement executed as a result of the bid or bids involved.
1. BIDDER’S DISTRIBUTION FACILITY #1 – Attach listing if more than two (2) locations.
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Web Site:
2. BIDDER’S DISTRIBUTION FACILITY #2 – Attach listing if more than two (2) locations.
Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Web Site:
3. EXPERIENCE a. Number of years of experience in providing this type of equipment/service: ______years.
b. Describe past projects comparable in scope and magnitude with this IFB. In addition, you must also describe your current ability and capacity to perform and deliver the products required by this IFB (include with bid.)
Section II.E –Bidder Questionnaire 321 IFB No. 2000002197 4. REFERENCES List at least three (3) references of major clients for contracted product/service like those to be provided. Include firm’s name, location, telephone and contact person.
a. Firm’s Name:
Address:
Contact Person: Telephone:
E-Mail Address: ______
b. Firm’s Name:
Address:
Contact Person: Telephone:
E-Mail Address: ______
c. Firm’s Name:
Address:
Contact Person: Telephone:
E-Mail Address: ______
5. BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS Provide, (include with bid) sufficient information regarding your firm’s qualifications to provide for the District’s product/service needs. You may include supporting literature and attachments which the District may use to establish the responsibility and capacity of your firm to meet District requirements.
6. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET, IF APPLICABLE The Bidder must submit (include with bid) a material safety data sheet for each type of chemical used. The MSDS must be approved by the District’s Environmental Health and Safety Branch before an award may be made.
7. SUBMITTAL/PROOF OF INSURANCE Provide (include with bid) evidence of insurance in compliance with insurance requirements indicated in the General Specifications (see Section II.C, Item #9).
8. DISCLOSURE OF LITIGATION Each Bidder (and each subcontractor/joint venture included in the Bidder’s Bid) shall include a complete disclosure of any civil litigation, settlement, arbitration, or proceeding to which it is a party and which is pending or was concluded within one year from the date of this IFB. THIS REQUIREMENT IS A CONTINUING DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENT. Any such litigation, settlement, arbitration, or other proceedings commencing after submission of a Bid shall be disclosed in a written statement to the Buyer within 30 days of its occurrence. Details of settlements that are prevented from disclosure by the terms of the settlement may be annotated as such.
Section II.E –Bidder Questionnaire 322 IFB No. 2000002197 9. SUBMITTAL OF MANUFACTURING PLANT LOCATIONS In accordance with the District’s Sweat-Free Procurement Policy, Bidders must disclose the manufacturing plant locations for the items they bid. It is required whether or not the Bidder is a manufacturer. Provide (include with bid) the following information for each item bid and attach additional sheets if needed:
Line Item #(s): ______Manufacturer: ______Address: ______City, State, Country: ______Phone number: ______
Line Item #(s): ______Manufacturer: ______Address: ______City, State, Country: ______Phone number: ______
Line Item #(s): ______Manufacturer: ______Address: ______City, State, Country: ______Phone number: ______
10. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM It shall be the Bidder’s responsibility to ensure receipt of all applicable addenda to this IFB.
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK.
Section II.E –Bidder Questionnaire 323 IFB No. 2000002197 SECTION III RATE SCHEDULE SECTION
1. Bidder shall fill out the Rate Schedule, and Submit with Signature and date. 2. When filling in the Rate Schedule, the Bidder should type or print legibly. If the pricing information is illegible, that item may not be considered for an award. 3. Item(s) may be awarded either “individually”, “by manufacturer”, “as a whole”, or in any combination.
Bidder to indicate number of days needed (if awarded a contract) to start service: ______Days After Notification.
The District reserves the right not to award to a Bidder whose start-up time is thirty (30) days or longer.
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK.
Section III –Rate Schedule 324 IFB No. 2000002197 Rate Schedules for (Network and Datacenter Equipment Manufacturers and Manufacturer-Partner Products such as, APC, Tripp Lite, NVT Phybridge, Informacast)
ACTIFIO Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Actifio/Google
Weighted Item Description Minimum Disc (%) Off Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: 100% Subcategories: A. Software/License Subscription 85% % B. Actifio/Google Cloud Sotorage 15% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 325 IFB No. 2000002197 DELL EMC
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Dell/EMC Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Tier 1 Rackmount Servers 10% Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ILO) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Tier 2 Rackmount Servers 10%
Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ILO) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: % III. Category: Blade Servers and Enclosure 20%
Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ILO) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 326 IFB No. 2000002197 IV. Category: DASD Storage Tier 1 25%
Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 40% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 45% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category IV: %
V. Category: DASD Storage Tier 2 15%
Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 40% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 45% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category V: %
VI. Category: NAS Storage 15%
Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 40% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 45% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category VI: %
% SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE:
Section III –Rate Schedule 327 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Dell/EMC
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average
II. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 65% % B. Non-specified software 20% % C. Non-specified accessories 10% % D. Product Warranty 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Dell/EMC
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Critical Care Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 328 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 329 IFB No. 2000002197 HPE
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: HPE Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Mission Critical Servers 20% Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Tier 1 Rackmount Servers 10% Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ILO) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: % III. Category: Tier 2 Rackmount Servers 10%
Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ILO) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 330 IFB No. 2000002197
IV. Category: Blade Servers and Enclosure 20%
Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ILO) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category IV: %
V. Category: DASD Storage Tier 1 25%
Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 40% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 45% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category V: %
VI. Category: DASD Storage Tier 2 15%
Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 40% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 45% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category VI: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 331 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: HPE
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Portable Data Center Equipment 80% Subcategories: A. UPS Hardware 30% % B. Data Center Generator Equipment 30% % C. Data Center AC/Cooling Equipment 25% % D. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Miscellaneous Items 20% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 65% % B. Non-specified software 20% % C. Non-specified accessories 10% % D. Product Warranty 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 332 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer HPE
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Data Center Care (DCC) Maintenance and Support 50% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Portable Data Center (POD) Maintenance and 50% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category II: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 333 IFB No. 2000002197 INFINIDAT Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Infinidat Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: DASD Storage Tier 1 40% Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 40% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 45% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: % II. Category: DASD Storage Tier 2 45%
Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 40% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 45% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: % III. Category: Neutrix Cloud Storage 15%
Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 15% % B. Applicable Software Subscription (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 65% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 334 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Infinidat
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average
II. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 65% % B. Non-specified software 20% % C. Non-specified accessories 10% % D. Product Warranty 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Infinidat
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Critical Care Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 335 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 336 IFB No. 2000002197 QNAP Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Qnap
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Enterprise ZFS NAS 100% Subcategories: A. Storage Hardware 60% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, cluster, replication) 25% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Qnap Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average II. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 65% % B. Non-specified software 20% % C. Non-specified accessories 10% % D. Product Warranty 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 337 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Qnap
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Annual Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 338 IFB No. 2000002197 VARONIS Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Varonis
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: 100% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. Servers, Appliances) 10% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ELA) 60% % C. Product Warranty 20% % D. Other Items in Product Family 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Varonis
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 339 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration Services* Not To Exceed Rate per Credit PSO Credits 1-150 151-600 601-1200 1201+ * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 340 IFB No. 2000002197 VMWARE
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Vmware
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: 100% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. Servers, Appliances) 10% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ELA) 60% % C. Product Warranty 20% % D. Other Items in Product Family 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Vmware
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 341 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 342 IFB No. 2000002197
ALCATEL-LUCENT Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Alcatel Lucent Weighted Item Description Minimum Disc (%) Off Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Wired LAN Equipment 44% Subcategories: A. Wired LAN Equipment Product Family (e.g. switches, interfaces/modules) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Wireless LAN Equipment 44% Subcategories: A. Wireless LAN Equipment Product Family (e.g. Access Point, Controller, Bridges) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
III. Category: Accessories 2% Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. antennas, antenna cables, lightning arrestors, enclosures) 45% % B. Transceivers 45% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 343 IFB No. 2000002197 C. Non-specific accessories (e.g. patch cables, connectors, patch panels, etc.) 5% % D. Accessories Warranty 5% % E. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
IV. Category: 10% Subcategories: A. UPS 85% % B. UPS Management (e.g. SNMP card) 5% % C. Product Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category IV: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate
On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 344 IFB No. 2000002197 ARUBA-HP
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Aruba-HP Weighted Item Description Minimum Disc (%) Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Wired LAN Equipment 35% Subcategories: A. Wired LAN Equipment Product Family (e.g. switches, interfaces/modules) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Wireless LAN Equipment 35% Subcategories: A. Wireless LAN Equipment Product Family (e.g. Access Point, Controller, Bridges) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
III. Category: Network Management 20% Subcategories: A. Network Management Product Family (e.g. AirWave, ClearPass) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 75% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 345 IFB No. 2000002197 C. Related Hardware (e.g. servers) 10% % D. Product Warranty 10% % E. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
III. Category: Accessories 5% Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. antennas, antenna cables, lightning arrestors, enclosures) 40% % B. Transceivers 40% % C. Non-specific accessories (e.g. patch cables, connectors, patch panels, etc.) 5% % D. Accessories Warranty 5% % E. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
IV. Category: UPS 5% Subcategories: A. UPS 85% % B. UPS Management (e.g. SNMP card) 5% % C. Product Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category IV: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 346 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Aruba-HP
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Maintenance and Support (e.g. Aruba Care, license renewal) 100% 0.00% Weighted Average of Category I: 0.00%
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: 0.00%
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate
On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 347 IFB No. 2000002197 CISCO
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Cisco
Weighted Item Description Minimum Disc (%) Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Wired LAN Equipment 44% Subcategories: A. Wired LAN Equipment Product Family (e.g. switches, interfaces/modules) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Wireless LAN Equipment 44% Subcategories: A. Wireless LAN Equipment Product Family (e.g. Access Point, Controller, Bridges) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
III. Category: Accessories 2% Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. antennas, antenna cables, lightning arrestors, enclosures) 45% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 348 IFB No. 2000002197 B. Transceivers 45% % C. Accessories Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
IV. Category: UPS 10% Subcategories: A. UPS 85% % B. UPS Management (e.g. SNMP card) 5% % C. Product Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category IV: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Cisco
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Datacenter Network Equipment 75% Subcategories: A. Storage Networking 15% % B. Datacenter Networking 60% % D. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % E. Product Warranty 10% % F. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: UCS Equipment 20%
Section III –Rate Schedule 349 IFB No. 2000002197 Subcategories: A. Server Hardware 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, VM) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
III. Category: Accessories 5% Subcategories: A. Transceivers 85% % B. Accessories Warranty 10% % C. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Cisco
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Service Provider Equipment 50% Subcategories: A. Branch router (e.g. ISRs, CSRs) e.g. 2900, 3900, 4000 series 50% % B. Core Equipment Product Family (e.g. ASR, NCS, CRS) 25% % C. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % D. Product Warranty 10% % E. Other Items in Product Family 5% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 350 IFB No. 2000002197 Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Broadband Wireless Router 25% Subcategories: A. Broadband Wireless Router 70% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % A. Accessories (e.g. antennas, antenna cables, lightning arrestors, enclosures) 5% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
III. Category: Optical Networking Equipment 20% Subcategories: A. Optical Hardware (e.g. ONS) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
IV. Category: Accessories 5% Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. transceivers) 90% % B. Accessories Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category IV: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 351 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Cisco
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Maintenance and Support (e.g. Cisco SMARTNet, license renewal) 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Cisco
Weighted Item Description Minimum Disc (%) Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Security Equipment 30% Subcategories: A. Security Equipment Product Family (e.g. Firewall, VPN, ACS) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 352 IFB No. 2000002197
II. Category: Application Networking 30% Subcategories: A. Application Networking Product Family (e.g. WAVE, WAAS, ...) 50% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, Akamai connect) 35% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
III. Category: Unified Communication Equipment 30% Subcategories: A. Call Control; CUCM 40% % B. Communication Gateways 5% % C. Contact Center 10% % D. Voicemail 10% % E. Collaboration Endpoints/Related License 10% % F. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % G. Product Warranty 10% % H. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category III: % IV. Category: Network Management 5% Subcategories: A. Network Management Product Family 75% % B. Related Hardware 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 353 IFB No. 2000002197 Weighted Average of Category IV: % Manufacturer (If V. Category: Miscellaneous Items 5% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 35% % B. Non-specified software 35% % C. Non-specific accessories (e.g. patch cables, connectors, patch panels, etc.) 10% % D. Product Warranty 10% % E. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category V: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate
On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of The contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 354 IFB No. 2000002197 CRADLEPOINT
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: CradlePoint
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Broadband Wireless Router 95% Subcategories: A. Broadband Wireless Router 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Accessories 5% Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. antennas, antenna cables, lightning arrestors, enclosures) 45% % B. Transceivers 45% % C. Accessories Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 355 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer CradlePoint
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support (e.g. License renewal, support) 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer CradlePoint
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP Manufacturer (If I. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 40% % B. Non-specified software 40% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 356 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 357 IFB No. 2000002197
INFOBLOX
IP Address Management Systems: Manufacturer: INFOBLOX Date: Bidder's Company Name: Proposer:
Item Description Weighted Percentage Discount (%) Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: 50.00% Subcategories: A. 25.00% % B. 25.00% % C. 25.00% % D. 25.00% %
Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: 50.00% Subcategories: 25.00% % A. 25.00% % B. 25.00% % C. 25.00% % D. E. %
Weighted Average of Category II:
TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 358 IFB No. 2000002197 Installed Base Alcatel IPAM
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation Consultation On-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation Off-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation
Training: 1. One (1) field service technician - system problem determination and repair 2. One (1) system installer - system installation and initial setup 3. One (1) system administrator - system daily operations/administration 4. One (1) system engineer - system engineering and
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 359 IFB No. 2000002197 INFOSIM
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Infosim
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Weighted Average Percentage (%) Off MSRP I. Category: Network Monitoring Equipment 90% Subcategories: A. Network Monitoring Equipment Product Family (e.g. Stablenet, …) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 10% Applicable)
Subcategories: A. Accessories (i.e. transceivers) 90% % B. Accessories Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 360 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Infosim
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Weighted Average Percentage (%) Off MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support (e.g. Software license renewal, support) 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Infosim
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Weighted Average Percentage (%) Off MSRP I. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 40% % B. Non-specified software 40% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 361 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 362 IFB No. 2000002197
NETSCOUT-FLUKE
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Netscout-Fluke
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Weighted Average Percentage (%) Off MSRP I. Category: Network Monitoring Equipment 80% Subcategories: A. Network Monitoring Equipment Product Family (e.g. Truview, Opiview, …) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Accessories 20% Subcategories: A. Accessories (i.e. transceivers) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 363 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Netscout-Fluke
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage Weighted Average MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support (e.g. Software license renewal, support) 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Netscout-Fluke
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage Weighted Average MSRP I. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 40% % B. Non-specified software 40% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 364 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Netscout-Fluke
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 365 IFB No. 2000002197 PALO-ALTO
PaloAlto Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Networks
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Security Equipment 80% Subcategories: A. Security Equipment Product Family (e.g. Firewall, VPN, …) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Accessories 20% Subcategories: A. Accessories (i.e. transceivers) 90% % B. Accessories Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 366 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer PaloAlto Networks
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support (e.g. Software license renewal, support) 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer PaloAlto Networks
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 40% % B. Non-specified software 40% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 367 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 368 IFB No. 2000002197 RED HAT
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Red Hat
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: 100% Subcategories:
A. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ELA) 60% % B. Product Warranty 30% % C. Other Items in Product Family 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Red Hat
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 369 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 370 IFB No. 2000002197 F5
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: F5
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: 100% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. Servers, Appliances) 10% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing, ELA) 60% % C. Product Warranty 20% % D. Other Items in Product Family 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer F5
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 371 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 372 IFB No. 2000002197
RATE SCHEDULES FOR (PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS AND PARTNER PRODUCTS)
ATLASED
IP Enabled Public Address-Intercom Systems Parts: Manufacturer: AtlasED Date: Bidder's Company Name: Proposer:
Item Description Weighted Percentage Discount (%) Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Centralized Emergency Notification 5.00% Subcategories: A. IP Centralized Emergency Notification Server (for 100 sites; scalable up to 1,000 sites) 25.00% % B. Additional license (increment of 100 sites) 5.00% % C. Gateways for centralized management of non- Valcom PA-Intercom systems 50.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to Centralized Emergency Notification Services 20.00% %
Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: School PA-Intercom System 95.00% Subcategories: A. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (100 endpoints) 5.00% % B. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (250 endpoints) 5.00% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 373 IFB No. 2000002197 C. Additional IP PA-Intercom License (increment of 100 endpoints) 5.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to full IP PA-Intercom equipment and license (e.g. IP speakers, horns, SIP components) 30.00% % E. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP retrofit equipment and license (e.g. IP/Analog gateways, ) 35.00% % F. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP clocks (e.g. clocks, combined clock/speaker) 5.00% % G. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to call buttons 5.00% % H. Items in manufacturer product catalog reated to amplification 5.00% % I. Other items in manufacturer product catalog related to the overall PA-Intercom system (e.g. analog, retrofit, full IP) 5.00% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: % Installed Base · AtlasED · Rauland · Valcom · Bogen
Section III –Rate Schedule 374 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: % `
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation Consultation On-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation Off-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation
Training: 1. One (1) field service technician - system problem determination and repair 2. One (1) system installer - system installation and initial setup 3. One (1) system administrator - system daily operations/administration 4. One (1) system engineer - system engineering and * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 375 IFB No. 2000002197 BOGEN
IP Enabled Public Address-Intercom Systems Parts: Manufacturer: Bogen Date: Bidder's Company Name: Proposer:
Item Description Weighted Percentage Discount (%) Off Weighted MSRP Average I. Category: Centralized Emergency Notification 5.00% Subcategories: A. IP Centralized Emergency Notification Server (for 100 sites; scalable up to 1,000 sites) 25.00% % B. Additional license (increment of 100 sites) 5.00% % C. Gateways for centralized management of non-Valcom PA-Intercom systems 50.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to Centralized Emergency Notification Services 20.00% %
Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: School PA-Intercom System 95.00% Subcategories: A. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (100 endpoints) 5.00% % B. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (250 endpoints) 5.00% % C. Additional IP PA-Intercom License (increment of 100 endpoints) 5.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to full IP PA-Intercom equipment and license (e.g. IP speakers, horns, SIP components) 30.00% % E. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP retrofit equipment and license (e.g. IP/Analog gateways, ) 35.00% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 376 IFB No. 2000002197 F. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP clocks (e.g. clocks, combined clock/speaker) 5.00% % G. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to call buttons 5.00% % H. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to amplification 5.00% % I. Other items in manufacturer product catalog related to the overall PA-Intercom system (e.g. analog, retrofit, full IP) 5.00% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: % Installed Base · AtlasED · Rauland · Valcom · Bogen
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Bogen
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 377 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation Consultation On-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation Off-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation
Training: 1. One (1) field service technician - system problem determination and repair 2. One (1) system installer - system installation and initial setup 3. One (1) system administrator - system daily operations/administration 4. One (1) system engineer - system engineering and
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 378 IFB No. 2000002197
RAULAND
IP Enabled Public Address-Intercom Systems Parts: Manufacturer: Rauland Date: Bidder's Company Name: Proposer: Weighted Item Description Discount (%) Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Centralized Emergency Notification 5.00% Subcategories: A. IP Centralized Emergency Notification Server (for 100 sites; scalable up to 1,000 sites) 25.00% % B. Additional license (increment of 100 sites) 5.00% % C. Gateways for centralized management of non-Valcom PA- Intercom systems 50.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to Centralized Emergency Notification Services 20.00% %
Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: School PA-Intercom System 95.00% Subcategories: A. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (100 endpoints) 5.00% % B. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (250 endpoints) 5.00% % C. Additional IP PA-Intercom License (increment of 100 endpoints) 5.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to full IP PA- Intercom equipment and license (e.g. IP speakers, horns, SIP components) 30.00% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 379 IFB No. 2000002197 E. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP retrofit equipment and license (e.g. IP/Analog gateways, ) 35.00% % F. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP clocks (e.g. clocks, combined clock/speaker) 5.00% % G. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to call buttons 5.00% % H. Items in manufacturer product catalog reated to amplification 5.00% % I. Other items in manufacturer product catalog related to the overall PA-Intercom system (e.g. analog, retrofit, full IP) 5.00% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: % Installed Base · AtlasED · Rauland · Valcom · Bogen
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Rauland Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 380 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation Consultation On-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation Off-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation
Training: 1. One (1) field service technician - system problem determination and repair 2. One (1) system installer - system installation and initial setup 3. One (1) system administrator - system daily operations/administration 4. One (1) system engineer - system engineering and
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 381 IFB No. 2000002197 VALCOM
IP Enabled Public Address-Intercom Systems Parts: Manufacturer: Valcolm Date: Bidder's Company Name: Proposer: Weighted Item Description Discount (%) Off Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Centralized Emergency Notification 5.00% Subcategories: A. IP Centralized Emergency Notification Server (for 100 sites; scalable up to 1,000 sites) 25.00% % B. Additional license (increment of 100 sites) 5.00% % C. Gateways for centralized management of non-Valcom PA-Intercom systems 50.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to Centralized Emergency Notification Services 20.00% %
Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: School PA-Intercom System 95.00% Subcategories: A. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (100 endpoints) 5.00% % B. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (250 endpoints) 5.00% % C. Additional IP PA-Intercom License (increment of 100 endpoints) 5.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to full IP PA-Intercom equipment and license (e.g. IP speakers, horns, SIP components) 30.00% % E. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP retrofit equipment and license (e.g. IP/Analog gateways, ) 35.00% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 382 IFB No. 2000002197 F. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP clocks (e.g. clocks, combined clock/speaker) 5.00% % G. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to call buttons 5.00% % H. Items in manufacturer product catalog reated to amplification 5.00% % I. Other items in manufacturer product catalog related to the overall PA- Intercom system (e.g. analog, retrofit, full IP) 5.00% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: % Installed Base · AtlasED · Rauland · Valcom · Bogen
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Valcom
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: 0.00%
Section III –Rate Schedule 383 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation Consultation On-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation Off-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation
Training: 1. One (1) field service technician - system problem determination and repair 2. One (1) system installer - system installation and initial setup 3. One (1) system administrator - system daily operations/administration 4. One (1) system engineer - system engineering and
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 384 IFB No. 2000002197 ZENITEL
IP Enabled Public Address-Intercom Systems Parts: Manufacturer: Zenitel Date: Bidder's Company Name: Proposer: Discount Weighted Item Description (%) Off Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: Centralized Emergency Notification 5.00% Subcategories: A. IP Centralized Emergency Notification Server (for 100 sites; scalable up to 1,000 sites) 25.00% % B. Additional license (increment of 100 sites) 5.00% % C. Gateways for centralized management of non-Valcom PA-Intercom systems 50.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to Centralized Emergency Notification Services 20.00% %
Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: School PA-Intercom System 95.00% Subcategories: A. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (100 endpoints) 5.00% % B. IP PA-Intercom Application Server (250 endpoints) 5.00% % C. Additional IP PA-Intercom License (increment of 100 endpoints) 5.00% % D. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to full IP PA-Intercom equipment and license (e.g. IP speakers, horns, SIP components) 30.00% % E. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP retrofit equipment and license (e.g. IP/Analog gateways, ) 35.00% % F. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to IP clocks (e.g. clocks, combined clock/speaker) 5.00% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 385 IFB No. 2000002197 G. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to call buttons 5.00% % H. Items in manufacturer product catalog related to amplification 5.00% % I. Other items in manufacturer product catalog related to the overall PA- Intercom system (e.g. analog, retrofit, full IP) 5.00% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: % Installed Base · AtlasED · Rauland · Valcom · Bogen
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer Zenitel
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 386 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation Consultation On-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation Off-Site Equipment Configuration Consultation
Training: 1. One (1) field service technician - system problem determination and repair 2. One (1) system installer - system installation and initial setup 3. One (1) system administrator - system daily operations/administration 4. One (1) system engineer - system engineering and
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 387 IFB No. 2000002197 RATE SCHEDULES FOR INTEGRATED ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS AND PARTNER PRODUCTS
ACS (AiPHONE)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If I. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, housing cases, power supplies, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 388 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 389 IFB No. 2000002197 ACS (2N)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage (%) Off MSRP Average I. Category: ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If I. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, housing cases, power supplies, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 390 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate
On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 391 IFB No. 2000002197 ACS (AMAG)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: AMAG
Weighted Minimum Disc Weighted Item Description Percentage (%) Off MSRP Average I. Category: ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If I. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, housing cases, power supplies, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 392 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 393 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV-AXIS
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Axis
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Percentage (%) Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer I. Category: Accessories 20% (If Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, housing cases, power supplies, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 394 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer AXIS
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 395 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV - BOLIDE
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: BOLIDE
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Percentage (%) Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer I. Category: Accessories 20% (If Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, housing cases, power supplies, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 396 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer BOLIDE
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 397 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV – HIKVISION (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: HIKVISION
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If III. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, camera housing, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 398 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer HIKVISION
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Average Percentage Off MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 399 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV-HIKVISION (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: HIKVISION
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If III. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, camera housing, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 400 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer HIKVISION
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However, it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 401 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV-LOUROE (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Louroe
Minimum Disc (%) Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage Off MSRP Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, housing cases, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 402 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However, it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 403 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV-LOUROE (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Weighted Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. mounting brackets, housing cases, etc.) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 404 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However, it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 405 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV – PANASONIC (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc (%) Off Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 406 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 407 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV-PANASONIC (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 408 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 409 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV-PELCO (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 410 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Pelco
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 411 IFB No. 2000002197 CCTV – PELCO (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 412 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Pelco
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 413 IFB No. 2000002197 IDS – DMP
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Weighted Item Description Disc (%) Off Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 45% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 45% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 414 IFB No. 2000002197
Manufacturer III. Category: Accessories 10% (If Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 415 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 416 IFB No. 2000002197
IDS – DSC (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 45% % B. Batteries, Transformers, Cables 45% % B. Accessories Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 417 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 418 IFB No. 2000002197
IDS – DSC (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc Weighted Item Description Weighted Percentage (%) Off MSRP Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 45% % B. Batteries, Transformers, Cables 45% % B. Accessories Warranty 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 419 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 420 IFB No. 2000002197 IDS – NAPCO (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: NAPCO
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Weighted Item Description Percentage Off MSRP Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 421 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer NAPCO
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: NAPCO
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 422 IFB No. 2000002197
IDS – NAPCO (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: NAPCO
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Item Description Percentage Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 423 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer NAPCO
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: NAPCO
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 424 IFB No. 2000002197 IDS – TAKEX (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Percentage (%) Off MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 425 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% 0.00% Weighted Average of Category I: 0.00%
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: 0.00%
Bidder's Name: Takex
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 426 IFB No. 2000002197 IDS – TAKEX (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 80% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
Manufacturer (If II. Category: Accessories 20% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 427 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Takex
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 428 IFB No. 2000002197 IESS - BOSCH
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Weighted Minimum Disc Weighted Item Description Percentage (%) Off MSRP Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 45% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: % II. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 45% A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: % Manufacturer III. Category: Accessories 10% (If Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 429 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 430 IFB No. 2000002197 IESS - GENETEC
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Genetec
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage Weighted Average MSRP I. Category: Network Monitoring Equipment 100% Subcategories: A. Federation Monitoring Product Family (Omnicast, Synergyis, Autovu, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: Accessories 0% Subcategories: A. Accessories (i.e. transceivers) 0% % B. Accessories Warranty 0% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 431 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer IESS Monitoring
Weighted Minimum Disc Item Description Weighted Average Percentage (%) Off MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support (e.g. Software license renewal, support) 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer IESS Monitoring
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Miscellaneous Items 100% Subcategories: A. Non-specified hardware 40% % B. Non-specified software 40% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Advanced/Professional Services 10% % Weighted Average of Category I: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 432 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: IESS Monitoring
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 433 IFB No. 2000002197 IESS - GENERAL EQUIPMENT
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: INTRUSION DETECTION/ACCESS CONTROL 45% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. control panels, sensors, card sensors, speaker/microphones, batteries, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Category: VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 45% Subcategories: A. Equipment Product Family (e.g. cameras, video transcoders, recorders, viewing stations/displays, etc.) 75% % B. Applicable Management and Monitoring Software (e.g. licensing) 10% % C. Product Warranty 10% % D. Other Items in Product Family 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 434 IFB No. 2000002197
Manufacturer (If III. Category: Accessories 10% Applicable) Subcategories: A. Accessories (e.g. testing tools) 80% % B. Accessories Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category III: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer:
Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Percentage Weighted Average MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and Support 100% Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 100% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 435 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level
* The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 436 IFB No. 2000002197
RATE SCHEDULES (TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS AND PARTNER PRODUCTS)
AVAYA (NEW EQUIPMENT)
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer: Weighted Item Description Minimum Disc (%) Off Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Processor (Main Components) 25% Subcategories: A. Processors (G3Si, ProLogix, etc.) 65% % B. Tone Clock 10% % C. TDM/LAN Bus Terminator 10% % D. Power Supply 10% % E. Fans & Assemblies 5% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
II. Media Servers & Media Gateways 25% II. Sensors Subcategories: A. S8100, S8400, S8510, S8700, S8800 45% % B. G250, G350, G450, G650 40% % C. Power Supplies 10% % D. C-LAN Card 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
Section III –Rate Schedule 437 IFB No. 2000002197
III. Circuit Packs 10% Subcategories: A. Analog (line & station) 15% % B. Digital (line & station) 20% % C. IP (station) 25% % D. DS1 (PRI) 25% % E. Auxiliary 5% % F. VAL Board 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: % IV. Telephones 5% Subcategories: A. 2400 Series (provide list) 45% % B. 9600 Series (provide list) 20% % C. 2500 Series (provide list) 15% % D. 6400 Series (provide list) 10% % E. 8400 Series (provide list) 10% % Weighted Average of Category III: % IV. Category: Wire and Cable 5% Subcategories: A. 25 pair price per foot (Copper) 70% % B. Related Hardware (Jacks, Faceplates) 15% % C. Other Items in Product Family 15% % Weighted Average of Category IV: % TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: % New Parts All new parts must include a one (1) year warranty.
Section III –Rate Schedule 438 IFB No. 2000002197 Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 80% % B. Product Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category I: % SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name:
Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 439 IFB No. 2000002197 AVAYA (REFURBISHED EQUIPMENT)
Minimum Weighted Item Description Disc (%) Off Percentage MSRP Weighted Average I. Category: Processor (Main Components) REFURBISHED PARTS 8% Subcategories: A. Processors (G3Si, ProLogix, etc.) 65% % B. Tone Clock 10% % C. TDM/LAN Bus Terminator 10% % D. Power Supply 10% % E. Fans & Assemblies 5% Weighted Average of Category I: %
III. Circuit Packs 7% Subcategories: A. S8100, S8400, S8510, S8700, S8800 45% % B. G250, G350, G450, G650 40% % C. Power Supplies 10% % D. C-LAN Card 5% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
III. Circuit Packs 10% Subcategories: A. Analog (line & station) 15% % B. Digital (line & station) 20% % C. IP (station) 25% % D. DS1 (PRI) 25% %
Section III –Rate Schedule 440 IFB No. 2000002197 E. Auxiliary 5% % F. VAL Board 10% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
IV. Telephones 3% Subcategories: A. 2400 Series (provide list) 45% % B. 9600 Series (provide list) 20% % C. 2500 Series (provide list) 15% % D. 6400 Series (provide list) 10% % E. 8400 Series (provide list) 10% % Weighted Average of Category II: %
IV. Category: Wire and Cable 2% Subcategories: A. 25 pair price per foot (Copper) 70% % B. Related Hardware (Jacks, Faceplates) 15% % C. Other Items in Product Family 15% % Weighted Average of Category IV: %
TOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Refurbished Parts Installed Models All refurbished parts must include a one (1) year warranty. G3R, G3S & G3Si ProLogix Installed Base S8300, S8400, S8510, S8700, S8800
· Avaya G250, G350,G600, G650,. G700
Section III –Rate Schedule 441 IFB No. 2000002197
Bidder's Name: Manufacturer
Weighted Minimum Disc (%) Off Item Description Weighted Average Percentage MSRP I. Category: Basic Maintenance and 100% Support Subcategories: A. Annual Maintenance and Support 80% % B. Product Warranty 20% % Weighted Average of Category I: %
SUBTOTAL WEIGHTED AVERAGE: %
Bidder's Name: Services* Not To Exceed Hourly Rate On-Site Equipment Installation On-Site Equipment Configuration Off-Site Equipment Configuration
Training: Engineering/Professional Level Field Support Level Helpdesk Level * The listed hourly rates shall be made available to the District throughout the duration of the contract. However it will not be part of the basis of award.
Section III –Rate Schedule 442 IFB No. 2000002197 SECTION IV
A. GENERAL BID CONDITIONS
1. AWARD OF CONTRACT If an award is made pursuant to the bidding process, the Contract will be awarded according to the authority granted by the Board of Education of the Los Angeles Unified School District under California law (e.g., the Public Contract Code, Education Code, and Government Code). Ordinarily, contracts are awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder. However, certain statutes, (e.g., Education Code Sections 39645 and 39802) authorize award for certain contracts to other than the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, at the discretion of the Board of Education. The Board of Education reserves the right to award in accordance with the fullest authority granted it under State law.
Moreover, certain contracts are designed to be awarded to the lowest or best bidder on specific items or parts. In such situations, this intention is delineated in the bidding documents. Bidders are cautioned and urged to pay specific attention to all terms and conditions in the bidding documents pertaining to such awards.
Bidders should retain a copy of their bid and all bidding documents. In the event of an award, the bid and all bidding documents will become the Contract Agreement. The only other document provided to the successful bidder will be a letter regarding the Notice of Acceptance of Bid and Award of Contract.
ORDERING PROCEDURES - The Contractor shall receive and accept any orders placed using either District approved purchase orders or by use of the P-Card or B- Card. All items/services specified in this contract will be ordered by issuance of individual purchase orders or P-Card/ B-Card transactions throughout the life of this agreement. The Contractor shall not deliver any product to any District location without the prior issuance of an official “District Purchase Order” or “P-Card Transaction” or “B-Card Transaction.” Please see Section II. C. 1 Delivery Requirements.
2. FORCE MAJEURE The parties to the Contract will be excused from performance during the time and to the extent that they are prevented from obtaining, delivering or performing by “Act of God”, fire, strike, loss or shortage of transportation facilities, lockout, or commandeering of materials, products, plants or facilities by the government, when satisfactory evidence thereof is presented to the other party. Provided that it is satisfactorily established that the non-performance is not due to the fault or negligence of the party not performing.
Upon issuance of an award, the Contractor shall as part of subject Contract, establish lines of communication which shall require the Contractor and/or principal subcontractor to issue notices of strikes or other work stoppages within 24 hours of the occurrence of such events. Failure of the Contractor to notify the District timely shall entitle the District to pursue such remedies as are available under the provisions of the Contract.
The Contractor will be granted an extension of time for any portion of a delay in completion of the Work caused by acts of a public enemy, wars, civil disturbances, fires, floods, Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 443 IFB No. 2000002197 2. FORCE MAJEURE-continued earthquakes, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, freight embargoes, strikes, weather more severe than normal, any other cause not in the reasonable control of the Contractor or acts of God, providing that the: a. Aforesaid causes were not foreseeable and did not result from the fault or negligence of the Contractor;
b. Contractor has taken reasonable precautions to prevent further delays owing to such causes; and
c. Contractor notifies the District in writing of the cause(s) for the delay within five (5) days from the beginning of any such delay.
3. PUBLIC RECORDS ACT Responses to this IFB shall be subject to the provisions of the California Public Records Act.
Those elements in each Bid which are trade secrets as that term is defined in Civil Code section 3426.1(d) or otherwise exempt by law from disclosure and which are prominently marked as "TRADE SECRET", "CONFIDENTIAL", or "PROPRIETARY" may not be subject to disclosure. However, it is incumbent on the Bidder to assert any rights to confidentiality and to seek and obtain a court order prohibiting the release of such information. Under no circumstances, will the District be responsible or liable to the Bidder or any other party for the disclosure of any such labeled information, whether the disclosure is required by law or a court order or occurs through inadvertence, mistake, or negligence on the part of the District or its officers, employees, and/or Contractors.
The Bidder, at its sole expense and risk, shall be responsible for prosecuting or defending any action concerning the information contained in the Bidder’s bid and shall hold the District harmless from all costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees, in connection with such action.
4. DISTRICT RIGHTS The District may investigate the qualifications of any bidder/proposer under consideration, require confirmation of information furnished by a bidder/proposer, and require additional evidence of qualifications to perform the services described in the IFB. The District reserves the right to:
a. Reject any and all bids. b. Issue subsequent IFB solicitations. c. Cancel the entire IFB. d. Remedy technical errors in the IFB process. e. Appoint evaluation committees to evaluate bids. f. Seek the assistance of outside technical experts in bid evaluation. g. Approve or disapprove the use of particular subcontractors h. Award a contract to one or more bidders.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 444 IFB No. 2000002197 5. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Before submitting a Bid, the Bidder shall become thoroughly familiarized with all bid and contract documents, and any addenda issued prior to the bid submission date. Such addenda shall form a part of the bid and shall be made a part of the Contract Documents. It shall be the Bidder’s responsibility to ascertain that their bid acknowledges all addenda issued prior to the bid submission date.
6. EXAMINATION OF ACTUAL CONDITIONS The Bidder should be satisfied by personal examination and by such other means as it may prefer as to the actual conditions and requirements under which the service must be performed/products provided. If upon inspection and examination by the Bidder that there are any existing conditions or requirements of the service which are not completely understood by the bidder, contact Contract Administration at the telephone number listed on the cover letter to request clarification.
Any prospective bidder wishing to visit District locations in connection with requirements of this bid must schedule such visits in advance with the Site Administrator. Please visit www.lausd.net for District locations and contact information.
7. ACCEPTANCE, REJECTION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID Bids submitted hereunder shall remain open, valid and subject to acceptance for a period of one hundred-twenty (120) days after the Bid Opening Date. Upon mutual agreement by the District and the Bidder, the one hundred-twenty (120) day period may be extended by an additional amount of time as mutually agreed upon. The District reserves the right to reject any and all bids.
The Bidder may withdraw its Bid at any time before the Bid Closing Date and Time. Such withdrawal shall not prevent Bidder from competing for future District requirements.
The successful Bidder will be notified by the District of an award of contract through the issuance of a “Notice of Acceptance of Bid and Award of Contract”. No other contract documents shall be issued. The Bidder’s signed bid as submitted and accepted by the District shall constitute the Agreement (subject to conditions set forth in the “Notice of Acceptance of Bid and Award of Contract”).
8. INSPECTION OF BIDDER’S FACILITY As part of the District’s evaluation process, the District reserves the right to inspect the facilities of the Bidder prior to award of the Contract. If representative(s) of the District determine after such inspection that the Bidder may not be capable of providing proper and satisfactory service/product to the District, the Bidder may not be considered for an award. Additionally, the District reserves the right to inspect the Contractor’s facility during the contract period at any time during normal business hours upon prior notice. Bidder may also be required to show evidence of its ability to furnish standard material from identified manufacturer(s). If a bidder(s) is located out of town/state and/or products bid are manufactured out of town/state, the Bidder shall bear the transportation (both air and land) costs and accommodations of not more than three (3) District representatives, if an inspection of the facility is necessary, as determined by the District. NOTE: Should an approved facility be vacated by the Contractor, a re-inspection will be required under the same conditions for the new facility.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 445 IFB No. 2000002197 9. BIDDER’S PAST PERFORMANCE A Bidder may be ruled “non-responsible” based upon Bidder’s unacceptable past performance which may include but not limited to: late/non-deliveries, partial deliveries, delivery of wrong materials, products not meeting specification, providing incorrect prices, invoicing problems, default, etc.
10. BIDDER’S INFORMATION WITH BID A completed “Bidder Questionnaire” shall be submitted as part of the bid package. The information provided therein will be used solely for evaluating the qualifications of the Bidder and their organization to carry out satisfactorily the terms of a contract.
The questionnaire must be filled out accurately, completely and submitted with the bid. Any errors, omissions, or fraudulent information may be considered as a basis for the rejection of the bid and may be grounds for the cancellation of any subsequent agreement executed as a result of the bid or bids involved.
The information contained in the questionnaire will be considered confidential and made available only to employees of the Los Angeles Unified School District or Members of the Board of Education. Bidders desiring additional information concerning the questionnaire or any of the other documents comprising the Bid or Contract Specifications may contact the District representative indicated on the Cover Page.
The District reserves the right to evaluate the information provided on the questionnaire prior to award of any Contract(s) and if representatives of the District determine after such evaluation that the Bidder is not capable of proper and satisfactory performance (service) to the District, its Bid will not be considered further.
11. APPROVED BRAND(S) Brands that have been previously approved by the District may be included in the Bid Specification Section as “Brands apparently conforming to specifications.” Brands previously approved may not need any further evaluation. Bidder may bid on these brands provided that there have been no changes made in any way subsequent to the District’s approval; including but not limited to: a. Manufacturer make/model b. Manufacturer/Distributor model (part) number c. Material and/or Quality d. Design construction
Note: Sample(s) and/or specification sheets of the product may still be required for previously approved product brands that meet the above criteria upon District request. 12. BRAND(S) NOT PREVIOUSLY APPROVED Bidder may bid on any alternate “equal” brand(s) that have not been previously approved by the District. If such items are bid, the Bidder must submit samples as indicated in this bid. However, an evaluation and testing period may be required to qualify any newly bid brand(s). The District reserves the right to exclude any brand(s) not previously approved by the District for bid award consideration if the evaluation and testing period required to qualify the newly bid brand(s) exceed ten (10) working days after receipt of samples from the Bidder. In such case, the evaluated brand(s) may not be accepted for this bid, but if
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 446 IFB No. 2000002197 12. BRAND(S) NOT PREVIOUSLY APPROVED deemed as an acceptable “equal” product brand, will be added to the District’s qualified products list for future consideration.
13. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT Complete technical specifications and a copy of the product label must be submitted for each line item bid in a tabbed 8 ½ x 11 inch binder. Each tab shall be identified by the bid line item number and commodity code. Bidder not providing the submittal of information/samples as directed may be deemed “non-responsive”.
14. SAMPLE REQUIREMENT a. SAMPLES ARE REQUIRED ONLY UPON REQUEST BY THE DISTRICT
(1) Samples must be furnished within seven (7) working days upon request by the District Representative. Bidder not providing samples may be deemed “non- responsive”.
(2) Samples may be required even though the Bidder has provided these items to the District in the past.
b. IDENTIFICATION OF SAMPLES Each sample must be labeled/tagged and identified as follows:
Bidder’s name, bid number, item brand and product code number, bid item number and District’s commodity code (stock number)
c. SAMPLES SHALL BE RETAINED Sample(s) from the successful Bidder will be retained by the District for comparison with goods delivered over the life of the contract. Any item shipped that is not equal to the “accepted sample”, will be rejected, and must be replaced at the Contractor’s expense within seven (7) working days.
d. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (M.S.D.S.) Must be submitted with samples, if required, and with all future deliveries.
e. RETURN OF SAMPLE(S) If Bidder is not awarded a Contract, do the sample(s) need to be returned? Check below.
Yes No
NOTE: Failure to submit a sample(s) and/or Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) may be cause to deem the bid “non-responsive”.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 447 IFB No. 2000002197 15. DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION CERTIFICATION Effective November 26, 2003, the Department of Education implemented 34 CRF Part 85 that applies to any procurement or subcontract expected to be worth $25,000 or more funded or authorized under Department of Education programs. To be eligible for an award under this bid, the Bidder must certify compliance by signing on Page 26 of Section II B – Specific Bid Conditions/Certifications. (See: Section II B, Item #11, “Certification Regarding Debarment”). B GENERAL CONTRACT CONDITIONS
1. AUTHORITY OF THE CHIEF PROCUREMENT OFFICER The District has the final approval in all matters relating to or affecting the Work. Except as expressly specified in the Contract, the Chief Procurement Officer may exercise any powers, rights, and/or privileges that have been lawfully delegated by the District. Nothing in the Contract shall be construed to bind the District for acts of its employees and Authorized Representatives that exceed the delegation of District specified herein.
2. DISTRICT’S TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE (PROJECT MANAGER) The District shall provide a Project Manager and/or a technical representative for all technical aspects related to the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall make such oral or written reports to the District's technical representative with an information copy to the District's designated procurement officer as may be requested by the District or as specifically required by the Contract. ALL CONTRACTUAL MATTERS SHALL BE ADDRESSED TO THE DESIGNATED PROCUREMENT OFFICER.
3. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR The Contractor represents that it is fully experienced and properly qualified to perform the class of Work required for the Contract and that it is properly licensed, equipped, organized, and financed to perform the Work. The Contractor shall be an independent Contractor. The Contractor is not an agent of the District in the performance of the Contract and shall maintain complete control over its employees and its subcontractors and Suppliers of any tier. Nothing contained in the Contract or any Subcontract awarded by the Contractor shall create any Contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the District. The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with its own methods, in compliance with the terms of the Contract.
The District reserves the right of prior approval of all subcontractors and retains the right to request Contractor to terminate any subcontractor, for any reason deemed appropriate by the District, by so notifying Contractor in writing. Should said notification be submitted to Contractor, it shall terminate said subcontractor immediately.
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 448 IFB No. 2000002197 4. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS a. Documentation And Acceptance
The Contractor shall submit a copy of all executed subcontracts at any time within thirty (30) days of execution regardless of value to the District for fulfillment of SBE Goals, and a copy of insurance certificates in accordance with Section II C, Item #9 entitled “Insurance Requirements”. Failure to submit subcontracts and certificates within the required time period will result in the subcontractor’s not being permitted to perform Work on the Project.
b. Performance of Work
The Contractor shall:
(1) Be responsible to the District for all acts and omissions of its own personnel, and of subcontractors, Suppliers and their employees; and
(2) Be responsible for coordinating the Work performed by subcontractors and Suppliers.
Should a portion of the subcontracted Work not be performed in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or if a subcontractor commits or omits any act that would constitute a breach of the Contract, the subcontractor shall be replaced and shall not again be employed under the Contract.
c. Acceptance of Substitution of Subcontractor
(1) The Contractor shall notify the District in writing of any proposal to substitute a subcontractor in place of a subcontractor listed in the Contractor's Qualification/Proposal. Prior to such substitution, the Contractor shall secure the acceptance of the District. The Contractor shall submit the following information in a form similar to that contained in the Contractor's original Qualification/Proposal.
(a) Name of Subcontractor
(b) Location and Phone Number of Place of Business
(c) Contact Person
(d) Subcontractor's License(s) number and expiration date (if applicable)
(e) Current District SBE Compliance Certification Status (if applicable)
(f) The portion of the Services that will be performed by each Subcontractor.
The District will promptly initiate a review of the information submitted on each Subcontractor and transmit written notification to the Contractor concerning its decision.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 449 IFB No. 2000002197 4. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS-continued c. Acceptance of Substitution of Subcontractor-continued
(2) The District shall not be responsible for delays incurred by the Contractor because of a timely disapproval by the District of a Subcontractor proposed by the Contractor, or for the late submittal for acceptance of a Subcontractor to the District, or because of a Subcontractor’s removal from the performance of the Work.
(3) The Contractor shall not do any of the following without the prior written consent of the District:
(a) Replace any previously accepted Subcontractor;
(b) Permit any previously accepted Subcontract to be assigned or transferred; and/or
(4) The Contractor may perform the Work itself with qualified personnel, provided written permission is obtained from the District prior to performance of the Work.
d. Flow-Down Requirements
(1) The Contractor shall incorporate the following into each Subcontract and require insertion of same into all lower-tier Subcontracts:
(2) All provisions required by law, regulation, rule, or the Contract shall apply to Subcontracts and shall apply to all Subcontracts of any tier.
(3) By virtue of signing the subcontract, the following apply:
(a) The Subcontractor acknowledges and agrees that all Work being performed by it under the Subcontract shall be performed in accordance with the Contractor's Contract with the District.
(b) The Subcontractor agrees that it shall have the same duties and obligations to the Contractor with respect to its performance of its own Work as the Contractor has to the District under its Contract.
(c) The Contractor and the Subcontractor agree that the District is the third party beneficiary of the Subcontract and shall have the right to enforce all of the terms of the Subcontract for its own benefit. All guarantees and warranties, express or implied, shall inure to the benefit of both the District and the Contractor during the performance of the Work. Upon final completion of the Work, such guarantees and warranties shall inure to the benefit of the District.
(d) The Contractor and the Subcontractor agree that nothing contained in the Subcontract shall be deemed to create any privity of the Contract between the District and the Subcontractor, nor does it create any duties, obligations, or liabilities on the part of the District to the Subcontractor except those allowed under California Law. In the event of any claim or dispute arising under the Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 450 IFB No. 2000002197 4. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS-continued d. Flow-Down Requirements-continued
Subcontract and/or the Contractor's Contract with the District, the Subcontractor shall look only to the Contractor for any payment, redress, relief, or other satisfaction. The Subcontractor hereby waives any claim or cause of action against the District arising out of the Subcontract.
(e) This Article does not and shall not operate to relieve the Contractor of any duty or liability under the Contract nor does it create any duty or liability on the part of the District. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for promptly settling any disputes between its Subcontractors and between the Subcontractors and any of their Subcontractors.
(f) No Subcontractor shall be permitted to perform the Work under the Contract until it, or the Contractor has supplied satisfactory evidence of required insurance to the District, in compliance with Section II C, Item #9 entitled “Insurance Requirements”.
5. GOODS a. The Contractor shall furnish all Goods required to complete the Work, except those designated to be furnished by the District. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract or Purchase Order, Goods incorporated into the Work shall be new, of good quality, and of the grade specified for the purpose intended. Unless otherwise specifically stated, reference to Goods or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number shall be regarded only as a means of establishing a standard of quality; such references shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor may, at its option, use any Goods or process that is equivalent to that named subject to the prior written acceptance by the District. The District shall be the sole judge of the quality and suitability of proposed alternative Goods or processes subject to the right of the District to accept or reject such alternative.
b. Any Goods that may be purchased under the Contract shall be transported, handled, and stored by the Contractor in a manner that shall ensure the preservation of their quality, appearance, and fitness for the Work. All Goods shall also be stored in a manner that facilitates inspection.
6. STANDARDS OF PERFORMANCE a. The Contractor shall perform and require its Subcontractors to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and in accordance with professional standards of skill, care, and diligence adhered to by firms recognized for their expertise, experience, and knowledge in performing Work of a similar nature. The Contractor shall be responsible for the professional quality, technical accuracy, completeness, and coordination of the Work, it being understood that the District will be relying upon such professional quality, accuracy, completeness, and coordination in utilizing the Work. The foregoing obligations and standards shall constitute the "Standard of Performance" for purposes of the Contract.
b. The District shall have the right, in its absolute discretion, to require the removal of Contractor’s personnel at any level assigned to the performance of the Services or Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 451 IFB No. 2000002197 6. STANDARDS OF PERFORMANCE-continued
Work, requests such removal in writing. Such personnel shall be promptly removed from the Project by the Contractor at no cost or expense to the District. Further, an employee who is removed from the Project for any reason shall not be re-employed on the Project.
7. UNAUTHORIZED ACTIONS Any action taken by the Contractor or its Subcontractors not in conformance with the terms and conditions of the Contract will be considered as unauthorized and at the sole expense of the Contractor. Contractor or its Subcontractors will not be compensated for any actions deemed by the District to be unauthorized. No extensions of time will be granted under the Contract or Purchase Order due to unauthorized actions.
No District employee or officer, except the Chief Procurement Officer, or designee, may authorize any Amendments to the Contract, issue a Purchase Order or make revisions to Purchase Orders.
8. CONTRACT TERMINATION a. Termination for Convenience
(a) The District may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate this Contract in whole or in part at any time, for the District’s convenience. Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall:
• Immediately discontinue all services affected (unless the notice directs otherwise) and,
• Deliver to the District all material and information as may have been involved in the provision of services, whether provided by the District or generated by the Contractor in the performance of this contract, whether completed or in process. Termination of this contract shall be as of the date of receipt of the Contractor of such notice.
(b) If the termination is for the convenience of the District, Contractor shall submit a final invoice within sixty (60) days of termination and upon approval by the District, the District shall pay the Contractor the sums earned for the Products/Services actually provided/performed prior to the effective date of termination and other costs reasonably incurred by the Contractor to implement the termination (if any).
(c) The Contractor shall not be entitled to anticipatory or consequential damages as a result of any termination under this Article. Payment to the Contractor in accordance with this Article shall constitute the Contractor’s exclusive remedy for any termination hereunder. The rights and remedies of the District provided in this Article are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 452 IFB No. 2000002197 8. CONTRACT TERMINATION-continued b. Termination for Default
(1) Issuance of Preliminary Notice of Termination for Default (Cure Notice).
If the District determines that the Contractor has failed to fulfill its contractual obligations hereunder, a Cure Notice will be sent to the Contractor and each known assignee, guarantor, or surety of the Contractor. The Contractor shall have 10 (ten) working days from receipt of the Cure Notice to cure its failure(s) to perform or make progress as set forth in the Notice. During the “cure” process, Contractor must sustain performance in all areas not affected by the cure notice. If the Contractor makes adequate progress within the cure period, the termination process will be discontinued. If the Contractor fails to perform in accordance with Contract requirements or to make adequate progress, termination proceedings may be initiated.
(2) The District may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate this Contract in whole, or in part, at any time because of the failure of the Contractor to fulfill its contractual obligations. Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall:
(a) Immediately discontinue all delivery/services affected (unless the notice directs otherwise), and;
(b) Deliver to the District all material and information as may have been involved in the provision of services, whether provided by the District or generated by the Contractor in the performance of this contract, whether completed or in process.
Termination of this contract shall be as of the date of receipt of the Contractor of such notice.
(3) If the termination is due to the failure of the Contractor to fulfill its contractual obligations, the District may take over the services, and complete the services by contract or otherwise. In such case, the Contractor shall be liable to the District for any reasonable costs or damages occasioned to the District thereby. The expense of completing the Services, or any other costs or damages otherwise resulting from the failure of the Contractor to fulfill its obligations, will be charged to the Contractor and will be deducted by the District out of such payments as may be due or may at any time thereafter become due to the District. If such costs and expenses are in excess of the sum which otherwise would have been payable to the Contractor, then the Contractor shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the District upon notice of the excess so due.
(4) If, after the notice of termination for failure to fulfill Contract Obligations, it is determined that the Contractor has not so failed, the termination shall be deemed to have been effected for the convenience of the District. In such event, adjustment shall be made as provided in “Termination for Convenience”.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 453 IFB No. 2000002197 8. CONTRACT TERMINATION-continued b. Termination for Default-continued
(5) The Contractor shall not be entitled to anticipatory or consequential damages as a result of any termination under this Section. Payment to the Contractor in accordance with this article shall constitute the Contractor’s exclusive remedy for any termination hereunder. The rights and remedies of the District provided herein are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract.
Upon termination notification, the District has the right to order at the price, terms, and conditions in effect at any time prior to the effective date of the cancellation of the agreement and require delivery service as specified. Purchase orders issued against the Contract may specify delivery dates beyond the effective date of the cancellation of this agreement, not exceeding sixty (60) days.
9. RIGHTS IN PROPERTY a. Title
(a) All property purchased by the Contractor for the District shall be hereinafter referred to as District property. Title to District property shall pass to and vest in the District upon the vendor's delivery and acceptance of such property by the contractor.
(b) Title to District property shall not be affected by its incorporation into or attachment to any property not owned by the District, nor shall District property become a fixture or lose its identity as personal property by being attached to any real property.
(c) The title transferred as described above shall in each case be good, and free and clear from any and all security interests, liens, and/or other encumbrances. The Contractor shall not pledge or otherwise encumber the items in any manner that would result in any lien, security interest, charge, and/or claim upon or against said items.
(d) The contractor shall promptly execute, acknowledge, and deliver to the District proper bills of sale or other written instruments of title in a form as required by the District; said instruments shall convey to the District title to material free and clear of debts, claims, liens, mortgages, taxes, and/or encumbrances.
b. The District property shall be used only for performing work on the contract or purchase order unless otherwise provided in the Contract or approved by the District's Chief Procurement Officer.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 454 IFB No. 2000002197 10. CHANGES a. The term "Change(s)," as used herein, means substitutions, additions, or deletions which result in revisions to the Contract or Purchase Order. Change does not mean work performed by the Contractor to correct defective Work caused by the Contractor's negligent acts, errors or omissions.
b. The District may at any time, and from time to time without invalidating the Contract or Purchase Order, make Changes in the Scope of Work. The District and Contractor will endeavor to reach mutual agreement regarding costs and Schedule associated with the Change; however, the District reserves the right to unilaterally direct the Contractor to perform the Changed Work. Such Changes, including any increase or decrease in the amount of the Contractor's compensation and/or the period of performance, shall be incorporated into the Contract or Purchase Order through the issuance of a Contract Amendment or Purchase Order Revision. All of the provisions of the Contract shall apply to Changes. Upon receipt of a Contract Amendment or Purchase Order Revision, approved by the District, the Contractor shall continue performance of the Scope of Work as modified by the Amendment.
c. If a Fixed Fee is a part of the compensation for the Contract or Purchase Order, it is the agreed intent of the parties that the Fixed Fee is an amount fixed at the inception of a Purchase Order with respect to the Work planned and Scheduled as set forth in the Scope of Work and is not intended to vary with actual costs for the Work. A Contract Amendment or Purchase Order Revision issued hereunder may, but will not automatically, result in a Change to the Fixed Fee.
11. ASSIGNMENT a. The Contractor shall not assign, transfer, convey or otherwise dispose of the Contract or a Purchase Order (or the right, title, or interest in it or any part of it) without the prior written consent and endorsement of the District, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
b. No rights under the Contract shall be asserted against the District, in law or in equity, by reason of any assignment of the Contract, or any part thereof, unless authorized by the District as specified in this Article.
c. Any assignment of proceeds of the Contract shall be subject to all proper setoffs and withholdings in favor of the District and to all deductions specified in the Contract or Purchase Order. All monies withheld, whether assigned or not, shall be subject to being used by the District for completion of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract. In the event that the District consents to such assignment of monies, written notice thereof shall be given by the Contractor to the District at least ten (10) days before payment is due.
12. SEVERABILITY In the event any Article, section, Subarticle, paragraph, sentence, clause, or phrase contained in the Contract or Purchase Order shall be determined, declared, or adjudged invalid, illegal, unconstitutional, or otherwise unenforceable, such determination, declaration, or adjudication shall in no manner affect the other Articles, sections, Subarticles, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, or phrases of the Contract or Purchase Order, which shall remain in full force and effect as if the Article, section, Subarticle, paragraph,
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 455 IFB No. 2000002197 13. SEVERABILITY-continued sentence, clause, or phrase declared, determined, or adjudged invalid, illegal, unconstitutional, or otherwise unenforceable, was not originally contained in the Contract or Purchase Order.
14. GOVERNING LAW This Contract between the District and the Contractor shall be subject to the laws of the State of California.
By entering into the Contract, the Contractor consents and submits to the jurisdiction of the Courts of the State of California, County of Los Angeles, over any action at law, suit in equity, and/or other proceeding that may arise out of the Contract.
15. PUBLIC RECORDS ACT a. All records, documents, drawings, plans, specifications and other information relating to conduct of the District's business, including information submitted by the Contractor shall become the exclusive property of the District and shall be deemed public records. Said materials are subject to the provisions of the California Public Records Act (Government Code Sections 6250 et. seq.). The District's use and disclosure of its records are governed by this Act. The District will not advise as to the nature or content of documents entitled to protection from disclosure under the California Public Records Act.
b. In the event of litigation concerning the disclosure of any information submitted by the parties, the District's sole involvement will be as a stakeholder, retaining the information until otherwise ordered by a court. The submitting party, at its sole expense and risk, shall be responsible for any and all fees for prosecuting or defending any action concerning the information and shall indemnify and hold the District harmless from all costs and expenses including attorneys' fees, in connection with any such action.
16. AGENT TO ACCEPT SERVICE The Contractor shall maintain a duly authorized agent as identified in Section II.A, Item #16 (“Name and Nature of Bidder’s Legal Entity”) to accept service of legal process on its behalf, and shall keep the District advised of such authorized agent name and address during the duration of the Contract and for three (3) years after Final Payment, or as long as the Contractor has warranty obligations under Section II C, Item #13 entitled “Manufacturer’s Warranty”, whichever period terminates later. In the event that no such duly authorized agent is on file with the District, the Contractor agrees that the Secretary of State of the State of California shall be the Contractor's authorized agent for service of legal process.
17. NO WAIVER Failure of the District to enforce at any time, or from time to time, any provision of the Contract shall not be construed as a waiver thereof.
No waiver by the District of any breach of any provision of the Contract shall constitute a waiver of any other breach or of such provision. Failure or delay by the District to insist upon strict performance of any terms or conditions of the Contract, or to exercise any rights or remedies provided herein by law, shall not be deemed a waiver of any right of the District
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 456 IFB No. 2000002197 17. NO WAIVER-continued to insist upon strict performance of the Contractor’s obligations set forth in the Contract, or any of its rights or remedies as to any prior or subsequent default hereunder.
18. CONFIDENTIALITY Contractor agrees that for and during the entire term of the Contract, any information, data, figures, records, findings and the like received or generated by the Contractor in the performance of the Contract, shall be considered and kept as the private and privileged records of the District and will not be divulged to any person, firm, corporation, or other entity except on the direct authorization of the District. Further, upon termination of the Contract for any cause, Contractor agrees that it will continue to treat as private and privileged any information, data, figures, records and the like, and will not release any such information to any person, firm, corporation or other entity, either by statement, deposition, or as a witness, except upon direct written authorization of the District.
The Contractor shall not publish information or technical data acquired or generated by the Contractor in performing the Contract until such time as such information or technical data is released in published reports by the District.
19. DISCRIMINATION In connection with the performance of Work provided for under this Contract, Contractor agrees that it will not, on the grounds of race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, medical condition, marital status, sex, sexual orientation, or age, discriminate or permit discrimination against any person or group of persons in any manner prohibited by Federal, State or local laws.
20. VEHICLE SAFETY AND SECURITY It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the District Branch or Office under whose direction the service shall be performed. The rules and regulations pertaining to safe driving on school grounds, and surrounding neighborhoods particularly when students and children are present, must be adhered to. The Contractor’s drivers shall exercise extreme caution at all times and be sensitive to community concerns regarding excessive noise.
Drivers entering school premises when school is not in session shall lock any gate or door to which they have access, both when entering and/or leaving the grounds. Gate keys, as may be required, will be furnished by the District Branch or Office supervising the service. Any unusual condition noted by drivers, such as gates or doors found unlocked or open or evidence of vandalism, should be reported to the School Police Department of the Los Angeles Unified School District, Tel: (213) 625-6631 (24 – hour telephone number).
Considering that many of the District’s schools are located in community neighborhoods, the Contractor shall have their drivers observe all applicable ordinances and/or restrictions pertaining to operating times and noise abatement.
Any Contractor, whose business operation requires a DMV Biannual Inspection of Terminal (BIT), must do so under the terms of this contract. The Contractor shall immediately notify the District of any inspection failure.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 457 IFB No. 2000002197 21. HOLD HARMLESS CLAUSES The Contractor shall hold harmless and indemnify the District and the Board of Education of the City of Los Angeles, its officers and employees from every claim or demand which may be made by reason of:
a. Any injury to person or property sustained by the Contractor or by any person, firm, or corporation, employed directly or indirectly by them upon or in connection with his performance under the Contract, however caused, unless such injury is caused by the negligence or willful misconduct of the District.
b. Any injury to person or property sustained by any person firm or corporation, caused by any act, neglect, default, or omission of the Contractor or of any person, firm, or corporation, indirectly employed by them upon or in connection with his performance under the Contract.
c. Any liability that may arise from the furnishing or use of any copyrighted composition, or patented invention, under this Contract. It is the intent of the District to adhere to the provisions of the copyright laws; this hold harmless shall not apply to any claim by Contractor that District has infringed a patent or copyright of Contractor.
The Contractor, at its own expense and risk, shall defend any legal proceeding that may be brought against the District or the Board on any such claim or demand, and satisfy any judgment that may be rendered against the District or the Board therein. With respect to claims of patent or copyright infringement, the District agrees to give Contractor notice of any such claim and to fully cooperate with Contractor in the defense and all related settlement negotiations. 22. AUDIT AND INSPECTION OF RECORDS The Contractor shall maintain, and the District shall have the right to examine and audit, all the books, records, documents, accounting procedures and practices and other evidence regardless of form (e.g., machine-readable media such as disk, tape, etc.) or type (e.g., databases, applications software, database management software, utilities, etc.), sufficient to properly reflect all costs claimed to have been incurred, or anticipated to be incurred, in performing the Contract.
The Contractor shall make said evidence (or to the extent accepted by the District, photographs, micro-photographs, or other authentic reproductions thereof) available to the District at the District’s or the Contractor’s offices (to be specified by the District) at all reasonable times and without charge to the District. Said evidence/records shall be provided to the District within five (5) working days of a written request from the District. The Contractor shall, at no cost to the District, furnish assistance for such examination/audit.
The Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall keep and preserve all such records for a period of at least 3 years from and after final payment or if the Contract is terminated in whole or in part until 3 years after the final Contract close-out. The District’s rights under this section shall also include access to the Contractor’s offices for the purpose of interviewing the Contractor’s employees.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 458 IFB No. 2000002197 22. AUDIT AND INSPECTION OF RECORDS-continued Any information provided on machine-readable media shall be provided in a format accessible and readable by the District. The Contractor’s failure to provide records or access within the time requested shall preclude Contractor from receiving any payment due under the terms of this agreement until such evidence/documents are provided to the District. The Contractor shall obtain from its Subcontractors and Suppliers written agreements to the requirements of this Section and shall, upon the District’s request, provide a copy of such agreements. 23. ENVIRONMENTALLY PREFERRED PRODUCT PROCUREMENT PROGRAM The Los Angeles Unified School District has established a policy to buy, wherever/whenever practical, environmentally preferable products to meet its needs and to foster market development for recycled products. The District recognizes that the availability of recycled products may be periodically limited. Therefore, the policy is intended to help develop the market for recycled products, and to increase District usage of environmentally preferable products, where and when economically feasible, as the market develops.
This policy covers all procurements, both of goods and services, to support the purchase of cost-competitive recycled products, and products that contain recycled content of equal utility and function, where a stable supply chain exists to meet the demands of our schools, and if there is no additional cost to the District.
ENVIRONMENTAL PREFERENCE
a. The District may give a preference, all other factors being equal, for environmentally preferable products.
b. The District encourages the maximum feasible use of environmentally preferable packaging products, reusable packaging, and returnable packaging materials for all deliveries of goods and materials.
c. The District requires all bidders for goods and materials to offer environmental alternatives to virgin products offered in response to bid specifications. Suppliers of goods and materials with recycled content will be required to provide the amount of “post-consumer content” and/or “pre-consumer recycled content” by weight percent for the goods and materials provided.
d. The District may provide for product servicing and product life extension service. To the maximum extent feasible, all machinery and electronic equipment provided should allow for the manufacturer/contractor to accept used equipment and goods, at the end of their planned useful life, or when they are declared surplus, for recycling purposes.
The District shall retain the right to dispose of materials declared surplus in the manner most beneficial to the District, which may include establishing credits for the return of goods to the manufacturer/distributor/original vendor, or at public auction.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 459 IFB No. 2000002197 24. SWEAT-FREE PROCUREMENT POLICY The Board of Education of the Los Angeles Unified School District has established policies to restrict purchases to only those products and services that have been manufactured without the illegal use of sweatshop (including exploitive, “child”, “forced”, “convict”, and “indentured”) labor. All sales/goods provided to the District by the contractor and/or their subcontractor shall be in compliance with the District’s official policy regarding “sweat- free” procurements. The Contractor will certify that the products and services provided to the District are manufactured in strict compliance with all applicable sweatshop, child and slave labor laws of this and all other countries of the products origin.
For the purposes of establishing a non-poverty wage, the LAUSD uses the definition of non-poverty wages as formulated by the Union of Needletrades, Industrial and Textile Employees (UNITE), utilizing the Department of Health and Human Services’ guidelines to determine non-poverty wages domestically. Internationally, the LAUSD recognizes the World Bank’s Gross National Income Per Capita Purchasing Power Parity figures to determine comparable wages in other countries.
The objective of this policy is specifically to discourage and prevent the use of any form of “exploitive labor” but not cause undue and unnecessary economic hardship for laborers. This policy targets those types of child labor that effect the mental, physical, and emotional developments of children such as those types of exploitive labor which fall under the broader category of “sweatshop labor”.
The consequence for any violation by the contractor in adherence to the aforementioned laws and/or provisions may result in action being taken by the District against the contractor, which may include, but not limited to, agreed upon liquidated damages, contract cancellation, vendor default, and/or debarment.
25. PRODUCT SAFETY COMPLIANCE Contractor shall comply with applicable sections of ASTM 963.07 (e) 1 and shall guarantee that the products provided under this contract shall not contain harmful substances that exceed the levels permitted in California Proposition 65 (Title 22, California Code of Regulations, Section 12000). Contractor shall also comply with all applicable requirements of the Consumer Product Safety Commission.
26. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION Pursuant to Labor Code section 1771.1, a contractor or subcontractor shall not be qualified to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, subject to the requirements of Section 4104 of the Public Contract Code, or engage in the performance of any contract for public work, as defined in this chapter, unless currently registered and qualified to perform public work pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5.
It is not a violation of this section for an unregistered contractor to submit a bid that is authorized by section 7029.1 of the Business and Professions Code, or by section 10164 or 20103.5 of the Public Contract Code, provided the contractor is registered to perform public work pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 at the time the contract is awarded.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 460 IFB No. 2000002197 26. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION-continued PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENT – (if applicable)
In accordance with Labor Code section 1720, 1771, 1771.5, 1774, 1815 and Title 8 CCR section 16433, District requires the payment of prevailing wage for all projects over $25,000 when the project is for construction work and for all projects over $15,000 when the project is for alteration, demolition, repair, or maintenance work. The District operates an approved LCP, which shall be enforced on all public works projects that exceed the monetary thresholds above.
Labor Compliance Program
Contractor/Firm and all Subcontractors must comply with District Labor Compliance Program (LCP) requirements, including, but not limited to, all applicable statutes and regulations, District LCP Manual, and District Contract requirements. In the event that additional or revised information is required pursuant to enforcement of the LCP, such requirement shall not result in an increase to the Contract Time or the Contract Amount. Contractor/Firm will be responsible for all failures by all Subcontractors to comply with District LCP requirements. Contractor/Firm, consistent with California Public Contract Code 6109, is prohibited from performing a portion of work with a Subcontractor who is debarred pursuant to Sections 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code.
District LCP was granted final approval/extended authority by the Department of Industrial Relations on December 27, 1996. For questions and assistance, please contact the District LCP office at (213) 241-4665, [email protected], or www.laschools.org/lcp on the web.
Prevailing Wage
(1) This Project is a public works Project, as defined in Labor Code section 1720, and must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Labor Code sections 1720 to 1815 and Title 8 California Code of Regulations (CCR) sections 16000 to 17270, which govern the payment of prevailing wage rates on public works projects.
(2) Pursuant to Labor Code sections 1770 et seq., District has obtained from the Department of Industrial Relations determinations of the prevailing wage rates and the prevailing wage rates for holiday and overtime work for Los Angeles County where the Project is to be performed. Copies of these prevailing wage rates are on file and available to any interested party upon request at the District principal office and the following websites: www.laschools.org/contractor/lc or www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr/pwd. (3). Questions pertaining to prevailing wage rates should be directed to the Labor Compliance Department or to the Division of Labor Statistics and Research at the following respective addresses:
Labor Compliance Department or DLSR 333 S. Beaudry Ave, 21st Floor P.O. Box 420603 Los Angeles, CA 90017 San Francisco, CA 94142 (213) 241-4665 (415) 703-4774 [email protected] www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 461 IFB No. 2000002197
26. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION-continued (4) Contractor/Firm shall post at appropriate and conspicuous locations on the Project site the following:
a. A schedule showing all applicable prevailing wage rates in accordance with Labor Code section 1773.2;
b. Notice of LCP approval and prevailing wage monitoring sufficient to satisfy Title 8 CCR sections 16429 and 16451(d).
(5) Contractor/Firm and all Subcontractors must provide itemized wage statements to their employees in accordance with Labor Code section 226.
(6) Contractor/Firm represents and warrants that the Contract Amount includes sufficient funds to allow Contractor/Firm and all Subcontractors to comply with all applicable laws and contractual requirements. Contractor/Firm shall defend, indemnify and hold District harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, losses, liabilities and damages arising out of or relating to the failure of Contractor/Firm or any Subcontractor to comply with any applicable law in this regard, including, but not limited to Labor Code section 2810. Contractor/Firm agrees to pay any and all assessments, including wages, penalties and liquidated damages, made against District in relation to such failure.
(7) Failure to comply with the payment of prevailing wages shall result in a penalty to the District pursuant to Labor Code section 1775 and applicable regulations, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rate for the work or craft in which such worker is employed by the Contractor/Firm or Subcontractor. This includes, but it not limited, to the failure to pay applicable shift differential rates.
(8) The Contractor/Firm and the bond insurer will be jointly and severally liable for the back wages, penalties, and/or Labor Code Liquidated Damages dues as a result of a prevailing wage violation. “Labor Code Liquidated Damages” are equal to the total underpayment of wages remaining uncorrected sixty (60) days after service of the Notice of Withholding of Contract Payments pursuant to Labor Code section 1742.1. The underpaid employee will receive both the liquidated damages and the underpayment amount.
(9) Pursuant to Labor Code section 1778, every person, who individually or as a representative of an awarding or public body or officer, or as a contractor or subcontractor doing public work, or agent or officer thereof, who takes, receives or conspires with another to take or receive, for his own use or the use of any other person any portion of the wages of any workman or working subcontractor, in connection with services rendered upon any public work is guilty of a felony.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 462 IFB No. 2000002197 26. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION-continued Apprentices
(1) Contractor/Firm and all Subcontractors shall comply with requirements in Labor Code section 1777.5 and Title 8 CCR sections 200 et seq. Contractor/Firm is responsible for compliance with Labor Code section 1777.5 for all apprenticeable crafts or trades. Contractor/Firm and any Subcontractor(s) who fail to comply with Labor Code section 1777.5 shall be subject to penalties specified in Labor Code section 177.7.
(2) Contractor/Firm and all Subcontractors shall submit contract award information using the Division of Apprenticeship Standards (DAS 140) Form to the applicable apprenticeship committee within ten (10) days of the date of execution of contract and no later than the first day of work as per Title 8 CCR section 230. Contractor/Firm shall simultaneously submit a copy of the completed DAS 140 Form to District Labor Compliance Program.
Working Hours
(1) Contractor/Firm and all Subcontractors shall comply with the following provisions for working hours:
a. Pursuant to Labor Code section 1810, eight (8) hours labor shall constitute a legal day’s work.
b. Pursuant to Labor Code section 1811, the time of service of any worker employed at any time by Contractor/Firm, of any tier, is limited and restricted to eight (8) hours during any one calendar day and forty (40) hours during any one calendar week, except as otherwise provided by law.
c. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions, work performed in excess of eight (8) hours per day and forty (40) hours during any one week, shall be permitted upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day and forty (40) hours per week at not less than one and one-half (1 ½) times the basic rate of pay, or as otherwise required by law. All work performed on Saturday, Sunday, and/or holiday shall be paid pursuant to the Prevailing Wage Determination.
d. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, where a single shift is worked, eight (8) consecutive hours between 7 AM and 5 PM shall constitute a work day at straight time for all workers;
e. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, forty (40) hours between Monday 7 AM and Friday 5 PM shall constitute a workweek at straight time;
f. The District’s Labor Compliance Program audit and investigation uses the working hours referenced above and determines violations and penalties accordingly, unless evidence is found to the contrary, such as in the Supplementary Conditions, or is prescribed by law.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 463 IFB No. 2000002197 26. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION-continued (2) Failure to comply with the payment of overtime wages shall result in a penalty to the District pursuant to Labor Code section 1813 and applicable regulations, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, during which worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any one calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week without proper compensation in violation of Labor Code section 1810 et seq. and/or applicable regulations.
Certified Payroll Reporting Forms and Payroll Records
(1) Contractor/Firm shall be responsible for the submission of electronic certified payroll records of Contractor/Firm and all Subcontractors within ten (10) days of the week ending date of each week. Contractor/Firm shall submit weekly electronic certified payroll records, including certified Non-Performance payroll records, in the method provided by District Web-based Certified Payroll Reporting System, to District Labor Compliance Program. When a Contract has various school projects, Certified Payroll Reporting Forms for each individual school shall be maintained and submitted in the method provided by District.
(2) Contractor/Firm must comply with all requirements of District Web-based Certified Payroll Reporting System, including, but not limited to, electronic signature, electronic submittal of documents and forms, and use of other electronic modules. This obligation includes compliance with all existing requirements and all new requirements developed during the term of the Project.
(3) Contractor/Firm shall submit to District Labor Compliance Program, an estimated start date for all Subcontractors, within five (5) days of the Subcontractor work start date and shall submit a revised estimate, if applicable, within five (5) days of knowledge of any changes to any estimated start date. This document must contain the name and address of each Subcontractor, each Subcontractor’s license number and the estimated start date.
(4) Contractor/Firm shall provide, and shall cause all Subcontractors to provide, “Payroll Records” as defined in Title 8 CCR section 16000 to District, within ten (10) days of written request, at no cost to District. “Payroll Records” are all un-redacted certified payroll records, time cards, sign-in sheets, daily construction reports, check stubs, cancelled checks, cash receipts, trust fund forms, books, documents, schedules, forms, reports, recipes or other evidences which reflect the job assignments, work schedules by days and hours, and the disbursement by way of cash, check or in whatever form or manner, of funds to a person(s) by job classification and/or skill pursuant to the Project. All received documents will become property of District.
(5) Failure to submit Payroll Records within ten (10) days of such due date shall result in a penalty to District pursuant to Labor Code section 1776 and applicable regulations, until strict compliance is effectuated.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 464 IFB No. 2000002197
26. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION-continued
(6) Should Contractor/Firm or any Subcontractor neglect, fail or refuse to submit any of the above- referenced documents, Contractor/Firm agrees to pay to District the sum of one hundred ($100) dollars per day in contractual liquidated damages, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, for every day of noncompliance beyond ten (10) days after such documents are due (“Payroll Record Liquidated Damages”). Payroll Record Liquidated Damages shall continue to accrue until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon issuance of a Payroll Record Liquidated Damages Permanent Assessment, the liquidated damages amount will be disbursed to the District. The Payroll Record Liquidated Damages amounts are agreed upon by and between Contractor/Firm and District because of the difficulty of fixing District actual damages in the event of failure to submit such documents.
Contractor/Firm and District specifically agree that said amounts are reasonable estimates of District damages in such event, and that such amounts do not constitute a penalty. Contractor/Firm and District acknowledge and agree that the liquidated damages contained in this provision are reasonable under the circumstances existing at the time of Contractor/Firm’s execution of the Contract. These Payroll Record Liquidated Damages are distinct from statutory Labor Code Liquidated Damages. This remedy is not exclusive and is cumulative of all other remedies available to District.
Withholding of Contract Payments
(1) District will withhold payments from Contractor/Firm in accordance with its rights and obligations under Labor Code section 1720 et seq. and applicable regulations, including for all back wages, penalties and Labor Code Liquidated Damages.
(2) Notwithstanding any other provision in this contract, District may withhold payment from any portion of the Contract Amount then or thereafter due the Contractor/Firm for violation by Contractor/Firm or any Subcontractor of the requirements of this PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENT section and for Payroll Record Liquidated Damages. Without limitation to the foregoing, payment shall not be made to the Contractor/Firm when certified payroll records by Contractor/Firm or any of its Subcontractors are delinquent or inadequate in accordance with Title 8 CCR 16435.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE All statutory Codes and Regulations cited in this contract are understood by the parties to be incorporated in full by the references to those statutes and regulations herein.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 465 IFB No. 2000002197 27. PROJECT STABILIZATION AGREEMENT (PSA) – (if applicable) The District entered into an agreement with the Los Angeles/Orange County Building and Construction Trades Council and the signatory craft unions called the Project Stabilization Agreement. The PSA applies to all projects funded over the applicable thresholds by Proposition BB, Measure K and Measure R, and/or future bond money that is not expressly excluded in the PSA.
1) The Project Stabilization Agreement (“PSA”) applies to all construction, major rehabilitation work, and capital improvement work, as set forth in the Contract. Consultant agrees to be bound by the PSA and to require all Subcontractors to do so. For information pertaining to PSA, Consultant can refer to the following web address: http://www.laschools.org/new-site/project-stabilization/ .
2) The District has designated Tybouy Tang-Wong as the District’s authorized representative, assisting consultants to comply, and monitoring compliance, with the PSA. Tybouy Tang-Wong can be reached at (213) 241-7077 and at Tybouy.tang- [email protected] .
3) Building/Construction Inspector and Field Soils and Materials Testers (“FSMT”) are a covered craft under the PSA. 4) Per the Operating Engineers Union’s December 6, 2001, letter to the California Department of Industrial Relations, and for purposes of the PSA and this Agreement, the services that are provided by an FSMT include, without limitation, “special grading, excavation filling, soils used in construction, concrete sampling, density testing and various types of verification tests.”
5) Consultant’s compliance with the PSA would include, among other obligations, Consultant’s:
a. Electronically sign a Letter of Assent (LOA) for each covered District project to which the Consultant is assigned. Effective immediately, the District will no longer accept hard copies of the LOAs. You are required to electronically execute the PSA LOA via the District’s LCP online Certified Payroll System at www.laschools.org/lcp. This is a requirement for the prime contractor and subcontractors of every tier. For more information and/or technical support, please call (213) 241-4647 or email [email protected]
b. Following the PSA guidelines regarding hiring procedures;
c. Making and timely submitting certified payroll reports;
d. Paying minimum prevailing wages, where applicable;
e. Executing union participation agreements when appropriate (as specified by the PSA);
e. Making fringe benefit contributions based upon the certified payroll reports, participation agreements, and Letters of Assent.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 466 IFB No. 2000002197 27. PROJECT STABILIZATION AGREEMENT (PSA)-(if applicable) continued 6) If the PSA applies to these Services, Consultant must also comply with all of the following provisions:
a. Consultant must post flyers provided by the District relating to employee benefits at appropriate and conspicuous locations on Project site.
b. Consultant shall cause a sign to be posted on the job site stating, in English and Spanish, in large enough print to read from a reasonable distance, no less than 32 point font size, “Employees: Your employee benefits payments are being paid to a trust fund on your behalf. Your employer must provide you information about your benefits and make documentation bout your benefits available to you.
c. Consultant must submit with its final Application for Payment a certification that Consultant and all Subcontractors have paid all benefit contributions due and owing to the appropriate trust fund(s). If District Web-Based Certified Payroll Reporting System contains a form for such certification, Consultant must use such form and submit it in the method required by District Web-based Certified Payroll Reporting system.
d. Prior to making final payment to each Subcontractor, Consultant shall obtain written releases from all appropriate trust funds affirming that such Subcontractor has paid all required employee benefits.
7) To the extent that the Services include the services of a craft covered by the PSA, and the other PSA criteria listed above apply, Consultant agrees to comply with the PSA. The PSA will supersede the Master Labor Agreement when a subject is covered in both agreements, per section 2.7 of the PSA. The State of California Director of Industrial Relations, General Prevailing Wage Determinations, supersedes both the PSA and Master Labor Agreement.
8) District Labor Compliance Program may monitor the timely payment of employee benefits to the appropriate trust fund in accordance with the PSA and Labor Code section 1771.5.
THIS SPACE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 467 IFB No. 2000002197 SECTION V.
SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (SBE) UTILIZATION PROGRAM
A. It is the District’s policy to encourage participation by Small Business Enterprise (SBE) firms in contract activity. On February 25, 2003 the Board of Education established a Small Business Enterprise (SBE) goal to “Establish a District-wide small business participation goal of 25 percent for all contracts and procurement activities”. Bidders/ proposers which include SBE firms in their proposal/bid must detail the SBE status of those firms on the SBE Utilization Report. Firms which meet the United States Small Business Administration size standards, or which have already been recognized by the LAUSD as a small business, or which are certified by a government agency or third party entity shall be considered SBE for the purposes of this program. The use of SBE partners/sub-contractors or participation in Federal agency small business programs will also be accepted as a response. Bidders/proposers are responsible for the verification of the SBE status of any firm represented as an SBE firm used in any proposal or bid. Misrepresentation of a firms’ SBE status may jeopardize future contracting opportunities. Size standards may be viewed at:
http://www.sba.gov/services/contractingopportunities/sizestandardstopics/index.html
B. The LAUSD affirmatively assures that all firms will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids/proposals in response to this IFB and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, sex, color, religion, ancestry, national origin, marital status, age (over 40), or disability (including AIDS, and cancer-related medical condition) in consideration for an award. C. LAUSD advises potential bidders/proposers that the SBE participation which the bidder/proposer commits to in their bid/proposal package becomes the goal of record. The LAUSD will enforce the SBE participation proposed.
D. Firms claiming SBE participation must execute a copy of the SBE Utilization Report included in this IFB/RFP package, and include it in their RFP/IFB response. Firms not submitting an SBE Utilization report may be determined to have no SBE participation.
MONITORING/PENALTIES
Contract Administration will be responsible for monitoring the SBE program.
If any firm listed on the SBE Utilization Report as an SBE is found not be an SBE, such finding may affect any future determination of responsibility for the firm(s) submitting the report.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 468 IFB No. 2000002197 SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (SBE) AND MICRO-BUSINESS UTILIZATION PROGRAM
E. It is the District’s policy to encourage participation by Small Business Enterprise (SBE) and Micro-business (Micro) firms in District contract activity. The District’s Board of Education established a SBE/Micro participation goal “of 25 percent for all contracts and procurement activities.” All bidders/proposers must include a completed SBE/Micro Utilization Report in their bid/proposal even if that bidder/proposer’s anticipated use of SBE and Micro firms is zero. Bidders/proposers that are SBE certified through a reciprocal agency, including Micro certification through the State of CA Department of General Services (DGS), and those bidders/proposers that are not SBE certified, – but meet the US Small Business Administration (SBA) size standards for SBE eligibility, must still apply for a District-issued certification through the Supplier Portal(SAP system). The use of partners/subcontractors who are SBE or Micro certified will also be accepted, provided the partner/subcontractor is certified through the Supplier Portal (District SAP system).
SBE Size standards may be viewed at: http://www.sba.gov/services/contractingopportunities/sizestandardstopics/index.html
State of CA DGS Micro- Business standards may be viewed at: https://www.dgs.ca.gov/PD/Services/Page-Content/Procurement-Division-Services-List- Folder/Certify-or-Re-apply-as-Small-Business-Disabled-Veteran-Business-Enterprise
F. The LAUSD affirmatively assures that all firms will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids/proposals in response to this IFB/RFP and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, sex, color, religion, ancestry, national origin, marital status, age (over 40), or disability (including AIDS, and cancer-related medical conditions) in consideration for an award.
G. To become certified by the District, or to document acceptable certification received from a reciprocal agency, you must have a LAUSD SAP Vendor Number (10-digit number, begins with “1”). If you have a LAUSD SAP Vendor Number, you may access your vendor profile through the Supplier Portal and apply for LAUSD SBE or Micro certification. The Supplier Portal is located at https://vendors.lausd.net/irj/portal
If you do not have a LAUSD SAP Vendor Number, go to the Supplier Self-Registration Portal to register for a SAP Vendor Number and apply for LAUSD SBE or Micro- certification at https://sus.lausd.net/sap/bc/webdynpro/sapsrm/wda_e_suco_sreg?sap- language=EN&sap-wd-configId=ZEH1003_WDAC_E_OIF_SUCO_SREG#
H. Firms that do not appear in the District’s system as SBE or Micro certified, through the process outlined above, may be determined to have no SBE or Micro participation.
MONITORING/PENALTIES If any firm listed on the SBE Utilization Report as an SBE or Micro is found not to be, that may affect the LAUSD’s determination of whether the submitting firm is sufficiently responsible to be a LAUSD vendor partner.
Section IV.A/B – General Bid and Contract Conditions 469 IFB No. 2000002197
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT SMALL BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM UTILIZATION REPORT
IFB/RFP No.: 2000002197
The Los Angeles Unified School District encourages participation by Small Business Enterprise (SBE) and Micro-Business (Micro) firms in procurement activity. Bidders/proposers must execute a copy of this Report, include it with their RFP/IFB response and apply for, or have received SBE or Micro-business certification through the LAUSD online Supplier Portal (SAP system) to be recognized as having SBE or Micro-business participation for purposes of this solicitation.
Reciprocal SBE Agencies: • State of California – Department of General Services • Metropolitan Water District of Southern California • City of Los Angeles • Los Angeles Metro • Los Angeles County
Reciprocal Micro-business Agency: • State of California – Department of General Services Firm Name IFB/RFP#
SBE or Micro-business Status (check one)
Our firm(s) is/are certified within the LAUSD system of record (SAP) as an SBE. LAUSD Vendor No.______
Our firm(s) is/are certified within the LAUSD system of record (SAP) as a Micro- business. LAUSD Vendor No.______
Our firm(s) is/are certified with an LAUSD reciprocal agency listed above (proof of Small Business, Micro-business or Disabled Veteran-Owned Business Certification is attached) and will complete the registration in the LAUSD system of record (SAP).
Our firm(s) utilize(s) certified SBE or Micro subcontractors. These subcontractors have SBE or Micro certification documented within the LAUSD system of record (SAP). Please list the LAUSD-certified subcontractors, the SAP vendor number for each and the percentage of the work to be performed by each certified subcontractor).
Section V – Small Business and Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise 470 IFB No. 2000002197 SBE/Micro LAUSD Subcontractors/Subconsultants (Yes/No) % Participation Work to be Performed Vendor #*
No SBE or Micro-business utilization. Non-profit organization** Educational institution** Government agency**
**Not eligible for SBE or Micro certification.
By signing below, bidders/proposers represent that this is an accurate representation of the SBE or Micro status or utilization for the firm(s) participating in this solicitation.
Name ______Title______
Signature______Date______Telephone______
*Proposers can register for a LAUSD vendor number and apply for SBE/Micro certification at https://achieve.lausd.net/Page/3904, under “LAUSD SAP Vendor Registration (Supplier Self Registration).” If you have any questions or need assistance registering, you can contact our Vendor Services Unit at (562) 654-9404 or [email protected].
Section V – Small Business and Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise 471 IFB No. 2000002197 VETERAN AND DISABLED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (VBE/DVBE) UTILIZATION PROGRAM
A. It is the District’s policy to encourage participation by all Veteran Business Enterprise (VBE) and Disabled Veteran Business Enterprises (DVBE) firms in District contract activity. The District’s Board of Education has established a VBE/DVBE participation goal of five percent (5%) for all contracts and procurement activities. All Bidders/Proposers must detail their VBE/DVBE status on the VBE/DVBE Utilization Report. In order to be credited with any claimed VBE/DVBE participation, Bidders/Proposers must apply for, or have received VBE/DVBE certification status through the Supplier Portal (SAP system). B. To apply for VBE/DVBE certification, a firm must be a registered vendor with a 10-digit LAUSD SAP Vendor Number. If you already have a SAP Vendor Number, you may access your vendor profile through the Supplier Portal and apply for VBE/DVBE certification at https://vendors.lausd.net/irj/portal If you do not have a LAUSD SAP Vendor Number, go to the Supplier Self-Registration Portal in order to register for a SAP Vendor Number and apply for VBE/DVBE certification at https://sus.lausd.net/sap/bc/webdynpro/sapsrm/wda_e_suco_sreg?sap-language=EN&sap-wd- configId=ZEH1003_WDAC_E_OIF_SUCO_SREG# C. Firms that have a valid DVBE certification from the California Department of General Services or meet all of the VBE eligibility requirements listed below, must also apply for certification in the District’s SAP system in order to be considered VBE/DVBE for the purposes of this program. The use of VBE/DVBE partners/subcontractors will also be accepted, provided the partner/subcontractor has received or applied for DVBE or VBE certification through the Supplier Portal (District SAP system).
DVBE certification eligibility requirements are available at: https://www.dgs.ca.gov/PD/Services/Page-Content/Procurement-Division-Services-List- Folder/Certify-or-Re-apply-as-Small-Business-Disabled-Veteran-Business-Enterprise
VBE certification eligibility requirements to verify status: 1. DD214 (Certificate of Discharge from Active Duty) 2. Organization Type (one of the following) a. Business Entities Records Request Form: Articles of Organization document - CA Sec of State for Corp/LLC b. DBA Registration document (if Sole Proprietor) 3. VBE letter confirming: a. 51% plus ownership by Veteran(s) b. 30 plus hours per week dedicated to VBE
D. The LAUSD affirmatively assures that all firms will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids/proposals in response to this IFB/RFP and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, sex, color, religion, ancestry, national origin, marital status, age (over 40), or disability (including AIDS, and cancer-related medical condition) in consideration for an award. MONITORING/PENALTIES If any firm listed on the VBE/DVBE Utilization Report as a VBE/DVBE is found not be a VBE/DVBE, such finding may affect any future determination of responsibility for the firm(s) submitting the report.
Section V – Small Business and Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise 472 IFB No. 2000002197
LOS ANGELES UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT DISABLED VETERAN ENTERPRISE (DVBE) and VETERAN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (VBE) UTILIZATION REPORT
Bid No.: 2000002197
The Los Angeles Unified School District encourages participation by all Veteran Enterprise Businesses (VBE) and Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise (DVBE) firms in procurement activity. Proposers/ Bidders must execute a copy of this Report, include it with their RFP/IFB response and apply for, or have received DVBE/VBE status in the District’s SAP system.
Bidders/proposers that are DVBE/VBE firms shall check one of the first two boxes on the form. Majority firms responding to the bid may list DVBE/VBE sub-contractors/partners.
DVBE/VBE STATUS (check one) LAUSD SAP Vendor #______
Our firm(s) is a certified DVBE certified by the California Department of General Services. ______Our firm(s) is a VBE and meets LAUSD’s stated VBE certification eligibility requirements
Our firm utilizes DVBE/VBE subcontractors/subconsultants. (List DVBE/VBE firms utilized, including their DGS number or other required documents, and the percentage)
DVBE/VBE LAUSD Subcontractors/Subconsultants (Yes/No) % Participation Work to be Performed Vendor #*
No DVBE/VBE utilization By signing below, Proposers represent that this is an accurate representation of the DVBE/VBE status or utilization for the firm(s) participating in this contract.
Name ______Title______
Signature______Date______Telephone______*Proposers can register for a LAUSD vendor number and apply for DVBE/VBE certification at https://achieve.lausd.net/Page/3904, under “LAUSD SAP Vendor Registration (Supplier Self Registration).” If you have any questions or need assistance registering, you can contact our Vendor Services Unit at (562) 654-9404 or [email protected].
Section V – Small Business and Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise 473 IFB No. 2000002197 APPENDIX A – DISTRICT MAP
Appendix A– District Map IFB No. 2000002197 APPENDIX B – OIG FRAUD NOTICE
FRAUD IS INVESTIGATED BY THE OFFICE OF THE INSPECTOR GENERAL
The Inspector General of the Los Angeles Unified School District has statutory authority to audit and investigate persons and companies that do business with the District. Identified criminal acts including fraud, kickbacks, theft, and conspiracy are pursued to the greatest extent of the law, in conjunction with Federal, State, and Local law enforcement partner agencies.
Examples of offenses and corresponding maximum sentences are: 15 U.S.C. §1 Conspiracy to Restrain Trade - 10 years 18 U.S.C. §1341 Mail Fraud - 20 years 18 U.S.C. §1344 Bank Fraud - 30 years 18 U.S.C. §1349 Conspiracy to Commit Wire Fraud - 20 years 18 U.S.C. §1956 Money Laundering - 20 years California Penal Code §487 Grand Theft – 3 years Offenses carry potential fines of up to $1,000,000. Call the OIG Hotline at (213) 241-7778 or visit http://achieve.lausd.net/oig
Appendix B – OIG Fraud Notice IFB No. 2000002197